ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES

and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

574-849 Rev. BA
*0574849BA*
This page is intentionally blank
 1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information................................................................................ 15
Contents
2 Installing the ES Panel PC Programmer................................................................................................. 16
2.1 System requirements...................................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1 Other required components..................................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Launching the ES Panel Programmer........................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.1 Downloading the ES Panel Programmer software............................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.2 Installing the ES Panel Programmer software....................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.2.1 Getting started........................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
2.2.3 Licensing......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.3.1 Managing the software license........................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.3.2 Loading an existing license.................................................................................................................................................................. 18
3 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Notice to users, installers, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and other involved parties......................................................... 19
3.2 Programming overview................................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.3 Interface overview........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.3.1 Tabs.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
3.3.2 Icons................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
4 Basic operations....................................................................................................................................... 24
4.1 Launching the ES Panel Programmer........................................................................................................................................... 24
4.2 Creating a job................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.3 Opening a existing job - guidelines............................................................................................................................................... 26
4.4 Entering the panel CPU serial number......................................................................................................................................... 27
4.5 Saving a job...................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
4.5.1 Using the Save As option............................................................................................................................................................................ 28
4.6 Building a job................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.7 Archiving, backing up, and restoring jobs.................................................................................................................................... 30
4.7.1 Archiving a job............................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.7.2 Backing up a job........................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
4.7.3 Restoring a backed up job, or an archived job...................................................................................................................................... 32
4.8 Converting a 4100 job to a 4100ES Panel job.............................................................................................................................. 32
4.8.1 Guidelines....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
4.8.2 Converting a job............................................................................................................................................................................................ 33
4.8.3 Reviewing and verifying the job................................................................................................................................................................. 34
4.9 Entering notes and setting preferences....................................................................................................................................... 35
4.9.1 Setting preferences...................................................................................................................................................................................... 35
4.10 Updating the EIR server using the ES Panel Programmer........................................................................................................ 36
4.10.1 EIR email requirements............................................................................................................................................................................ 36
4.10.2 Configuring the EIR email warning and the EIR email automatic generation.............................................................................. 36
4.10.3 Automatically generating the EIR email upon job backup............................................................................................................... 36
5 Panel Information, system options, and restricting access to display functions.............................. 38
5.1 Entering general information......................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.2 Enabling and disabling system options........................................................................................................................................ 39
5.2.1 General system option descriptions........................................................................................................................................................ 40
5.2.2 Active status reminder system options................................................................................................................................................... 42
5.2.3 4100ES audio system options................................................................................................................................................................... 44
5.2.4 Recurring Trouble Filter system options 4100ES/4010ES.................................................................................................................. 45
5.2.5 Addressable appliance preferred default system option for the 4100ES/4010ES with IDNAC................................................. 45
5.3 Restricting access to operator interface functions...................................................................................................................... 46
5.3.1 Step 1. Edit access levels............................................................................................................................................................................ 47
5.3.2 Step 2. Edit passcodes................................................................................................................................................................................ 47
5.4 Providing information about available features.......................................................................................................................... 49
6 Specifying hardware components.......................................................................................................... 50
6.1 The Hardware tab........................................................................................................................................................................... 50
6.2 Adding and editing units................................................................................................................................................................ 53
6.2.1 Adding a unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 53
6.2.2 Editing unit properties................................................................................................................................................................................. 53
6.3 Adding and editing boxes and bays.............................................................................................................................................. 54
6.3.1 Adding a box.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 54
6.3.2 Editing or viewing box and bay properties............................................................................................................................................. 55
6.4 Adding cards.................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.4.1 Adding option cards..................................................................................................................................................................................... 56

6.4.2 Annunciator numbers................................................................................................................................................................................. 56
6.4.3 Annunciator number sharing rules.......................................................................................................................................................... 57
6.4.4 Annunciator number sharing examples................................................................................................................................................. 57
6.4.5 Card manipulation considerations........................................................................................................................................................... 57
6.4.6 Editing basic card properties..................................................................................................................................................................... 58
6.4.7 Upgrading IDNet Cards (Programmer Version 2.04 and above)....................................................................................................... 59
7 Editing non-audio card properties......................................................................................................... 60
7.1 Editing RUI-specific property settings........................................................................................................................................... 60
7.1.1 Editing settings.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 61
7.2 Editing service port-specific settings............................................................................................................................................. 61
7.3 Editing network cards..................................................................................................................................................................... 66
7.3.1 Editing 4120 NIC/4120 Network Repeater property settings............................................................................................................ 66
7.3.1.1 Accessing the network information for the 4120 NIC or Network Repeater card................................................................. 66
7.3.1.2 Setting network information for the 4120 NIC or Network Repeater card.............................................................................. 66
7.3.2 Editing the ES Net NIC................................................................................................................................................................................. 67
7.3.2.1 ES Net topologies................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
7.3.2.2 About supplemental traffic.................................................................................................................................................................. 69
7.3.2.3 Editing bay mounted TSW ES Net NIC.............................................................................................................................................. 69
7.3.2.4 Accessing and setting the network information............................................................................................................................. 70
7.3.2.5 Network port types................................................................................................................................................................................ 70
7.3.2.6 Configuring a single ring Class X network........................................................................................................................................ 71
7.3.2.7 Configuring a multiple ring network.................................................................................................................................................. 72
7.3.2.8 Configuring a Class B network............................................................................................................................................................ 74
7.3.2.9 Configuring a system to use the supplemental traffic channel.................................................................................................. 75
7.3.2.10 Configuring a Node with ES Net and BNIC Card.......................................................................................................................... 76
7.3.2.11 Panel Net ports.................................................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.3.2.12 Pairing the network ports correctly................................................................................................................................................. 77
7.3.2.13 Ground Fault Detection...................................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.3.2.14 ES Net Ports options and settings................................................................................................................................................... 77
7.4 ES Net Synchronization Domain.................................................................................................................................................... 78
7.4.1 Maximum number of hops........................................................................................................................................................................ 79
7.4.1.1 Dual ring network................................................................................................................................................................................... 79
7.4.2 Configuring the MSN and Sync Domain nodes..................................................................................................................................... 79
7.5 Editing Power Supply property settings....................................................................................................................................... 80
7.5.1 Accessing power supply-specific information....................................................................................................................................... 81
7.5.1.1 ES-PS Options......................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
7.5.1.2 ES-XPS Options....................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
7.5.1.3 EPS options.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 84
7.5.1.4 SPS and MSS options............................................................................................................................................................................ 85
7.5.1.5 ESS options.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
7.5.1.6 RPS options.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
7.5.1.7 TPS options.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
7.5.1.8 XPS options.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
7.6 Editing DACT card property settings............................................................................................................................................. 88
7.6.1 Basics tab....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 88
7.6.2 Event Codes tab............................................................................................................................................................................................ 89
7.6.3 Local Points tab............................................................................................................................................................................................. 89
7.6.4 Point Types tab, per point DACT only...................................................................................................................................................... 91
7.7 Setting up the Per Point SDACT automatic email........................................................................................................................ 92
7.7.1 Step 1. Verify outlook profile name, password, and default email profile...................................................................................... 93
7.7.2 Step 2. Add a central station entry to the address book.................................................................................................................... 94
7.7.3 Step 3. The ES Panel Programmer Email Settings................................................................................................................................ 95
7.8 Adding the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway................................................................................................... 95
7.8.1 Deleting an IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway.......................................................................................................... 95
7.8.2 Adding an internal IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway............................................................................................. 95

page ii 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.8.3 Adding a close-nippled IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway.................................................................................... 96

7.9 Configuring the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway........................................................................................... 96
7.9.1 Editing LAN Ethernet operation................................................................................................................................................................ 96
7.9.2 Editing Enterprise services settings......................................................................................................................................................... 96
7.9.3 Configuring the e-mail server settings.................................................................................................................................................... 96
7.9.4 Editing the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway settings........................................................................................... 97
7.10 Editing options for TrueAlert Controllers................................................................................................................................... 97
7.10.1 Opening the 4009T window.................................................................................................................................................................... 97
7.10.2 4009T Card Properties tab...................................................................................................................................................................... 97
7.10.3 4009T Point Editing tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 98
7.10.4 4009T Power Consumption tab........................................................................................................................................................... 100
7.10.5 Opening the TPS window (4100ES jobs only)................................................................................................................................... 101
7.10.6 TPS Card Properties tab......................................................................................................................................................................... 101
7.10.7 TPS data entry.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 102
7.10.8 TPS point editing...................................................................................................................................................................................... 103
7.10.9 TPS Power Consumption....................................................................................................................................................................... 105
7.10.10 EPS/ESS point editing........................................................................................................................................................................... 106
7.10.11 Copy, paste, point editing, and special paste features................................................................................................................. 106
7.10.12 TrueAlert ES AO appliance point editing.......................................................................................................................................... 108
7.10.13 TrueAlert ES VO appliances point editing........................................................................................................................................ 108
7.10.14 TrueAlert ES AV appliance point editing.......................................................................................................................................... 109
7.10.15 ISO options............................................................................................................................................................................................. 111
7.10.16 Repeater options................................................................................................................................................................................... 111
7.10.17 DCAI options........................................................................................................................................................................................... 111
7.10.18 TrueAlert STRB appliances point editing......................................................................................................................................... 112
7.10.19 TrueAlert Horn appliance point editing........................................................................................................................................... 112
7.10.20 TrueAlert AV appliances point editing.............................................................................................................................................. 113
7.10.21 TrueAlert ASTRB appliances point editing....................................................................................................................................... 114
7.10.22 TCODE...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 114
7.11 Editing annunciator-specific properties................................................................................................................................... 115
7.11.1 4100-7402 Graphic LED/Switch Controller....................................................................................................................................... 116
7.11.2 4100-FUI-InfoAlarm................................................................................................................................................................................. 116
7.11.3 Point vectoring.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
7.11.4 Creating a user list................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
7.11.5 Selecting a user list.................................................................................................................................................................................. 118
7.12 Editing the 2120 interface properties for 4100ES jobs........................................................................................................... 118
7.12.1 Determine the number of transponder addresses required....................................................................................................... 119
7.12.2 Opening the 2120 interface properties screen................................................................................................................................ 119
7.12.3 Define the general settings................................................................................................................................................................... 119
7.12.4 Data entry fields....................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
7.12.5 Automatically defining monitor and control slots............................................................................................................................ 120
7.12.6 Manually defining monitor and control slots.................................................................................................................................... 121
7.12.7 Editing monitor slot data....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
7.12.8 Editing the control slot data.................................................................................................................................................................. 123
7.13 Editing ES Panel BMUX interface properties for 4100ES jobs................................................................................................ 125
7.13.1 Accessing the ES Panel BMUX interface properties screen.......................................................................................................... 126
7.13.2 General settings....................................................................................................................................................................................... 126
7.13.3 Data entry.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 127
7.13.4 Transponder/Points tab......................................................................................................................................................................... 127
7.13.5 Editing transponder slot points............................................................................................................................................................ 129
7.13.6 BMUX pseudo points.............................................................................................................................................................................. 130
7.13.7 SCC Editing tab......................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
7.14 Editing TFX Loop Interface Card Properties for 4100ES jobs................................................................................................. 133
7.14.1 Accessing the ES Panel TFX Loop Card Properties screen............................................................................................................ 133
7.14.2 General settings....................................................................................................................................................................................... 133
7.14.3 Point editing.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 133
7.14.4 TFX limitations........................................................................................................................................................................................... 134

page iii 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.14.5 4100-6066 TFX Loop Card Coding Pattern tab................................................................................................................................ 134

7.14.6 TFX SMPL pre-alarm programming..................................................................................................................................................... 135
7.15 Editing TFX Voltage Regulator and 25V Regulator Module properties................................................................................. 139
7.15.1 Accessing the ES Panel Voltage Regulator card properties screen............................................................................................. 139
8 Using the Central Station Configuration Tool..................................................................................... 141
8.1 Launching Central Station Configuration Tool........................................................................................................................... 141
8.2 Configuring the communication paths....................................................................................................................................... 141
8.3 Configuring reporting settings..................................................................................................................................................... 142
8.4 Editing the event codes................................................................................................................................................................ 143
8.5 Editing the local codes.................................................................................................................................................................. 143
8.6 Editing the points.......................................................................................................................................................................... 143
8.7 Viewing reports.............................................................................................................................................................................. 143
8.8 Building and downloading the configuration............................................................................................................................ 144
9 Programming non-audio points........................................................................................................... 145
9.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
9.2 Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
9.3 Point, card, and unit views........................................................................................................................................................... 146
9.4 Sort function.................................................................................................................................................................................. 146
9.5 AutoFill............................................................................................................................................................................................ 146
9.6 Custom label spell check.............................................................................................................................................................. 147
9.7 Search............................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
9.8 Filter................................................................................................................................................................................................ 148
9.9 Importing/Exporting a CSV file containing point definitions.................................................................................................... 149
9.9.1 Exporting a CSV file.................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
9.9.2 Importing a CSV file................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
9.9.3 Configuring the Simplex BACpac Ethernet module and exporting CSV files............................................................................... 151
9.9.3.1 Step 1: Selecting the export CSV format........................................................................................................................................ 151
9.9.3.2 Step 2: Selecting Points for BACpac................................................................................................................................................ 151
9.9.3.3 Step 3: Specifying Input format for each card.............................................................................................................................. 153
9.9.3.4 Optional Step 4: Creating and specifying zones (BACnet Devices).......................................................................................... 154
9.9.3.5 Optional Step 5: Assigning points for each zone......................................................................................................................... 155
9.9.3.6 Step 6: Selecting the CSV file name and location........................................................................................................................ 156
9.9.3.7 Reviewing the summary..................................................................................................................................................................... 157
9.9.3.8 Downloading the CSV to BACpac..................................................................................................................................................... 158
9.9.3.9 Importing CSV to Metasys................................................................................................................................................................. 158
9.10 Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs.................................................................................................................... 158
9.10.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 158
9.10.2 Step 1. Choose LED or switch to program........................................................................................................................................ 158
9.10.3 Step 2. Select the switch or LED mode.............................................................................................................................................. 159
9.10.4 Step 3. Choose the Reference Address.............................................................................................................................................. 159
9.10.5 High-level mode programming for display cards............................................................................................................................. 159
9.11 Programming monitor points.................................................................................................................................................... 160
9.11.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 160
9.11.2 Step 1. Choose a monitor point to program..................................................................................................................................... 160
9.11.3 Step 2. Define the device type.............................................................................................................................................................. 162
9.11.4 Step 3. Define the point type................................................................................................................................................................ 162
9.11.5 Step 4. Define the custom label........................................................................................................................................................... 162
9.11.6 Configurations where a relay is used to provide abnormal indication....................................................................................... 162
9.12 Programming NAC and signal points........................................................................................................................................ 163
9.12.1 Step 1. Choose a NAC or signal point to program........................................................................................................................... 163
9.12.2 Step 2. Define a point type.................................................................................................................................................................... 164
9.12.3 Step 3. Define a custom label............................................................................................................................................................... 164
9.12.4 Step 4. Use the NAC Power Consumption Calculator.................................................................................................................... 164
9.12.5 Power consumption build warnings................................................................................................................................................... 166
9.13 Programming relay points......................................................................................................................................................... 167
9.13.1 Step 1. Choose a relay point to program........................................................................................................................................... 167

page iv 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.13.2 Step 2. Define a point type.................................................................................................................................................................... 168

9.13.3 Step 3. Define a custom label............................................................................................................................................................... 168
9.14 Programming IDNet and MAPNET points................................................................................................................................ 168
9.14.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 168
9.14.2 Step 1. Choose an IDNet/MAPNET point to program..................................................................................................................... 168
9.14.3 Step 2. Define a device type.................................................................................................................................................................. 171
9.14.4 Step 3. Define a point type.................................................................................................................................................................... 171
9.14.5 Step 4. Define a custom label............................................................................................................................................................... 171
9.15 Programming the 4098 CO Detectors/Sensors....................................................................................................................... 171
9.15.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 171
9.15.2 Common point configurations............................................................................................................................................................. 177
9.15.3 MCOGAS - CO Toxic Gas Sub-Point..................................................................................................................................................... 177
9.15.4 MACOFIRE - CO-enhanced Fire Detection Sub-Point...................................................................................................................... 177
9.15.5 CO/Photo Algorithm Sub-Point............................................................................................................................................................ 177
9.16 Programming pseudo points..................................................................................................................................................... 178
9.16.1 Step 1. Choose a pseudo point to program..................................................................................................................................... 178
9.16.2 Step 2. Define a custom label............................................................................................................................................................... 179
9.16.3 Step 3. Define an analog pseudo point type.................................................................................................................................... 179
9.16.4 Step 4. Programming a digital pseudo point type........................................................................................................................... 179
10 Audio programming 4100ES jobs....................................................................................................... 181
10.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
10.2 Programming guidelines............................................................................................................................................................ 181
10.2.1 Guidelines and restrictions................................................................................................................................................................... 181
10.3 Setting audio card properties.................................................................................................................................................... 182
10.3.1 Add controllers and amplifiers to the job.......................................................................................................................................... 182
10.3.2 Analog or digital audio controller properties.................................................................................................................................... 182
10.3.3 Editing amplifier properties................................................................................................................................................................... 183
10.4 Specify Initial Audio Library....................................................................................................................................................... 184
10.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 184
10.5 Specify audio options................................................................................................................................................................. 186
10.6 Build Job and Download Files.................................................................................................................................................... 187
10.7 Downloading directly to audio controller................................................................................................................................. 188
10.8 Creating custom scripts.............................................................................................................................................................. 190
10.8.1 Downloading the ES Panel Audio Library.......................................................................................................................................... 190
10.8.2 Adding custom messages to ES Panel Audio.................................................................................................................................... 190
10.8.3 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 190
10.8.4 Creating a new script.............................................................................................................................................................................. 191
10.9 Example - Programming LED/switch for audio........................................................................................................................ 193
10.10 Programming the example switch and LED........................................................................................................................... 193
10.11 Programming the example custom control equations......................................................................................................... 195
10.12 Editing Loop TFX Audio Interface Module properties........................................................................................................... 195
10.13 Accessing the ES Panel TFX Audio Interface Module Properties screen............................................................................. 195
10.14 General settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 196
10.15 Programming the TFX Loop AMP96 Audio Application........................................................................................................ 196
10.15.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 196
10.16 AMP96 plays its own DV2/Tone card...................................................................................................................................... 196
10.17 AMP96 plays the ES Panel Analog Audio Channel 1 Message............................................................................................. 197
10.18 Programming the TFX Loop ATM500 Phone Application..................................................................................................... 201
10.18.1 The microphone of the AMP96 operation...................................................................................................................................... 201
10.18.2 Phone paging operation for the AMP96 speakers........................................................................................................................ 201
10.18.3 Programming the TFX ATM500 phone operation.......................................................................................................................... 202
10.18.4 ATM500 Phone SMPL programming examples.............................................................................................................................. 203
11 Viewing, adding, and editing lists....................................................................................................... 207
11.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 207
11.2 List tab overview......................................................................................................................................................................... 207
11.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 207

page v 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

11.2.2 Sort function............................................................................................................................................................................................. 209

11.2.3 Custom label spell check....................................................................................................................................................................... 209
11.2.4 Search......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 209
11.3 Editing system lists..................................................................................................................................................................... 210
11.3.1 Turning Autogen off and on from the General List tab.................................................................................................................. 210
11.4 Adding and editing user-defined lists....................................................................................................................................... 211
11.4.1 Adding a user-defined list...................................................................................................................................................................... 211
11.4.2 Editing an existing user-defined list.................................................................................................................................................... 213
11.5 Editing alarm verification groups.............................................................................................................................................. 213
11.5.1 Alarm verification overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 213
11.5.2 Moving points between groups............................................................................................................................................................ 213
11.5.3 Selecting Canadian or domestic (US) operation.............................................................................................................................. 214
11.5.4 Renaming a group................................................................................................................................................................................... 215
11.6 Editing coding groups................................................................................................................................................................. 215
11.6.1 Moving points between groups............................................................................................................................................................ 216
11.6.2 Editing group properties........................................................................................................................................................................ 217
11.7 Editing WalkTest groups............................................................................................................................................................. 218
11.7.1 Moving points between groups............................................................................................................................................................ 218
11.7.2 Editing group properties........................................................................................................................................................................ 220
11.8 Editing elevator recall lists......................................................................................................................................................... 221
11.8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 221
11.8.2 Moving points between groups............................................................................................................................................................ 222
11.8.3 Editing group descriptions.................................................................................................................................................................... 223
11.9 Zone Lists..................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
11.9.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
11.9.2 Creating a Zone List................................................................................................................................................................................ 224
11.9.3 Adding and deleting Zone Lists on 4100ES/4010ES FACUs.......................................................................................................... 224
12 Custom control..................................................................................................................................... 225
12.1 Custom control overview........................................................................................................................................................... 225
12.2 The role of lists and pseudo points.......................................................................................................................................... 225
12.3 Anatomy of a custom control equation................................................................................................................................... 225
12.4 Using a ladder logic diagram to evaluate an equation........................................................................................................... 226
12.5 Custom Control window overview............................................................................................................................................ 227
12.6 Creating an equation.................................................................................................................................................................. 227
12.7 Using the Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard............................................................................................................................. 230
12.8 Using the Selective Signaling Wizard........................................................................................................................................ 233
12.9 Using the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard..................................................................................................................................... 236
12.10 Alarm-activate base on alarm................................................................................................................................................. 236
12.11 Alert-activate base prior to alarm........................................................................................................................................... 238
12.12 Suppression Release................................................................................................................................................................ 239
12.12.1 General Capabilities.............................................................................................................................................................................. 239
12.12.2 Applying the appliqué.......................................................................................................................................................................... 240
12.12.3 Device and point types........................................................................................................................................................................ 241
12.12.4 Step 1. Defining the Hazard Area...................................................................................................................................................... 242
12.12.5 Step 2. Specifying the initial data and options............................................................................................................................... 243
12.12.6 Step 3. Specify abort switch operation............................................................................................................................................ 243
12.12.7 Step 4. Setting the timer options...................................................................................................................................................... 244
12.12.8 Step 5. Specifying Hazard Area points............................................................................................................................................. 245
12.12.9 Deleting a Hazard Area........................................................................................................................................................................ 247
12.12.10 Editing an existing Hazard Area....................................................................................................................................................... 247
12.13 Using the Scheduled Self-Test Wizard.................................................................................................................................... 248
12.14 Using the Floors/Suites Wizard............................................................................................................................................... 253
12.14.1 Step 1. Creating floor groups............................................................................................................................................................. 253
12.14.2 Step 2. Configuring the equation event settings........................................................................................................................... 253
12.14.3 Step 3. Configuring the equation data floor settings................................................................................................................... 253
12.14.4 Step 4. Configuring the equation data suite settings................................................................................................................... 253

page vi 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

12.14.5 Deleting floor groups............................................................................................................................................................................ 254

12.14.6 Using the Device Association Tool..................................................................................................................................................... 254
12.14.7 Creating the custom control equations........................................................................................................................................... 255
12.14.8 Viewing the custom control equations............................................................................................................................................ 255
13 Programming TrueAlert zones........................................................................................................... 256
13.1 TrueAlert zone description......................................................................................................................................................... 256
13.2 TrueAlert Zone window.............................................................................................................................................................. 256
13.3 Creating and editing TrueAlert zones....................................................................................................................................... 257
13.3.1 Grouping TrueAlert zones..................................................................................................................................................................... 257
13.3.2 Setting TrueAlert zone properties....................................................................................................................................................... 257
13.3.3 Using the tag list to add devices to the TrueAlert zone................................................................................................................. 257
13.3.4 True Alert application example............................................................................................................................................................. 258
13.3.5 Speaker type zone configuration and behavior............................................................................................................................... 259
14 Port Vectoring....................................................................................................................................... 261
14.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 261
14.2 Selecting Event Groups.............................................................................................................................................................. 261
14.2.1 UL disclaimer............................................................................................................................................................................................ 261
14.2.2 Choosing Event Groups to route......................................................................................................................................................... 261
15 AMON Point Types............................................................................................................................... 262
15.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 262
15.2 Adding or editing an AMON point type.................................................................................................................................... 262
15.2.1 Adding a point type................................................................................................................................................................................. 262
16 Configuring the ES TSD....................................................................................................................... 265
16.1 Card properties........................................................................................................................................................................... 265
16.2 Annunciator settings................................................................................................................................................................... 266
16.3 Point editing................................................................................................................................................................................. 266
16.4 Access levels................................................................................................................................................................................ 266
16.5 Point vectoring............................................................................................................................................................................ 266
16.6 Global settings............................................................................................................................................................................. 266
17 Programming the InfoAlarm............................................................................................................... 268
17.1 FUI tab overview.......................................................................................................................................................................... 268
17.1.1 Specifying bitmap for use with site map............................................................................................................................................ 268
17.1.2 Specifying the watermark text.............................................................................................................................................................. 269
17.1.3 Setting the general options................................................................................................................................................................... 269
17.1.4 Advanced FUI options............................................................................................................................................................................. 270
17.1.5 Setting site point coordinates............................................................................................................................................................... 270
17.2 Programming the InfoAlarm language..................................................................................................................................... 272
17.2.1 Standard MsgLib...................................................................................................................................................................................... 272
17.2.2 Select FUI fonts........................................................................................................................................................................................ 272
17.2.3 English........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 272
17.2.4 French/Spanish......................................................................................................................................................................................... 272
17.2.5 Other languages....................................................................................................................................................................................... 272
17.2.6 Editing country-specific font................................................................................................................................................................. 273
17.2.7 Starting the FUI Font Utility................................................................................................................................................................... 273
17.2.8 Creating and editing a text font file..................................................................................................................................................... 273
17.2.9 Using Notepad to verify and edit font characters........................................................................................................................... 275
17.2.10 Building the text font file..................................................................................................................................................................... 276
17.2.11 Importing the binary file...................................................................................................................................................................... 276
18 Adding or editing network information............................................................................................ 277
18.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 277
18.2 Role of the Network Programmer............................................................................................................................................. 277
18.3 Public versus external points..................................................................................................................................................... 277
18.4 General network programming guidelines.............................................................................................................................. 277
18.5 ES Panel Programmer Network tab.......................................................................................................................................... 278

page vii 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.6 Editing network information...................................................................................................................................................... 279

18.6.1 Accessing the network information..................................................................................................................................................... 279
18.6.2 Editing the network name and node number.................................................................................................................................. 280
18.7 Declaring public points............................................................................................................................................................... 281
18.8 Declaring external points........................................................................................................................................................... 282
18.9 Programming Network Alarm Silence...................................................................................................................................... 283
18.9.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................... 283
18.9.2 Programming Central Network Silence.............................................................................................................................................. 283
18.9.3 Distributed Network Silence................................................................................................................................................................. 284
18.10 Programming Network System Reset..................................................................................................................................... 285
18.10.1 Central Network Reset......................................................................................................................................................................... 285
18.10.2 Distributed Network Reset.................................................................................................................................................................. 286
18.11 Programming the digital pseudo points P463 and P464...................................................................................................... 287
18.11.1 Distributed configuration.................................................................................................................................................................... 287
19 File Transfer and Terminal Features.................................................................................................. 288
19.1 IP File Transfer............................................................................................................................................................................. 288
19.1.1 IP File Transfer connection to the PC.................................................................................................................................................. 288
19.2 Starting the IP File Transfer Utility............................................................................................................................................. 289
19.2.1 Using the select Panel/Network dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 290
19.2.2 Network downloads................................................................................................................................................................................ 294
19.3 IP File Transfer download........................................................................................................................................................... 294
19.3.1 Download tab........................................................................................................................................................................................... 295
19.3.2 Additional Download tab functions..................................................................................................................................................... 295
19.4 IP File Transfer Upload/Reports................................................................................................................................................ 297
19.4.1 Types of transfer...................................................................................................................................................................................... 299
19.4.2 Mass Storage tab..................................................................................................................................................................................... 300
19.4.3 History/Undo tab..................................................................................................................................................................................... 301
19.4.3.1 Upload a job to PC and perform a full compare....................................................................................................................... 301
19.5 Downloading files to the ES TSD............................................................................................................................................... 302
19.5.1 USB.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 302
19.5.2 Downloading the ES TSD Files.............................................................................................................................................................. 302
19.5.3 File Structure............................................................................................................................................................................................. 302
19.5.4 File Naming................................................................................................................................................................................................ 303
19.5.5 RFP Files..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 303
19.6 Starting the Serial Transfer Utility............................................................................................................................................. 304
19.6.1 Setting serial communication parameter settings........................................................................................................................... 305
19.6.2 Connecting the service PC to the panel............................................................................................................................................. 306
19.6.2.1 Direct connection to a panel.......................................................................................................................................................... 306
19.6.2.2 4120 Network connection............................................................................................................................................................... 307
19.7 Serial File Transfer download.................................................................................................................................................... 309
19.7.1 Modem connection to remote panel.................................................................................................................................................. 309
19.7.2 Procedure for downloading a CFIG file............................................................................................................................................... 310
19.7.3 Procedure for downloading Slave Exec files..................................................................................................................................... 312
19.7.4 Downloading Bootloader files.............................................................................................................................................................. 314
19.7.5 Downloading files to the InfoAlarm..................................................................................................................................................... 316
19.7.6 Build file for the InfoAlarm.................................................................................................................................................................... 316
19.7.7 Connect the PC to the InfoAlarm panel............................................................................................................................................. 317
19.7.8 Downloading InfoAlarm files................................................................................................................................................................. 317
19.7.9 Resetting the InfoAlarm.......................................................................................................................................................................... 318
19.7.10 Upgrading the ES Panel....................................................................................................................................................................... 318
19.7.11 Upgrading FUI job to latest Programmer/Master.......................................................................................................................... 318
19.7.12 Upgrading a LEGACY job..................................................................................................................................................................... 318
19.8 Terminal connection................................................................................................................................................................... 319
19.8.1 Using the terminal feature.................................................................................................................................................................... 319
19.8.2 Selecting options...................................................................................................................................................................................... 319
19.8.3 Connecting to the panel using the serial port.................................................................................................................................. 320

page viii 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.8.4 Connecting to the panel using the Ethernet port............................................................................................................................ 320

20 Appendix A Software point types....................................................................................................... 321
20.1 Device type and point types for IDNet/MAPNET..................................................................................................................... 321
20.1.1 Analog device types................................................................................................................................................................................. 321
20.1.2 Control device types................................................................................................................................................................................ 323
20.1.3 Multipoint device types.......................................................................................................................................................................... 323
20.1.4 TFX device types....................................................................................................................................................................................... 324
20.2 Device type and point types for TFX......................................................................................................................................... 327
20.2.1 TFX multipoint device types................................................................................................................................................................... 327
20.2.2 Minerva multipoint device types.......................................................................................................................................................... 328
20.2.3 Hardwired monitor device types.......................................................................................................................................................... 328
20.2.4 ES Panel hardwired signal..................................................................................................................................................................... 329
20.2.5 SPS and MSS NACs device types.......................................................................................................................................................... 329
20.2.6 XPS AUX Relay........................................................................................................................................................................................... 329
20.3 Device and point types for hardwired monitor, signal and AUX relay.................................................................................. 329
20.3.1 SPS, MSS, OR RPS AUX Relay................................................................................................................................................................ 329
20.3.2 4100-3001, 4100-3002, 4100-3003.................................................................................................................................................... 329
20.3.3 EPS AuxNAC.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 329
20.3.4 ES-PS/ES-XPS AuxNAC Point Types...................................................................................................................................................... 329
20.3.5 NAC Card Point Types............................................................................................................................................................................. 331
20.4 Device/communication channel compatibility........................................................................................................................ 332
20.5 Signal point types........................................................................................................................................................................ 334
20.5.1 SIGNAL........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 334
20.5.2 RELAY.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 334
20.5.3 SSIGNAL..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 334
20.5.4 RSIGNAL..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 335
20.5.5 TSIGNAL..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 336
20.5.6 BSIGNAL..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 336
20.5.7 CODED........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 336
20.5.8 SVISUAL...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 337
20.5.9 RVISUAL...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 337
20.5.10 SWATER.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 337
20.5.11 RWATER.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 338
20.5.12 SUPERV.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 338
20.5.13 PRIMARY.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 338
20.5.14 ALTERN..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 339
20.5.15 AHUR........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 339
20.5.16 AHUO........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 339
20.5.17 AHUF......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 339
20.5.18 CPRESS..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 340
20.5.19 CEXHAUS................................................................................................................................................................................................. 340
20.5.20 CDAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................ 340
20.5.21 DRESET..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 340
20.5.22 DHOLDER................................................................................................................................................................................................ 341
20.5.23 PHONE..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 341
20.5.24 RMPHONE............................................................................................................................................................................................... 342
20.5.25 SHAFT....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 342
20.5.26 AUXPWR................................................................................................................................................................................................... 342
20.6 Monitor point types.................................................................................................................................................................... 342
20.6.1 FCORFAST.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 342
20.6.2 SCORFAST.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 343
20.6.3 PCORFAST.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 343
20.6.4 UCORFAST................................................................................................................................................................................................. 343
20.6.5 SCORFALSE................................................................................................................................................................................................ 343
20.6.6 PCORFALSE................................................................................................................................................................................................ 343
20.6.7 UCORFALSE............................................................................................................................................................................................... 344

page ix 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.8 COFIRE........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 344

20.6.9 COPRI2........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 344
20.6.10 COSUPV................................................................................................................................................................................................... 344
20.6.11 COGASPRI2............................................................................................................................................................................................. 345
20.6.12 COGASSUPV............................................................................................................................................................................................ 345
20.6.13 FIRE........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 346
20.6.14 WATER....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 346
20.6.15 HEAT.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 346
20.6.16 DUCT......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 346
20.6.17 FLAME....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 347
20.6.18 PULL.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 347
20.6.19 SMOKE..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 347
20.6.20 VSMOKE................................................................................................................................................................................................... 347
20.6.21 CODEDIN................................................................................................................................................................................................. 348
20.6.22 EMERG...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 348
20.6.23 EXTNGSH................................................................................................................................................................................................. 349
20.6.24 SFIRE......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 349
20.6.25 VSFIRE....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 349
20.6.26 SPULL....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 349
20.6.27 VSPULL..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 350
20.6.28 GENMON................................................................................................................................................................................................. 350
20.6.29 SGENMON............................................................................................................................................................................................... 350
20.6.30 FPUMP...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 351
20.6.31 SFPUMP................................................................................................................................................................................................... 351
20.6.32 ABORT...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 351
20.6.33 S2STAGE................................................................................................................................................................................................... 351
20.6.34 SO.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 352
20.6.35 SC.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 352
20.6.36 WSO.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 352
20.6.37 WSC........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 353
20.6.38 GVMON.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 353
20.6.39 SUPERV.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 353
20.6.40 LATSUPV................................................................................................................................................................................................... 353
20.6.41 UTILITY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 354
20.6.42 TROUBLE................................................................................................................................................................................................. 354
20.6.43 DAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................... 354
20.6.44 TDAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................. 355
20.6.45 MPRI2 (ARMED)...................................................................................................................................................................................... 355
20.6.46 MPRI2 (DISARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................ 355
20.6.47 SMALARM (ARMED)............................................................................................................................................................................... 355
20.6.48 SMALARM (DISARMED)......................................................................................................................................................................... 356
20.6.49 SMDOOR (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................ 356
20.6.50 SMDOOR (DISARMED).......................................................................................................................................................................... 356
20.6.51 SMWIND (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................. 357
20.6.52 SMWIND (DISARMED)........................................................................................................................................................................... 357
20.6.53 SMBREAK (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................ 357
20.6.54 SMBREAK (DISARMED)......................................................................................................................................................................... 357
20.6.55 SMMOT (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................... 358
20.6.56 SMMOT (DISARMED)............................................................................................................................................................................. 358
20.6.57 SPRI2 (ARMED)....................................................................................................................................................................................... 358
20.6.58 SPRI2 (DISARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................. 359
20.6.59 SSALARM (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................ 359
20.6.60 SSALARM (DISARMED).......................................................................................................................................................................... 359
20.6.61 SSDOOR (ARMED).................................................................................................................................................................................. 359
20.6.62 SSDOOR (DISARMED)........................................................................................................................................................................... 360
20.6.63 SSWIND (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................... 360
20.6.64 SSWIND (DISARMED)............................................................................................................................................................................ 360

page x 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.65 SSBREAK (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................. 361

20.6.66 SSBREAK (DISARMED)........................................................................................................................................................................... 361
20.6.67 SSMOT (ARMED)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 361
20.6.68 SSMOT (DISARMED).............................................................................................................................................................................. 361
20.6.69 STYLEC...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 362
20.6.70 SDUCT...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 362
20.6.71 GENPRI2 (ARMED)................................................................................................................................................................................. 362
20.6.72 GENPRI2 (DISARMED)........................................................................................................................................................................... 363
20.6.73 GENFS....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 363
20.6.74 S3SMOKE................................................................................................................................................................................................. 363
20.6.75 SUTIL......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 363
20.6.76 LSDUCT.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 364
20.6.77 LVSUPV..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 364
20.6.78 LVSDUCT.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 364
20.6.79 FBEAM...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 364
20.6.80 LSBEAM.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 365
20.6.81 UBEAM..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 365
20.7 AUX relay point types................................................................................................................................................................. 366
20.7.1 RELAY.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 366
20.7.2 PRIMARY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 366
20.7.3 ALTERN....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 366
20.7.4 AHUR........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 366
20.7.5 AHUO.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 367
20.7.6 AHUF........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 367
20.7.7 CODED........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 367
20.7.8 CPRESS....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 367
20.7.9 CEXHAUS.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 368
20.7.10 CDAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................ 368
20.7.11 SRELAY...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 368
20.7.12 RRELAY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 368
20.7.13 TRELAY...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 369
20.7.14 BRELAY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 369
20.7.15 DRESET..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 369
20.7.16 DHOLDER................................................................................................................................................................................................ 369
20.7.17 SWATER.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 370
20.7.18 RWATER.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 370
20.7.19 SUPERV.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 370
20.7.20 SVISUAL.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 370
20.7.21 RVISUAL................................................................................................................................................................................................... 371
20.7.22 SSIGNAL................................................................................................................................................................................................... 371
20.7.23 RSIGNAL................................................................................................................................................................................................... 371
20.7.24 SHAFT....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 371
20.7.25 AUXPWR................................................................................................................................................................................................... 372
20.8 Monitor device types.................................................................................................................................................................. 372
20.9 24 Point I/O point types............................................................................................................................................................. 373
20.9.1 Feedback point types.............................................................................................................................................................................. 373
20.9.1.1 DAMPER............................................................................................................................................................................................... 373
20.9.1.2 AHUMON............................................................................................................................................................................................. 373
20.9.1.3 PRESSUR.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 373
20.9.1.4 EXHAUST.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 373
20.9.1.5 ONOFF.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 374
20.9.2 UTILITY........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 374
20.9.3 TROUBLE.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 374
20.9.4 USWITCH.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 374
20.9.5 OSWITCH.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 375
20.9.6 SSWITCH..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 375
20.9.7 TSWITCH..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 375

page xi 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.8 TDAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................... 375

20.9.9 AHUMON................................................................................................................................................................................................... 376
20.9.10 PRESSUR.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 376
20.9.11 EXHAUST.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 376
20.9.12 ONOFF...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 377
20.9.13 OFFON...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 377
20.9.14 EP............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 377
20.9.15 DAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................... 377
20.9.16 LAMP......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 378
20.9.17 PIEZO........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 378
20.9.18 RELAY........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 378
20.9.19 PRIMARY.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 378
20.9.20 ALTERN..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 379
20.9.21 AHUR........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 379
20.9.22 AHUO........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 379
20.9.23 AHUF......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 380
20.9.24 CPRESS..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 380
20.9.25 CEXHAUS................................................................................................................................................................................................. 380
20.9.26 CDAMPER................................................................................................................................................................................................ 380
20.9.27 SRELAY...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 381
20.9.28 RRELAY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 381
20.9.29 TRELAY...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 381
20.9.30 BRELAY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 382
20.9.31 SHAFT....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 382
20.10 Digital pseudo point types....................................................................................................................................................... 382
20.10.1 UTILITY..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 382
20.10.2 FIRE........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 382
20.10.3 TROUBLE................................................................................................................................................................................................. 383
20.10.4 SUPERVIS................................................................................................................................................................................................. 383
20.10.5 PRI2........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 383
20.11 Analog pseudo point types...................................................................................................................................................... 383
20.11.1 TIMER........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 383
20.11.2 COUNTER................................................................................................................................................................................................. 383
20.11.3 ANALOG................................................................................................................................................................................................... 383
20.12 List pseudo point types............................................................................................................................................................ 384
21 Appendix B LED/Switch Modes.......................................................................................................... 385
21.1 Switch modes.............................................................................................................................................................................. 385
21.2 LED modes................................................................................................................................................................................... 386
21.3 High-level switch / LED modes.................................................................................................................................................. 388
22 Appendix C ULC programming requirements (Canadian)............................................................... 390
22.1 Common earth fault ground indication................................................................................................................................... 390
22.1.1 Step 1. Open CPU Card Properties Dialog........................................................................................................................................ 390
22.1.2 Step 2. Program the LED........................................................................................................................................................................ 391
22.2 Programming the automatic alarm signal timer..................................................................................................................... 391
22.2.1 Step 1. Initializing the timer................................................................................................................................................................... 392
22.2.2 Step 2. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Running LED............................................................................................... 392
22.2.3 Step 3. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel switch......................................................................................................... 392
22.2.4 Step 4. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel LED............................................................................................................. 393
22.3 Simultaneous alarm display...................................................................................................................................................... 393
22.3.1 Creating annunciation zone lists.......................................................................................................................................................... 394
22.3.2 Programming the address and mode for each LED....................................................................................................................... 394
22.3.3 Programming a Lamp Test switch........................................................................................................................................................ 395
22.4 Manual evacuation...................................................................................................................................................................... 396
22.4.1 Programming the Manual Evacuation Key......................................................................................................................................... 396
22.5 Setting the alarm silence/reset inhibit timer........................................................................................................................... 397
22.5.1 Enabling the alarm silence/reset inhibit timer.................................................................................................................................. 397

page xii 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

22.5.2 Programming the Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit LED......................................................................................................................... 397

22.6 Enabling the low battery cutout option.................................................................................................................................... 397
22.6.1 Enabling depleted battery cutout........................................................................................................................................................ 398
22.7 The alarm cutout timer.............................................................................................................................................................. 398
22.7.1 Enabling the alarm cutout timer.......................................................................................................................................................... 398
22.7.2 Setting the Alarm Cutout Timer LED................................................................................................................................................... 398
22.8 Degraded and local mode indication....................................................................................................................................... 399
22.8.1 Procedure for degraded network operation..................................................................................................................................... 399
22.8.2 Procedure for local mode operation.................................................................................................................................................. 399
22.9 Releasing specific controls and indications............................................................................................................................. 400
22.9.1 Programming the Pre-Discharge LED................................................................................................................................................. 400
22.9.2 Programming the Discharge LED......................................................................................................................................................... 401
22.9.3 Programming the Abort Switch Active LED....................................................................................................................................... 401
22.9.4 Programming the Abort Switch Trouble During Normal Supervisory Conditions.................................................................... 402
22.9.5 Programming the optional Releasing Service Signal Silence button and LED.......................................................................... 402
22.10 Request, grant, and deny control functionality for multiple display and control centers................................................ 404
22.10.1 Programming request, grant, and deny functionality................................................................................................................... 404
22.10.2 Initiating the Request Timeout Setpoint.......................................................................................................................................... 404
22.10.3 Programming control of the system, and the associated LEDs................................................................................................. 405
22.10.4 Programming equations, and the associated LEDs, that request system control................................................................ 406
22.10.5 Programming equations, and the associated LEDs, that grant and deny system control.................................................. 407
22.10.6 Programming an equation that grants system control after a system reset.......................................................................... 409
22.11 The fire drill feature.................................................................................................................................................................. 410
22.11.1 Programming the Fire Drill manual control.................................................................................................................................... 410
23 Appendix D UL programming requirements (United States).......................................................... 411
23.1 Setting Alarm Verification Timer to US operation................................................................................................................... 411
23.2 Non-Steady Visual Evacuation System option......................................................................................................................... 411
24 Appendix E Labor saving features..................................................................................................... 413
25 Appendix F Multiple detector operation........................................................................................... 415
25.1 Addressable detection................................................................................................................................................................ 415
25.2 Alarm verification timing............................................................................................................................................................ 415

page xiii 574-849 Rev. BA

This page is intentionally blank
 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid
damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX™ PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect
the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an
authorized Simplex product supplier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should
be performed by a representative or an authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.

STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:

• Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.

EYE SAFETY HAZARD Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety
limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.

SULFURIC ACID WARNING Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can
destroy fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with
sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.

FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
SYSTEM REACCPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in
accordance with NFPA-72, after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after
any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All
components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to
ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change,
up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
Important: Verify FACU System Programmer, Executive, and Card Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components.
Refer to the Technical Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.

page 15 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

2 Installing the ES Panel PC Programmer

This chapter describes the installation of the ES Panel PC Programmer Application, for use with 4100ES fire alarm control panels (FACPs)
and 4010ES FACPs.

2.1 System requirements

The following are the minimum hardware requirements for the PC on which the ES Panel Programmer is to be installed:
• Windows 7, or a more recent operating system.
• Removable media for job archives and backups.
• 1 CD-ROM drive for access to the documentation CD.
• 1 Ethernet port, or 1 serial port with assorted cable for communication with the ES Panel.
• A network card for certain operations
• 1280 x 1024 minimum screen resolution
Note: This may differ depending on the display setting

2.1.1 Other required components

• Access to the ES Panel Programmer is controlled by the Security Service installation, available from the Simplex Technical Support
web site. When the ES Panel Programmer application launches, the Security Service performs a check to see if a valid, active software
license is available. If the service does not detect a software license, a message appears alerting the user that the license is missing,
and access to the ES Panel Programmer is not permitted. See the Licensing section for further information. For instructions on
installing the Security Service, refer to Installing the Software Security System 579-825 .
• Internet access to download the ES Panel Programmer software from Simplex Technical Support website www.simplex-fire.com .

2.2 Launching the ES Panel Programmer

The ES Panel PC Programmer software is available for download from the Simplex Technical Support web site www.simplex-fire.com .
Note: You must have administrative rights on your machine to install the software.

2.2.1 Downloading the ES Panel Programmer software

To download the ES Panel Programmer software:
1. Connect to the Internet.
2. Go to the www.simplex-fire.com website, registration is required.
3. Click Distributor Support, and click Technical Support.
4. Click Fire Alarm in the Software Downloads area, and click the 4100ES Fire Alarm Panel link. The latest revision of the ES Panel
Programmer for the 4100ES panel is available on this page.
5. Click the file you want to download, and a security warning appears. Click Run to proceed.
6. An authorization request to copy the file to the C Drive on your computer appears. Click OK. This downloads the file 4100ESProg
to the C directory of your computer.

page 16 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

2.2.2 Installing the ES Panel Programmer software

To install the ES Panel Programmer software:
1. Click Start, and then point to Computer. Point to Default (C:), and double-click 4100ESProg folder.
2. Double-click the ESProgrammer.exe file.
3. The Software Licensing agreement appears. Read the agreement and click Next to continue.
4. A prompt window appears requesting the user to specify the destination folder for the programmer files. Click Next to accept
the default folder, Simplex.
5. Progress indicators appear, displaying the progress of the file copy operations. The next prompt requests a computer restart.
Click Finish to restart and complete the installation.
Note: Ensure that all open files are saved before you restart the computer.

Important: Verify the system software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. For information about
compatibility, see the Software Downloads section in the Technical Support area on the Simplex Fire website:
https://simplex-fire.com.

2.2.2.1 Getting started

To launch the ES Panel Programmer:
1. Click Start, and point to All Programs.
2. Click the Simplex folder, and click the folder for the version of the ES Panel Programmer you want to open.
3. Click ES Panel Programmer.
Note: The following options are also available from the ES Panel Programmer menu:
- Compare: This option allows the user to compare job revisions.
- Converter: Use this option to convert a 4100 job to a 4100ES job.
- File Transfer: Use this option for downloading to the panel.
- FUI Font Util: Use this option to capture and edit a language-specific font file.
- IP File Transfer: This option opens the IP File Transfer menu.
- Job Builder: Select this option to build a Job.
- Tera Term: This option opens the Tera Term connection.
- Uninstall ES Panel Programmer: Use this option to uninstall the ES Panel Program.

2.2.3 Licensing
The licensing mechanism protects against unauthorized access to programming and application software. This protection is provided to
the customer through a unique customer software license. A technician can also use the Technical Representative (TR) / Maintenance
license to run the software, but with various access and time restrictions.
Contact your local Simplex supplier to obtain a software license.
Note: The software license replaces the legacy USB security dongle. The software license is backward compatible so you can use legacy
Simplex programs with the new software license.

2.2.3.1 Managing the software license

To manage a software license, do the following:
1. From the Help menu in the ES Panel Programmer, click Software License… .
2. Click Manage License. The License window displays the current status of your license.
3. In the Actions section, select one of the following options:
- Activate a license or renewal.
- Refresh my license.
- Deactivate this workstation.
4. Select This computer’s Internet connection. Or Another computer’s Internet connection.
Note: If you do not have an active internet connection, use the Another computer’s Internet connection and complete the on-
screen instructions.
5. In the License Details section, complete the License ID, Password and Installation fields.
6. Click Next.
7. If the request is successful, click Finish. If the request fails, click Back and verify the license information.

page 17 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

2.2.3.2 Loading an existing license

Use this feature to load a license directly from another file. The license must be valid for the current application. This operation
is useful for testing purposes as you can preserve the user license while servicing the system. When you load a license once, it is
available for multiple Simplex applications.
To load an existing license file, do the following:
1. From the Help menu in the ES Panel Programmer, click Software License…
2. Click Load Existing License File.
3. Select the license file and click Open.

page 18 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

3 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the process required to program a ES Panel job, and introduces you to the general features of the ES
Panel PC Programmer application, which is the Windows-based application used to program an ES Panel FACP.

3.1 Notice to users, installers, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and other involved
parties
This product incorporates field programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the Standard for Control Units and
Accessories for Fire alarm systems, UL864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values, or not used at all,
as indicated below.
Table 1: Programming features or options
Program feature or option Permitted in UL864? Possible settings Settings permitted by UL
(Y/N)
AC Fail delayed reporting to the Yes 1, 2, or 3 hours
central station
Editing amplifier properties data Yes Depleted Battery Cutout Insuite Depleted Battery Cutout Backup Amp
entry tab (Editing amplifier Devices Used Backup Amp Address Address NAC Options
properties) NAC Options
Editing group properties DC Yes ON until completion ON until completion
group tab (Editing group ON until RESET
properties) ON until SILENCE
Specify Abort Switch operation Yes Immediate Immediate
(Notice to users, installers, 10 second delay 10 second delay
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, 10 second remaining 10 second remaining
and other involved parties) IRI Abort NYC Abort
Editing Custom Control Yes 3.1 3.1
equations that change sensitivity 2.6 2.6
levels (set Alarm Thresholds) for 2.2 2.2
ISN- 550 Photo smoke detectors 1.8
1.4
1.0
LVSUPV - Latching Verified No
Supervisory Smoke Detector
LVSDUCT - Latching Verified No
Supervisory Duct Smoke
Detector
Fiber Modem Phone Expansion When the Fiber Modem Phone Expansion Card is used, phones connected through the card are not
Card suitable for audio paging, and cannot be programmed to provide audio system paging capability.
MACOFIRE - Carbon Monoxide Yes COFIRE, COPRI2, COSUPV, UTILITY COSUPV UTILITY
Fire Algorithm
Alarm Cutout Timer Yes Enabled/Disabled (60-3600 seconds) 60 seconds or greater
Standard Alarm Evacuation Yes 33.3.4 The Standard Evacuation Signal When used, it must set for no less than
Signal is feature that is programmable in this 3 minutes.
4100 panel.
Automatic Alert Tone Yes 34.2.1.1 The Automatic Alert Tone You must set this for no less than 1 to 3
is a feature in this 4100 panel that seconds.
is programmable. You can use this
either separately produced or part of
a pre-recorded message.
Muting a Voice or an Alarm Yes 34.2.1.5 The 4100 panel can mute a N/A
Annunciation from the Release voice or an alarm from the release
Action portion of the system and the
respective speaker zone during a
mechanical or manual release.

page 19 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

3.2 Programming overview

This manual describes the process used to program a new ES Panel job, or edit an existing ES Panel job. A job refers to the file containing
all the programming information for the panel. A job can be either of the following:
• A standalone job, meaning the panel, which may consist of multiple back boxes, contains only a single CPU
• A network job, which contains the programming information for multiple panels, that is multiple CPUs, linked to one another using a
Simplex 4120 or ES Net fire network.
The job programming process typically falls into one of the three categories outlined below. This table also identifies the general process
required to program each type of job.
Table 2: Programming process overview
Job programming General programming process
category
A new, standalone, non- Create a job using the ES Panel Edit the initial hardware definitions Custom control Build,
network job Programmer required? TrueAlert download,
A new, or existing Create or open a Create or open The ES Panel Edit as necessary NAC programming and archive
network job network using the a job using Programmer required? Port the job
Simplex Network the Simplex launches vectoring required?
Programmer Network automatically Analog Monitor point
Programmer types required? Edit the
An existing, standalone Upload a job, or edit an Edit as necessary custom label?
non-network job archived job using the ES Panel
Programmer
As shown above, the three job types require a slightly different process at the beginning, and a similar process towards the end. Use the
following tips when programming a job:
• Existing jobs - Always use an archived or backed up version of the job as the starting point for editing the job. This ensures the version
of the job currently executing on the panel and the job loaded on the programmer are the same. If necessary, the job file for an
installed panel can be uploaded to the PC from the panel.
• Network jobs - See the Simplex Network Programmer, installation and programming manual (579-166) for information about using the
network programmer to do the following:
- Create a network, or open an existing network.
- Create a job, or open an existing job. When the network is created or opened, you must create or edit a job for each panel on the
network. The network programmer automatically launches the ES PC Programmer to create or edit a job for each panel.
After these tasks are complete, follow the procedures in this manual to edit and program the job for each panel on the network.

page 20 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

3.3 Interface overview

The ES Panel Programmer application provides a graphical interface for programming an ES Panel job. This application contains the
following major components.

Figure 1: Main programming screen with Panel Tab selected

• Two types of tabs are used in the programmer:
- Major tabs - The major tabs run along the top of the screen, below the row of icons, and are always displayed. Click on a major tab
to access a window for programming a specific component or feature of the job. When viewed from left to right, these tabs identify
the programming sequence used to create an ES Panel job. When programming a new job, best practice is to use the tabs from left
to right. See Tabs later in this section for specific information on each tab.
- Minor sub tabs - Some of the major tabs, such as the Panel tab shown in Figure 1, have a set of minor tabs associated with them.
Minor tabs are used to break down the major tab into specific programming areas, and only appear when the associated major tab
is selected.
• Use the icons to quickly perform routine tasks such as printing, saving a job, and so on. See Icons for a quick reference the icon.
• Menus contain groups of similar choices. All menu choices have an icon on the icon bar.
• Task Checklists, track progress through the programming process, see the left side of Figure 2. Each major programming task can be
expanded to view its subtasks. As you complete each subtask, use the check box to indicate that it is complete. Tasks are divided into
two major groups, mandatory and optional. This is useful when determining whether all of the basic programming tasks for a job are
complete.
You can configure the programmer display a prompt when you exit a programming tab with an unchecked task check box. It is possible
to program reminders to appear during the programming session, or only at build time. Click Edit, and select Preferences to enable or
disable reminder messages.
Toggle the checklist display on and off using the X control on the top right of the checklist, or click View and select Checklist, or press F10.

page 21 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 2: Programmer Checklist

3.3.1 Tabs
Each of the major tabs running along the top of the programmer contains a group of related programming functions.
• Panel tab: Five sub tabs appear along the bottom of the screen when the Panel tab is selected. Use these sub tabs to do the
following:
- Identify general information about the panel, such as branch, panel, customer information, and so on.
- Enable system options which are common programming tasks, such as choosing whether door relays drop on AC power failure.
These options are typically check boxes or list boxes that allow you to choose how a common task is performed. Panel Information,
system options, and restricting access to display functions discusses system options.
- Restrict access to specific panel functions by associating the function with a passcode.
- Specify the serial number of the CPU card.
• Hardware tab: This tab uses a two dimensional work area in which icons represent the customer-specific components of the fire
alarm system. Available icons include units which represent locations in the building, boxes, and cards. See Specifying hardware
components for information about adding and editing the hardware components of the system.
• Point tab: Use this tab to specify the custom label and point type for each point in the system. Points are the discrete components of
the system, such as pull stations, NACs, and relays. Programming a point involves defining the hardware device type, which identifies
the specific type of equipment being programmed, and defining the software point type, which defines the way in which the system
responds to a change in the point's electrical state. Every point in the system also includes a custom label field. These fields are
typically specified in conjunction with the building's maintenance personnel and the local fire department. Use the Point Tab to sort,
filter and search to locate specific points.
• List tab: Lists have a variety of uses within the system. The programmer automatically creates System Lists. These lists define the
default operation of the system, so that groups of devices are controlled in a specific manner following a specific system event. Points
are assigned to specific system lists based on the point type assigned to the point. User Defined Lists allow custom operation of the
system, using either Custom Control equations, or by associating the list with a switch or LED, for example if a point within the user-
defined list switches “On”, illuminate a specific LED to indicate a specific condition has occurred.
• Custom Control tab: The Custom Control tab has wizard dialogs that are used for creating custom control equations, and
customizing the system operation.
• TrueAlert Zone tab: TrueAlert NACs are not hardwired to the ES Panel, but instead are connected using TrueAlert communication
channels in the system. Use this tab to specify which remote devices comprise which TrueAlert zones.
• Port Vectoring tab: Use this tab to specify which events on the system are routed to the service modem, or to an RS-232 card.
• AMON Point Type tab: Use this tab to configure the Analog Monitor ZAMs on the system.
• Action Message tab: Use this tab to set messages to direct the user during an alarm condition.
• FUI tab: Use this tab to configure the language and display settings of the InfoAlarm.
• Network Point tab: Use this tab to declare the public points on the panel, and to identify which external points annunciate their
status on the panel. A public point is a point connected to this panel that is visible to other nodes on the network. In other words,
when the status of the point changes, it is annunciated on the other node. An external point is a point on another node. Declare a

page 22 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

point as external so that the status of the point is annunciated on this panel.
• Zone Lists: Available if Zone List Cards are added to the job.

3.3.2 Icons
The icon bar contains a set of icons you use to perform basic tasks, such as creating a job or building a job. Figure 3 shows the location of
the icon bar and identifies the function of each icon.

Figure 3: Icon bar

page 23 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4 Basic operations
This chapter discusses the basic operations related to using the ES Panel Programmer, such as starting the application, uploading a job
from an existing panel, creating a new job, and so on.

4.1 Launching the ES Panel Programmer

Click Start and point to All Programs. Click Simplex, and click ES Panel Programmer.
A screen similar to Figure 4 appears. At this point, you need to either create a job or open an existing job. Refer to either Creating a job or
Opening a existing job - guidelines in this chapter for more information.

Figure 4: Initial ES Panel Programmer screen

4.2 Creating a job

1. You can create a job in the following ways:

- Click the File menu, and click New.

- Click the New icon on the tool bar at the top of the window.
A dialog appears similar to the one shown below appears.

Figure 5: Create a job dialog

2. Click the Type list and select the panel type.

- NDU ES Net: Specifies the panel is a Network Display Unit with an ES Net NIC card.
- NDU 4120: Specifies the panel is a Network Display Unit with a 4120 NIC card.
- 4010ES MSS. Specifies the panel is a 4010ES with a main system supply (MSS).
- 4010ES MSS INT. Specifies the panel is an international 4010ES with an MSS.
- 4010ES ESS. Specifies the panel is a 4010ES with an extended system supply (ESS) IDNAC.
- 4010ES ESS INT. Specifies the panel is an international 4010ES with an ESS.
- 4100ES SPS. Specifies the panel is a 4100ES with a standard power supply (SPS).
- 4100ES EPS. Specifies that the panel is a 4100ES, networked or standalone, with an extended power supply (EPS) IDNAC.
- 4100 ES-PS. Specifies the panel is a 4100ES, networked or standalone, with the newest modular power supply- ES-PS.
- 4007: Specifies that the panel is a 4007ES Addressable panel.
- 4007H: Specifies that the panel is a 4007ES Hybrid panel.
- 4100ESi: Specifies that the panel is a 4100ESi panel for Australia and New Zealand (ANZ).

page 24 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- 4100ESi NDU: Specifies that the panel is a Network Display Unit with a 4100ESi ANZ NIC card.
3. Enter the job number in the Number field. The ES Panel job naming convention is a five-field, eight-digit code, consisting of
the following fields. (A file number is assigned to every job at order entry. In most cases, this number should be taken from the
electronic project folder.) See Table 3.

- Year. This is a two-digit field. Use the last two digits of the current year to indicate the year in which the job was programmed.
- Month. This is a single character field. Use the numbers and letters shown in the example below to indicate the month in which the
job was programmed. See Table 3.
- File Type. This field is a single letter, used to indicate the panel type. There is currently only a single supported type. For a 4100ES
job use the letter E.
- Number. This is a three-digit field used to track how many of a specific job type have been programmed during the month. For
example, if the File type is 4100ES, enter the number of 4100ES jobs programmed during the month.
- Job Version. When archiving a job, you can use letters to differentiate the jobs once they have been archived. For example, when
job 103E123A is archived, save new edits as 103E123B. Table 3 describes the format.
4. Specify the directory path where the job file will be stored in the Path field of the New Job dialog, see Figure 5. The default
directory for a standalone panel is \4100UJOBS. Network jobs default to \NETJOBS\SITENAME, where SITENAME represents the
job's directory. If necessary, use the folder icon to the right of the text entry field to specify an alternative directory or drive.
5. Click Finish.
Table 3: Job Naming Convention
YEAR MONTH FILE TYPE NUMBER JOB VERSION
2013 1 = Jan 4100ES
2 = Feb
3 = Mar
4 = Apr
5 = May
6 = Jun
7 = Jul
8 = Aug
9 = Sep
A = Oct
B = Nov
C = Dec

13 5 E 001 A

page 25 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4.3 Opening a existing job - guidelines

By default, previously programmed jobs are stored in either the \4100UJOBS or the \NETJOBS\SITENAME directory, where SITENAME
represents the directory in which the network job is stored. Use the procedure described in this section to open a previously saved job
stored on your PC.
Note: Do this only when you are sure that the job on the PC is exactly the same as the programming (CFIG) currently in use on the panel.
1. Open the 4100UJOBS folder by doing either of the following:

- Select the Open icon from the toolbar at the top of the window.
- Click the File menu and click Open. A window similar to the following appears.

Figure 6: Open Job Window

2. Open the folder containing the job that corresponds to the panel you are programming.
3. Select the job name and click Open. One of the following occurs, depending on whether the job was previously archived.

- Non-Archived Jobs. A series of messages appear, indicating that the programmer is loading the job and updating links. This
displays the main ES Panel Programmer window.
- Archived Jobs. A prompt appears, indicating that the job has been previously archived and changes will be saved to a new revision
of the job. Click OK to continue. This displays the main ES Panel Programmer window.

page 26 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4.4 Entering the panel CPU serial number

Note: If you do not know the panel CPU serial number, apply power to the panel and observe the initial screens that appear on the
display. Record the CPU Serial Number that appears.

Note: To enter the panel CPU serial number, do the following:

1. Click the Panel tab at the top of the ES Panel Programmer window.
2. Click the Features sub tab at the bottom of the ES Panel Programmer window.
A screen similar to Figure 7 appears.

Figure 7: Enabling System Features Screen

3. Click the Runtime Enable Edit check box. Enter the serial number of the panel CPU in the CPU # field, and click Update Access
Codes.

page 27 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4.5 Saving a job

When programming a large job, periodically save the job to avoid losing changes in the event of a problem.
You can save the job in the following ways:
• Click the File menu and click Save.
• Click the Save icon.
The Revision History window appears, see Figure 8. Enter the following information in the window fields:
• Name: The name of the person editing the job.
• Enter Modifications: Type a specific description of the changes that you have made. For example, “Updated the custom labels of
points M1-1 through M1-5, according to the customer request.”

Figure 8: Revision History window

4.5.1 Using the Save As option

Use the Save As option to save the current job as a new revision letter.
1. Click File and select Save As. A cascade menu appears with the option to Copy or Rename the file, see Figure 9. Click the
appropriate choice, using the following guidelines:

- Copy saves a copy of the currently open job, using the name you specify, in a new directory using the same name as the job. You can
open and reuse the previous version.
- Rename changes the name of the open job to the name you specify, creates a new directory with that name, and deletes the
original job from its directory. The previously saved file is no longer available.

Figure 9: Save As dialogs

2. Enter the new name in the Job Name field. If the job is a network job, select number of the job in the Node drop down list.

page 28 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4.6 Building a job

When you are finished programming a job, you must build the job before downloading it. Building a job uses the .SDB file, the compiled,
“working” file, and creates a CFIG file. The CFIG file is the compiled version of a job, that can be downloaded to the panel.
If the build operation detects errors, they are flagged and the build operation aborts. You must resolve these errors before performing the
build, and creating the CFIG file.
1. Launch the ES Panel Programmer, and open the job that you want to build.
2. Start the build utility, using either of the following:

- Click the Build menu, and click the Build.

- Click the Build icon.

Figure 10: Build Icon

3. When the Revision History dialog appears, enter the name of the job in the Name field or the name of the person making the
changes. Describe the modifications you made to the job in the Enter Modifications text box. Click OK.

Figure 11: Revision History

The 4100 Job Builder dialog appears. It contains messages, including errors, related to the creation of the CFIG file that will be
downloaded to the panel.

page 29 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 12: Job Builder

4. If the dialog displays the message Build Complete, the CFIG file is ready for download to the panel. If error messages appear
with a Build Aborted message, review the warning and error messages. Resolve the errors and build the job again.

4.7 Archiving, backing up, and restoring jobs

This section discusses the file management tools in the ES Panel Programmer, Archive, Backup, and Restore.
Always backup and archive a job after editing a job, and after a successful download. You can use the archived job to return to a known
state if critical problems occur when you are editing a job file, or when future changes to a job are required.

4.7.1 Archiving a job

The Programmer Archive Utility creates a compressed, permanent copy of a job, marks the job as read only, and saves it to the drive you
specify. You can restore this copy at a later date, using the Restore option.
Note: Simplex product suppliers must implement a robust process for local archiving of all Simplex Fire Alarm system program files.
Ensure you follow the local archiving procedures. To archive a job, complete the following steps:
1. Ensure you save the job before archiving it.
2. Click File and select Archive. A dialog similar to Figure 13 appears.

Figure 13: Archive Dialog

3. Click the Save in list to select a drive and folder. By default, the Archive Utility uses the name of the job for the archive

page 30 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

directory and file name.

4. Click Archive. A progress meter appears, showing the progress of the archive operation.

4.7.2 Backing up a job

Use the Backup utility to create a compressed version of the job, and store it as a read/writable version of the job on either a removable
storage medium, or a remote disk.
Complete the following steps to back up a job:
1. Click File and select Backup. A dialog similar to Figure 14 appears.
2. Click the Save In list to select a destination drive and folder. By default, the Backup Utility uses the name of the job for the
archive directory and file name.
3. Click Backup.

Figure 14: Backup dialog

page 31 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4.7.3 Restoring a backed up job, or an archived job

Use the Restore utility to retrieve previously backed up, or archived jobs, for subsequent viewing or editing.
To restore a backed up or archived job, complete the following steps:
1. Click File and select Restore. A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 15 appears.

Figure 15: Restore dialog

2. Click the Look in list and select the drive and directory containing the backup or archive files.
3. Click the Files of Type list, and select Archive or Backup. In the list of files that appears, choose the file to restore and click
Continue. Archived files are listed with an SDA4100U file extension, and backup files are listed with an SDC4100U file extension.
A dialog similar to Figure 16 appears, prompting you to specify the hard drive, typically the C drive, to which the file should be
restored. Make sure to specify only the hard drive here. The Restore utility restores the job to the directory from which it was
originally backed up or archived.

Figure 16: Programmer Restore Utility screen

4. Select the drive and directory to which you want to restore the file, and click Restore.
Note: If a file by the same name exists in the target directory, a dialog box appears. Click Yes to overwrite the existing file in the
directory.

4.8 Converting a 4100 job to a 4100ES Panel job

4.8.1 Guidelines
This section describes converting an existing 4100 job to a 4100ES job. Adhere to the following guidelines before beginning the conversion:

page 32 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Note: You cannot convert an existing 4100 job to a 4010ES job.

• Make a backup of the original job, or network job, before making any changes. See the previous section in this chapter for information
about doing this.
• If the revision level of the system software is lower than Revision 9, the job must first be loaded, built, and verified at each revision up
to and including Revision 9.
• If you are converting a network job, the job must be converted and saved in the current network directory to remain part of the
network.
• If possible, obtain a default configuration report print out of the existing Rev. 9 job configuration.

4.8.2 Converting a job

1. Click Start. Point to the All Programs option. Point to Simplex and click the ES Panel Ver folder. Click Converter. A screen
similar to the following appears.

Figure 17: DBF to SDB Conversion Utility

2. Click the Load DBF button. Use the standard Windows dialog that appears to locate the.DBF file you want to convert. Click Open
in the Windows dialog to load the.DBF file. A series of messages appear in the Convert Utility window, followed by a prompt
asking if you want to start the translation.

page 33 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 18: Starting the translation

3. Click Yes to start the job translation.
Important: The translation process can take several minutes to complete. At times, the process may appear to be stalled and the
amount of time required to convert a job depends on the size of the job. Do NOT press the Abort key. This could cause the file to
become corrupt. When the translation is complete, Translation Complete appears at the bottom of the window.
4. The old JOBNAME.DBF file is converted to JOBNAME.SDB4100U and is stored in the c:\4100JOBS\JOB_DIRECTORY folder. Move
the job.directory folder from the C:4100Jobs to the c:\4100UJOBS\ folder. Use Windows Explorer to move the folder. Click Close.
5. Open the translated job (new.SDB4100 file) within the ES Panel Programmer.

4.8.3 Reviewing and verifying the job

To review and verify the job to ensure that all hardware and system functions converted correctly, complete the following steps:
1. Take a physical inventory of the job.

- Boxes. Record location information for each box, as well as the number of bays associated with each box.
- Cards. Record the card type and physical location, box, bay, and slot for each card. The slot information is critical, as the DOS
programmer does not reference slot information, but the Windows ES Panel Programmer does.
2. Open the Hardware tab and expand all boxes, so that the card level information is visible. For more information about using the
Hardware Tab, see The Hardware tab. Be aware of the following in the hardware tab:

- By default, the system sets each box in the converted job to a 3-bay (6 unit) box. To change a box type, right click the box icon and
click Properties. Click the Type list box and select the correct box type.
- You can add additional boxes to the job configuration when a box does not physically exists. You need to delete these extra boxes
after moving cards from them. To delete an extra box, right click on the box icon and click Delete.
- Add cards to the correct box, bay, and slot by clicking and dragging the card to the correct location. In some cases, the card's slot
information must be changed before moving the card to its new location.
- Ensure that all cards are located in the correct slot location.
3. Verify all programming. Ensure that you review the job configuration thoroughly for program errors and deletions. The key areas
to focus on include:

- System Modules. Verify that all modules converted properly and are present in the new configuration. There should be no deletions.
Verify the programmed information for each module. Refer to the subsequent chapters in this book for information about
programming specific modules.
- Custom Control. Verify the programmed information for each module. Verify that all program names (blocks) and equation names
are correct. Verify the programming information in each equation.
- If TrueAlert addressable controllers are installed, verify all point and zone information for the controller.

page 34 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Access Levels. The default access level for several functions is no longer access level 1, and has been changed to access level 2.
Access levels that are not valid after conversion will be set to the default access level for the function.
- The panel serial number needs to be entered. See Entering the panel CPU serial number earlier in this chapter for information
about doing this, the information is also available in the main menu. The panel serial number appears when the panel powers up.
- Verify all point list information, including alarm verification, coding, WalkTest, and elevator recall.
- Verify all network information.
4. Save, build, and download the new job configuration.
5. Verify the system operation. A 100% system test must be completed to ensure correct system operation.

4.9 Entering notes and setting preferences

The Notes window is a blank screen in which you can input any notes or reminders related to the job. Click the Tools menu and select
Notes.

Figure 19: Note Utility

4.9.1 Setting preferences

The Preferences window, shown in the figure below, sets general system behavior and appearance. Click the Edit menu and select
Preferences.

Figure 20: Preferences window

Set the following options in the Preferences window:
• Job. Select the Reload Job check box to automatically reload the last saved job each time you start the programmer.
• Toolbar Icon Size. Click to select large or small icons on the ES Panel Programmer toolbar.

page 35 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Checklist: The following preference settings exist for this option:

- Reminder: Check this box to generate a reminder dialog when you exit a screen for which the corresponding entry in the Checklist
has not been marked as complete. For example, in the General Information tab, and that checklist entry is not marked as complete,
when you exit the screen a dialog box appears displaying the option to mark the task as complete.
- Build Warning: Check this box to generate warning messages in the job builder screen when you attempt to build a job where all
mandatory checklist tasks are not marked as complete.
- Consecutive 3PII Device Address Warning: Select this check box to display a warning when a device needs more than one
address.
- Auto Create EIR Email On Backup: Select this check box to automatically generate an Electronic Inspection Reporting (EIR) Email
after each job backup operation.
- Auto Create EIR Email Warning: When the Auto Create EIR Email On Backup check box is selected, select this check box to display
a warning after each job backup operation.
• Default Central Station Email Address: Select this check box to set the default central station email address used by a per point
SDACT. The address that you enter here automatically appears in the email address field of the programming screen in the SDACT
card.
Note: This option does not apply to the IP Communicator, see Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.
• Print Cover page.
• Allow mixed case labels (non English jobs only).

4.10 Updating the EIR server using the ES Panel Programmer

The EIR application communicates with an EIR server to retrieve and store inspection results. The job configuration information stored on
the EIR server is updated by the Centralized Inspection Setup (CIS) group. You can configure the ES Panel Programmer to generate an EIR
Email that is sent to the CIS group containing relevant point information to update the EIR server. You can generate the EIR email manually
at any time using the ES Panel Programmer, or you can configured the ES panel Programmer to do so when a fire system job backup is
completed.

4.10.1 EIR email requirements

Ensure that MS Outlook is installed and configured correctly. If MS Outlook is not installed and configured correctly, the ES Panel
Programmer fails to automatically, or manually generate an EIR email, and displays a warning indicating that there is a problem with MS
Outlook. If there are no points in the job, the ES Programmer does not create an EIR email and displays a warning indicating that there no
points to send to EIR and an email will not be generated.

4.10.2 Configuring the EIR email warning and the EIR email automatic generation
The EIR email warning and the EIR email automatic generation preferences are not selected by default in the ES Panel programmer.
When the EIR email warning, or the EIR email automatic generation preferences is selected, the selection is preserved when the ES Panel
Programmer restarts. Select the EIR email automatic generation preference to manually generate the EIR email.
To configure the ES programmer to automatically generate an EIR email after each job backup operation, complete the following steps:
1. Launch the ES Panel Programmer and open the relevant job.
2. Click Edit, and select Preferences.
3. Under Checklist select Auto Create EIR Email On Backup.
To configure the ES Panel Programmer to generate a warning indicating that an EIR email will be created, complete the following steps:
1. Launch the ES Panel Programmer and open the relevant job.
2. Click Edit, and click Preferences.
3. Under Checklist select Auto Create EIR Email Warning.

4.10.3 Automatically generating the EIR email upon job backup

The EIR email generates automatically after each job backup operation. If there are no points in the job, the ES Programmer does not
create an EIR email, and displays a warning indicating that there no points to send to EIR.
If there are points in the job, and the Creating an EIR Email Warning check box is selected, the warning displays with an option to show
this warning again. Show this warning again is selected by default, de-selecting this option also de-selects the Creating an EIR Email
Warning check box in the ES Panel Programmer. See Figure 21.

page 36 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 21: Creating an EIR email warning

Click Yes to preserve the selected preferences, and generate the EIR email. The EIR email is automatically populated with the CIS group
email address in the To field, relevant job information in the email body, and the relevant point information in the .csv file attachment.
Click Send. The CIS group updates the EIR server with the relevant information contained in the EIR email.

page 37 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5 Panel Information, system options, and restricting access to display

functions
This chapter describes programming the following information and options:
• Panel Information consists of the fields used to record panel, branch, and customer specific information.
• System Options are pre-programmed, application-specific features of the ES Panel Programmer.
• Access Levels/Passcodes restrict access to the features and functions of the panel, and prevent unauthorized users from controlling
the devices attached to the ES Panel.

5.1 Entering general information

Use the General Information window, see Figure 22, to document information about the panel, branch, person programming the
system, and the customer.
To open the General Information window, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the General Info sub tab.
3. Enter the appropriate information in the fields on the General Information window.

Figure 22: General information fields

page 38 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5.2 Enabling and disabling system options

ES Panel system options are global attributes that control the following:
• The appearance of some information on the panel display. For example, whether the temperature displays in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
• Whether specific application options, such as Door Drop on AC Fail, are enabled or disabled.
To open the System Options screen, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the System Options tab. A screen similar to below appears. See the system option tables for specific details on each
option.

Figure 23: 4100ES FACP with EPS options

Figure 24: 4010ES FACP with ESS options

page 39 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5.2.1 General system option descriptions

Table 4: General system options
Option Description
Date Format • Select MM-DD-YY for the panel to display the date by month, day and year (example: January 4th 2013 =
4100ES/4010ES 01-04-13). This is the default setting.
• Select DD-MM-YY for the panel to display the date by day, month and year (example: January 4th 2001 =
04-01-13).
Time Format • Select 12 Hour for the panel to display the time as “a.m.” and “p.m.” (example: 6:00 a.m. , 6:00p.m.) This is
4100ES/4010ES the default setting.
• Select 24 Hour for the panel to display the time on a 24h clock (example: 6:00, 18h00.)
Unit Format • Select Imperial for the panel to display Imperial units. (example: 96°F, 6 ft) This is the default setting.
4100ES/4010ES
• Select Metric for the panel to display Metric units. (example: 36°C, 1.83 m)
Acknowledge Option • Select Global acknowledge to enable every point reporting the same alarm state, alarm, trouble, priority
4100ES/4010ES 2, or supervisory condition, to be acknowledged at once by pressing the according Acknowledge key.
For example: If five trouble conditions are present on the system, and global acknowledge is enabled,
one press of the Alarm Ack key acknowledges all five troubles at the same time. This is the default setting.
• Select Individual acknowledge to ensure that each point reporting an alarm state must be
acknowledged individually. For example: If five trouble conditions are present, you will have to
acknowledge each one individually.
Standard Select the standard that the system is listed with. The options are:
4100ES/4010ES
• None. This is the default setting.
• UL (US)
• ULC (Canada)
Miniplex Local Mode Select the Miniplex Local Mode system option for a panel with a 4100T (4100 Universal Transponder) job
4100ES type, this enables the panel to operate on its own following loss of communication with the master panel. If
the master panel contains the custom programming for the 4100 UT NACs of the panel, the 4100T signals a
general alarm if any of the initiating devices enter the alarm state.
Service Reset Select Service Reset so that an operator can reset the system even though the device causing the alarm is
4100ES/4010ES not restored to normal state. The typical application for this would be when a malfunctioning initiating device,
detector or sensor consisting of a base and removable head, causes an alarm, but will not reset even though
the off-normal condition is no longer present. With this option enabled, the head can be removed and the
system, including the local energy masterbox, if provided, can be reset. Without this option enabled, removing
the head will cause the system to abort the reset because the alarmed point/zone is not restored to a normal
state, and it will not be possible to reset the local energy masterbox. The default setting for this option is
disabled.
Display First Alarm Select this check box so that the display alternates between two screens similar to Screen 1 and Screen 2
4100ES/4010ES below. Screen 1 is a summary screen containing information about the number of active alarms, troubles, and
so on. Screen 2 shows detailed information about the first alarm received by the system.

If Display 1st Alarm Option is not enabled, one screen only, similar to Screen 1, appears. This screen indicates
the total number of alarm conditions present on the system.

page 40 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 4: General system options

Option Description
In-Control Operation Select this check box to program the system for annunciator "in-control" operation. This enables the
4100ES/4010ES annunciation of which unit is in control, and provides the ability to take control or to prevent another
annunciator from taking control.
Combined Alarm and When this check box is selected, press the Reset button to perform an alarm reset, followed by a hardware
Hardware Reset reset. When it is not selected, an alarm reset is performed if there are fire alarms or supervisory conditions in
4100ES/4010ES the system. Otherwise, a hardware reset is performed.
Sync Legacy Signals Select this check box for systems that are configured with legacy signals , for example 4100-4021, and newer
4100ES style signal circuits, for example 4009A, QuickAlert, and so on. If the SMPL opcodes MARCH60, MARCH120,
AND TEMPORAL are used to code signals and this option is checked, legacy signals will be synchronized with
the new signals.
Note: This only applies to the SMPL opcodes listed above. This option is not always selected because the
activation of legacy signals can be delayed by up to 4 seconds in order to synchronize them with the new
signal circuits.
Language of Use The list contains two options, Primary and Alternate. Use Alternate only when you download an alternate
4100ES/4010ES msglib file, containing alternate language text, to the panel. If no alternate msglib file is downloaded, you must
use the English option.
Non Steady Audible Evac Enable this option to select the type of operation for Non Steady Audible Evacuation Signals. The term Non
4100ES/4010ES Steady Audible Evacuation Signal refers to any notification appliance capable of sounding a coded signal. The
default setting for this option is not enabled. The choices are:
• California Code 1. A coding pattern consisting of 12 beats within a 10 second span of time, followed by
a 2 and ½ second pause. This sequence repeats four times (four rounds) and then terminates, that is, the
total coding pattern lasts approximately one minute.
• California Code 3. This is a similar coding pattern to California Code 1, however the sequence repeats
12 times (12 rounds) and then terminates, that is, the total coding pattern lasts approximately three
minutes.
• Fast March Time. A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4 second
pulse on, and 1/4 second off. The pattern repeats until alarm silence.
• March Time. A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/2 second pulse on,
and 1/2 second off. The pattern repeats until alarm silence.
• Slow March Time. A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1.5 second pulse
on, and 1.5 second off. The pattern repeats until alarm silence.
• Temporal 4. A CO gas warning that is a repeated sequence of four cycles of 100 msec on, and100 msec
off, followed by 5 seconds off.
• Temporal. A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence. The pattern repeats until
alarm silence.
• On Steady.
Note: If the coding pattern selected here is not supported by TrueAlert, it is replaced by a default one.
For TrueAlert, this means replacing the unsupported pattern by Temporal. For other types of circuits, the
fallback operation is the same.
Non Steady Visual Evac Enable this option to select the flash pattern output by Non Steady Visual Signals. The term Non Steady Visual
4100ES/4010ES Signal refers to any visual notification appliance capable of emitting a pattern of flashes, such as incandescent
visuals. The default setting for this option is not enabled. The choices are:
• March Time. A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4 second pulse on,
1/4 second off.
• Slow March Time. A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1.5 second pulse
on, 1.5 second off.
• Temporal. A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence.
Note: This option cannot be used for public mode signaling as defined in Section 4-4 of NFPA 72-99.

page 41 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 4: General system options

Option Description
Alarm Cutout Timer Select this check box to set a duration, of up to 60 minutes, that specifies how long signals sound following
4100ES/4010ES an alarm. For example, with this option set at two minutes, building signals sound for two minutes and then
automatically stop. After the signals stop, the alarm condition remains active at the panel. If the Alarm
Silence/Reset Inhibit option is active, it takes precedence over this option. See the following description
of Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit for more information. The range for this option is 60-3600 seconds. The
default setting for this option is not enabled. Set the point type for visual NACs to SVISUAL to have them turn
off at the same time as the audible signals.
AC Failure Delay Specifies the time delay (HH:MM) in reporting an AC failure trouble to the city circuit, if AC fail is the only
4100ES/4010ES trouble, or Central Station if an SDACT is installed.
UL and NFPA restrict the AC Fail delayed reporting to the central station to 1, 2, or 3
hours.
Note: This feature does not apply to the IP Communicator.
Alarm Silence/ Reset This option disables the Alarm Silence and System Reset keys for a user-definable duration that ranges
Inhibit from 1 to 60 minutes. The timer is activated only by the first alarm, subsequent alarms do not reset the timer.
4100ES/4010ES If this option and the Alarm Cutout Timer are both enabled, this option takes precedence. For example,
if the Alarm Cutout Timer is set to one minute and this option is set to two minutes, signals continue to
sound after one minute. The default setting is not enabled.
Note: This option must be enabled for Canadian jobs.
Door Drop on AC Fail Enable this option to program the ES Panel to provide DC battery power to magnetic door holders following
4100ES/4010ES an AC power loss at the panel. Following a power loss, the duration of time for which the panel powers the
door holders is between 0 and 3600 seconds. It is recommended that this option is set to 60 seconds. This
enables the system to hold open the doors following a short, momentary power outage, eliminating the need
to reset door holders in this type of situation. If, however, the power outage is significant, set the value to 60
seconds to ensure that the panel batteries are not drawn down too much. The default setting is not enabled.
Note: The Door Drop on AC Fail option is unavailable if there are no points configured as DHOLDER point
type.
Door Drop on Alarm Enable this option to program the ES Panel to hold magnetic door holders open for a set duration during an
4100ES/4010ES alarm condition. When the timer expires, the ES Panel de-energizes the door holder relays, and the doors
close. The range for the timer is 0 to 600 seconds. To have the door holders drop the doors immediately,
ensure the check box is not selected. The default setting is not enabled.
Note: The Door Drop on AC Fail option is unavailable if there are no points configured as DHOLDER point
type.
Auto Set Panel Time and The time and date that appear on the panel before the CFIG DOWNLOAD are automatically set when the
Date download is complete. This option does not work if the time and date was not set prior to the download, that
4100ES/4010ES is, a system time/date invalid trouble at the panel.

5.2.2 Active status reminder system options

Table 5: Active status reminder system options
Option Description
Fire Reminder The Fire Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared alarm condition
4100ES/4010ES exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators that there is an uncleared condition. To enable the
Active Status Reminder, complete the following:
1. Select the Enabled check box. This option is enabled by default.
2. Set the interval at which the piezo will sound. The range is from 0 to 18 hours. The default is 8 hours.
Pri2 Reminder The PRI2 Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared Priority 2 Alarm
4100ES/4010ES (security) condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators that there is an uncleared condition.
To enable Active Status Reminder, complete the following steps:
1. Select the Enabled check box. This option is enabled by default.
2. Set the interval at which the piezo will sound. The range is from 0 to 18 hours. The default is 8 hours.
Supv. Reminder The Supv Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared supervisory
4100ES/4010ES condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators that there is an uncleared condition. To
enable the Active Status Reminder, complete the following steps:
1. Select the Enabled check box. This option is enabled by default.
2. Set the interval at which the piezo will sound. The range is from 0 to 18 hours. The default is 8 hours.

page 42 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 5: Active status reminder system options

Option Description
Trbl. Reminder The Trbl Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared trouble
4100ES/4010ES condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators about the uncleared condition. To enable
Active Status Reminder, do the following:
1. Select the Enabled check box. This option is enabled by default.
2. Set the interval at which the piezo will sound. The range is from 0 to 18 hours. The default is 8 hours.
Local Annunciation If there is a per point serial DACT in the system, this setting specifies whether the piezo on the local panel
4100ES/4010ES sounds. This option is useful in situations where the panel is located in a public area, such as a lobby, and the
occupant does not want the piezo to sound repeatedly.
Note: This feature does not apply to the IP Communicator.

page 43 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5.2.3 4100ES audio system options

Table 6: 4100ES audio system options
Option Description
Operation Use the two options, United States and Canadian, to set the default audio operation required by the
local AHJ. This option controls which of the two default audio programs is loaded.
Type If you have a network audio system and the panel job you are editing contains amplifiers, but no local
audio controller, you need to set this option to reflect the type of audio controller installed in the node
supplying the audio signal to the amplifiers. If there is a local audio controller, this selection is not editable.
Resolution Select the appropriate choice as follows:
• High Resolution: This applies to Digital Audio only, indicating that the sampling rate for audio
messages is 16K. When you select this option, the quality of audio messages is better, but twice as
much storage is required. However, that reflects the type of audio controller installed.
Note: When high resolution is used, only four audio channels are available.

• Normal Resolution: This applies to Digital Audio only, indicating the sampling rate for audio
messages is 8K. When 8K is used, all eight audio channels are available. This option is not permitted
for Canadian installations.
Number of Channels Specify the number of audio channels included on the system signal cards. That number is dependent on
normal or high resolution.
Paging Channel Specify the audio channel used for the paging, or talk function. For Analog Audio this can be channel 1 or
2 if the number of channels is set to two. If the number of channels is set to one, the paging channel is 1.
For Digital Audio it is channel 3 and is non-editable.
Audio Low Power This mode is used to conserve battery life. When there is an AC power failure, the power stage of the
Conservation amplifier is shut down whenever the amplifier is not active (i.e. no audio signal is amplified other than
for supervision). Please note that while the power stage is shut down, it is not supervised therefore any
problems in the power stage will not be detected or reported until the amplifier tries to play an audio
signal. Power will be restored to the power stage when the amplifier needs to amplify an audio input to
send it to a speaker circuit.
Note: Checking the box to ENABLE the Audio Low Power Conservation option (default).
AmpAux Usage This is available only for single channel analog or a multi-channel digital audio system. AmpAux Usage
specifies how the AmpAux input on the amplifiers is used. Choices include None or no connection, Non-
alarm audio, or Degraded FailSafe Mic.
Connect NAA via: Indicates the means by which non-alarm audio is routed to the amplifiers. For a digital system, you must
use either a Non Alarm Audio (NAA) card (head end) or a TIC card (transponder only), and the choices are
unavailable. For an analog system, NAA connects to one of the option card inputs on the analog audio
controller.
1st Non Alarm Audio This applies to digital systems only. It specifies the first channel being used for non-alarm audio.
Channel
2nd Non Alarm Audio Applies to digital systems only. It specifies the second channel being used for non-alarm audio.
Channel
Amp Aux This specifies the priority level of the AmpAux in relation to the 1st and second non-alarm audio channels.
This applies to Digital audio systems only.
1st Non Alarm Audio This specifies the priority level of the 1st non-alarm audio channel in relation to the AmpAux channel and
Channel the second non-alarm audio channels. This applies to digital audio systems only.
2nd Non Alarm Audio This specifies the priority level of the second non-alarm audio channel in relation to the AmpAux channel
Channel and the first non-alarm audio channels. This applies to digital audio systems only.
1st Non Alarm Audio This specifies the priority level of the 1st non-alarm audio channel in relation to the AmpAux channel and
Channel the second non-alarm audio channels. This applies to digital audio systems only.
2nd Non Alarm Audio This specifies the priority level of the second non-alarm audio channel in relation to the AmpAux channel
Channel and the first non-alarm audio channels. This applies to digital audio systems only.

page 44 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5.2.4 Recurring Trouble Filter system options 4100ES/4010ES

This option stops a recurring trouble event from continuously dialing the central station, or from generating SafeLINC email events if the
programmed criteria, the number of occurrences of that point in the trouble log within the specified elapsed time frame are met.
Table 7: Recurring Trouble Filter system options
Option Description
Occurrences Number of times the point is found in the trouble log (0=no filtering;default for pre-existing jobs upgraded
to 12.06). Select the value 0, or a value between 2 and10.
Elapsed Time the number of minutes in which the troubles must be found. Select a value from 1 to 1440 minutes.

5.2.5 Addressable appliance preferred default system option for the 4100ES/4010ES with
IDNAC
This option is used to configure TrueAlert ES appliances identically through the ES Panel Programmer software.
Note: If you use the System Options to configure TrueAlert appliances it is important that:

• The jumpers and configuration switches of the appliance are set to the correct setting. For example, if a specific candela value is
selected in the system options, the device should be set to FACP. If the system option is set to Hardware, the candela flag at the
device must be set to any other position than FACP.
• The candela and coding type of the appliance in the Point Editing tab of the power supply in the ES Panel Programmer must be set
to System Default.
When a specific candela value is selected, that value is applied to all compatible appliances that have the configuration switches set to
FACP*.
When Hardware Specified is selected, the locally configured candela value on the appliance is used.
Note: *When a specific candela value is selected, a warning message appears to notify the user that in the event that an appliance
cannot be set to the selected Preferred Default System Option, a compatible default value will be assigned to the device by the ES Panel
Programmer. For example: If the System Option is set to 20cd and there is a UL Weatherproof device (that has no 20cd setting) the ES
Panel Programmer assigns a value of WP75cd to the UL weatherproof device.
Table 8: Addressable Appliances Preferred Default system options
Option System Options
Candela • 15 cd • 75 cd • 185 cd • Hardware Specified
• 20 cd • 110 cd • Weather Proof 75 cd
• 30 cd • 135 cd • Weather Proof 185 cd
General Evacuation Tone • Broadband • Slow Whoop • Siren • Chime
• 520HZ • Bell • Hi/Lo • Hardware Specified
Alert Tone • Broadband • Bell • Siren • Chime
• 520HZ • Slow Whoop • Hi/Lo • Hardware Specified

Note:
See the following tables for the FACP assigned compatible values.

Table 9: Compatible Candela Value

Assigned candela value Compatible value for indoor Compatible value for Compatible value for
appliances weatherproof, UL weatherproof, ULC
15 cd 15 cd 15 cd 20 cd
20 cd 30 cd WP75 cd 20 cd
30 cd 30 cd WP75 cd 30 cd
75 cd 75 cd 75 cd 75 cd
110 cd 110 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
135 cd 135 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
185 cd 185 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
WP75 cd 75 cd WP75 cd 75 cd
WP185 cd 185 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
HARDWARE The local candela setting on the device is used as the valid candela setting.

page 45 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 10: Compatible general evacuation tone value

Assigned tone Compatible tone for appliances
Broadband / 520HZ/ Slow Whoop/ Bell/ Siren/ Broadband
Hi/Lo / Chime/ Hardware Specified
Table 11: Compatible alert tone value
Assigned tone Compatible tone for appliances
Broadband / 520HZ/ Slow Whoop/ Bell/ Siren/ Temporal coding and Broadband tone.
Hi/Lo / Chime/ Hardware Specified

5.3 Restricting access to operator interface functions

Restricting access to the functions performed from the front panel of the ES Panel is a two-step process:
1. Associate each display function with an access level, which is a numerical designation from one to four. Basic display functions,
such as System Reset and Change Time and Date, are usually assigned to Access Level 1. More sensitive display functions,
such as Remote Download, are typically assigned to Access Level 3 or 4.
2. Associate each access level with a passcode of up to 10 digits.
This restricts the display functions that a TR or system operators can execute to only those associated with their passcode.

page 46 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5.3.1 Step 1. Edit access levels

To open the Access Levels screen, do the following:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the Access Levels sub tab. A screen similar to Figure 25 appears.

Figure 25: Access Levels screen

3. Double-click a display function to change the access level. A dialog similar to Figure 26 appears.
4. Click the User Level up or down arrows to select the access level. Click Apply. Click OK to close the dialog.
5. To edit the access level setting for a different display function, use the First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to scroll through
the list of display functions. Repeat Step 4 to change the setting.

Figure 26: Access level Object Properties dialog

5.3.2 Step 2. Edit passcodes

You can create up to 20 passcodes. To open the Passcodes window, and define or edit a passcode, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the Passcode Assignments sub tab. A screen similar to Figure 27 appears.

page 47 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 27: Passcodes screen

3. Double-click the line corresponding to the passcode you want to add or edit. A screen similar to Figure 28 appears.

Figure 28: Passcode dialog

4. Enter the passcode in the Passcode field. Limit the passcode to 10 or fewer numbers. In the User Level field, set a
corresponding user level for the passcode. The range is between 1 and 4.

page 48 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5.4 Providing information about available features

Under the Panel tab, click the Features tab to display information about the functionalities of the ES Panel Programmer. Depending on
the software license currently loaded, you can see different functionalities in the Programmer Features pane.

page 49 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6 Specifying hardware components

This chapter describes specifying the customer-specific hardware components of the job.
Use the Hardware tab window to add and edit the hardware components of the job. The Hardware tab has the following capabilities:
• Add and delete hardware components to a job.
• Program points on a card-by-card basis. Information on programming points is discussed in Programming non-audio points.
• Edit the card properties. These can be either basic properties that are common to every card, or they can be card-specific properties,
DACT setup information, for example. Setting the basic properties of a card is discussed in this chapter. Setting card-specific
properties is discussed in Editing non-audio card properties.

6.1 The Hardware tab

Drag and drop the available icons on the right hand side of Hardware window to the work area on the left hand side of the window. See
Figure 29 for an example of the work area for a 4100/4100ES job. You can move the icons representing the various components of the
system are from Available Hardware to Hardware Configuration to form a two dimensional view of the hardware elements of the job.
See Table 12 for descriptions of the available icons.

Figure 29: The Hardware tab window, showing the Available Hardware and the Hardware Configuration for a 4100ES Job

page 50 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

The Hardware tab of a 4010ES job is identical to the Hardware tab of a 4100ES job, except that the Available Hardware on the right
contains fewer devices for the 4010ES job. See Figure 30.

Figure 30: Hardware Tab Window, showing the Available Hardware and the Hardware Configuration for a 4010ES Job

page 51 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

The Hardware tab icons listed in Table 12 represent the system hardware components.
Table 12: Hardware tab icons
Icon Meaning
This is a non-editable icon that permanently resides in the top left corner of the work area. The panel icon represents all of
the non-networked, RUI-linked components controlled by a single CPU. A single panel may, for example, be multiple boxes,
some residing at one location and some at another location.
Panel icon Note: Highlight this icon, and press Shift-Right Arrow at the same time to expand the entire hardware tree.
The unit icon does not represent equipment. It corresponds to a location where one or more boxes reside. For example, in
a multi-floor building, one box containing the CPU may be on Floor 1 and two separate, close-nippled boxes, containing NAC
cards for the floor, may be on Floor 2. In this case, both the box on Floor 1 and the boxes on Floor 2 are referred to as Units.
Click the + sign to expand the contents of a unit and see the boxes of the unit.
Unit icon
The box icon typically represents a standard single bay, double bay, or triple bay box. Additional box types available include:
External charger, 8 Point RCU, 16 Point SCU, External LCD, Custom, TrueAlert, and FUI. After adding a box to the work area,
click the + sign to the left of the box to see the bays that make up the box.
The bay icon represents the standard card cage in which option cards, power supplies, and audio components are installed.
Box icon The programmer automatically adds this icon and it is not necessary to drag these icons from the Available Hardware to
the Hardware Configuration work area. Click the + sign to the left of the box to see the cards that make up the bay.

Bay icon
The hardware tab has two card icons to represent the logical cards, and the physical cards in the system.
Logical cards are not hardware, they represent all of the analog pseudo points, digital pseudo points, or lists used on the
system.
Logical Card Physical cards are actual hardware, including for example monitor, signal, relay, annunciator, display, interface, audio, and
icon power cards.

Physical
Card icon

page 52 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.2 Adding and editing units

A unit represents an area of a facility in which one or more boxes are installed. Examples of typical areas include a building floor or a part
of a building, such as the manufacturing, or office area.
A panel can contain multiple units, but there can only be one CPU managing all of the panel's units. All units must be linked by an RUI.

6.2.1 Adding a unit

Add units to the work area of the Hardware tab in either of the following ways:
• Drag and drop: Point to the Available Hardware portion of the Hardware Tab. Click the + sign to expand the unit. Three additional
icons, representing the unit types, appear. Click the appropriate icon, and drag the icon to the Panel icon in the work area. The Unit
Properties dialog appears.
• Right-click: Point to the work area and right click. A menu, containing several choices, appears. Select Add Unit. The Unit Properties
dialog appears.
Refer to Editing unit properties for information about these dialogs.

6.2.2 Editing unit properties

The Unit Properties dialog, see Figure 31, appears immediately after a unit is added to the work area. To access this dialog at any time,
right click a Unit icon in the work area and click the Properties choice.
Specify the following information in this dialog:
• RUI #: Enter the RUI channel on which the unit communicates with other units.
• Description: Enter descriptive text for the unit.
• AC Breaker Location: Enter the location of the breaker to which the power supplies within the boxes connected to the unit.

Figure 31: Unit Properties dialog

page 53 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.3 Adding and editing boxes and bays

A box represents a back box in which an external charger, or the system electronics are installed. The following boxes are available with the
4100ES panel and 4010ES panel.

Figure 32: 4100ES boxes

Figure 33: 4010ES boxes

6.3.1 Adding a box

Add boxes to the work area of the Hardware tab in either of the following ways. Use the right-click method to add multiple boxes at one
time.
• Drag and Drop: Point to the Available Hardware portion of the Hardware tab. Click the + sign to expand the Boxes icon. Click the
appropriate icon, and drag the icon to the corresponding unit in the work area. See Editing or viewing box and bay properties for
information about editing the box properties.
• Right Click: Point to the appropriate unit icon in the work area and right click. A menu, containing several choices, appears. Select
Add Box. The Add Box dialog appears. Click the Type drop down list to specify the type of box to add. Specify the number of boxes to
add in the Quantity field.

page 54 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.3.2 Editing or viewing box and bay properties

Use the following procedures to edit and view box and bay properties:
• Editing Box Properties: Right click the appropriate box icon. When the list of choices appears, select Properties. Non-editable
information includes: the unit number, box number within the unit, and the number of bays. Use the Type drop down list to select the
type of box, one bay, two bay, three bay, or external charger, if necessary.

Figure 34: Box Properties dialog

• Viewing Bay Properties: Click the + sign to the left of the appropriate Box icon to expand it. Right click on a bay icon and then click
on the Properties choice. The properties dialog shown below appears. The Bay # field indicates the number of the bay within the
selected box. The Type field shows the bay type currently assigned to the bay.

Figure 35: Bay Properties dialog

page 55 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.4 Adding cards

This section describes adding option cards to the system. Editing the card properties is discussed in the next chapter.

6.4.1 Adding option cards

Add cards to the work area of the Hardware tab in either of the following ways. Right Click to add multiple cards at once.
• Drag and Drop: Point to Available Hardware on the Hardware tab. Click on the + sign to expand the appropriate card icon. The
example below shows the relay card group. Additional icons, representing specific system cards, appear. Click the appropriate icon,
and drag the icon to the appropriate bay in the Configure Hardware work area.

Figure 36: Adding option cards

• Right Click: Expand the appropriate unit, box, and bay combination. Cards can only be added to a bay, which appears when the
corresponding unit and box are expanded. In the Hardware Configuration work area, right-click the appropriate bay icon. A menu,
containing several choices, appears. Select Add Card. The Add Card dialog appears. Select the appropriate card and quantity.
• Move Cards: Drag and drop in the hardware screen without losing custom programming. The map associated with the job is
automatically updated to accommodate these changes. This does not affect existing rules associated with the drag and drop feature.

6.4.2 Annunciator numbers

Every card in a ES Panel job must have an associated annunciator number, whether it is an annunciator or not. Annunciator numbers are
assigned in the following manner. When a new unit is added to a job, the unit is assigned the next available annunciator number. Any non-
annunciator cards added to this unit also share this number with the unit.
When the first annunciator card is added to such a unit, it also assumes the unit's annunciator number.
As additional annunciators are added to the unit, there are several cases where the annunciators will share their annunciator numbers.
Any additional annunciator cards of the same type added to the same unit also share this number. When an additional annunciator card
of a different type is added to the unit, that annunciator card is given an annunciator number distinct from the number assigned to the
earlier annunciator type. Non-annunciator cards continue to use the unit's annunciator number.
The following are exceptions to the rules above:
• Internal and external LCD Annunciators require their own annunciator number and do not share numbers, even with other LCD
Annunciators and ES TSD.
• The InfoAlarm shares annunciators numbers with ES Panel LEDSW annunciators.
The InfoAlarm or Legacy LEDSW card which enters into a sharing arrangement with a CPU or ES Panel card is determined by the lowest
addressed card among the competitors.

page 56 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.4.3 Annunciator number sharing rules

The following rules apply to the annunciator sharing arrangement:
AN Rule 1- The CPU is annunciator number 0.
AN Rule 2 - Legacy LEDSW64 and ES Panel LEDSW64 Annunciator types can not be in the same unit.
AN Rule 3 - Annunciators of the same type in the same unit share annunciator numbers, except those in AN Rule 4 - i.e. LCD and
Infoalarm.
AN Rule 4 - LCD and Infoalarm/ES TSD Annunciators do NOT ever share annunciator numbers with others of their own kind.
AN Rule 5 - The CPU will always share annunciator number 0 with any and all ES Panel LEDSW64 annunciator cards in the CPU unit.
AN Rule 6 - The CPU can share annunciator number 0 with the lowest addressed Infoalarm/ES TSD or Legacy LEDSW64 annunciator card.
The presence of ES Panel LEDSW64 cards in the CPU bay does not prevent this sharing with a Infoalarm/ES TSD. The presence of ES Panel
LEDSW64 cards in the CPU bay does exclude Legacy LEDSW64 cards (see AN Rule 2).
AN Rule 7 - If the CPU is sharing annunciator number 0 with a Legacy LEDSW64 card, all other Legacy LEDSW64 cards in the unit are also
annunciator 0 (see AN Rule 3).
AN Rule 8 - The Infoalarm/ES TSD can NOT share an annunciator number with the Legacy LEDSW64.
AN Rule 9 - In non-CPU units, the lowest addressed Infoalarm can share an annunciator number with any ES Panel LEDSW64 cards. If
there are no ES Panel LEDSW64 cards, the Infoalarms have no opportunity to share an annunciator number with another card.

6.4.4 Annunciator number sharing examples

CPU Bay/Box:
Scenario A (ES Panel LEDSW64): CPU + ES Panel LEDSW64 and Infoalarm/ES TSDs in Unit 0.
The CPU can share annunciator number 0 with all the ES Panel LEDSW64s in Unit 0. Only the lowest addressed Infoalarm in Unit 0 can
share with the CPU. The higher addressed Infoalarm/ES TSDs must have their own annunciator numbers. Note that once a ES Panel
LEDSW64 is installed in a unit, no Legacy LEDSW64 cards can be added.
Scenario B (Legacy LEDSW64): CPU + Legacy LEDSW64 and Infoalarm/ES TSDs in Unit 0.
Legacy LEDSW64 and ES Panel LEDSW64 cards cannot be in the same unit. Also, Legacy LEDSW64 and Infoalarm/ES TSD cards cannot
share annunciator numbers.
The lowest Legacy LEDSW64 or Infoalarm/ES TSD card shares the CPU number. All Legacy LEDSW64s shares a unique annunciator number
in the unit. If it has the lowest number, all Legacy LEDSW cards shares the CPU annunciator number. If the lowest card is an Infoalarm/ES
TSD, all other Infoalarms/ES TSDs will have separate annunciator numbers.
Non-CPU Units:
This is a simplified version of Unit 0. The same rules apply, except for the CPU, and the annunciator numbers are other than 0.
Scenario A (ES Panel LEDSW64): ES Panel LEDSW64 and Infoalarm/ES TSDs in Unit x.
An Infoalarm/ES TSD can share an annunciator number with all the ES Panel LEDSW64s in the unit. But if there are multiple Infoalarm/
ES TSD cards in the unit, only the lowest addressed Infoalarm/ES TSD can share with the ES Panel LEDSW64s. The higher addressed
Infoalarm/ES TSDs must have distinct annunciator numbers.
Note: ES Panel LEDSW64 and Legacy LEDSW64 cards can not be in the same unit.

Scenario B (Legacy LEDSW64): Legacy LEDSW64 and Infoalarm/ES TSDs in Unit x. Legacy LEDSW64 and Infoalarm/ES TSDs cards cannot
share annunciator numbers. All Legacy LEDSW64s share a unique annunciator number. The Legacy LEDSW64 in the unit blocks any ES
Panel LEDSW64 cards from being added.

6.4.5 Card manipulation considerations

The annunciator number assignment and sharing relations mentioned above need to account for various manipulations of the cards in the
job. Adding, deleting, and moving cards requires the assignments to be re-evaluated, as do relative address changes.

page 57 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.4.6 Editing basic card properties

All cards, regardless of whether they are the standard system cards, such as the system power supply, or an option card - include the basic
properties. The following are the basic card properties:
• Card Address. A unique number used to identify the card within the system. This number must correspond to the card address dip
switch settings on the card.
Note: It is usually easier to first add the card to the job with the programmer and then set the dip switches with the address
automatically assigned by the programmer.
• Card Custom Label. This field describes the card's function, location, or some other descriptive text.
• Card Alternate Custom Label. This field permits an alternative description of the card, its function, or location.
• Unit, Box, Bay, and Slot (location). The values shown in the fields reflect the location in which the card icon was placed when you
added it with the programmer. It is possible to change these values; however, the new values must reflect the new physical location of
the card.
• Symbolic ID. The values shown in this field provide a quick reference for the user, for example, M3 and SIG4. They represent the
IDNAC or IDNET channels on the card. The symbolic ID field is present in card properties that contain the IDNET or IDNAC channels.
They can be remembered, or not, depending on user choice when the card numbers in the system are changed.
To gain access to the Card Properties dialog, double-click any card icon in the Hardware Configuration work area.
A dialog similar to Figure 37 appears. Edit these fields as follows:
• Enter a descriptive name in the Card Custom Label field.
• Use the Unit, Box, Bay, and Location fields to change this information if necessary. If you specify invalid information, for example,
attempt to assign a card to a fully populated bay, an error message appears in indicating the problem.

Figure 37: Card Properties dialog

page 58 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6.4.7 Upgrading IDNet Cards (Programmer Version 2.04 and above)

Follow the steps below to replace IDNet, IDNet+ and IDNet1+ cards with IDNet2 and IDNet2+2 cards. See Table 13 for the conversion list.
1. Click the Hardware tab and right-click the IDNet card that you want to replace in the Hardware Configuration window.
2. In the list of options that appears, click Upgrade Card to automatically replace the old IDNet card with the new card.

Figure 38: Replacing the IDNet, IDNet+ and IDNet1+ cards

Table 13: IDNet cards conversion table
Panel IDNet, IDNet+ and IDNet1+ Cards Replacement IDNet2 or IDNet2+2 Cards
4100ES 4100-3101 - IDNet 250 Points 4100-3109 - IDNet2
4100-3104 - IDNet 127 Points
4100-3105 - IDNet 64 Points
4100-3106 - IDNet QuickConnect 250 Points
4100-3108 - IDNet1+ 250 Points
4100-3107 - IDNet+ 250 Points 4100-3110/ 4100-3112 IDNet2+2
4010ES 4010-9907 - IDNet+ 250 Points 4010-9929 IDNet2+2

page 59 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7 Editing non-audio card properties

There are two types of card properties.
• Basic card properties. All ES Panel cards have basic card properties, such as address, custom label, location, and so on.
• Card-specific properties. In addition, some cards have card-specific properties. These properties are used to define facility and
application specific information.
This chapter describes setting the card-specific properties for non audio cards. Information on configuring audio card properties is
contained in Programming non-audio points.

7.1 Editing RUI-specific property settings

Accessing the RUI-specific settings
The Remote Unit Interface (RUI) properties include the basic property settings common to all cards, as well as a series of settings specific
to the RUI. The RUI is available in two forms:
• A standard RUI interface is located on the ES Panel CPU card.
• Additional RUI ports can be added to the system by adding an optional RUI card.
To access the RUI-specific settings, follow these steps:
1. Expand the Unit, Box, Bay icons containing the CPU or RUI card.
2. If you are editing the properties for the RUI located on the CPU card, double click the CPU card icon. Otherwise, double click the
card icon labeled Remote Unit Interface (RUI). A dialog similar to the following appears.
Note: The CPU card properties sheet has additional tabs.
3. Click the RUI Info tab.

Figure 39: CPU RUI tab

Figure 40: Added RUI tab

page 60 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.1.1 Editing settings

The RUI properties on the ES Panel CPU card are read-only and cannot be edited.
The properties on the added RUI card are as follows:
• Input Communication Rate. It is strongly recommended that the RUI input communication rate be left at its default setting, 9600
baud.
• Output Communication Rate. It is strongly recommended that the RUI output communication rate be left at its default setting,
9600 baud.
• Card Descriptions. This field is read-only. It lists the cards linked to the CPU by the RUI.

7.2 Editing service port-specific settings

Setting the service port communication settings
The service port is a component of the CPU card. The service port enables a directly or remotely connected PC to determine the status of
panel components, and to perform system diagnostics.
To set the communications settings of the service port on the CPU card, complete the following steps:
1. Expand the Unit 0, Box 1, and Bay 1 icons containing the CPU card.
2. Double-click the CPU card icon, the card properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Service Port tab. A window similar to Figure 41 appears.
4. The Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, and Stop Bit fields have default settings. You can edit the settings, but use the default settings
whenever possible. The default settings are:
- Baud Rate: 19,200
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop Bits: 1
- Parity: None

Figure 41: Service Port Card Properties dialog with 4100ES CPU card
To set the communications settings of the service port on the 4120 NIC, complete the following steps:
1. Expand the unit, box, and bay combination containing the 4120 NIC.

page 61 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

2. Double-click the 4120 NIC icon, the card properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Service Port tab. A window similar to Figure 42 appears.
4. The Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, and Stop Bit fields have default settings. You can edit the settings, but use the default settings
whenever possible.The default setting are:
- Baud Rate: 9600
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop Bits: 1
- Parity: Even

Figure 42: 4120 service port properties dialog

To set the communications settings of the service port on the ES Net NIC, complete the following steps:
1. Expand the Unit, Box, and Bay combination containing the ES Net NIC.
2. Double-click the ES Net card icon, the card properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Card Configuration tab and click Virtual Service Port.
4. The default Device type for the port is COMMAND. If a supervised port is required, device type should be set to COMPUTER.
Port data entry and the Gen Info. tab

page 62 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

See Table 14 for definitions of the fields in the Gen. Info tab of the CPU card, the 4120 NIC, and the ES Net NIC.
Table 14: Gen. Info tab
Field CPU card 4120 NIC ES Net NIC
Device Type This field is permanently set to This field is set to "80 character This field is set to COMMAND,
COMMAND. CRT,unsupervised AC printer" but can be set to COMPUTER
Header Label This field specifies the first line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen.
Port ID Label This field specifies the second line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen. You can
use it to indicate the port connection, for example Port 2, Command Center.
Port ID Alt. Label This field specifies the alternate text for the Port ID Label.
Port Default Set Priority This is the system priority level Not applicable. This is the system priority level
assigned to commands issued assigned to commands issued
from the service port. The range from the service port. The range
is 2 to 15, and the default is 9. is 2 to 15, and the default is 9.
CPU Modem Card Click this check box if a Not applicable. Not applicable.
4100-6030 modem card is
attached to the CPU card.
Modem Enabled Click this check box to activate the Not applicable. Not applicable.
modem. No modifications to the
initialization string are required.

Figure 43: Port Data Entry, Gen. Info tab for CPU Card

page 63 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 44: ES Net Virtual Service Port Gen. Info tab

page 64 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Port data entry, and the Access Levels tab

Click the Port Data button, see Figure 41, and click the Access Levels tab. Use this tab to set the access level for the various system
operations that can be accessed through the service port.
Note: These access levels apply only to actions performed through the service port. Refer to “Restricting Access to Display Functions” for
information on setting access levels and passcodes for front panel display functions.

When you click this tab, a window similar to Figure 45, appears. To set an access level for one of the service port operations, scroll through
the list of functions and highlight the function. As shown in Figure 45, the text to the left of the control changes. Use this control to
associate an access level with the function.

Figure 45: Port Data Entry, Access Levels tab

Port data entry and the Port Options tab
Click the Port Data button, see Figure 41, and click the Port Options tab. This tab, shown in Figure 46, contains options that apply to how
the data appears on the display connected to the service port. For the CPU card or the 4120 NIC properties dialog box, these are read only
fields.
In the ES Net NIC properties dialog box click the Card Configuration tab and click the Network Service Port ellipsis button. The ES Net Card
Service Port dialog box appears. Click the Port Options tab to view the port options. When the port is set to COMMAND, the port options
are read only; only when the port is set to COMPUTER that the options are modifiable. To toggle the state of the port options, highlight the
option and press the Spacebar key.

Figure 46: Port Data Entry, Port Options tab

page 65 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3 Editing network cards

The following sections describe setting the network card information for the 4120 network and the ES Net network.

7.3.1 Editing 4120 NIC/4120 Network Repeater property settings

Introduction
This section describes setting the network information for the 4120 NIC or 4120 Network Repeater card. See for information about setting
the card properties for the 4120 card. See Editing service port-specific settings for information about programming the service port on
the cards.

7.3.1.1 Accessing the network information for the 4120 NIC or Network Repeater card
To access the network information for the 4120 NIC or Network Repeater card, expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon combination
containing the network card. Double click the network card icon, and click the Network Info tab.

7.3.1.2 Setting network information for the 4120 NIC or Network Repeater card
Set the fields within the Network Info tab as follows:
Note: Comm Style is not a valid selection for the network repeater card.

• Comm Style. Click Class B networks to represent a single line or star topology. With these types of networks, a single short, ground
fault, or open circuit on the network communication channel causes a trouble, and all nodes beyond the fault operate in local, or
standalone mode. Click Class X networks to represent a closed loop ring. With these types of networks, any single open, short, or
ground fault on the communication channel will not interrupt communication between nodes on the network.
• Left Port/Right Port. The NIC card contains two ports, a left port and a right port. Each can have one of the following types of media
connected to it RS485, fiber, or modem. The setting must agree with the type of media module installed on the port.
• Network Sync Enable. When this check box is selected, Network Sync is enabled. Network Sync enables all notifications devices
connected to different panels, on the same 4120 network, to be synchronized. They simultaneously flash or sound when there is a
fire alarm. Network Sync is supported on a full network, 99 nodes, as long as all nodes either support network sync, or are safe to use
with network sync.
Table 15 details the products that support Network Sync, products that can be synchronized over the 4120 network, and products that are
safe to use with Network Sync, meaning that they will not disrupt products supporting Network Sync. If a product does not appear in this
list, it should be assumed that it does not support the Network Sync feature, and it is not safe to use with Network Sync.
Note: If a product does not appear in this list, it should be assumed that it does not support the Network Sync feature, and it is not safe to
use with Network Sync.
Table 15: Products supporting Network Sync on 4120 networks
Product name Network Card PID Supports Network Sync feature Safe for use with Network Sync
4100ES 4100-6078 yes yes
4100ES 4100-6014 no no
4010ES 4010-9922 yes yes
4010ES 4010-9902 no no
TSW 4190-9828, no yes
4190-9829,
4190-6060,
4190-6061
TSW 4190-9820, no no
4190-9821,
4190-6032,
4190-6033
IMS 4190-9828, no yes
4190-9829,
4190-6060,
4190-6061
IMS 4190-9820, no no
4190-9821,
4190-6032,
4190-6033
4100U 4100-6078 no yes
4100U 4100-6014 no no
4100+ 4100-6078 no yes

page 66 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 15: Products supporting Network Sync on 4120 networks

Product name Network Card PID Supports Network Sync feature Safe for use with Network Sync
4100+ 4100-6014 no no
NSI 4190-9831, no no
4190-9830
NSI 4190-9827, no no
4190-9826

7.3.2 Editing the ES Net NIC

This section describes setting the network information for the ES Net NIC. See Editing basic card properties for information about setting
the card properties. See Editing service port-specific settings for information about configuring ES Net's Virtual Service port.
You can modify the ES Net NIC card's mounting from slot to flat or from flat to slot at any stage. Use the Type combo box shown in Figure
47. When you change the mounting, the configuration of the card is also maintained as network information: public or external points. It is
important that you check and adjust the location when required.

Figure 47: Card Properties showing the card type combo box
The ES Net NIC has two networks, Panel Net that is internal to the panel, and a Fire Net that connects the panels on a network, and is
totally separate from the Panel Net, see Figure 49.
Panel Net is a network of the CPU card and optional Ethernet based slave cards.
Panel Net uses Ethernet eSlave protocol to interconnect the CPU card with other Ethernet based cards.
The Fire Net is a redundant, flexible ring-based network topology that interconnects ES Net NICs. The Fire Net can have up to 99 nodes of
different types, ES Panels or TSWs.

7.3.2.1 ES Net topologies

With the ES Net network, you can deploy and interconnect fire alarm control units and workstations in a variety of ways. You can bridge
together or cascade rings using ES Net’s flexible ring-based topology.
Depending on your code, and if redundant paths are not required for specific segments of a network, it is also possible to connect panels
and workstations (or network nodes) using a daisy chain topology.

page 67 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 48: Examples of possible topologies for the ES Net network

page 68 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 49: Panel Net and Fire Net (single ring topology shown)

7.3.2.2 About supplemental traffic

Through the ES Net NIC, supplemental traffic can be transported over the redundant Fire Network. Supplemental traffic may consist of
either communications between a TSW Server and its remote clients or communications between third party Ethernet appliances.
The supplemental traffic channel is available by configuring ES Net NIC Ethernet based ports (on board ports A or B or extra ports available
through an Ethernet media module). Ports configured for supplemental traffic are part of their own "virtual" network, entirely independent
of the Fire Network.
TSW Remote Clients leveraging supplemental traffic through a connection to a Fire Panel ES Net NIC card may require special installation
instructions. Refer to 579-834 TrueSite Workstation Installation and Checkout Instructions for more details.
Note: Supplemental traffic is not supported on networks using the physical media DSL. If such media cards exist in the configuration, the
job build will fail.

Forwarding of supplemental traffic frames happens at a low level layer that has no concept of IP addresses; this means that to allow
communications between devices on this channel, the user may have to configure IP addresses and/or related protocol parameters for all
equipment leveraging the supplemental channel.

7.3.2.3 Editing bay mounted TSW ES Net NIC

In installations where using an ES Net External NIC is not practical, you can install a TSW ES Net NIC in the bay of an ES Panel.
Because the ES Net NIC is located in, and powered by the panel, you must add the TSW ES Net NIC to the correct location using
the ES Panel Programmer.

page 69 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Complete the following steps to configure the physical card settings of the bay mounted TSW ES Net NIC:
1. Add the card to the correct location in the Hardware window: the unit, bay and box. See Specifying hardware components for
more information about configuring card properties.
2. You can type useful information about the TSW node in the Notes field, for example:

TSW Node X Central Office (40 characters maximum),

Where x is the node number on the network.
See ES Net Slot Type Network Interface Card Installation Instructions (579-1256), ES Net Flat Type Network Interface Card Installation
Instructions (579-1257) and TrueSite Workstation Installation & Checkout Instructions (579-834) for more information about installing
the cards.

7.3.2.4 Accessing and setting the network information

To access the network information for the ES Net NIC, complete the following steps:
1. Expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon combination containing the ES Net NIC.
2. Double-click the card icon, and click the Card Configuration tab.
3. From the Comm Style list, select Class B or Class X.
Note: Class X is the default selection. This selection applies to the entire network, not just this node. By selecting Class B, it is implied
that the network operates without redundancy for every link interconnecting nodes together.

7.3.2.5 Network port types

There are two types of ports that you can configure on a Fire Net:
• Fire Network port
• Fire Network Spur port
A Fire Network port type is configured when a port is part of a redundant ring. A ring is anything from a two-node “bridge” connecting rings
together, up to the maximum size ring. This also assumes that this port will be part of a pair to guarantee redundancy. If you configure an
odd number of Fire Network ports on a NIC, an error message displays when you click Save or Apply in the Card Configuration dialog
box.
Fire Network Spurs occur in applications in the following circumstances:
• When a node is to be part of the network but the link connecting it to the rest of the system doesn’t have to be redundant.
• When a network is configured in Class B; under certain jurisdictions, for example, this node could be an annunciator panel.
If you select a Class X network where there are Fire Network ports and Fire Network Spur ports, then a break detected on any port set as
Fire Network will create a link down trouble for this port and a degraded network trouble.
However, if the break was detected on a port set as Fire Network Spur, then only a link down condition is declared for that port.

page 70 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3.2.6 Configuring a single ring Class X network

The example in Figure 50 shows a four-node Class X network with a mix of Ethernet and single mode fiber.

Figure 50: Four-node Class X mixed media network

To configure this network, configure the following options in the ES Net Card configuration dialog for each node in Table 16
Table 16: Four-node Class X mixed media network configuration options
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Comm Style Class X Class X Class X Class X
Port A Fire Network Unused Unused Fire Network
Port B Unused Unused Fire Network Fire Network
Port C Host Host Host Host
Port D Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port
Media Module 1 Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Unused
Port E Unused Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Port F Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused
Media Module 2 Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port G Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port H Unused Unused Unused Unused

page 71 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3.2.7 Configuring a multiple ring network

The following figure shows a seven-node network. There are two bridged rings and a fire spur connects a single panel.

Figure 51: General view of a seven-node, multi-ring network

In this network configuration, a Class X trouble is declared when a break occurs on any of the rings, but not on the spur. You can see a mix
of Ethernet and fiber links in this network. Ensure proper pairing of the ports (for example, port A into port B, port E into port F or port G
into port F) so that no miswire or link down condition is declared.

Figure 52: Seven-node Class X network with a fire spur

Table 17: Seven-node (Class X) network with spur, mixed media network configuration options
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7
Comm Style Class X Class X Class X Class X Class X Class X Class X
Port A Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused Unused Fire Network
Spur
Port B Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused Fire Network Unused
Spur
Port C Host Host Host Host Host Host Host

page 72 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 17: Seven-node (Class X) network with spur, mixed media network configuration options
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7
Port D Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port
Media Module 1 Unused Unused Single Single Multi Multi Unused
Mode Fiber Mode Fiber Mode Fiber Mode Fiber
Port E Unused Unused Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Port F Unused Unused Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Media Module 2 Unused Unused Unused Multi Mode Unused Unused Unused
Fiber
Port G Unused Unused Unused Fire Network Unused Unused Unused
Port H Unused Unused Unused Fire Network Unused Unused Unused

page 73 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3.2.8 Configuring a Class B network

The example in Figure 53 shows a four-node network similar to the previous example, only this time configured in Class B.

Figure 53: Four-node Class B mixed media network

To configure this network, configure the following options in the ES Net Card configuration dialog for each node in Table 18.
Note: All ports connecting the four nodes together are configured as Fire Network Spurs, as the daisy chain topology is not providing any
redundancy.
Table 18: Four-node Class B mixed media network configuration options
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Comm Style Class B Class B Class B Class B
Port A Unused Unused Unused Fire Network Spur
Port B Unused Unused Fire Network Spur Unused
Port C Host Host Host Host
Port D Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port
Media Module 1 Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Unused
Port E Unused Fire Network Spur Fire Network Spur Unused
Port F Fire Network Spur Fire Network Spur Unused Unused
Media Module 2 Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port G Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port H Unused Unused Unused Unused

page 74 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3.2.9 Configuring a system to use the supplemental traffic channel

Figure 54 shows the previous example for a four-node single ring network but with third party Ethernet appliances or TSW Remote Clients
connected to nodes 1 and 3.

Figure 54: Four-node single-ring network with supplemental traffic sources

The following configuration is required to establish the supplemental traffic between these two nodes.
Table 19: Supplemental traffic configuration
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Comm style Class X Class X Class X Class X
Port A Fire Network Unused Supp. Channel 1 Fire Network
Port B Supp. Channel 1 Unused Fire Network Fire Network
Port C Host Host Host Host
Port D Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port
Media Module 1 Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Unused
Port E Unused Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Port F Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused
Media Module 2 Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port G Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port H Unused Unused Unused Unused

page 75 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3.2.10 Configuring a Node with ES Net and BNIC Card

Figure 55 shows Node 2 from Figure 53 with the connection to an external network through a BNIC card.

Figure 55: Node 2 with BNIC

Configure the following options in the ES Net Card configuration dialog for each node (The BNIC port options are non-configurable).
Table 20: Node with ES Net configuration and connections
Configuration Connection
Port A Unused N/A
Port B Unused N/A
Port C CPU Connect to CPU Card Ethernet Port
Port D Panel Net Connect to BNIC port “C”
Media Module 1 Single Mode Fiber N/A
Port E Fire Network Connect to Neighbor Node
Port F Fire Network Connect to Neighbor Node
Media Module 2 Unused N/A
Port G Unused N/A
Port H Unused N/A
Table 21: Node with BNIC configuration and connections
Configuration Connection
Port A External Network To building Network
Port B External Network N/A
Port C CPU Connect to ES Net Card Port “D”
Port D Service Port Connect to Front Panel’s Service Port
As the ES Net card is used to bridge the BNIC and CPU card, you must configure Port D of the ES Net as Panel Net so that the connection is
supervised.

page 76 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.3.2.11 Panel Net ports

Use the Panel Net port type to connect Ethernet slave cards, such as a BNIC, to the CPU card. This port type provides supervision of the
link and declares a port trouble if the link goes down.

7.3.2.12 Pairing the network ports correctly

You must pair ports correctly to create a Fire Network. Depending on the media type, not pairing the ports correctly can result in links
between node not being brought up, or in the case of Ethernet, creating a miswiring condition.
When you are pairing fiber-media card ports, match the wavelengths on each side of the fiber link ensuring that the TX wavelength on one
node matches the RX wavelength on the other node, see Figure 56. If you pair them incorrectly, a Port Link Down trouble appears on both
ports.

Figure 56: Pairing fiber-media card ports

When you are pairing DSL media card ports, ensure Port E or G on one end of a link is connected to ports F or H on the other end. If you
pair them incorrectly, as with fiber media, a Link Down trouble appears on both ports.
Ethernet ports A, E and G on the ES Net NIC or on the ES Net Ethernet media card can detect ground fault conditions. If code requires that
a Ground Fault condition be detected and annunciated for a link, correct port pairing must be respected.
To pair the ports correctly, ensure that a port with ground fault detection capabilities (Port A, E or G) is connected to a port without Ground
Fault detection capabilities (Port B, F or H). If you do not respect this port pairing, a miswired trouble results.

7.3.2.13 Ground Fault Detection

Correctly paired DSL and Ethernet links detect ground fault conditions. This option is the default selection for both media.
Depending on local code, ground fault detection may not be required or desirable. To disable this feature, uncheck the Link requires
Ground Fault Protection check box in the port Advanced Settings. Note that you must deselect this option for the ports on each end of
the link, that is at each node. Failing to do this results in a miswired trouble.

7.3.2.14 ES Net Ports options and settings

The following table describes the ES Net NIC network ports.

page 77 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 22: ES Net NIC network ports

Port List options Advanced settings options Pairing options
Port A Fire Network Link requires Ground Fault Pair with port B, F or H
Fire Network Spur Protection option is selected by
Supp. Channel 1 default when port is not unused
PanelNet
Unused
Port B Fire Network Link requires Ground Fault Pair with port A, E, or G
Fire Network Spur Protection option is selected by
Supp. Channel 1 default when port is not unused
PanelNet
Unused
Port C Host N/A Always connect Port C to the master
controller CPU.
Port D PanelNet N/A Port D is the Service Port on the front
Service Port panel, except in configurations using a
BNIC, or a gateway card. When there
is a BNIC or a gateway card in the
configuration, set port D to Panel Net.
Media Card 1 Port E Fire Network Link requires Ground Fault For Ethernet, pair port E with port B, F
Fire Network Spur Protection option is selected by or H. For fiber media or DSL, pair Port
Supp. Channel 1 default when port is not unused (Not E with port F or H
PanelNet (Only for applicable for Fiber)
Ethernet Media
Module)
Unused
Port F Fire Network Link requires Ground Fault For Ethernet, pair port F with port A, E,
Fire Network Spur Protection option is selected by or G. For fiber media or DSL, pair Port
Supp. Channel 1 default when port is not unused (Not F with Port E or G.
PanelNet (Only for applicable for Fiber)
Ethernet Media
Module)
Unused
Media Card 2 Port G Fire Network Link requires Ground Fault For Ethernet, pair port G with port B, F
Fire Network Spur Protection option is selected by or H. For fiber media or DSL, pair Port
Supp. Channel 1 default when port is not unused (Not G with port F or H
PanelNet (Only for applicable for Fiber)
Ethernet Media
Module)
Unused
Port H Fire Network Link requires Ground Fault For Ethernet, pair port H with port A, E,
Fire Network Spur Protection option is selected by or G. For fiber media or DSL, pair Port
Supp. Channel 1 default when port is not unused (Not H with Port E or G.
PanelNet (Only for applicable for Fiber)
Ethernet Media
Module)
Unused

7.4 ES Net Synchronization Domain

Use Network Synchronization (Network Sync) to synchronize multiple ES panels and their notification devices over the ES Net framework. A
Synchronization Domain (Sync Domain) is when a group of nodes are synchronized together.
When configuring a Sync Domain, you must only define one Master Sync Node (MSN). This node acts as a clock reference for all other
nodes in the domain. When the MSN is identified, you must explicitly configure all nodes that require synchronization so that they are
added to the Sync Domain.
The distance between the MSN and the synchronized nodes is measured in hops. Hops track the number of links between the MSN and
the node in the Sync Domain.
In Class X networks, a Sync Domain can cover a single ring or it can span over multiple rings. However, a maximum distance between the
MSN and the nodes within the Sync Domain must be met. If the path to the MSN only consists of Fiber or Ethernet, the maximum number
of hops between the MSN and a node requiring synchronization is 30. If the path has a DSL link or multiple links, the maximum number of
hops is 10.

page 78 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Note: ES Net Synchronization does not support Wheelock notification devices.

7.4.1 Maximum number of hops

To calculate the maximum span for a Sync Domain, ensure that communications flow in one direction only. For example, when a break is
present on the network. The longest possible path, in the case of a single ring, is therefore the one from the MSN to its neighbor, as shown
in Figure 57.

Figure 57: Single ring time domain for a Fiber or Ethernet Class X network

7.4.1.1 Dual ring network

If you place the MSN on one side of a bridge, you can stretch the time domain if the node counts on the other ring respect the maximum
number of hops, for example 30 nodes. The dotted line in Figure 58 represents the time domain.
Note: In this figure, the dotted line follows the maximum 30 hops rule.

Figure 58: Dual ring time domain for a Fiber or Ethernet Class X network
Multiple synchronization topologies are possible, which increase the size of the domain by bridging rings together and placing the MSN
where it reaches the maximum number of nodes. However, it is important to always consider the longest alternate path from the MSN to a
node. For example, if there is a break anywhere on the Class X network. Check that the path falls within the maximum number of hops for
that media or mix of media.

7.4.2 Configuring the MSN and Sync Domain nodes

To create a Sync Domain, select a node as the MSN and select all of the nodes that require configuration as part of that domain.

page 79 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 59: Card configuration dialog with Network Sync options, MSN configuration shown
Select the following options to create and configure a Sync Domain:
Network Sync Enable: Select this option for any node, including the MSN, that is required as part of the Sync Domain. On a multi-ring
network, if only one ring requires synchronization, only select the nodes on that particular ring.
Master Sync Node: Select this option for the MSN.
Note: Configure only one MSN for the entire Sync Domain. If you do not configure an MSN, or if you select more than one node as the
MSN, an error occurs at build time.

7.5 Editing Power Supply property settings

This section describes editing power supply-specific information for the following standard and optional power supplies. Power supplies
intended for Canadian use are designated as such. The power supplies are listed below according to job type:
4100ES jobs only
• 4100-5101 - Expansion Power Supply (XPS), 120 VAC
• 4100-5102 - Expansion Power Supply (XPS), 240 VAC
• 4100-5103 - Expansion Power Supply (XPS), 120 VAC, Canadian Version
• 4100-5111 - System Power Supply (SPS), 120 VAC
• 4100-5112 - System Power Supply (SPS), 120 VAC, Canadian Version
• 4100-5113 - System Power Supply (SPS), 240 VAC
• 4100-5120 - TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS), 120 VAC
• 4100-5121 - TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS), 120 VAC, Canadian Version
• 4100-5122 - TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS), 240 VAC
• 4100-5125 - Remote Power Supply (RPS), 120 VAC
• 4100-5126 - Remote Power Supply (RPS), 120 VAC, Canadian Version
• 4100-5127 - Remote Power Supply (RPS), 240 VAC

page 80 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• 4100-5325 - Extended Power Supply (EPS), 120 V

• 4100-5327 - Extended Power Supply (EPS), 220V / 230 V / 240 V
• 4100-5311 - Extended Power Supply fitted with an IDNet2 (EPS2), 120 V
• 4100-5313 - Extended Power Supply fitted with an IDNet2 (EPS2), 220 V / 230 V
• 4100-6005 - Power Supply/Charger. Card-specific properties only
• 4100-5401 - ES-PS/ES-BPS
• 4100-5402 - ES-XPS
4010ES jobs only
• 4010-ESS - Extended System Supply - 240 V
• 4010-ESS - Extended System Supply - 120 V
• 4010-MSS - Main System Slave 240 V
• 4010-MSS - Main System Slave 120 V
• 4010-MSS - No IDNet 120 V
• 4010-MSS - No IDNet 240 V
4100ES and 4010ES jobs
• 4081-9306 - External Charger, 120 VAC. Card-specific properties only
• 4081-9308 - External Charger, 240 VAC. Card-specific properties only

7.5.1 Accessing power supply-specific information

See Table 23 for instructions on accessing the power supply-specific information.
Table 23: Power supply-specific information
Power supply Access instructions
ES Power Supply (ES-PS) To access the ES-PS located in the CPU bay, click the Hardware tab and
expand the Unit 0, Box 1 and Bay 1 icons. Double-click the icon labeled
(Blocks G&H) (001) 4100-5401/4100-5403 ES-PS/ES-BPS. This is also the
option to configure an ES-PS as backup power supply.
ES-XPS To access these power supplies, expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon
combination containing the power supply. Double-click the icon for the power
supply.
Extended Power Supply (EPS) To access the EPS located in the CPU bay, click the Hardware tab and expand
the Unit 0, Box 1, and Bay 1 icons, double-click the icon labeled PS QUAD
(Slot 5-8) (001) 4100-xxxx, where xxxx corresponds to the last four digits of
the PID for the specific power supply installed.
Standard System Power Supply (SPS) To access the SPS located in the CPU bay, click the Hardware tab and expand
the Unit 0, Box 1, and Bay 1 icons, double-click the icon labeled PS QUAD
(Slot 5-8) (001) 4100-xxxx, where xxxx corresponds to the last four digits of
the PID for the specific power supply installed.
Optional Power Supplies (TPS, XPS, RPS) To access these power supplies, expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon
Main System Slave (MSS) combination containing the power supply. Double-click the icon for the power
Extended System Supply (ESS) supply.
See one of the following tables for specific information.

page 81 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.5.1.1 ES-PS Options

Table 24:
Tab Option
Card Properties Select the ES-PS power supply option from the Type list. Refer to
Editing basic card properties for information about setting the card
properties for the power supply.
Data Entry High. Select this radio button if the battery is rated as greater than
20Ahr.
Low. Select this button if the battery is rated between 6.2 and 20
AHh.
Optional Card City Connect. Select this option when the City Connect
card is to be populated on the ES-PS.
Relay Card. Select this option when the Relay card is to be populated
on the ES-PS.
Depleted Battery Cutout. Select this option if the ES-PS should shut
itself off after detecting a depleted battery condition when no AC
power is present. This option is unselected by default.
External battery charge. Select this option if the ES-PS will not be
used to charge the batteries.
Fan Option. Select this option if the ES-PS is populated with a fan
module to expand the alarm capacity from 9.5A up to 12.7A.
Redundant power supply. This check box is automatically selected
when a second ES-PS is added to the bay to function as the backup
power supply. Ensure that only one ES-PS is configured as the
primary or master power supply. The master verifies that the correct
power supply is assigned as the backup power supply.
Simple NAC and Relay Use this tab to configure wiring for auxiliary power or for use as a
simple reverse polarity notification appliance circuit (SNAC). This
circuit does not support TrueAlert addressable or non-addressable
(SmartSync) appliances. There are only two device types on the
ES-PS card: SIGB (Simple NAC) and RELAY. The user can select the
corresponding point type from the list derived by each device type
selected.
Power Consumption The column on the left, Available Power, gives the total current
capacity that the ES-PS can supply.
• 24V SIG is the total current an ES-PS can supply to the notification
appliances.
• AUX Power is the total current an ES-PS can supply on its Auxiliary
NAC terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current an ES-PS can supply to cards
populated in the same bay or in other bays. This depends on how
cards are configured in the Power Supply list in the Bay Properties
window.
• The Total Available that the ES-PS can produce is 9A of bulk 24V for
system use.
The column on the right, Power In-Use, gives the total current
consumption from the devices connected to the FACP.
• 24V SIG is the total current drawn by the notification appliances
based on which devices are selected in the Simple NAC and Relay
tab.
• AUX NAC is the total current drawn on its Auxiliary NAC terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current drawn from the other cards in the
bays powered by this ES-PS. To use this feature, you must select the
Supply Card Power checkbox to configure the ES-PS as the source of
power for other cards.
• Total In-Use gives the total current drawn from the FACP by all
external devices.
• Supply Card power. Select this option for the ES-PS to provide
power to the PDI (up to 4 amps).

page 82 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.5.1.2 ES-XPS Options

Table 25:
Tab Option
Card Properties Select the ES-XPS power supply option from the Type list. Refer to
Editing basic card properties for information about setting the card
properties for the power supply.
Data Entry Options
Depleted Battery Cutout. Select this option if the ES-XPS should shut
itself off after detecting a depleted battery condition when no AC
power is present. This option is unselected by default.
Fan Option. Select this option if the ES-XPS is populated with a fan
module to expand the alarm capacity from 9.5A up to 12.5A.
Simple NAC and Relay Use this tab to configure wiring for auxiliary power or for use as a
simple reverse polarity notification appliance circuit (SNAC). This
circuit does not support TrueAlert addressable or non-addressable
(SmartSync) appliances. There are only two device types on the ES-
XPS card: SIGB (Simple NAC) and RELAY. The user can select the
corresponding point type from the list derived by each device type
selected.
Power Consumption The column on the left, Available Power, gives the total current
capacity that the ES-PS can supply.
• 24V SIG is the total current an ES-XPS can supply to the notification
appliances.
• AUX Power is the total current an ES-XPS can supply on its Auxiliary
NAC terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current an ES-XPS can supply to cards
mounted directly on the module through the on-board PDIs.
• The Total Available that the ES-XPS can produce is 9A of bulk 24V
for on-board module use the column on the right, Power In-Use,
gives the total current consumption from the devices connected to
the FACP.
• 24V SIG is the total current drawn by the notification appliances
based on which devices are selected in the Simple NAC and Relay
tab.
• AUX NAC is the total current drawn on its Auxiliary NAC terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current drawn from the other cards mounted
to the ES-XPS.
• Total In-Use gives the total current drawn from the FACP by all
external devices.

page 83 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.5.1.3 EPS options

Table 26: EPS options
Tab Option
Card Properties Refer to Editing basic card properties for information about setting the card properties for the power supply.
Data Entry Battery Type
High. Select this radio button if the battery is rated between 18 and 50 Ah.
Low. Select this button if the battery is rated between 6.2 and 12.7 Ah.
Optional Card
City Connect. Select this option when the City Connect card is to be populated on the EPS.
Relay Card. Select this option when the Relay card is to be populated on the EPS.
Options
Depleted Battery Cutout. Select this option if the EPS should shut itself off after detecting a depleted
battery condition when no AC power is present. This option is unselected by default.
External battery charge. Select this option if the EPS will not be used to charge the batteries.
AuxNAC Use this tab to configure the operation mode of the AuxNAC circuit. The AuxNAC circuit supports the basic
coding pattern, but does not support the QuickAlert or Wheelock operation. The user can select the device
type for this channel using a combo box. The list of point types is derived directly by the device type selected.
Point Editing Select this tab to configure the devices attached to the EPS. See Editing options for TrueAlert Controllers for
specific information.
Power Consumption The column on the left, Available Power, gives the total current capacity that the EPS can supply.
• IDNACs is the total current a EPS can supply to the notification appliances.
• AUX NAC is the total current a EPS can supply on its Auxiliary NAC terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current a EPS can supply to cards populated in its bay or on other bays, depending
on how they are configured through the Power Supply drop down menu in the bay properties.
• The Total Available that the EPS can produce is 9A of bulk 24V for system use.
The column on the right, Power In-Use, gives the total current consumption from the devices connected to
the FACP.
• IDNACS is the total current drawn by the notification appliances based on which devices are selected in
the Power Consumption Calculator through the Point Editing tab.
• AUX NAC is the total current drawn on its Auxiliary NAC terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current drawn from the other cards in the bay(s) powered by this EPS. To make
use of this box, the Supply Card Power checkbox has to be selected, thus indicating that the EPS is the
source of power for other cards.
• Total In-Use gives the total current drawn from the FACP by all external devices.
• Supply Card power. Select this option for the EPS to provide power to the PDI (up to 4 amps).

page 84 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.5.1.4 SPS and MSS options

Table 27: SPS and MSS options
Tab Option
Card Properties See Editing basic card properties for information about setting the card properties for the power supply.
Data Entry Battery Type
Use this tab to specify general High. Select this radio button if the battery is rated between 18 and 50 Ah.
information and options for Low. Select this button if the battery is rated between 6.2 and 12.7 Ah.
the SPS or MSS Optional Card
None. Indicates that no optional card is connected to the SPS or MSS.
City Connect. Select this radio button if a city connect module is connected to the power supply.
Relay. Select this radio button if an alarm relay card is connected to the power supply.
NAC Options
Indicates the number and type, Class A or B, of NACs connected to the power supply. The SPS power supply
can have either 3 class A or Class B NACs. The MSS can have 4 Class A or Class B NACs.
Options
Depleted Battery Cutout. Select this option to enable the low battery cutout option see Enabling the
low battery cutout option. THIS OPTION MUST BE SELECTED FOR ALL CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS.
Note: On the MSS, there is no Canadian MSS assembly. Instead, move jumper P7 to position 2, 3 for
Canadian operation.
External Battery Charger. Select this check box if an external battery charger is connected to the power
supply. This is not available for the XPS.
Insuite Protection Devices Installed. Select this check box to wire multiple rooms on a single circuit.
In this case, a short can be seen by the card but the circuit will still turn on in an alarm condition. The NAC
with Insuite enabled will then isolate the room with the short.
Wheelock Horn/Strobe appliances. select this check box to cause all NACs with point type SQALERT on
the selected power supply to send Wheelock Sync Protocol instead of TrueAlert Non-Addressable protocol.
TrueAlert Non-Addressable appliances cannot be mixed with Wheelock Sync Protocol appliances on the
same power supply.
IDNet (SPS/MSS with IDNet Use this tab to configure addressable IDNet points connected to the IDNet channel on the power supply.
only) See Programming IDNet and MAPNET points for specific information.
NACs Use this tab to configure the point type and custom label for the NACs on the power supply. See
Programming NAC and signal points for specific information.
AUX. Relay Aux. Relay. Use this tab to define the point type and custom label of the Aux. Relays on the power supply.
See Programming relay points for specific information.
Power Consumption The Power Consumption tab for the SPS and MSS contains the same options as the EPS. See the Power
Consumption entry in EPS options for details.

page 85 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.5.1.5 ESS options

Table 28: ESS options
Tab Option
Card Properties The ESS Card address and IDNet Card Address are fixed at 1 and 2, respectively.
Note: It is usually easier to first add the card to the job with the ES Panel Programmer and then set the dip
switches with the address automatically assigned by the ES Panel Programmer.
Card Description. This is the text that appears next to the card in the Hardware tab.
Card Default Label. This is the card label that appears on the front panel display.
Card Custom Label and IDNet Card Custom Labels. This field describes the function of the card, the location,
or some other descriptive text.
Card Alternate Custom Label. This field permits an alternative description of the card, its function, or location.
Annunciator. Indicates the number of Remote Annunciators that are using the ESS.
Symbolic ID. The values shown in this field provide a quick reference for the user, for example, M3 and SIG4.
They represent the IDNAC or IDNET channels on the card. The symbolic ID field is present in card properties that
contain the IDNET or IDNAC channels. They can be remembered, or not, depending on user choice when the card
numbers in the system are changed.
Unit, Box, Bay, and Location The values shown in these fields reflect the location in which the card icon was
placed when you added it with the programmer. It is possible to change these values, however, the new values
must reflect the new physical location of the card.
Type. This field can be used to switch between a 120 V and a 240 V ESS.
Only activate TrueAlarm device LEDs. Select this check box for the TrueAlarm device LED to blink during
normal state.
Activate Signal IAM LEDs. Select this check box for the Signal IAM LED to blink during normal state.
Data Entry Battery Type
High. Select this radio button if the battery is rated between 18 and 50 Ah.
Low. Select this radio button if the battery is rated between 6.2 and 12.7 Ah.
Options
Depleted Battery Cutout. Select this option if the ESS should shut itself off after detecting a depleted battery
condition when no AC power is present. This option is unselected by default.
External Battery Charge. Select this option if the ESS will not be used to charge the batteries.
Optional Card
None. Indicates that no optional card is connected to the ESS.
City Connect. Select this radio button if a City Connect module is connected to the power supply.
Relay. Select this radio button if an alarm relay card is connected to the power supply.
IDNet Use this tab to configure addressable IDNet points connected to the IDNet channel on the power supply. See
Programming IDNet and MAPNET points for specific information.
Loop Editing Use this tab to select the device type and custom labels of the IDNet points.
Note: The point types on an ESS cannot be modified because the number of loops is set.
AuxNac/Relay Use this tab to select the device type, point type and custom labels for the AuxNAC and relays on the power
supply. See “Programming Relay Points” for more information about relays.
Point Editing Select this tab to configure the devices attached to the ESS. See “Editing options for TrueAlert Controllers” later in
this chapter for specific information.
Power Consumption The Power Consumption tab for the SPS and MSS contains the same options as the EPS. See the Power
Consumption entry in EPS options for details.

page 86 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.5.1.6 RPS options

Table 29: RPS options
Tab Option
Card Properties See Editing basic card properties for information on setting the card properties for the power supply.
Data Entry, Use this tab to Battery Type
specify general information High. Select this radio button if the battery is rated between 18 and 50 Ah.
and options for the RPS Low. Select this button if the battery is rated between 6.2 and 12.7 Ah.
Optional Card
None. Indicates that no optional card is connected to the SPS.
Relay. Select this radio button if an alarm relay card is connected to the power supply.
NAC Options
Indicates the number and type, Class A or B, of NACs connected to the power supply. The RPS power
supplies can have either 3 class A or Class B NACs.
Options
Depleted Battery Cutout.Select this option to enable the low battery cutout option, see pages 6-26. THIS
OPTION MUST BE SELECTED FOR ALL CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS.
External Battery Charger. Select this check box if an external battery charger is connected to the power
supply.
Insuite Protection Devices Installed. Select this check box to wire multiple rooms on a single circuit. In
this case, a short can be seen by the card but the circuit will still turn on in an alarm condition. The NAC with
Insuite enabled isolates the room with the short.
Wheelock Horn/Strobe appliances. Select this check box to cause all NACs with point type SQALERT on
the selected power supply to send Wheelock Sync Protocol instead of TrueAlert Non-Addressable protocol.
TrueAlert Non-Addressable appliances cannot be mixed with Wheelock Sync Protocol appliances on the
same power supply.
NACs Use this tab to configure the point type and custom label for the NACs on the power supply. See
Programming NAC and signal points for specific information.
AUX. Relay Aux. Relay. Use this tab to define the point type and custom label of the Aux. Relays on the power supply.
See Programming relay points for specific information.

7.5.1.7 TPS options

Table 30: TPS options
Tab Option
Card Properties See Editing basic card properties for information about setting the card properties for the power supply.
Data Entry Battery Type
High.Select this radio button if the battery is rated between 18 and 50 Ah.
Low. Select this button if the battery is rated between 6.2 and 12.7 Ah.
Options
Depleted Battery Cutout.Select this option to enable the low battery cutout option, see Enabling the low
battery cutout option.THIS OPTION MUST BE SELECTED FOR ALL CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS.
External Battery Charger. Select this check box to disable the charger connected to the power supply.
Point Editing Select this tab to configure the NAC devices attached to the TPS.

7.5.1.8 XPS options

Table 31: XPS options
Tab Option
Card Properties See Editing basic card properties for information about setting the card properties for the power supply.
Data Entry Insuite Protection Devices Installed. Select this check box to wire multiple rooms on a single circuit. In this
case, a short can be seen by the card but the circuit will still turn on in an alarm condition. The NAC with Insuite
enabled isolates the room with the short.
Wheelock Horn/Strobe appliances. Checking this option causes all NACs with point type SQALERT on
the selected power supply to send Wheelock Sync Protocol instead of TrueAlert Non-Addressable protocol.
TrueAlert Non-Addressable appliances cannot be mixed with Wheelock Sync Protocol appliances on the same
power supply.
NAC Options Use this tab to set the number and type, Class A or B, of NACs connected to the power supply. The XPS can
have 3 Class A, 3 Class B, 6 Class A, or 6 Class B NACs. Check the appropriate radio button.

page 87 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.6 Editing DACT card property settings

This section describes programming the DACT interface cards. The ES Panel supports both per point cards (changes to a specific point's
status are transmitted to the central station by the DACT) and event reporting DACT (events of a specific type are reported to the central
station via the DACT).
To open the DACT properties screen, expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon combination containing the DACT and double click on the icon
for the DACT. For a 4100ES job, a window similar to Figure 60 appears. If you are programming a per point DACT, several additional tabs
appear. The DACT window for a 4010ES job is identical to Figure 60, except the header reads 4010-9912 - Event Serial DACT Interface
instead of 4100-6052 - Event Serial DACT Interface.
Note: Alternatively, you can configure the IP Communicator with the Central Station Configuration Tool to perform central station
reporting. See Configuring the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway and Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.

7.6.1 Basics tab

Use the Basics tab, to setup the basic communication information for the DACT to DACR link.

Figure 60: Basics tab

• Phone and Account Numbers. The phone numbers are the numbers of the central station or the facility at which the DACR resides.
For example, on a campus, the DACT may connect to a DACR at a campus-wide dispatch facility. The account numbers are typically
provided by the central station provider and serve to identify the location or the customer to the central station.
• Communication Format (Event DACT only). Prior to selecting the Comm Format Codes, determine the required reporting format
from an authorized person at the central station. The choices are:
- 3/1 pulse = Three-digit account code followed by one-digit reporting code, double round at 20 pulses per second (PPS).
Programmable reporting codes.
- 4/2 pulse = Four-digit account code followed by two-digit reporting code, double round at 20 PPS. Programmable reporting codes.
(Default account code.)
- BFSK = Three-digit account code followed by two-digit reporting code, single transmission of constant tones. Features built-in error
checking and fixed reporting codes.
- SIA = Three-digit account code followed by two-digit reporting code, Level 1 compatibility. Features tonal acknowledge, basic reports,
and fixed reporting codes.
• Pulse Comm Format (Event DACT only). Prior to selecting the Pulse Comm format, determine the required format from an
authorized person at the central station.
- Format Rate. Choices are 10 PPS and 20 PPS.
- Comm Format Frequency. Choices are 1.9 Khz Data/1.4 Khz ACK and 1 Khz Data/2.3 Khz ACK.
- Dial Mode. Possible choices are Tone, Pulse, or Tone else Pulse (meaning check for tone and use the pulse mode if tone is not
present). If you are sure you don't have Tone service in your area, select Pulse.

page 88 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Miscellaneous. Set as follows:

- Report AC Failure Delay. Use the control to specify the amount of time that should pass following an AC Power Failure before
the DACT dials in to the central station to report the AC failure. This setting is intended to prevent the central station from being
overloaded with AC power failure events following a power outage.
- Test Report Time. Specify the time at which the DACT should dial in to the DACR to report the status (normal or off normal) of the
panel.
- Send Unmapped Points (Per Point DACT only). Mapped points are those which have been selected to report status changes to
the DACR. Unmapped points are new points which have been added to the system, but have not been selected. Select this check
box so that these points report a generic status code to the DACR.

7.6.2 Event Codes tab

Use the Event Codes tab, see Figure 61, to edit the event codes associated with each of the ES Panel point types. Should an event (alarm,
trouble, supervisory) occur to a point associated with one of the point types, the DACT sends the specified event code to the central
station.
Note: Do not edit event codes without prior authorization and direction from the central station.

Note: To edit a code, complete the following steps:

1. Click the Point Types drop down list and select the point type for which you want to change the event codes. Use the Next and
Previous buttons to scroll through the list without clicking on the drop down list box.
2. Click the Enable Edit check box at the bottom of the screen.
3. Define the appropriate event codes for both Event, the code sent to the DACR when the event occurs, and Restoral, code sent
when system reset occurs.

Figure 61: Event Codes tab

7.6.3 Local Points tab

Use the Local Points tab to set the event codes received by the central station when problems occur to the DACT or its phone line.
Note: Do not edit event codes without prior authorization and direction from the central station.

page 89 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 62: Local Points tab

1. Click the Enable Edit check box at the bottom of the screen, see Figure 63.
2. Edit the event codes as directed by the central station.

Figure 63: Enable Edits on local points tab window

page 90 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.6.4 Point Types tab, per point DACT only

Use the Point Types tab to define unique SDACT point types for use in reporting event codes to the central station. A unique point type
enables the central station to identify a specific point, for example, a single smoke detector, from within a large group of similar points, for
example, all of the smoke detectors in a building.
When you have defined a unique point type, use the Points tab to assign the point type to a specific point. See “Points tab” later in this
chapter for information. Be certain to work in conjunction with the central station and advise them regarding any new event codes that
have been created.
To define a point type, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Add button.
2. Enter a unique name for the point type in the SDACT Point Type Name field.
3. Enter descriptive text in the SDACT Point Type Descrip. field.
4. Edit the Event and Restoral codes to be sent to the central station.

Figure 64: Point tab

Use the Points tab, see Figure 65, to do the following:
• Select the points that have events routed to the central station. By doing this, you can prevent unnecessary messages, such as when a
pseudo point turns on and off, from being sent to the central station.
• Assign points to Groups. Use groups to split a large number of points into sub-groups, such as all of a building's smoke detectors.
Groups are typically used to group points by location. For example, each floor in a building can be a group. The central station can use
the group information to provide the fire department with an approximate location of the point in alarm.
To select points and assign points to groups, complete the following steps:
Note: The Per Point Serial DACT Interface window for a 4010ES job is identical to that for a 4100ES job, except that the window header
reads 4010-9912 Per Point Serial DACT Interface.
1. Use the scrollbar, or the up and down arrow keys to highlight a point.
2. Check the Select check box for the points that should send events to the DACT, see Figure 65.
3. Enter the group number of the point in the CID Group field.
4. To change the point identifier, CID Number, within the group, enter a new number in the CID Number field.

page 91 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 65: Select check box on the Point tab

7.7 Setting up the Per Point SDACT automatic email

The Per Point SDACT Automatic Email (Auto Email) provides a means of automatically notifying the central station when the programming
definition of an SDACT point, or ES Panel point is changed.
Operation of Auto Email is as follows:
• After editing a job, the ES Panel Programmer generates a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file when saving the job.
Note: The CSV file is generated for any point changes. There is no distinction between points mapped to the SDACT and non-mapped
points.
• When you build the job, the Build utility generates a progress message indicating that an email containing the CSV file is sending to
the central station. How long this takes depends on the configuration of the system, the operating system, and email configuration.
• If the email cannot be sent, a warning appears indicating the file could not be sent. If this occurs, the user should send the CSV
the next time they connect to the email system. If the email is not sent because the PC is offline, the unsent email is placed in the
Outbox queue. Depending on how the email system is configured, unsent emails may be automatically sent the next time the system
is connected to its mail server. In some cases, you must manually send an unsent CSV file to the central station. The location of an
unsent CSV file is always the reports subdirectory of the job directory.
Perform the steps listed in this section on the PC on which the programmer resides. These steps assume you are using a Windows-based
OS with Microsoft Outlook 2007.

page 92 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.7.1 Step 1. Verify outlook profile name, password, and default email profile
Profiles contain settings for your information service provider, access to your inbox, address books, sets of folders, and other features.
Typically, you need only one profile. The Outlook Profile Name and Password are required fields when configuring the ES Panel
Programmer SDACT email information and default preferences screens. To verify what is currently set for these properties, follow these
steps:
1. Click Start and point to Control Panel. Click Mail.

Figure 66: Mail setup

2. The profile name is usually Microsoft Exchange Server, Simplex Grinnell, Simplex, or Outlook. Make sure the field labeled “When
starting Microsoft Outlook, use this Profile,” which specifies the default profile, contains the name of the correct profile.
3. Click the Show Profiles button. A dialog similar to the following appears.

Figure 67: Dialog showing default profile

4. Click the name and then the Properties button.
5. In the next screen, click the E-Mail Accounts button.
6. Double-click the email account, or highlight the account name and select Change.
7. In the next screen, click More Settings.
8. On the General tab, ensure Automatically detect connection state is selected.
9. On the Security tab, be sure Negotiate Authentication is selected for Logon network security.
10. Close all open dialogs.

page 93 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.7.2 Step 2. Add a central station entry to the address book

The steps in this section add the central station email address to the address book, and setup the mail program to queue unsent CSV files
to the outbox. In the event that you are offline when you build a job, the Outbox will then automatically send any CSV files contained in it to
the central station when you re-connect to the network.
1. Run Outlook. Click Address Book. When the Address Book appears, click the File menu and click New Entry. A dialog appears.
2. Click New Contact.
3. Click the list labeled Put this entry in:. Make sure the choice reads Contacts under the Outlook Address Book.
4. Click OK. A dialog appears, allowing you to enter a new Internet Address, in this case, the email address of the Central Station.
5. Complete the fields Full name, this is the name that you select in the address book, and Display As, this is the name that
appears in place of the email address. Enter the email address of the central station in the E-Mail Address field. Verify that the
order in File as: is correct. You may have to reverse it.
6. Click Save and Close.
7. To make the personal address book the first address list that Outlook searches, complete the following steps:

a. Click Address Book. A dialog appears.

b. Click Tools and click Options.
c. If the Personal Address Book entry Contacts appears in the list, skip to the next step. If the Personal Address Book entry does
not appear in the list, select the Custom radio button, and click Add button. Another dialog, containing address lists appears.
Scroll through the entries that appear, select Contacts under Outlook Address Book and click Add, and click Close.
d. Move the Personal Address Book entry to the top of the list. To do this, highlight the entry and click the up arrow, located on
the right side of the dialog, until the entry appears at the top of the dialog.
e. Click OK.

page 94 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.7.3 Step 3. The ES Panel Programmer Email Settings

The Email preferences settings, contained within the ES Panel preferences dialog, determine the default email entry contained in the
SDACT programming dialog. To set the default SDACT email address, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Edit menu and select Preferences. A dialog similar to the following appears.

Figure 68: Preferences dialog

2. Enter information in this dialog as follows:

- Profile.
- Password.
- Default Central Station Email Address.

7.8 Adding the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway

The IP Communicator (IPC) / Connected Services Gateway (CSG) is available in jobs you create with ES Panel Programmer revision 4.02 or
later. Only one IPC/CSG can exist in a job. If you want to add a different IPC/CSG to the job, first remove any existing IPC/CSG. There are two
possible configurations for programming the IPC/CSG depending how the it is installed in the FACU.
The configurations are as follows:
• Internal installation: Configure a 4100-6105 - IP Communicator, 4100-2500 - Connected Services Gateway or 4100-2504
- Connected Services Gateway with IP Communicator for a side mounted IPC/CSG in a 4100ES, or a 4100-6107 - IP
Communicator, 4100-2502 - Connected Services Gateway or 4100-2506 - Connected Services Gateway with IP
Communicator for a vertically mounted IPC/CSG in a 4100ES. Configure a 4010-9931 IP Communicator, 4010-2500 - Connected
Services Gateway or 4010-2504 - Connected Services Gateway with IP Communicator for the 4010ES.
• Close-nippled installation: Configure a 4100-IPC- IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway.

7.8.1 Deleting an IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway

To remove the IPC/CSG, complete the following steps:
1. In the Hardware Configuration pane, right-click the IPC/CSG and select Delete to open the confirmation window.
Note: When the IPC/CSG is located in the IP Communicator Box, delete the 4100-IPCCSGBOX- IPC CSG BOX.
2. In the confirmation window, do one of the following:
- Click Yes to preserve central station configuration
- Click No to discard central station configuration

7.8.2 Adding an internal IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway

There are two options for 4100ES internally mounted IPC/CSGs. Configure the 4100-6105 IP Communicator, 4100-2500 - Connected
Services Gateway or 4100-2504 - Connected Services Gateway with IP Communicator for side mounted IPC/CSGs, or a
4100-6107 - IP Communicator, 4100-2502 - Connected Services Gateway or 4100-2506 - Connected Services Gateway with IP
Communicator for vertically mounted IPC/CSGs. Configure the 4010-9931 - IP Communicator, 4010-2500 - Connected Services
Gateway or 4010-2504 - Connected Services Gateway with IP Communicator for 4010ES FACUs.
To add a IPC/CSG to the job, do the following:
1. In the Available Hardware pane, expand INTERFACE.
2. Drag and drop an IPC/CSG to the Hardware Configuration pane.

page 95 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.8.3 Adding a close-nippled IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway

If the IPC/CSG is close-nippled mounted in an external box, add the 4100-IPCCSGBOX- IPC CSG BOX to the job.
To do this, complete the following steps:
1. In the Available Hardware pane, expand Boxes.
2. Drag and drop the 4100-IPCCSGBOX- IPC CSG BOX to Unit 0 in the Hardware Configuration pane to create a new box.

7.9 Configuring the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway

To program central station reporting through the IPC or CSG with IPC, see Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.
To open the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway window, do the following:
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. Double-click the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway.
Note: The IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway could be in Box 1 or another Box.

7.9.1 Editing LAN Ethernet operation

By default, the IPC/CSG automatically obtains its IP address from the building LAN it is connected to. When the building network requires
the IPC to use a static IP, you must then configure the LAN Ethernet operation.
To configure the LAN Ethernet operation, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Options tab of the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway window.
2. From the Ethernet Operation list, select Automatic/DHCP or Static IP.
3. Optional: If you select Static IP, enter the IP addresses for the following fields: Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Primary DNS, and Alternate DNS.
4. Click Apply.

7.9.2 Editing Enterprise services settings

Use the Enterprise tab to disable or enable reporting of panel telemetry to the Enterprise services. This option is disabled by default.
To configure these settings, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Enterprise tab of the Connected Services Gateway window.
2. Select the Enable Enterprise Service check box to enable the service.

7.9.3 Configuring the e-mail server settings

To enable the IP Communicator to send e-mails on event notifications, you must specify the e-mail protocol. Configure either Microsoft
Messaging API, or SMTP e-mail server. Your company IT department can supply the e-mail settings. This is similar to setting up an e-mail
client program.
To configure the e-mail server settings, do the following:
1. Click the IP Communicator sub tab.
2. Select the Central Station Email Address check box and enter the e-mail address.
3. Click one of the following to select the e-mail protocol: Send Email using Microsoft Messaging API or Send Email using
SMTP mail server.
4. Optional: If you click Send Email using SMPTP mail server, configure the SMTP settings.

- In the SMTP Server Address field, enter the SMTP server address.
- In the From Email Address field, enter your e-mail address.
Note: When you build the job, the Build Progress window indicates the e-mail sent status. If the CSV file fails to send, review these
settings and contact your company IT department for additional help.
5. Click OK and Apply.
If the to-address is invalid, the SMTP server attempts to send the message and eventually sends an Message Undeliverable notice to the
From Email Address.
If the ES Programmer PC is running an anti-virus program, you may need to add an exception for the process (4100translate.exe) to send
emails.
Refer to your specific anti-virus vendor documentation for information about adding exceptions. For McAfee, the process is as follows:
1. Click Start and select All Programs, McAfee, and VirusScan Console.
2. Double-click Access Protection.
3. Select Prevent mass mailing worms from sending mail and click Edit.
4. Add 4100translate.exe to the Excluded Processes list.

page 96 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Important: Ensure that there are no spaces before or after the comma between process names, for example
outlook.exe,msimn.exe.
5. Click OK until the Access Protection Properties window closes.
Note: When you build a job, the ES Programmer automatically e-mails a report to the central station using the e-mail address you provide
if you select Per Point as the reporting type.

7.9.4 Editing the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway settings

Central station reporting is an optional function of the IP Communicator, while the Connected Services Gateway features Enterprise
server reporting . The Connected Services Gateway with IP Communicator contains both Central station reporting and Enterprise server
reporting. Use the IP Communicator tab to enable central station reporting and use the Central Station Configuration tool, or the
Enterprise tab to enable Enterprise server reporting. If a DACT is already programmed to report to the central station it can continue
to perform that function. In that case, do not enable the central station connection in the IP Communicator / Connected Services
Gateway window.
To configure the IP Communicator for central station reporting, consult Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.

7.10 Editing options for TrueAlert Controllers

TrueAlert controllers are linked to the panel by RUI communication lines. They are capable of managing up to three separate channels of
audible, visual and combination (A/V) TrueAlert NAC appliances and isolators.
The following power supply modules are TrueAlert Controllers:
For both 4100ES and 4010ES:
• The 4009T TrueAlert Controller (4009T)
For the 4010ES only:
• The Extended System Supply (ESS)
For the 4100ES only:
• The TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS)
• The IDNAC Card
• The Extended Power Supply (EPS)
Programming a TrueAlert controller consists of setting Card Properties, Card Options, and Device Properties. The card properties are
the card address, description, location, unit, box, bay, and so on. Click the Card Properties tab and see Specifying hardware components
for information about setting these properties. Card Options are global, and apply to all devices connected to the TrueAlert controller.
Device properties specify the type of device, and the coding pattern and power consumption when it is active. In the case of the TPS, the
user can also select the candela rating of the device. See Programming TrueAlert zones for information about creating TrueAlert Zones.

7.10.1 Opening the 4009T window

To open the 4009T TrueAlert Controller properties screen, expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon combination containing the controller,
and double click the icon.
There are a total of three tabs on this window:
• Card Properties tab
• Point Editing tab
• Power consumption tab

7.10.2 4009T Card Properties tab

The Card Property tab will be open by default when you open the 4009T window. The fields on this tab are filled with the default settings
provided by the ES Panel Programmer. These settings can be edited if necessary.

page 97 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 69: TrueAlert Controller Properties tab

7.10.3 4009T Point Editing tab

Class A Option Board. Select this check box if you are using Class A option cards on the 4009T controller or TPS.
LEDs Blink when Polled. Select this check box if you want the LED on each device to flash when the device is polled by the 4009T
controller or TPS. This option disables TrueAlert diagnostics that use the LEDs, for example, activate all LEDs diagnostics.
For TPS only, this extra option is available.
Code Candela Rating on Magnet with Test Mode Off. Check this box if you want the LED to code the candela rating of the device
when it is configured via the candela rating option, with the jumper in the FACP position, and a magnet is placed in front of the magnetic
switch on the device. The feature is available when diagnostic mode is not activated, and the system is not in alarm condition.

page 98 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 70: TrueAlert Controller Point Editing tab

Device properties are located at the bottom of the TrueAlert Point Editing screen. Use the device properties to set how the device operates
when activated.
To set the device properties, highlight the device and enter information for its properties as follows:
• Device Type. Assign the device type to the NAC appliance based on the following:
- A/V. Use this device type for combination TrueAlert Audible/Visual (AV) devices. All A/V devices use 4903-xxxx, 4906-xxxx, or 49AV-
xxxx series PIDs.
- ASTRB. Use this device type for amber strobe-only TrueAlert Mass Notification devices, that is, nonfire warnings. Amber Strobe
devices use 4906-xxxx series or 49VO-xxxx PIDs. If you are using the 49VO-xxxx appliances to replace the amber strobes, the Alert
mode on the appliance must be set to ON.
- HORN. Use this device type for horn-only TrueAlert device. Horn-only devices use 4901-xxxx or 49AO-xxxx series PIDs.
- ISO. Use this device type for a TrueAlert isolator device. The isolator device has a PID beginning with 4905-xxxx.
- STRB. Use this device type for strobe-only TrueAlert devices. Strobe-only devices use 4904-xxxx, 4906-xxxx series, or 49VO-xxxx
PIDs.
- UNUSED. Use this device type for unused devices.
• Custom Label. Enter descriptive text, up to 40 characters, for the device. In many cases, this label identifies the location of the device
and its device number in a single label. Consult facility management for the building before defining a custom label.
• Alternate Label. Enter descriptive text, up to 40 characters, for the device. This label is used on non-English systems as an alternate
name for the custom label. For example, on a panel running in Spanish, custom label can be in English and alternate label in Spanish.
• Coding Type. Assign a coding type to the NAC appliance based on the following:
• LMARCH120. Plays a low volume tone consisting of 120 beats per minute (1/4 second on, followed by a 1/4 second pause).
- LMARCH60. Plays a low volume tone consisting of 60 beats per minute (1/2 second on, followed by a 1/2 second pause).
- LONSTEADY. Plays a continuous low volume tone.
- LTEMPORAL. Plays a low volume, three pulse coding pattern, consisting of three 1/2 second pulses, each separated by 1/2 second
silence. Each group of three pulses is separated by 1.5 seconds of silence.

page 99 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- MARCH120. Plays a high volume tone consisting of 120 beats per minute (1/4 second on, followed by a 1/4 second pause).
- MARCH60. Plays a high volume tone consisting of 60 beats per minute (1/2 second on, followed by a 1/2 second pause).
- ONSTEADY. Plays a continuous high volume tone.
- TEMPORAL. Plays a high volume, three pulse coding pattern, consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by 1/2 second
silence. Each group of three pulses is separated by 1.5 seconds of silence.
• Current Draw. Gives the current drawn by the device. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power table and
to select the device, press the F11 key. When the correct device is selected, and the quantity entered, the correct power rating for this
device will appear in this box. Use the NAC Power Consumption Calculator, see Chapter 7.
• Primary Action Message. Assign Primary state Action Message to use for the device.
• Trouble Action Message. Assign Trouble state Action Message to use for the device.
Click OK to save the changes to the TrueAlert controller.

7.10.4 4009T Power Consumption tab

Column on the left (Available Power) gives the total current capacity that the 4009 can supply.
• 24V NAC is the total current a 4009T can supply to Notification Appliances.
• AUX Power is the total current a 4009T can supply on its Auxiliary Power terminal
• 24V Card is the total current a 4009T can supply to cards populated in its bay or on other bays, depending on how they are configured
through the Power supply drop down menu in the bay properties.
• The “Total Available” that the 4009T can produce is 8A of bulk 24V for system use. Column on the right (Power in Use) gives the total
current consumption from devices hooked to the 4009T.
• 24V NAC is the total current drawn by the Notification Appliances based on which devices have been selected in the Power
Consumption Calculator via the Point Editing tab. If the Calculator is not used, this box will remain at zero.
• AUX Power is the total current drawn through the Auxiliary Power terminal. This field must be zero at all times because the TrueAlert
card does not contain any AUXPWR points.
• 24V Card is the total current drawn from the other cards in the bay(s) powered by this 4009T. To make use of this box, the Supply Card
Power checkbox has to be selected, thus indicating that the 4009T is the source of power for other cards.
Total in Use gives the total current drawn from the 4009T by all external devices.

page 100 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 71: TrueAlert Controller Power Consumption tab

7.10.5 Opening the TPS window (4100ES jobs only)

To open the TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) properties screen, expand the Unit, Box, and Bay icon combination containing the controller
and double click on its icon.
There are a total of four tabs on this window:
• Card Properties tab
• Data Entry tab
• Point Editing tab
• Power consumption tab

7.10.6 TPS Card Properties tab

The Card Property tab will be open by default when you open the The fields on this tab will be filled with the default settings provided by
the programmer. These settings can be edited if necessary.

page 101 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 72: TPS Properties tab

7.10.7 TPS data entry

Select the following radio buttons and check boxes that appear on this tab. See Figure 73.
Battery Type:
Select the charge of the battery the FACP is using:
• High (greater than 18AH)
• Low (6.2 AH - 12.7 AH)
Options:
• Depleted Battery Cutout. This option determines the behavior of the TPS when a Depleted Battery and AC Failure condition
exists. For the Canadian version of the TPS, when this condition occurs, the system will log a message and shut itself off. For the non-
Canadian version, if no alarm was active prior to the Depleted Battery condition, VNACs will not activate if this option is enabled. This
operation is intended to be identical to the depleted battery cutout operation of the other ES Panel power supplies (e.g. ES-PS or EPS).
• Disable Charger. Disables the Charger.

page 102 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 73: TrueAlert Power Supply Data Entry Tab

7.10.8 TPS point editing

Class A Option Board. Check this box if you are using Class A option cards on the TPS.
LEDs Blink when Polled. Check this box if you want the LED on each device to flash when the device is polled by the 4009T controller or
TPS. This option will disable TrueAlert diagnostics that use the LEDs (e.g.: activate all LEDs diagnostics).
For TPS only, this extra option is available.
Code Candela Rating on Magnet with Test Mode Off. Check this box if you want the LED to code the candela rating of the device when
it is configured via the candela rating option (with jumper in the FACP position) and a magnet is placed in front of the device’s magnetic
switch. The feature is available when neither diagnostic mode is activated and the system is not in alarm condition.
Device properties are located at the bottom of the TrueAlert Point Editing screen. They allow you to set the manner in which the device
operates when activated.

page 103 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 74: TrueAlert Power Supply Point Editing Entry tab

To set device properties, highlight the device whose properties you want to set and then enter information as follows:
• Device Type. Assign the device type to the NAC appliance based on the following:
- A/V. Use this device type for combination TrueAlert Audible/Visual (AV) devices. All A/V devices use 4903-xxxx, 4906 -xxxx, or 49AV -
xxxx series PIDs.
- ASTRB. Use this device type for amber strobe-only TrueAlert Mass Notification devices (i.e. nonfire warnings). Amber Strobe devices
use 4906 -xxxx series or 49VO -xxxx PIDs. If you are using the 49VO -xxxx appliances to replace the Amber strobes, the “Alert” mode
on the appliance must be set to “ON”.
- HORN. Use this device type for horn-only TrueAlert device. Horn-only devices use 4901 -xxxx or 49AO -xxxx series PIDs.
- ISO. Use this device type for a TrueAlert isolator device. The isolator device has a PID beginning with 4905 -xxxx.
- STRB. Use this device type for strobe-only TrueAlert devices. Strobe-only devices use 4904 -xxxx, 4906 -xxxx series, or 49VO -xxxx
PIDs.
- UNUSED. Use this device type for unused devices.
• Custom Label. Enter descriptive text, up to 40 characters, for the device. In many cases, this label identifies the location of the device
and its device number in a single label. Consult facility management for the building before defining a custom label.
• Alternate Label. Enter descriptive text, up to 40 characters, for the device. This label is used on non-English systems as an alternate
name for the custom label. For example, on a panel running in Spanish, custom label can be in English and alternate label in Spanish,
or vice versa.
• Coding Type. Assign a coding type to the NAC appliance based on the following:
- LMARCH120. Plays a low volume tone consisting of 120 beats per minute (1/4 second on, followed by a 1/4 second pause).
- LMARCH60. Plays a low volume tone consisting of 60 beats per minute (1/2 second on, followed by a 1/2 second pause).
- LONSTEADY. Plays a continuous low volume tone.
- LTEMPORAL. Plays a low volume, three pulse coding pattern, consisting of three 1/2 second pulses, each separated by 1/2 second
silence. Each group of three pulses is separated by 1.5 seconds of silence.
- MARCH120. Plays a high volume tone consisting of 120 beats per minute (1/4 second on, followed by a 1/4 second pause).

page 104 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- MARCH60. Plays a high volume tone consisting of 60 beats per minute (1/2 second on, followed by a 1/2 second pause).
- ONSTEADY. Plays a continuous high volume tone.
- TEMPORAL. Plays a high volume, three pulse coding pattern, consisting of three 1/2 second pulses, each separated by 1/2 second
silence. Each group of three pulses is separated by 1.5 seconds of silence.
• Current Draw. Gives the current drawn by the device. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power table and to
select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity entered (see Step 4. Use the NAC
Power Consumption Calculator), the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
• Candela Rating. The column of the Candela Rating lists the candela value for the Multi-candela TrueAlert Appliances. The candela
values are associated with the Current Draws. You can select another candela value by using the Filter button to bring up the taglist. In
the taglist, the Muti-candela TrueAlert Appliances are modifiable which allows you to change to another candela value. You can assign
the candela rating to the NAC appliance based on the following:
- Hardware: Select this option if the device’s candela rating has been set to a fixed value via its jumper.
To allow the device’s candela rating to be set via the programmer, its jumper has to be set to the FACP position. If this is not the case, then
a trouble will be declared for this device.
• 15 Candelas: Set the device’s candela rating to 15Cd.
• 30 Candelas: Set the device’s candela rating to 30Cd.
• 75 Candelas: Set the device’s candela rating to 75Cd.
• 110 Candelas: Set the device’s candela rating to 110Cd.
Click Apply, then the OK button to save the changes to the TrueAlert controller.
• Primary Action Message. Assign Primary state Action Message to use for the device.
• Trouble Action Message. Assign Trouble state Action Message to use for the device.

7.10.9 TPS Power Consumption

Column on the left (Available Power) gives the total current capacity that the TPS can supply.
• 24V NAC is the total current a TPS can supply to Notification Appliances.
• AUX Power is the total current a TPS can supply on its Auxiliary Power terminal.
• 24V Card is the total current a TPS can supply to cards populated in its bay or on other bays, depending on how they are configured
through the Power supply drop down menu in the bay properties.
• The “Total Available” that the TPS can produce is 9A of bulk 24V for system use.
Column on the right (Power in Use) gives the total current consumption from devices hooked to the TPS.
• 24V NAC is the total current drawn by the Notification Appliances based on which devices have been selected in the Power
Consumption Calculator via the Point Editing tab. If the Calculator is not used, this box will remain at zero.
• AUX Power is the total current drawn through the Auxiliary Power terminal. This field must be zero at all times because the TrueAlert
card does not contain any AUXPWR points.
• 24V Card is the total current drawn from the other cards in the bay(s) powered by this TPS. To make use of this box, the Supply Card
Power checkbox has to be selected, thus indicating that the TPS is the source of power for other cards.
Total in Use gives the total current drawn from the TPS by all external devices.

page 105 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 75: TPS Power Consumption Entry tab

7.10.10 EPS/ESS point editing

To access the Point Editing tab on the EPS or the ESS card:
1. Open or create a job in the ES Programmer.
2. Open the Hardware tab.
3. Double click on the Icon of the EPS module that the Repeater is connected to. This will open the “Properties” window.
4. Select and click on the “Point Editing” tab.

7.10.11 Copy, paste, point editing, and special paste features

This feature is available through the Point Editing tab of the EPS and IDNAC card and allows you to copy the properties of a device and
paste them into the properties of a similar device by using the "Copy" and "Paste" buttons.
Standard Copy and Paste:
There are two ways to perform a standard Copy and Paste.
• Device by device:
1. Select the point to be copied.
2. Select the device type
3. Complete the options in the Properties widow.
4. Click on the "Copy" button located above the properties window.
5. Select the next point to be programmed and click on the "Paste" button.
6. All of the properties from the first device will now be copied into the new device's properties.
7. Make any editing adjustments required and repeat if necessary.
• By multiple selection:
1. Select the point to be copied.
2. Select the device type.
3. Complete the options in the Properties widow.
4. Click on the "Copy" button located above the properties window.
5. Go to the Point Editing spreadsheet and select all the points you want filled with the pasted properties.
6. Once all the points are selected click on the "Paste" button.
7. All of the properties from the first device will now be copied into the properties of all the selected devices.

page 106 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Special Paste:
The Special paste essentially works like the regular paste but gives you more options and more control over the content you paste. The
special paste gives you four advanced paste options:
• Auto Increment last number in labels: Selecting this options will automatically increase the existing number on the label by 1. For
example: Label DEVICE1 would be pasted as label DEVICE2. This option can be added to the "Paste All Properties" option and the
"Paste Label Only" option.
• Paste All Properties: This option pastes all properties of the copied device, including labels.
• Paste Labels Only: This option only pastes the copied labels.
• Paste Exclude Labels: Pastes all copied properties of the device except the labels

page 107 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.10.12 TrueAlert ES AO appliance point editing

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert ES Audible (AO) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 32: TrueAlert ES AO point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message: This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
Available settings:
• Indoor
• Weatherproof UL
• Weatherproof ULC
Horn Type Broadband Multitone
Tone BROADBAND BROADBAND, 520 Hz, BELL, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN, HILO, CHIME,
HARDWARE
Coding Type Select the Coding Type that will determine the cadence of the audible signal.
System Default This will set the coding to the value determined in the System Option tab.
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three 1/2 second pulses, each
separated by a 1/2 second silence. Each three pulse group is separated
by 1-1/2 seconds of silence. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 20 A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1.5
second pulse on, 1.5 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/2
second pulse on, 1/2 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4
second pulse on, 1/4 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
On Steady On steadily.
Temporal 4 A CO gas warning that is a repeated sequence of four cycles of 100 msec
on with 100 msec off, followed by 5 seconds off.
Volume Set the appliance volume:
High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to
Panel.
Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to
Panel.
Hardware Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.13 TrueAlert ES VO appliances point editing

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert ES Visual (VO) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 33: TrueAlert ES VO point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
Message message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.

page 108 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 33: TrueAlert ES VO point editing options

Option Description
Trouble Action This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Message
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
Indoor. Available candela System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
options: tab.
15 candela
30 candela
75 candela
110 candela
135 candela
185 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Weatherproof UL. Available System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
candela options: tab.
15 candela
75 candela
WP 75 candela
WP 185 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Weatherproof ULC. Available System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
candela options: tab.
20 candela
30 candela
75 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Operation Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
General Evac. The strobe will be automatically associated with the “ALL VISUAL” VNAC by default.
The “alarm/alert” switch on the device must be set to "Alarm".
Alert The strobe will be automatically associated with the “ALL ALERT” VNAC by default.
The user must select this option to configure the strobe as a “Mass notification”
device. The “alarm/alert” switch on the device must be set to "Alert".
Other When this mode is selected the user is confirming that the strobe will not have a
default assignation to a particular VNAC and that the VNAC must be specified by the
user.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance. The selection varies according to the appliance style.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.14 TrueAlert ES AV appliance point editing

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert ES Audible/Visual (AV) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 34: TrueAlert ES AV point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.

page 109 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 34: TrueAlert ES AV point editing options

Option Description
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
• Indoor. System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
• Available candela tab.
options: 15 candela
30 candela
75 candela
110 candela
135 candela
185 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
• Weatherproof UL. System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
• Available candela tab.
options: 15 candela
75 candela
WP 75 candela
WP 185 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
• Weatherproof ULC. System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
• Available candela tab.
options: 20 candela
30 candela
75 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Operation Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
General Evac. The strobe will be automatically associated with the “ALL VISUAL” VNAC by default.
The “alarm/alert” switch on the device must be set to "Alarm".
Alert The strobe will be automatically associated with the “ALL ALERT” VNAC by default.
The user must select this option to configure the strobe as a “Mass notification”
device. The “alarm/alert” switch on the device must be set to "Alert".
Other When this mode is selected the user is confirming that the strobe will not have a
default assignation to a particular VNAC and that the VNAC must be specified by the
user.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance. The selection varies according to the appliance style.
Horn Type Broadband Multitone
Tone BROADBAND BROADBAND, 520 Hz, BELL, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN, HILO, CHIME, HARDWARE
Coding Type Select the Coding Type that will determine the cadence of the audible signal.
System Default This will set the coding to the value determined in the System Option tab.
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated
by a 1/2 second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1-1/2 seconds of
silence. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 20 A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1.5 second
pulse on, 1.5 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/2 second
pulse on, 1/2 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4 second
pulse on, 1/4 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
On Steady On steadily.
Temporal 4 A CO gas warning that is a repeated sequence of four cycles of 100 msec on with
100 msec off, followed by 5 seconds off.

page 110 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 34: TrueAlert ES AV point editing options

Option Description
Volume Set the appliance volume:
High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Hardware Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.15 ISO options

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert Isolators.
The following editing options are available for this device:
Table 35: TrueAlert isolator editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.

7.10.16 Repeater options

Use this device type to point edit IDNAC or EPS Repeaters.
The 4009 IDNAC Repeater is a TrueAlert ES Addressable device that extends the maximum wiring distance supported by the IDNAC
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC).
Consult the 4009 IDNAC Repeater manual 579-1019 for more information.
The following editing options are available for this device:
Table 36: IDNAC or EPS repeater editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Depleted Battery When this option is selected the Repeater will shut itself off after detecting a depleted battery condition when no
Cutout AC power is present. This option is de-selected by default.
Repeater Operation Select the option that corresponds to the Repeater’s wiring style.
• For local Class B Wiring select "Class B Spur"
• For local Class A Loop Wiring select "Class A Spur"
• For extended Class A Loop Wiring select "Class A Loop"

7.10.17 DCAI options

Use this device type to point edit DCAI cards.
Note: A warning will appear if the number of DCAI cards added to the Point Editing Table does not correspond to the number of cards
added to the job. The 4100-6103 Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) card converts the Class B output of an EPS IDNAC or IDNAC card into two
isolated Class A outputs. Consult the DCAI manual 579-1029 for more information.

The following editing options are available for this device:

Table 37: EPS or IDNAC DCAI editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.

page 111 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 37: EPS or IDNAC DCAI editing options

Option Description
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Loop 1 Address The Loop 1 Address is automatically set by the programmer.
Loop 2 Address When the second loop is used the programmer will assign it a virtual address. This virtual address does not need
to be adjacent to the loop 1 hardware address.

7.10.18 TrueAlert STRB appliances point editing

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert Strobe (STRB) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 38: TrueAlert STRB point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
• Indoor. Available System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
candela options: tab.
15 candela
30 candela
75 candela
110 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Operation Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
General Evac. The strobe will be automatically associated with the “ALL VISUAL” VNAC by default.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.19 TrueAlert Horn appliance point editing

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert Horn appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 39: TrueAlert horn point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message: This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Style Select the Indoor Style

page 112 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 39: TrueAlert horn point editing options

Option Description
Coding Type Select the Coding Type that will determine the cadence of the audible signal.
System Default This will set the coding to the value determined in the System Option tab.
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three 1/2 second pulses, each separated by a 1/2
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1-1/2 seconds of silence. Pattern
repeats until alarm silence.
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/2 second pulse on, 1/2
second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4 second pulse on,
1/4 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
On Steady On steadily.
Volume Set the appliance volume:
High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.2 TrueAlert AV appliances point editing

0

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert Strobe Audible/Visual (AV) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 40: TrueAlert AV point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
• Indoor. Available System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
candela options: tab.
15 candela
30 candela
75 candela
110 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Operation Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
The strobe and horn appliances will be automatically associated respectively with the “ALL VISUAL” and "ALL
AUDIBLE" VNAC by default.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance.
Coding Type Select the Coding Type that will determine the cadence of the audible signal.
System Default This will set the coding to the value determined in the System Option tab.
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three 1/2 second pulses, each separated
by a 1/2 second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1-1/2 seconds of
silence. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/2 second
pulse on, 1/2 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4 second
pulse on, 1/4 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
On Steady On steadily.

page 113 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 40: TrueAlert AV point editing options

Option Description
Volume Set the appliance volume:
High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.21 TrueAlert ASTRB appliances point editing

Use this device type to point edit TrueAlert Alert Strobe (ASTRB) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 41: TrueAlert ASTRB point editing options
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to have an alternative description of the appliance.
Current Draw (Amps) Gives the current drawn by the appliance. The current draw is based on the device PID. To access the Power
table and to select the device, the user must press on F11. Once the correct device is selected, and the quantity
entered the correct power rating for this device will appear in this box.
Primary Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the NAC circuit. This action
message will be selected from the list of default and user defined messages.
Trouble Action Message This selection allows the user to assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the NAC.
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
• Indoor. System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
• Available candela tab.
options: 15 candela
30 candela
75 candela
110 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option will set the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
Operation Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
Alert. The strobe will be automatically associated with the “ALL ALERT” VNAC by default. The user must select this
option to configure the strobe as a “Mass notification” device.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices on the EPS identically.

7.10.22 TCODE
It is possible to change the coding type on the fly using the TCODE SMPL op code. This op code is applicable only to the TrueAlert Power
Supply. When executed on an activated VNAC, this op code changes the default coding specified in this section to a different code
specified by the TCODE command. TCODE only works on activated VNACs, and once the VNAC is deactivated the coding reverts back to the
programmed default. TCODE is intended for operations like recall, where the cadence of the horns is changed when the incident is over
to recall people into the building. It should be noted that when a TCODE command is executed the VNAC stays in that state until another
TCODE command is executed, or until the VNAC is deactivated. Thus, if override of the TCODE induced cadence is required on activation
of a subsequent alarm that must be programmed using another TCODE command. Setting TCODE to OFF causes the coding type to revert
back to the original coding type.

page 114 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.11 Editing annunciator-specific properties

Internal, external, and LCD annunciator properties
The following annunciators, most of which are remotely connected to the panel by an RUI, all use the same property sheet for configuring
what an operator can do from the remote location.
• 4604-9201 External Graphical LCD Annunciator
• 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• 4120 Graphical LCD Annunciator
Note: For a 4010ES job, the 4100-7401 - Flat 24 Point Graphics Interface, 4100-7402 Graphic LED/Sw Ctrl w/32 LED, 4606-9102 LCD,
4100-7403 are available. The 4100-7474 annunciators are also available. To set the annunciator properties for one of these annunciators,
do the following:
1. Click on the Hardware tab to open the Hardware window.
2. Expand the unit, box, and bay combination in which the annunciator resides.
3. Double-click on the annunciator's icon. When the properties sheet appears, click on the LCD Annunciator tab. A dialog similar to
the one shown below appears.

Figure 76: Annunciator Property sheet

Note: Alternatively, right click on the icon of the annunciator, and select "Properties" from the pop up window.
4. The LCD Annunciator tab lists the display functions. Toggle the functions on or off using the KEYSWITCH Required and
OVERRIDE on Alarm check boxes:
- KEYSWITCH Required. Select the KEYSWITCH Required check box to ignore a function unless a key is inserted in the annunciator's
key switch, and the position of the key is on.
- OVERRIDE on Alarm. Select the OVERRIDE on Alarm check box so that if the KEYSWITCH Required check box is selected, the key
switch is not required during an alarm situation.

page 115 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.11.1 4100-7402 Graphic LED/Switch Controller

The standard 4100-7402 Graphic LED/Switch Controller ships with 32 LEDs. An optional 32 LEDs, and up to 64 optional switches, can
be connected to the 4100-7402 annunciator. Use the annunciator property sheet, as described below, to specify if any optional LEDs or
switches are connected to the controller.
To see the annunciator properties for the 4100-7402 Graphic LED/Switch Controller, do the following:
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. Expand the unit, box, and bay combination in which the annunciator resides.
3. Double click on the annunciator's icon. The Properties sheet for the annunciator appears. Click on the Configure tab. A dialog
similar to the one shown below appears.

Figure 77: Annunciator specific properties

Figure 78: Annunciator specific properties

4. Check the boxes on the left that correspond to the optional LED and switch modules connected to the controller. The box at the
top represents the standard LEDs that accompany the controller.

7.11.2 4100-FUI-InfoAlarm
The InfoAlarm shares the properties of the other remote annunciator cards, and also features configurable pseudo points similar to
the standard 2X40 operator interface. As with other annunciator cards, right-click on the Front Display InfoAlarm card icon, and select

page 116 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Properties. The InfoAlarm properties window contains five tabs: Card Properties, Annunciator Settings, Point Editing, Access Levels, and
Point Vectoring. Refer to Programming non-audio points for instructions on how to configure keys, switches and LEDs.
In the Card Properties tab, there is a checkbox for “Memory Expansion Card Installed”. Check this box if the memory expansion card is
present on your InfoAlarm card. A mismatch between this checkbox and the actual hardware will cause a Configuration mismatch trouble
in the system.

Figure 79: InfoAlarm specific properties

Note: You cannot write custom control equations on InfoAlarm switches and LEDs.

7.11.3 Point vectoring

Point Vectoring on the InfoAlarm card is a two-step process:
1. Creating a list of points to be vectored
2. Selecting the list

7.11.4 Creating a user list

1. In the main window of the ES Panel Programmer, select the List tab to display the List window. The General List subtab, located
at the bottom right of the window is selected by default.
2. Open the TagList window by pressing the Insert key or by right clicking in the List window and selecting Add List.
3. Select points for the list using a combination of the following three methods. When you select points, the TagList window adds
the >> character to the left of the point to indicate that the point is tagged.

- Use the spacebar to select/deselect specific points. Click on the point you want to select and then press the spacebar once to tag
the point. Press it again to deselect the point.

page 117 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Click on the Tag All icon, located at the top of the TagList window. This selects every point in the Taglist.
- Click on the Tag by Type dialog to tag points based on their point type or device type.
4. Click on the OK button in the TagList window. You are prompted to name the list. Enter descriptive text and click on OK.

7.11.5 Selecting a user list

1. In the left pane of the Hardware tab, double-click on the InfoAlarm card icon and select Point Vectoring. See Figure 80.

Figure 80: Point vectoring tab

2. Check the Enable Point Vectoring check box to enable point vectoring.
3. Press F9 to open the TagList dialog.
4. Highlight the list you wish to display and press the space bar.
5. Click on Apply and then OK to save the changes. After you click OK, the Select list for display text box shows the name of the
selected list.
Note: Performing a Global Acknowledge from an annunciator with Point Vectoring will acknowledge points that are not visible at the
annunciator. To avoid this, it is recommended that acknowledgements are prohibited in a Global Acknowledge system by setting all
Acknowledge functions to Level 4 on the Access Levels tab.

7.12 Editing the 2120 interface properties for 4100ES jobs

The ES Panel's 2120 interface provides the physical interface between a ES Panel and a 2120 channel. Connecting the ES Panel to the
2120 channel allows the 2120 system to activate ES Panel signals or annunciate events when alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions
occur on 2120 initiating devices. Additionally, it allows the 2120 to monitor ES Panel initiating devices and activate 2120 signals if a ES
Panel initiating device activates. Information on connecting the ES Panel's 2120 interface to the 2120 channel is contained in 579-221. This
section describes the programming required to identify the ES Panel initiating devices, signals, etc. Key terms and concepts that you should
be aware of include:
• 2120 Channel. The channel is the physical connection between the 2120 BMUX (master at the head end) and the 2120 transponders
(slave devices). When a 2120 interface is installed in a ES Panel, it functions as a 2120 transponder. At its most basic level, the channel
carries status information from the monitor devices on the channel to the BMUX. The BMUX processes the status information
received from the monitor devices and sends commands to the control devices attached to the channel. In this type of system,
monitor devices never directly communicate with control devices. A 2120 system can support 2 communication channels.
• Transponder. Each 2120 channel can have up to 63 transponders, each of which is referenced by an address, ranging from one to
63. For the ES Panel, a transponder does not refer to a single piece of equipment, such as a single ES Panel, but instead refers to a
logical group of devices, such as a group of monitor or control points. These groups are known as slots and each transponder can
have between one and eight slots.
• Slots. Each slot in turn has one of the following types:
- Monitor. A Monitor Slot is a group of up to eight 4100 points whose status you want to be monitored by the 2120 BMUX.
- Control. A control slot refers to a group of up to 4 devices on a 4100 that you want the 2120 BMUX to be able to control.

page 118 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Broadcast. Broadcast slots identify devices (up to eight) on the 4100 that you want the 2120 BMUX to be able to control. Typically
these slots are only used to link 2120 devices to 4100 annunciator pseudo points.
Note: A 2120 software reburn is required to interface a 4100 to a 2120. The 4100 transponder address, monitor, and control slot
information must match the 2120 CMS file configuration.

7.12.1 Determine the number of transponder addresses required

Before you begin programming the 2120 interface, it is critical that you determine how many transponder addresses you will require
for the ES Panel and also which addresses are currently being used on the 2120 channel. To determine the number of transponder
addresses, do the following:
1. First determine the total number of points on the 4100 whose status the 2120 will be monitoring. Divide this number by eight.
This is the number of monitor slots required. Divide the number of monitor slots required by eight to determine the number of
transponder addresses required for the monitor slots.
2. Determine the number of 4100 points that the 2120 will be controlling. Divide this number by four. This is the number of control
slots required. Divide the number of control slots by eight to determine the number of transponders required for the control
slots.
3. Add the number of transponder addresses from Step 1 to the number from Step 2.

7.12.2 Opening the 2120 interface properties screen

Follow these steps to open the interface properties screen for the 2120 interface card 4100-6038 and 4100-0113.
1. Click on the Hardware Tab to open the Hardware Window.
2. Expand the unit, box, and bay combination in which the 2120 interface resides.
3. Double click on the interface card's icon. The Properties sheet for the card appears.

7.12.3 Define the general settings

1. Click on Port A. (The 2120 interface can use only Port A of a 2120/RS232 card.)
2. Click on Port Type and choose the 2120 Interface setting.
3. Set the communication settings to the settings being used on the 2120 channel. In most cases, if DC COMM is being used, the
baud rate is 4800 baud. Note that if any of the 2120 transponders are connected to the BMUX via a modem, the baud rate must
be set to 1200 baud.

Figure 81: 2120 Interface, Port A Settings

page 119 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.12.4 Data entry fields

Click on the Port Data button. The screen shown in Figure 82 appears.
• 2120 File Number. This is the eight-digit, alphanumeric file number of the 2120 configuration loaded on the 2120 BMUX.
• Base Transponder. See “Automatically Adding Monitor and Control Slots” below for information on this field.
• Relocatable Transponders. Check this box to permit editing of the transponder addresses assigned to the 4100.
• Positive Indication. When checked, indicates that Positive Indication is enabled.
• Time Sync. When checked, the 2120 updates the 4100 with its time. This ensures that the time on both systems is identical.
• Automap. See Data entry fields below for information on this field.

Figure 82: Port Data Screen, 2120 Interface

7.12.5 Automatically defining monitor and control slots

Before attempting to automatically define monitor and control slots, first calculate the total number of transponder addresses required
for the ES Panel and identify which transponder addresses are already in use on the channel. Next, determine whether a large enough
block of free, contiguous addresses exists. For example, if you need 10 addresses for the ES Panel, you would look for a block of ten free
addresses that are all next to one another.
If an appropriately sized block of free addresses exists, do the following to automatically define the monitor and control slots.
1. Click in the Base Transponder field and set the value of this field to the lowest number in the block. For example, if you need 10
addresses and addresses 10 through 20 are not being used, set the value of this field to 10.
2. Click on the Automap field. The programmer automatically adds the appropriate number of monitor and control slots.

page 120 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.12.6 Manually defining monitor and control slots

In some cases, you may need to manually add the monitor and control slots. To do this, the Automap field must not be selected.
• If you will be monitoring or controlling only a subset of the ES Panel points. (When you automatically add monitor and control slots,
the programmer reserves enough slots for all of the ES Panel monitor and control points.)
• If you are editing an existing job and you need to add a limited number of slots to the job.
• If you need to fit the monitor and control slots into a range of transponder addresses that are not adjacent to one another. For
example, if you want to add 32 monitor and control slots, you need four transponder addresses. Suppose, however, there are four
free addresses, but they are adjacent to one another. In this situation, you could manually add the slots, and manually specify the
transponder addresses.
To manually add a monitor or control slot, do the following:
1. Click on the Add Slot button. Refer to Figure 82 for the location of this button. A dialog similar to the following appears.

Figure 83: Add Slot dialog

2. Click on the Slot Type field and select the appropriate type of slot - monitor or control.
3. Click on the Quantity field and specify the number of slots you want to add.
Note: If you specify more than 8, the First Transponder field is the transponder address of the first eight slots. The next highest
transponder addresses will then be automatically assigned to the next 8 slots, etc. Make sure these addresses are free and not being
used by other slots somewhere on the channel.
4. Click on the First Transponder field and set the address of the first transponder for the group of slots you are defining.

7.12.7 Editing monitor slot data

Editing the monitor slot data to specify the 4100 points and modes that the 2120 will monitor. Note that the Point column in this dialog
shows the point address of the 2120 point that will be monitoring the ES Panel reference address.
To edit the monitor slot data, do the following:
1. In the 2120 Interface Data Entry screen (Figure 82), click on the slot whose data you want to define and then click on the Edit Slot
Data button. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 84 appears.

page 121 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 84: Editing monitor slot data

2. Position the cursor in the Ref. Address field, located at the bottom part of the screen. Press the F9 key to see a tag list of the
4100 points. Position the cursor on the point you want to select and press the space bar. A >> symbol appears to the left of the
point to indicate that it is selected.
3. Click on the Mode drop down list box and choose one of the modes. Refer to Table 42.
In this table, the resulting state (normal, current limited, open, short) of the 2120 point is listed at the top and the ES Panel states
are listed underneath the 2120 states. For example, if you assign the DUAL mode to a ES Panel list pseudo, turning the pseudo
OFF will be interpreted by the 2120 as Normal, turning the pseudo ON will be interpreted as Current Limited, etc.
Table 42: Monitor slot modes
Type of ES Panel Resulting State of 2120 Point
Reference Point Normal Current Limited Open Short
Dual - Multi Channel Signal Multi Channel Signal Off Channel 1 and On Trouble Channel 2 and
Status On
List Pseudo Off Channel 1 and On Trouble Channel 2 and
On

page 122 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 42: Monitor slot modes

Type of ES Panel Resulting State of 2120 Point
Reference Point Normal Current Limited Open Short
Fire - 2120 Fire Alarm Mode Analog Normal Alarm Trouble
Digital Off Alarm
List Pseudo Off Alarm Trouble
Mapnet Normal Alarm Trouble
Monitor Normal Alarm Trouble
Monitor - 2120 Monitor Analog Device Normal Current Limited Disable Offauto (if any)
Point Analog Pseudo Off On
Aux. Relay Off On Disable Manual Override
Digital Pseudo Off On
Feedback Off On
Graphic Input Normal Current Limited Open Disable Short
Graphic Output Off On Open Disable Manual Short
Override
List Pseudo Off On
Mapnet Input Normal Current Limited Open Disable
Mapnet Output Off On Open Relay Fault disable
Monitor Normal Current Limited Open Disable Short
Switch Center Up Down

7.12.8 Editing the control slot data

Editing the control slot data allows you to specify the 2120 points and modes that the 4100 will monitor.
To edit the control slot data, do the following:
1. In the 2120 Interface Data Entry screen (Figure 82), click on the control slot whose data you want to define and then click on the
Edit Slot Data button. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 85 appears.

page 123 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 85: Defining Control Slot Data

2. Position the cursor in the Ref. Address field, located at the bottom part of the screen. Press the F9 key to see a tag list of the
4100 points. Position the cursor on the point you want to select and press the space bar. A >> symbol appears to the left of the
point to indicate that it is selected.
3. Click on the Mode drop down list box and choose one of the modes. Refer to Table 43.
Table 43: Control slot modes
ES Panel Mode Valid ES Panel Reference Point
Control Analog devices with outputs
Auxiliary Relay Points
Digital Pseudo Points
Graphic Output
List Pseudo Points
MAPNET Output
Master Controller
Signal Points
DE Analog Device
Graphic Input Output
ONOFF Analog Devices with Outputs
Digital Pseudo Points
Graphic Output
List Pseudo Points
MAPNET Output
Master Controller
Signal Points

page 124 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 43: Control slot modes

ES Panel Mode Valid ES Panel Reference Point
PBH Analog Devices with Outputs
Digital Pseudo Points
Graphic Output
List Pseudo Points
MAPNET Output
Master Controller
Signal Points
Power Supply Points
LAACK None required
LSACK None required
LTACK None required
LSS None required
OFF Analog devices with outputs
Digital Pseudo Point
Graphic Output
List Point Pseudo
MAPNET Output
Master Controller
Signal Points
Power Supply Points
S1 List Pseudo Point
Signal Points
S2R List Pseudo Point
Signal Points
SON List Pseudo Point
Signal Points
GAACK None Required
GSACK None Required
GTACK None Required
LFACK None Required
LSR None Required
SA3 Signal Points
List Pseudo Point
SPAGE Signal Points
List Pseudo Point

7.13 Editing ES Panel BMUX interface properties for 4100ES jobs

The BMUX card is used to interface the existing 2120 transponders to the ES Panel. The card is essentially a physical media and protocol
converter, from 4100 Comms (RUI) to 2120 (20mA DC Loop). The BMUX card is installed into a ES Panel and is designed to communicate
to 2120 transponders through the DC loop communications peripherals such as the DC Loop to RS-232 converters. There is one DC loop
Comms Channel per BMUX card, and two cards are required for a two-channel system.
The 2120 Comms loop is a two-wire interface with the BMUX card acting as a master transmitter. The protocol is designed to have the
slave transponders respond to their address match by replying to the BMUX card command. The protocol is half-duplex, and the slaves
respond to the master transmitter by reversing the bus data direction. The card includes primary and secondary DC loop drivers, so that a
single open on any line does not prevent communications to the transponders.
The BMUX card is a flat-form factor ES Panel card in the 4 in. x 10 in. (double slot) format. The BMUX card supports the following
communication performance for signaling line circuits (SLC):
• Class B (Single line)
• Class A (McCulloh Loop)
• Class X (McCulloh Loop - enhanced with the use of 2120 Class X interface card)
The DC Loop communication supports the same baud rates that are supported by the 2120 DC Loop card. The DC Loop communication
rate is as follows:
• 1200 bps, Baud Rate
• 4800 bps, Baud Rate
The BMUX card supports the following ES Panel generic slave features including, but not limited to:
• 4100 Comms interface

page 125 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Slave Exec Download

• Slave CFIG download
• Earth Fault Search
• Except for:
• Transponder Local Mode
The BMUX card can report the following card status troubles to the ES Panel master:
• Earth Fault
• DC Loop Communication Channel troubles
• Abnormal condition of the slave executive
• Wrong Address
• DC Loop Class
• Extra Transponder
• BMUX CFIG Version Mismatch
In addition, the ES Panel master can report a BMUX card missing/failed trouble.

7.13.1 Accessing the ES Panel BMUX interface properties screen

Follow these steps to access the interface properties screen for the ES Panel (4100-6065) BMUX Interface card.
1. Click on the Hardware tab to open the Hardware window.
2. Expand the unit, box, and bay combination by clicking on the plus signs.
3. Add a second bay to the box if it does not already contain one.
4. From the Available Hardware pane, expand the INTERFACE components, select 4100-6065 BMUX Interface, and move the
interface card to bay two.
5. Double click on the interface card’s icon. The Properties sheet for the card appears as shown in Figure 86.

Figure 86: BMUX Card Properties Dialog tab

7.13.2 General settings

The Card Properties tab allows you to edit the general settings for the ES Panel (4100-6065) BMUX Interface.
Click on the Card Properties. This tab is default to open when you first access the ES Panel (4100-6065) BMUX Interface. The card
properties appear as follows:
• Card Address. To change the card address, click in the Card Address field and enter a numerical value.

page 126 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Card Custom Label. You can change the information of the Card Custom Label or the Card Alternate Custom Label by clicking on
their fields and entering a text string.
• Unit, Box, and Bay. The Unit, Box, and Bay fields are set with the current configuration values. However, you can change these
values by clicking in their fields and entering a numerical value.
• Location. From the drop-down list, select the location where the (4100-6065) BMUX Interface card is physically located in the bay.

7.13.3 Data entry

To change the baud rate and the channel style (Class B, Class A/X) for the ES Panel (4100-6065) BMUX Interface, follow these steps.
1. Click on the Data Entry tab of the 4100 6065 BMUX Interface.
2. To change the style, click on the drop-down box and select one of the following:

- Class B
- Class A/X
3. To change the baud rate, click on the drop-down box and select one of the following baud rates:

- 1200
- 4800

7.13.4 Transponder/Points tab

The Transponder/Points tab allows editing of a transponder’s properties and the properties of any slots belonging to a particular
transponder. The transponders and any of their slots are presented in a grid format. If a transponder has slots, the slot information can be
expanded and collapsed into view by clicking the + or - sign next to the transponder.
As the highlight is moved over the transponders and slots, their properties are mirrored in controls below the grid. These controls allow
the properties to be modified. The nature of the controls and their enable state will be modified to fit the context indicated by the position
of the highlight bar. For example, when a transponder is highlighted, the transponder type drop down will be enabled, while the slot type
control is disabled. If a transponder is ‘opened’ with the ‘+’ element, its slots and their types are displayed. Moving the highlight over the
slots enables the slot type control, if modifications are allowed.
Click on the Transponder/Point tab of the 4100 6065 BMUX Interface. A dialog box appears as shown in Figure 87.

page 127 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 87: Transponder/Points dialog

1. Highlight a transponder field by clicking on an Xpndr in the Transponder/Points screen.
2. Modify the properties of the transponder as follows:
- From the Transponder Type, select a transponder. See Table 44 for a list of transponders.
- A plus sign now appears in front of the selected transponder.
- Expand the tree by clicking on the plus sign.
- Select a slot by clicking and highlighting one of the eight slots.
- From the Slot Type, select UNUSED, MONITOR, or CONTROL.
3. You can enable the modem option by clicking on the modem selection.
4. Use the First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to navigate and find a transponder.
Table 44: : Transponders
UNUSED CDT ANALOG
SCC ET
SCC (102) 4100UT
BT 4100
FABT 4100+
DABT 4100U
VPBT 4020
CDT II 4002
ES

page 128 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7.13.5 Editing transponder slot points

You can edit the data of an existing transponder slot as indicated below. The Edit button opens a dialog box for the highlighted slot. It has
the standard ES Panel programmer point editing features. The editing features may be restricted based on the transponder type.
1. Expand the tree of a transponder by clicking on the “+” sign in front of its Xpndr, followed by selecting a transponder’s slot.
2. From the Properties section of the Transponder/Points screen, select the Edit Slot Point button. A dialog box appears as shown in
Figure 88. (Or double-click any slot.)
3. From the Device Type, click on the drop-down list and select one of the following options:
MONITOR CONTROL
UNUSED UNUSED
MONB Relay
SIGB
4. If MONB is selected for the device type, the following options are available for the Point Type:
Fire SPR12
STYLEC MPR12
Trouble UTILITY

Figure 88: Transponder-Slot Point Editing Popup dialog

5. You can enter a text string in the Custom Label and Alternate Custom Label fields.
6. From the Primary Action Message drop-down list, select one of the following options:

- No Option
- 1: Fire

page 129 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- 2: Priority
- 3: Supervisory
- 4: Trouble
7. From the Trouble Action Message drop-down list, select one of the following options:

- No Option
- 1: Fire
- 2: Priority
- 3: Supervisory
- 4: Trouble
8. Use the First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to move up and down the BMUX points.
9. Click Apply followed by clicking OK to register the changes.

7.13.6 BMUX pseudo points

The pseudo points tab displays the BMUX channel 0 transponders and their slots. Editing a slot opens a pop-up dialog for the slot’s points
that displays the point number and corresponding ES Panel pseudo points. This tab is present on both channels 1 and 2 of the BMUX
cards. However, on each card this tab references common channel 0.
1. Click on the Pseudo Points tab on the 4100 6065 BMUX Interface. A dialog box appears as shown in Figure 89.

Figure 89: Pseudo Point tab

2. Expand the Xpndr (transponder) tree by clicking on the plus sign.

page 130 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

3. Click on a slot and highlight its field.

4. From the Properties section, select UNUSED or DIGITAL option. If the DIGITAL option is selected, the Edit Slot Point button
becomes enabled.
5. To edit a slot, click on the Edit Slot Points button or double-click its transponder’s slot. See Figure 90.

Figure 90: Pseudo point editing

6. From the Properties section, click on the Point field and press F9. A TagList dialog box appears.
7. Highlight any point whose device type is DIGITAL by clicking on its field. Press the space bar followed by clicking OK.
8. Click Apply followed by clicking OK to register the changes.

7.13.7 SCC Editing tab

The data of the status command center (SCC) is displayed in a simple grid format. Any transponder marked as an SCC will have entries in
the grid format. The SCC points shown in the grid format use the SCC addressing tradition of transponder (1-63) and point (1-255) rather
than the non-SCC transponder (1-63), slot (1-8), and point (1-8) scheme as shown in the Transponder/Point tab.
Fields that are editable for the current SCC entries are displayed in the Properties control and they can be modified through those
controls. The grid displays entries equal to the number of points entered for the transponder as shown in the Transponder/Points tab. The
SCC2 are displayed under the preceding SCC1 transponder.
The module type can only be edited on the first point of the module. The module type determines the number of points. It also
determines the type of points that occupies the module. This in turn restricts the kind of modes allowed. The Pnt Type column displays
blocks of LED or SW, depending on the SCC module. A NULL module displays ‘---’ for its points, sets its mode to ‘E’, and disables other
property controls. When switch modules are added, the SCC monitor slots and points are configured. (These points are shown in the
Transponder/Points tab.)

page 131 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Note: This dialog box is used only for the SCC and SCC (1-2) transponders (Xpndr).
Figure 91: SCC Editing tab
1. After the SCC and SCC (1-2) transponders have been entered using the Transponder/Point, click the Apply button in the SCC
dialog box. For more information, see the Transponder/Points tab.
2. Click on the SCC tab on the 4100 6065 BMUX Interface. A dialog box appears as shown in Figure 91.
3. From the displayed grid shown above the Properties section, highlight a given Xpndr and Mod# by clicking on the field. You can
use the First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to scroll through the rows in the grid display to find a given Xpndr and Mod#.
4. Select a module from the Module drop-down list. See Table 45 for a list of modules.
Table 45: : SCC modules
0000-8 Point Place Keeper only 6407 16 Point Green/Switch Module (3 pos)
0305-16 Point Graphic Lamp Driver 6408 16 Point Red/Switch Module (3 pos)
0306-8 Point Graphic SPDT Relay 6410 16 Point Red/Switch Module (2 pos)
0307-16 Point Graphic Switch 6411 16 Point Red/Switch Module (3 pos)
0308-8 Point Graphic Remote Switch 7301-8 Point Red LED Module
0402-16 Point Graphic Lamp Drive 7302-8 Point Yellow LED Module
0403-8 Point Graphic SPDT Relay 7303-8 Point Green LED Module
0404-16 Point Graphic Switch 7304-8 Point Switch Module (3 pos)
0405-8 Point Graphic Remote Switch 7305-16 Point Red LED Module
6401-8 Point Red LED Module 7306-16 Point Red/Yellow LED Module
6402-8 Point Yellow LED Module 7307-16 Point Green/Switch LED Module (3 pos)
6403-8 Point Green LED Module 7308-16 Point Red/Switch LED Module (3 pos)
6404-8 Point Switch Module (3 pos) 7310-16 Point Red/Switch LED Module (2 pos)

page 132 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 45: : SCC modules

6405 16 Point Red LED Module 7311-16 Point Red/Switch LED Module (3 pos)
6406 16 Point Red/Yellow Module 9999-Expansion Slot Place Keeper
5. Select a mode from the Mode drop-down list. See the list shown below.
E — Empty
A — Track alarm condition of a monitor point
B — Track bypass condition of a monitor point
T — Track trouble condition of a monitor point
X — Track a transponder trouble
S — Track system trouble
C — Track a control point
P — Track a pseudo point
D — Disable
K — Track transponder control point trouble
6. To allow the LED to flash, check the Alert check box.
7. Enter an associated point in the Associated Point field. For more information on how to enter a value, see the BMUX Pseudo
Points, steps 6 to 8.
8. To enable the update option, check the Update check box. Or you can reset the update option by clicking on the Reset Updates
button.
9. Complete the remaining point numbers for the given xpndr and Mod# by repeating steps 5 to 8.

7.14 Editing TFX Loop Interface Card Properties for 4100ES jobs
The ES Panel TFX Loop card is a ES Panel slave that provides a means to replace a TFX/Minerva series control panel with a ES Panel Master.
The card allows for the existing TFX/Minerva Loop addressable devices from former TFX/Minerva panel configurations to interface with a
newly integrated ES Panel. Each TFX Loop card accommodates a single TFX/Minerva loop. The card’s loop circuitry is electrically isolated
from the ES Panel Master panel.
The card is a flat, 4"x 5" form-factor module that plugs into the ES Panel power distribution interface.

7.14.1 Accessing the ES Panel TFX Loop Card Properties screen

Follow these steps to access the interface properties screen for the ES Panel (4100-6066) TFX Loop Interface card.
1. Click on the Hardware Tab to open the Hardware Window.
2. Expand the Unit, Box, and Bay combination by clicking on the plus signs.
3. Add a second bay to the box if it does not already contain one.
4. From the Available Hardware pane, expand the INTERFACE components, select 4100-6066 TFX Loop Interface (TFX/Minerva), and
move the interface card to bay two.
5. Double click on the interface card’s icon.

7.14.2 General settings

The Card Properties tab allows you to edit the general settings for the ES Panel (4100-6066) TFX Loop Card.
Click on the Card Properties. This tab is default to open when you first access the ES Panel (4100-6066) TFX Loop Interface card. The card
properties appear as follows:
• Card Address. To change the card address, click in the Card Address field and enter a numerical value.
• Card Custom Label. You can change the information of the Card Custom Label or the Card Alternate Custom Label by clicking on
their fields and entering a text string.
• Unit, Box, and Bay. The Unit, Box, and Bay fields are set with the current configuration values. However, you can change these
values by clicking in their fields and entering a numerical value.
• Location. From the drop-down list, select the location where the (4100-6066) TFX Interface Loop card is physically located in the bay.
• Loop Wiring Style. From the drop-down list, select the channel style (Class B, Class A/X) for the ES Panel (4100-6066) TFX Loop
Interface card.

7.14.3 Point editing

You can edit the data of an existing TFX Interface Loop point as indicated below. Click and highlight a TFX device slot. You can click directly
on any device slot or browse the list of devices as follows:
• <| First. Select the first device slot in the list.
• << Previous. Select the previous device slot in the list.

page 133 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Next >>. Select the next device slot in the list.

• Last |>. Select the last device slot in the list..

Figure 92: TFX loop card point editing dialog tab

1. From the TFX Device Type, click on the drop-down list and select one of the options listed.
2. Depending on the device type you selected, you can choose different options in the Point Type drop-down list. The point type
determines the function of the point and the message displayed on the system’s annunciators. For the TFX monitor device (non
analog device) such as a contact module, its active status (for example: contact closed for fire) is mapped to the "current limit"
physical status of the ES Panel point type. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of the ES Panel point types.
3. From the PNIS Code drop-down list, enter the PNIS code for the monitor point.
4. You can enter a text string in the Custom Label and Alternate Custom Label fields.
5. From the Primary Action Message drop-down list, select one of the available options.
6. Front he Trouble Action Message drop-down list, select one of the available options.

7.14.4 TFX limitations

The following are limitations that you should be aware of when editing TXF devices within the ES Panel Programmer:
1. Parent points of TFX multipoint devices cannot be made public on the network.
2. The TFX signal driver modules (such as SDA505, SDA506) do not support any kind of synchronized coding directly from the
programmer. All coding must be done using a third party module. These signal driver can de set to on or off.

7.14.5 4100-6066 TFX Loop Card Coding Pattern tab

The 4100-6066 TFX Loop Card Coding Pattern tab allows you to set two channel pattern signals for signal control devices as well as
sounder/relay base of the monitor devices associated with the TFX Interface Loop card.

page 134 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 93: TFX loop card coding pattern dialog tab

1. In the Pattern (1 or 2) Length in Seconds textbox, enter an integer value between 8 and 32. This value in unit Seconds determines
the signal length of the corresponding pattern. This is the total length of the pulsing cycle. It will be repeated until the output is
turned off.
2. Depending on the length of the pattern you entered in the Pattern (1or 2) Length textbox, enter a pattern string composed of 0’s
and 1’s. The most left bit is the pattern start bit, the number of characters must match the integer provided in the Pattern (1or 2)
Length in Seconds field.
3. SMPL program opcode CHLCODE provides user with a way to select the coding pattern 1 or coding pattern 2 for the TFX Loop,
the opcode DEVCODE can be used for the TFX device (signal or the monitor device with the Relay/Sounder base) to do the
channel coding selected.
Note: If the program does not send down the coding pattern using the CHLCODE to the slave, the default operation for the TFX loop
Slave to do channel coding is just to turn the coding devices to steady on.

7.14.6 TFX SMPL pre-alarm programming

The ES Panel does not directly support the pre-alarm event. By using SMPL programming, a PR12 digital alarm can be turned on when the
condition current of the TFX analog device reached the pre-alarm threshold or falls within certain range.
Note: For the comparison of the analog condition current, the SMPL Wizard only accepts integer inputs. To input a decimal value, you
must manually edit the condition current value directly from the SMPL editor. Below is an example. The procedure described subsequently
produces the following equation:

[INPUTS]
IF ANALOG>CONSTANT 1.000000mA
M2-2-0| Compare Analog| 912HEAT| HEAT|
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P512| DIGITAL| PR12|

page 135 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

[END OUTPUTS]
If you want the analog value to be 1.2mA, then manually change the 1.000000mA to 1.2mA.
This gives the following final equation:

[INPUTS]
IF ANALOG>CONSTANT 1.2mA
M2-2-0| Compare Analog| 912HEAT | HEAT|
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P512| DIGITAL| PR12
[END OUTPUTS]
1. In the CC Input/Output dialog, select "Compare analog/heat sensor" option in the input dropdown list, then click Next.

Figure 94: CC Input/Output dialog

2. The CC Point Qualifier dialog appears. Click and select the OR radio Button, then click Next.

Figure 95: CC Point Qualifier dialog

3. In the Point Selection dialog, enter the string "M2-2-0" in the Point Name text field, then click Next.

page 136 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 96: Point Selection

4. In the Qualifier dialog, select the "greater than" option from the Selected Qualifier dropdown list, then click Next.

Figure 97: Qualifier dialog

5. In the Analog Or Constant dialog, click and select the CONSTANT radio button, then click Next

Figure 98: Analog Or Constant dialog

6. The Enter Value dialog appears. Set the Value field to 1 by either manual insertion of by using the spinner buttons. After setting
the value, click Next.

Figure 99: Enter Value dialog

page 137 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7. The Qualifier dialog appears: Select the "mA" option from the Select Qualifier field, then click Next.

Figure 100: Qualifier dialog

8. In the CC Input / Output dialog, select "Hold Point" option in the Output dropdown list, then click Next.

Figure 101: CC Input/Output dialog

9. The Qualifier dialog appears: select "ON" in the Select Qualifier dropdown list, then click Next.

Figure 102: Qualifier dialog

10. In this dialog, configure the Set Priority and Reset Priority values by either using manual insertion or through the spinner buttons.
Set both values to 9, then click Next.

page 138 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 103: Output Qualifier dialog

11. The Point Selection dialog appears. Enter"P512" in the Point Name field, then click Finish.

Figure 104: Point Selection dialog

The SMPL equation is configured.

7.15 Editing TFX Voltage Regulator and 25V Regulator Module properties
The ES Panel TFX Voltage Regulator module provides a regulated 24V output that is compatible with PSM800/RPS424 power supply 24V
outputs used in TFX/Minerva systems. The regulated 24V output is used to power devices on the TFX loop that require 24V power. The
Voltage Regulator module, used un conjunction with the ES Panel TFX Loop card provides the means to replace TFX-500, -800 and Minerva
series control panels with a ES Panel while retaining the existing loop wiring and devices.
Note: Note: The 4100-5130 TFX Voltage Regulator Module is available on 4100ES jobs. The 4010-9916 25V Regulator Module is available
on 4010ES jobs.

The output is isolated from the ES Panel. It complies with power-limited requirements. The output is a "resetable" output allowing use with
addressable loop modules that interface to conventional detectors. The card is a flat 4"x 5" form-factor module that plugs into the ES Panel
power distribution interface. The Voltage Regulator card has an isolated earth detect circuit. Sensitivity is 10K ohms to earth. Earth trouble
is indicated on the card via trouble LEDs. Because the Voltage Regulator module doesn’t communicate with the ES Panel, an earth trouble
is reported by causing a negative earth fault on the non-isolated side of the ES Panel for detection by the EPS, SPS or other ES Panel power
supplies. It will also cause the trouble relay to change state for monitoring by an IAM or similar device.

7.15.1 Accessing the ES Panel Voltage Regulator card properties screen

Follow these steps to access the interface properties screen for the ES Panel TFX Voltage Regulator (4100-5130) or the 4010ES 25V
Regulator (4010-9916) card.
1. Click on the Hardware tab to open the Hardware window.
2. Expand the Unit, Box, and Bay combination by clicking on the plus signs.
3. Add a second bay to the box if it does not already contain one.
4. From the Available Hardware pane, expand the INTERFACE components, select 4100-5130 TFX Loop Voltage Regulator
card (4100ES) or the 4010-9916 25V Regulator card (4010ES), and move the voltage regulator card to bay two.
5. Double click on the interface card’s icon, The Properties sheet for the card appears as shown in Figure 105. The Properties
sheet for the 4010ES card is identical to Figure 105, except that the header reads 4010-9916 25V Regulator.

page 139 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 105: TFX Loop Voltage Regulator Dialog Tab

page 140 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

8 Using the Central Station Configuration Tool

Use the Central Station Configuration Tool to configure the IP Communicator to report to the central station. The Central Station
Configuration Tool is included with the ES Panel Programmer version 4.02 or later. The ES Panel Programmer invokes the Central Station
Configuration Tool.
If a DACT is already programmed for Central Station reporting it can continue to perform that function.

8.1 Launching Central Station Configuration Tool

You can launch the Central Station Configuration Tool from within the ES Panel Programmer. Alternatively, you can launch it directly from
Windows Explorer.

To open the Central Station Configuration Tool from the ES Programmer, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware Configuration pane, double-click the IP Communicator / Connected Services Gateway to open the IP
Communicator / Connected Services Gateway window.
3. Click the IP Communicator sub tab.
4. Select the Enable Central Station Connection check box and click Configure Central Station to open the Central Station
Configuration Tool.

Click File and select Exit to close the Central Station Configuration Tool and return to the ES Panel Programmer.

8.2 Configuring the communication paths

Use the Accounts sub tab to configure communication paths, account codes, and phone numbers or IP addresses. You can configure
central station reporting to have one, or two communication paths. Central station provides the account codes.
To configure the communication paths, do the following:
1. Click the General tab and click the Accounts sub tab.
2. In the Central Station Primary Communication Path section, enter the account code.
3. From the Interface list, select the communication path type: PhoneLine, Ethernet, or Cellular.
- If you select PhoneLine , enter the Phone Number provided by the central station.
- If you select Ethernet or Cellular, enter the Source Port number, Destination IP Address, Destination Port number, Use
Encryption, DNIS, Heartbeat Supervision, and Heartbeat Frequency provided by the central station.
4. From Use Encryption, select Yes or No. Use Encryption indicates if the communication for this path is encrypted. Central
station provides the encryption key when you require one for the installation.
- If you select Yes, enter the Encryption Key.
5. Enter the Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) for additional identification.
6. From Heartbeat Supervision , select Yes to enable the network connection supervision to the central station, or No.
- If you select Yes, select the Heartbeat Frequency to set the frequency that Heart Supervision information sends.
Note: These settings are based on central station hardware and the configuration of the account.
7. Optional: In the Central Station Alternative Communication Path section, repeat steps 2 to 6 to configure a secondary path.
Note:
• If the primary communication path is PhoneLine. You must configure a secondary communication path.

page 141 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 106: Communication paths

8.3 Configuring reporting settings

Use the Options sub tab to configure the following:
• Reporting Type specifies how the IP Communicator reports to the central station. Select Per Point to transmit changes to specific
point status. Select Event to transmit events of a specific type.
• Report AC Failure Delay is the amount of time that should pass following an AC power failure before the IP Communicator contacts
the central station to report the AC failure. This setting is intended to prevent the central station from being overloaded with AC power
failure events following a power outage. You must enter a time between 1 to 3 hours to be compliant with UL and NFPA.
• Send Unmapped Points. Mapped points are selected points that report status changes to the central station. Unmapped points are
points that are part of the FACU job but you have not configured in the Central Station Configuration Tool.
• IP Path Down Delay is the length of time an IP based connection can be failing before it reports to the central station. Use this
setting for IP paths that have heartbeat supervision to make failure customizable for the expected behavior. For example, a cellular
tower may require a longer period to reconnect to a cell tower if the connection is momentarily lost.
• Test Report Period is the frequency at which the IP Communicator report the panel status, normal or off normal, to the central
station.
• Central Station Line #. The central station assigns the line number for the account. They use the line number for reference when
you contact them.
• Central Station Email. The e-mail address for contacting the central station.
To configure these settings, complete the following steps:
1. Click the General tab and click the Options sub tab.
2. In the Reporting Type section, click Per Point or Event.
3. In the Report AC Failure Delay field, enter the AC failure delay. You must enter a duration between 1 to 3 hours to be compliant
with UL and NFPA.
4. Optional: Select the Send Unmapped Points check box to report a generic code to the central station for unmapped points.
5. In Test Report Period, enter the duration between 1 to 6 hours.
6. In Central Station Line #, enter the line number for the central station.
7. In Central Station Email, enter the e-mail address for central station.

page 142 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

8. Click Apply.

8.4 Editing the event codes

Use the Event Codes tab to edit the event codes associated with each of the ES panel mapping types. If an event occurs to a point
associated with one of the mapping types, the IP Communicator sends the specified event code to the central station.
Note: Do not edit event codes without prior authorization and direction from the central station.

To edit the event codes, do the following:

1. Click the Event Codes tab to display the list of mapping types and event codes.
2. From the Mapping Type list, select the mapping type for which you want to change the event codes, to display the associated
event codes.
3. In the Event Codes section, select the Enable Edit check box.
4. Optional: Select the Hide Unused check box to view only the events codes in use.
5. Click the pencil icon next to the Event Code or Restoral Code, and enter changes.

8.5 Editing the local codes

Use the Local Codes tab to do the following:
• Set the event codes received by the central station when the IP Communicator detects an error
• Modify the event codes for automatic test reporting
Note: Define the communication path troubles in the mapping types, not in local codes.

To edit the local codes, do the following:

1. Click the Local Codes tab to display the Local Event, Restoral, and Miscellaneous codes.
2. Select the Enable Edit check box.
3. Click the pencil icon next to the code you want to edit and edit codes as directed by the central station.

8.6 Editing the points

Use the Points tab to do the following:
• Select the points that have events routed to the central station. By doing this, you can prevent unnecessary messages, such as when a
pseudo point turns on and off, from being sent to the central station.
• Assign points to groups. This is a feature of CID communication format only. Use groups to split a large number of points into sub-
groups, such as all of a building smoke detectors. Groups are typically used to group points by location, for example, each floor in
a building can be a group. The central station can use the group information to provide the fire department with an approximate
location of the point in alarm.

To select points and assign points to groups, do the following:

1. Select a point.
2. Select the check box to enable the point to send events to the IP Communicator.
3. In the CID Group field, enter the group number of the point.
4. In the CID Number field, enter the number for the point identifier.
Note: If you selected Per Point reporting type, you can edit Mapping Type. See Configuring reporting settings for information
about reporting types.

8.7 Viewing reports

Use the report feature to view a summary of your configurations.
To view a report, do the following:
1. Click Tools and select Reports.
2.
- All, General
- Event Codes
- Local Codes
- Points

page 143 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

8.8 Building and downloading the configuration

The configuration for central station reporting is built in the ES Panel Programmer when you build the job.
The central station reporting configuration is downloaded to the FACU as part of the job. You do not need to download it separately.

For information using the ES Panel Programmer to build and download the job to the FACU, see File Transfer and Terminal Features.

page 144 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9 Programming non-audio points

9.1 Introduction
This chapter describes programming the non-audio points in the job. There are two types of non-audio points used by the ES Panel:
• Non-Audio Hardware Points, such as Monitor points, Relay points, and so on.
• Pseudo Points, which are memory locations on the ES Panel, capable of storing either digital (on/off) or analog values.

9.2 Overview
Use the Point Tab, see Figure 107, to view all points in the system, and to add and edit point information, such as the point type, custom
label, and PNIS code.
Important: The device type assigned to a point can only be changed from the Hardware tab. To do this, click the Hardware tab and
expand the unit, box, and bay containing the point. Double click the card with which the point is associated. When the Properties dialog
appears, click the Point Editing tab. Scroll through the list of points and highlight the point you want to change. Click the Device Type
drop down list and select the appropriate device type for the point.

This section describes the general features of the Point Tab, such as AutoFill, Search, Spell Check, Filter, and so on. These features are
available for use with all points, regardless of point type.

Figure 107: Point tab

page 145 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.3 Point, card, and unit views

Use the Point tab to sort and view points by unit, card, or point. To select one of these views, right click the point list and select View By,
and click Unit, Card, or Point.
• Unit sorts the points by the unit with which they are associated.
• Card sorts points by card, listing the points for each card below the icon representing that card.
• Point lists all points in the system in numerical order.

9.4 Sort function

Use the Sort function to sort and display points in ascending or descending order based on the Hardware Reference number, Point
Name, Device Type, Point Type, Custom Label, Alternate Custom Label, Primary Action Message, Trouble Action Message, or
PNIS code. To sort points, do one of the following:
• Press F5 function key. When the Sort dialog box appears, click the Column drop down list box to select the sort criteria, point
name, custom label, and so on. Next, select Ascending or Descending order and click OK.

Figure 108: Sort dialog

• Click on a Column. Clicking on one of the column titles in the Point tab window automatically sorts the point list in descending
order. Click on the column title again to sort the points in ascending order.

Figure 109: Location of column titles

• Right Click the Point List. When the list of options appears, select Sort. The Sort dialog appears. Click the Column drop down list
box to select the sort criteria, point name, custom label, and so on. Next, select Ascending or Descending order and click OK.

9.5 AutoFill
Use AutoFill to automatically add text to the Custom Label field. It is possible to select a single point, all points, or the points following
the currently selected point (Point Forward).
1. Press the F4 button or right click the point list, and select AutoFill from the list of options. A dialog similar to the following
appears.

Figure 110: Auto Fill dialog

page 146 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

2. Click the Auto Fill drop down list box. Select All, Selected, or Point Forward.
3. Enter the text in the Custom Label field and click OK.

9.6 Custom label spell check

Use Spell Check to validate the spelling of custom labels, incorrectly spelled words can be automatically corrected, or suggested
alternatives can be substituted.
1. Point to the point list and press the F7 button. Alternatively, you can right click in the point list and select Spell Check when the
list of options appears.

Figure 111: Spell Check

2. Correct the misspelled word in any of the following ways. Note: Use the Ignore and Ignore All buttons to ignore the misspelled
word.

- Click the Change or Change All button to accept the suggested spelling in the Change To field.
- Type the correct spelling in the Change To field and click the Change or Change All button.
- Scroll through the Suggestions drop down list, click one of the entries, and then click the Change or Change All button.

9.7 Search
Use the Search function to specify a search criteria to search the point list for the selected data.
1. Point to the point list and press the CTRL + F key combination. Alternatively, you can right click in the point list and select Search
from the list that appears.

Figure 112: Search Dialog

2. Enter the search text in the Search For field. Click on the Search in Column field and select the point list column (Hardware
Ref., Custom Label, etc.) in which to search. Click on Search Next to start the search.
3. To continue searching the point list for another occurrence of the item you selected in Step 2, press the F3 key.

page 147 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.8 Filter
Filter is useful for when you just want to see a specific subset of the system points. For example, all smoke detectors with a custom label
of “First Floor” or all door holder relays (i.e., points with a point type of DH).
1. Position the pointer in the point list and press the F8 key. (Alternatively, you can right click in the point list and select Filter from
the list that appears.)

Figure 113: Filter Tab

2. Select the type of points you want to see in the filtered point list in either of the following ways:

- Filter Tab. The Filter Tab (shown above) contains check boxes that allow you to select groups of points. For example, if you click on
only the Aux Relay check box and click OK, the filtered point list contains only Aux Relay points. If you select the Aux Relay and
Annunciator check boxes, the filtered list contains only these types of points.
- Advanced Tab. The Advanced Tab (shown below) allows you to filter the point list by three specific criteria: Device Type, Point Type,
or Custom Label. Specify the criteria and click OK to see the filtered list.

Figure 114: Advanced Tab

page 148 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9 Importing/Exporting a CSV file containing point definitions

Exporting and importing files containing the panel’s point definitions provides a convenient way for Technical Representatives, Project
Engineers, and facility management personnel to edit point information remotely from the panel or programmer. For example, a TR may
perform the initial point programming using the ES Panel programmer, export the file in a Comma Separated Value (CSV) format, and email
it to the building's facility maintenance personnel for custom label editing using the Excel spreadsheet application. The facility maintenance
representative then emails the file containing changes back to the TR, who in turn imports the CSV file back into the programmer.

9.9.1 Exporting a CSV file

To export a CSV file for editing, follow these steps:
1. Click on the File menu and choose Export.
2. In the list of Export options, choose Export User Points to Text File. A dialog similar to the following appears.

Figure 115: Export Points

3. Check the boxes corresponding to the type of points you want to export.
4. Select the appropriate option under Select Custom Label.
5. Browse or enter a filename for the CSV file in the File Name for text box. Use a file extension of .CSV
6. Click OK. The programmer generates a message indicating that the export operation successfully completed. The CSV file is
stored in the directory corresponding to the jobname. For example, drive:\4100UJOBS\JOBNAME (where JOBNAME is the 8 digit
code for the job).
Use Excel to open the CSV file. The file appears similar to the one shown in the figure below

page 149 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 116: Excel Pointlist

Note: It is recommended that you do not edit any fields other than the Custom Label field, which appears in Columns D, E, and F
above.

Note: After making edits, save the file. Use a filename.csv format and choose a file type of CSV. Excel may generate a message similar
to the following. There are no incompatible fields within the programmer's CSV file. Click on Yes to continue saving the file.

Figure 117: Saving the CSV File

9.9.2 Importing a CSV file

To load a CSV file, follow these steps.
Important: You should only import CSV files that have been created by the export operation.
1. Click on the File menu and choose Import.
2. A standard Windows dialog appears, prompting you to identify the CSV file to import. Locate and select the file and click on
Open.

page 150 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9.3 Configuring the Simplex BACpac Ethernet module and exporting CSV files
A BACpac module (hardware card) is a Simplex Microprocessor-based communication device that provides seamless, one-way
communications between a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and the industry-standard Building Automation and Control Network (BACnet).
The BACpac card is created jointly with Sierra Monitor Corporation (SMC). It currently supported for 4100ES job and 4010ES jobs.
To add the BACpac card to the job, do the following:
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Available Hardware pane, expand INTERFACE.
3. Drag and drop the card into your job to add the hardware.
Note: A RS-232 card is required to use the BACpac card. See 579-842 or 579-1015 for more information about configuring the BACpac
with the RS-232 card.
Configure the BACpac card to export specified points from the job using the Simplex ES Programmer BACpac Export Wizard. The wizard
generates a CSV file that you download to the BACpac card in order to configure it.
You can use the wizard to create a second, optional CSV file. Use this second CSV to configure Simplex FACP Metasys systems
communication with BACnet, through the BACpac card. Metasys is Johnson Controls Building Automation System Software Platform.
To invoke the BACpac Export Wizard, do the following:
1. Click File and select Export.
2. From the list of Export options, select Export User Points for BACpac… to open the BACpac Export Wizard.
To configure the BACpac Export Wizard, perform the following steps:
1. Select the format for the export CSV.
2. Select points for BACpac.
3. Specify input format for each card.
4. Optional: Create and specify Zones (BACnet Devices).
5. Optional: Assign points for each zone.
6. Select the CSV file name and location.
7. Review the summary and results.
These steps are described in the following procedures.
Note: If you exit the wizard without saving the CSV file, the Simplex ES Programmer prompts you to save the all current selections, or to
discard your changes.

9.9.3.1 Step 1: Selecting the export CSV format

When the BACpac Export Wizard first launches, you must select an export CSV format. To select the format, do the following:
1. Click an export format:
- BACnet/IP
- BACnet/MSTP (serial)
- Modbus/IP
- Modbus/RTU (serial)
2. Click Next to continue.
Note: If you choose zones or configure options in the following steps, and then return to this step to change the export format, all zones
or options automatically return to default values.

9.9.3.2 Step 2: Selecting Points for BACpac

Select the points in the Select Points for BACpac window. The following points are selected by default:
• 1-0-0: Card 1-PS Missing or Failed
• 1-0-2: AC Power Failure
• 1-0-3: Positive Earth Ground
• 1-0-4: Negative Earth Ground
• 1-0-8: Low Battery
• 1-0-9: Depleted/Missing Battery
• P11: Unacknowledged Fire
• P12: Unacknowledged Supervisory
• P13: Unacknowledged Trouble

page 151 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• P201: AC Voltage Failure

• A0: # Fire Alarms
• A1: # Supervisory Alarms
• A2: # Troubles
• A115: # Excessively Dirty Sensors
• A116: # Dirty Sensors
• A117: # Almost Dirty Sensors
Note: Depending on the type of power supply used, the default points from the system power supply (card 1 in this example) may have
different addresses.

All initiating points within the job are also selected by default, you can deselect these points if you do not need them. For Network Jobs,
Common Trouble Points are also selected by default. The next time the wizard is invoked, all points previously selected are automatically
selected again.

Figure 118: Select Points for BACpac

To select or deselect a point, do the following:
1. Click the point to highlight it.
2. Press the space bar to select or deselect.
3. When all points are selected or deselected as required, click Next > to continue to the Select input Format for Each Card
window.

Note: Right-click the point list to open a context menu. This menu is useful for searching and filtering.

page 152 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9.3.3 Step 3: Specifying Input format for each card

Specify the BACnet input format for each card selected in the previous wizard window.
The following defaults are used for the default points:
• Card 1 (power supply): BI (binary input)
• Card 128 (first system digital pseudo card): BI (binary input)
• Card 144 (first system analog pseudo card): AI (analog input)
For additional selected cards, the following defaults are used:
• Digital Pseudo cards: BI (binary input)
• Analog Pseudo cards: AI (analog input)
• All other cards: MI (multi-state input)
Note: For most cards, we recommend the multi-state (MI) card format in order to provide as much information over BACnet as possible
with the BACpac card. For example, if a point is in an Alarm State, Trouble state, Control state, or Utility State, any of these states can be
sent over BACnet if you use the MI format.

To specify input format, do the following:

1. Click the Format column for each card.
2. Select BI, AI, or MI.
Click Next > to continue to the Create Zones (optional) window.

page 153 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9.3.4 Optional Step 4: Creating and specifying zones (BACnet Devices)

The Metasys UI uses logical equipment devices to present information to the operator. We create these logical equipment objects and
serving/served by relationships between the equipment and space objects.
As the user navigates through the Metasys system using the space presentation format, they have access to the equipment that is serving
the space.
Splitting the Simplex points into multiple BACnet virtual devices enables you to limit the number of points that a user needs to
manage within a single presentation screen. The preference is to create a logical equipment device per controller. Much of the existing
configuration work flow assumes that this is the case.
For system integrations with Metasys, limit the zone point count to less that 200. This limit simplifies the manual discovery and
configuration process during a Metasys integration.
For small sites, it is acceptable for everything to fall into one zone. Larger sites benefit from splitting points into multiple BACnet virtual
devices (zones) in order to create a hierarchical presentation. Possible zone configurations are as follows:
• Create zones based on the building layout
• Create zones based on the FACU confirmation
• Create zones based on the FACU point type
• Put the 16 default points, see Step 2: Selecting Points for BACpac, in the first zone, and additional points in additional virtual zones.
You can add, create, and remove BACnet devices (zones) to help with Metasys configuration and presentation. If you do not need to do
this, click Next > to skip to the next step.

Figure 119: Create zones

To create and edit zones, do the following:
1. In the Zone field of the Zone Details section, enter the name of the zone. By default, all points are in the following default zones:
- ESPanel_IP for BACnet/IP or BACnet/MSTP
- Dev_TCP for Modbus/IP
- Dev_RTU for Modbus/RTU
Each zone must have a unique name consisting of 1-31 characters.
2. In the Device ID field, enter the a unique device ID (node ID in the CSV file).
- The default ID for ESPanel_IP is 32400. Each subsequent zone created is incremented by one.
- The Device ID must be unique. Confirm with the Metasys engineer or the building owner that the Device ID is unique from other
on-site BACpac devices.

page 154 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

3. In the Description field, enter a meaningful description of the zone.

- For example, the default description is for ESPanel_IP is ES Panel <jobname> Zone.
- Include a description consisting of 1-64 characters.
4. When you are finished editing the zone, click Add.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each zone you want to create.
6. When all zones are added, click Next > to continue to the Assign points for each zone (optional) window.
7. Configure additional settings in this window depending on the export CSV format:
- For BACnet/IP, enter values in the BACnet IP Port and Network Number fields.
- For BACnet/MSTP, select a value from the Baud list and enter values in the Max Master and MAC Address fields.
- For Modbus/RTU, select a value from the Baud, Data, Parity and Stop lists.
See Table 46 for default and valid values.
Important: The Network Number must be unique across all BACnet router devices on the customer’s network. Consult with the
customer site to avoid duplicate network numbers.
Table 46: Additional zone settings depending on export CSV format
BACnet/IP BACnet/MSTP Modbus/RTU
BACnet IP Network Baud Max Master MAC Baud Data Parity Stop
Port Number Address
Default 47808 0/unused 76800 / 127 11 76800 / 7 or 8 None 1
values 115200 115200
Valid 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 76800, 9600, 1 - 127 0 - 127 76800, 9600, 7 or 8 None, Even, 1, 2
values 19200, 19200, Odd
115200, 38400
38400
Note: If a network site has multiple ES nodes containing BACpacs, the BACpacs cannot use the same Device ID. This ensures that if points
are brought into Metasys from multiple ES Nodes, the Device ID/Instance ID is unique for each point. For example, if Node 1 has 3 zones
(using Device IDs: 32400, 32401, 32403) and Node 2 also has 3 Zones, use different Device IDs for Node 2 zones such as, 52000, 52001,
52002. In this case, it is acceptable if both Node 1 and Node 2 have points with the same Object/Instance ID because they have different
Device IDs.

To delete a zone, do the following:

1. From the Zone column, select the zone you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
- You cannot delete the default zone.
- When you delete a zone, all points assigned to the zone are automatically reassigned to the default zone.

9.9.3.5 Optional Step 5: Assigning points for each zone

Use the Assign points for each zone (optional) window to organize points into the zones specified in the Select input Format for
Each Card window. If you do not need to organize the points, click Next> to continue to the Select CSV File Name and Location
window.
To assign the points to a zone, do the following:
1. From the Point Name column, select a point.
2. From the Zone list, select a zone.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you assign each point.
4. Click Next> to continue to the Select CSV File Name and Location window.

Note:
• Use the context menu, or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F to search.
• Click column headers to sort.
For each Zone created, the Programmer automatically creates a list pseudo point which contains all of the points within that list. By default,
the zone list point is selected for export. The list name is the same as the Zone name. The Programmer does not include NXNA points in
the pseudo list.

page 155 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9.3.6 Step 6: Selecting the CSV file name and location

Use the Select CSV File Name and Location window to the select the CSV output name and location.
To edit the name and location, do the following:
1. In the Select CSV File for field, enter the file path and file name.
- If this file already exists, an Overwrite File confirmation window appears.
2. Optional: Select the Generate Mapping File checkbox to generate a mapping text file within the job directory.
Note: You can not edit the name or location of this file. If the file already exists, the new text file automatically replaces the old
text file.
3. Optional: Select the Generate Metasys Integration Data checkbox to generate a second CSV that you can use as input for a
separate tool for importing into Metasys. This is an alternative to discovering the point through BACnet.
4. Click Next> to continue to the Summary window.
The Generate Metasys Integration Data CSV contains the following columns:
• Point Name string
• Full Custom Label for the Point
• ES Panel Device Type string
• ES Panel Device Type ID
• ES Panel Point Type string
• ES Panel Point Type ID
• Zone Name
• Zone Description
• BACnet Point Type string (MI, AI, or BI)
• BACnet Point Instance number
• BACnet device ID

page 156 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9.3.7 Reviewing the summary

The Summary window confirms if the CSV files are successfully exported. At this stage the wizard checks the SMC max point formula and
issues a warning if the point capacity is over 1500. It will suggest an upgrade if necessary.

Figure 120: Successful export summary

Simplex offers different versions of the BACpac card based on point capacity requirements as follows:
• 4100-6069 BACpac ETHERNET MODULE, 1.5K PT. CAP
• 4100-6110 BACpac ETHERNET MODULE, 5K PT. CAP
• 4100-6111 BACpac ETHERNET MODULE, 15K PT. CAP.
• 4010-9915 BACpac ETHERNET MODULE, 1.5K PT. CAP.
Contact Simplex Sales if you require a larger point capacity.
If any point labels were modified, such as truncated, a separate comment line is included in the exported CSV file indicating the original
point label and the modified map descriptor label. The CSV file contains information about the ES Programmer and when it was created.
At this point the wizard also checks if it contains an RS-232 card with a CPP Port. If not, a warning is displayed.

page 157 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.9.3.8 Downloading the CSV to BACpac

Download the CSV file to the BACpac using the SMC FieldServer toolkit. The SMC FieldServer toolkit is available from
www.sierramonitor.com. To download the CSV file, complete the following steps:
1. Launch the FieldServer Toolkit application and connect to your BACpac card.
2. In the Navigation pane, click Setup and select File Transfer.
3. From the File Transfer pane, click the General sub tab.
4. Download your prof1.csv file and select Submit.
Important: Ensure you download prof1.csv to in the General sub tab. Downloading the prof1.csv in the Configuration sub tab deletes
the BACpac device configuration.

9.9.3.9 Importing CSV to Metasys

The Metasys Import CSV file can be leveraged by the Johnson Controls Mass Changes Tool (MCT) to quickly and easily configure the Simplex
integration into Metasys. MCT has several rich features you can use to define the network tree view and labels, alarm extensions and
priorities, and the Metasys UI equipment objects. When you have customized your configuration to meet the needs of the project, MCT
can push the configuration data to Metasys by creating a Metasys import file.

9.10 Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs

9.10.1 Introduction
This section describes programming the function keys, LEDs and switches located on the system CPU card, display cards, and annunciator
cards. See “Programming 24 Point I/O Points” later in this chapter for information on programming a 24 Point I/O Input or Output. LEDs
and Switches perform the following functions:
• LEDs can be used to annunciate changes to the status of specific system components (for example, LED lights when power supply
detects an Earth ground).
• Switches allow components of the building's fire, audio, HVAC, and security systems to be manually controlled.

9.10.2 Step 1. Choose LED or switch to program

Function Keys (CPU Card only), LED and Switch points can be programmed from either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab. The
Hardware tab lists points on a per-card basis, whereas the Point Tab lists all points in the system. (Figure 121 shows the Hardware
Tab point editing screen; the Point Tab programming screen is similar. Some fields, such as device type, may only be available from the
Hardware Tab point editing screen.)
Table 47: Selecting LED or Switch
Location Tab Procedure
CPU Card LEDs and Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
Function Keys 2. Locate the LED or switch to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options.
3. Double click on the LED or Switch point. A properties window similar to the one
shown in Figure 121 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the Unit 0, Box1,
and Bay1 icons.
2. Double click on the card icon labeled (slot4) (xxx) 4100-000-CPU. A card-
specific dialog box, containing four tabs, appears.
Note: For a 4010ES job, double-click on the card icon labeled (---)(xxx)
4010-000C - 4010 CPU.
3. Click on the Display tab. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 121
appears. Click on the Display checkbox.
4. Click on the LED or Switch point.

page 158 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 47: Selecting LED or Switch

Location Tab Procedure
Display Card and Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
Annunciator LEDs and 2. Locate the LED or switch to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
Switches bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options.
3. Double click on the LED or Switch point. A properties window similar to the one
shown in Figure 121 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
Unit, Box, and Bay icons.
2. Double click on the card icon (LED and Switch Display Card, LCD Annunciator,
RCU, SCU, InfoAlarm or 24 I/O) containing the LED or switch point you want to
edit. A properties window similar to the one shown in Figure 121 appears.
3. Click on the LED or Switch point.

Figure 121: Typical Programming Screen for LEDs/Switches

Click on the LED or switch you want to program.

9.10.3 Step 2. Select the switch or LED mode

Click on the Mode drop down list box and select a Mode for the switch or LED. The mode determines what the switch or LED does (for
example, toggle the enable/disable state of a point). Refer to Appendix B LED/Switch Modes for a list of the switch and LED modes.

9.10.4 Step 3. Choose the Reference Address

How the system uses the reference address depends on whether you are programming a switch or LED. If you are programming a switch,
the reference address is the system function (system reset for example) or output device (relay point, for example) controlled by the
switch. If you are programming an LED, the reference address refers to the point whose state change triggers the LED to illuminate. For
example, if you choose an LED mode of ON, the LED lights when the state of the referenced point changes to On.
To set the reference address, click on the Reference Address field and select a point.

9.10.5 High-level mode programming for display cards

The 4100-0403, 4100-0404, and 4100-0405 display cards allow high-level programming. This type of programming allows multiple switches
and LEDs to controlled by a single high-level mode, eliminating the need to program LEDs and Switches separately.
Follow these steps to perform high-level programming on the 4100-0403, 4100-0404, or 4100-0405 display cards.
1. Double click on the card's icon in the Hardware window and click on the Point Editing tab.
2. Click on the High Level button in the upper right corner of the window. A window similar to the one shown below appears.

page 159 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 122: Setting High Level Mode

3. Click on the Mode drop down list box and select a Mode for the switch and LED. The mode determines what the LED/Switch pair
does (for example, toggle the enable/disable state of a point and light the LED). Refer to Appendix B LED/Switch Modes for a list
of the high-level modes.
4. Click on the reference address and specify the control point that will be controlled by the switch portion of the LED/Switch pair.

9.11 Programming monitor points

9.11.1 Introduction
Monitor points can be used to observe the status of the following types of devices.
• Fire alarm initiating devices, including pull stations, smoke detectors, etc.
• Critical components of the fire system, such as waterflow switches and fire pumps.
• Security alarm initiating devices, such as glass break detectors and motion detectors.

9.11.2 Step 1. Choose a monitor point to program

Monitor points can be programmed from either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab. The Hardware Tab lists points on a per-card basis
and allows editing of both the point type and device type. The Point Tab lists all points in the system, but allows only the Point Type to be
edited.
Use the following procedures to edit the attributes for a specific monitor point.

page 160 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 48: Selecting monitor point

Tab Procedure
Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
2. Locate the monitor point to be programmed. One easy way to do this is to use the Filter option. Right
click in the Point Window. When the Filter option appears, click on the Monitor checkbox and select
OK. The Point Window then displays only monitor points.
3. Double click on the monitor point. A properties window similar to the one shown in Figure 123
appears. The Device Type field, which is shown as an active field in the figure, is not available in the
Point Tab. Use the Hardware Tab if you need to edit the monitor point's device type.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the Unit, Box, and Bay icons containing
the monitor card.
2. Double click on the monitor card icon. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 123 appears.
3. Click on the monitor point.

Figure 123: Monitor Point Programming

page 161 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.11.3 Step 2. Define the device type

The device type identifies the specific type of Monitor Device being programmed. Available choices are listed in the table below. The
Device Type field is editable only when the monitor point is selected using the Hardware Tab.
Click on the Device Type field and specify one of the device types listed in the following table.
Table 49: Monitor Device Types
Device Type Description
SMONB Identifies the zone as a Class B Monitor/Security Zone.
SCAN50 Identifies the zone as a 0 - 50% Detection/Scanning Zone (used with Normally Closed security devices).
SMONA Identifies the zone as a Class A Monitor/Security Zone.
MONA Identifies the point as a Class A monitor device such as a pull station, smoke detector, etc.
MONB Identifies the point as a Class B monitor device such as a pull station, smoke detector, etc.

9.11.4 Step 3. Define the point type

Click on the Point Type drop down list box and select a point type for the monitor point. The point type determines the function of the
point and the message displayed on the system annunciators. Refer to Appendix A Software point types for a complete list of the point
types.

9.11.5 Step 4. Define the custom label

The Custom Label field provides a way to associate descriptive text with the point. When changes to the state of the point occur (i.e.
monitor point experiences a trouble), this text and the associated message appear at the system’s annunciators. Typically, Custom Labels
are developed in conjunction with the building's facility management personnel.
The Point Tab includes two useful features for editing custom labels: Autofill and Spellcheck. Refer back to the Overview at the
beginning of this chapter for specific information on these features.
To edit the Custom Label, simply replace the default text located in the Custom Label field with the text you want to associate with the
point.

9.11.6 Configurations where a relay is used to provide abnormal indication

In configurations where a relay is used to provide an abnormal indication when the fire panel is powered down do the following:
1. Use the Normally Open contacts on the relay.
2. Program the relay with the RELAY point type.
3. Add the following equation to a Custom Control program:
IN:
NOT A2 ON
OUT:
TRACK ON AUXn PRI=9,9
END:

page 162 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.12 Programming NAC and signal points

Notification Appliances and Signal points are programmable outputs -- such as bells, horns, and strobes -- used to alert building personnel
and occupants to the presence of an alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition.

9.12.1 Step 1. Choose a NAC or signal point to program

Signal and NAC points can be programmed from either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab. The Hardware tab lists points on a per-card
basis, whereas the Point Tab lists all points in the system. Use the following procedures to edit the attributes for a specific point.
Table 50: Selecting NAC or Signal Point
Location Tab Procedure
Signal Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
2. Locate the Signal Point to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting the Signal
checkbox within the Filter option displays only the system's Notification
appliance and signal points.)
3. Double click on the Signal Point. A properties window similar to the one
shown in Figure 124 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
Unit, Box, and Bay icons.
2. Double click on the Signal card icon containing the signal point you want to
edit. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 124 appears.
NAC Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
2. Locate the NAC Point to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting the Signal
checkbox within the Filter option displays only the system's Notification
appliance and signal points.)
3. Double click on the NAC Point. A window similar to the one shown in Figure
124 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the unit, box,
and bay containing the appropriate power supply or TrueAlert controller.
2. Double click on the icon for the power supply or controller. If you are
programming the NACs on a power supply, click on the NACs tab. If you are
programming the NACs on a TrueAlert controller, click on the Point Editing
tab.

Figure 124: Typical Signal/NAC Point Editing Window

page 163 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.12.2 Step 2. Define a point type

Click on the Point Type drop down list box and select a point type for the signal/NAC point. The point type determines the function of the
point and the message displayed on the system annunciators. Refer to Appendix A Software point types for a complete list of the point
types.

9.12.3 Step 3. Define a custom label

The Custom Label field provides a way to associate descriptive text with the point. When changes to the state of the point occur (i.e.
Signal point experiences a trouble), this text and the associated message appear at the system's annunciators. Typically, Custom Labels are
developed in conjunction with the building's facility management personnel.
The Point Tab includes two useful features for editing custom labels: Autofill and Spellcheck. Refer back to the Overview at the
beginning of this chapter for specific information on these features.
To edit the Custom Label, simply replace the default text located in the Custom Label field with the text you want to associate with the
point.

9.12.4 Step 4. Use the NAC Power Consumption Calculator

The NAC Power Consumption Calculator allows you to calculate the load that a combination of notification appliances will have on the NAC.
To use the calculator, do the following:
1. In the Current Draw Amps field (see Figure 124), enter the existing current draw for all devices currently installed on the NAC.
Keep the cursor in this field and press F11. The Power Consumption Calculator shown in the figure below appears.
2. Scroll through the list of appliances and identify how many of each device are to be placed on the NAC. Enter the quantity for
each device in the Quantity field. (To do this, either type the number or double click on the Quantity field and use the controls
that appear to set the number.)
Note:
You can control which devices appear in the calculator list by using the Filter button. When you click the Filter button, a taglist
containing the entire list of available notification appliances appears. The space bar toggles whether an entry is selected to appear in
the calculator. If a >> appears to the left of the entry, it is selected and will appear in the calculator. Sort through the list and use the
space bar to toggle the entries until only the devices you want to appear in the calculator are marked by a >> symbol.

Figure 125: Power Consumption Calculator

3. Select an operation for the calculator to perform as follows:

- Add (Present Total + Subtotal = New Total). Adds the total current draw for all specified devices to any existing current draw value.
Use this when adding devices for the first time, or when adding devices to a NAC that is already populated with devices.

page 164 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Subtract (Present Total - Subtotal = New Total). Subtracts the total for the entries you have just made in the calculator from any
existing current draw value. Use this when removing devices from a NAC that is already populated with devices.
- Replace. Replaces any existing current draw value with the value for the entries you have just made in the calculator.
4. Click OK. The total current draw determined by the calculator appears in the Current Draw (Amps) field.

page 165 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.12.5 Power consumption build warnings

The warnings listed below are example warnings for each type of power consumption warning that may occur. The card number and
actual values will differ depending on the configuration.
In some cases it is possible a power source that cannot be configured in the Programmer could be used to supply power in a panel. If
that is the case it is recommended the consumption be calculated manually. If the power consumption is not being exceeded when these
external sources are taken into consideration the warning can be ignored. See below for solutions using the configuration choices known
to the ES Panel Programming software.
1. WARNING: Power Supply (Card 8) -- Present 24V card power (2.7500) is greater than maximum (2.0000). (Amps)
SOLUTION: You may need to add an additional power supply; or move cards to another bay. Each power supply provides 2.0
Amps of 24V card power.
2. WARNING: Power Supply (Card 12) -- Present 24V NAC power (9.4500) is greater than maximum (9.000). (Amps)
SOLUTION: You may need to hang less peripherals off a circuit; or add more power supplies and/or cabinets. Most power
supplies provide 9.0 Amps of NAC power.
3. (Legacy Power Supply)
WARNING: Power Supply (Card 5) -- Present 24V AUX power (8.2000) is greater than maximum (8.000). (Amps)
SOLUTION: You may need to use less AUX Power peripherals on a given power supply; or add an additional power supply. Most
power supplies provide 8.0 Amps for AUX power.
4. WARNING: Power Supply (Card 10) -- Present 24V total power (9.2755) is greater than maximum (9.000). (Amps)
SOLUTION: Total power includes NAC Power, AUX Power, and 24V Card power. You will need to decrease one of these values; or
add an additional power supply. Each power supply provides 9.0 Amps of total power.
5. (Legacy Power Supply)
WARNING: 8V Power Resource (Card 1) -- Present 8V card power (3.3750) is greater than maximum (3.000). (Amps)
SOLUTION: The CPU Card provides 3.0 Amps of 8V power for unit 0. If this value is exceeded, you can increase available 8V power by
adding TIC cards. Each TIC card provides an additional 1.0 Amps of 8V power. A network TIC may be added to Unit 0 (Box 1, Bay 2.)
Additional TIC cards may be added to other units. (1 per Unit).
6. WARNING: Amplifier (Card 13) -- Present audio power (100.7000) is greater than maximum (100.000). (Watts)
SOLUTION: Flex 50 Amps provide 50 Watts of power. 100 W Amps provide 100 Watts of power. If these values are exceeded, you
may need to add additional Amplifier cards, or use less devices on the Amplifier NAC's.
7. WARNING: True Alert (Card 16) -- Present 24V NAC power (3.6500) on CHL 1 is greater than maximum (3.000). (Amps)
SOLUTION: For TrueAlert controllers and TrueAlert Power Supplies, each channel provides 3.0 Amps of NAC power for a total of
9.0 Amps. If you exceed 3.0 on a given channel, you may need to move peripherals to a different channel; or add an additional
TrueAlert power supply.

page 166 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.13 Programming relay points

Relays provide a means of switching current on or off to a load. Fire alarm systems make extensive use of relays, using them to control
fans, dampers, door magnets, motors, and control panel inputs.

9.13.1 Step 1. Choose a relay point to program

Relay points can be programmed from either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab. The Hardware tab lists points on a per-card basis,
whereas the Point Tab lists all points in the system. Use the following procedures to edit the attributes for a specific point.
Table 51: Selecting Relay Point
Point Type Tab Procedure
AUX Relay Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
2. Locate the Relay Point to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting the AUX
Relay checkbox within the Filter option displays only the system's relay
points.)
3. Double click on the relay point. A properties window similar to the one
shown in Figure 126 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
unit, box, and bay.
2. Double click on the icon for the power supply containing the AUX relay you
want to program.
3. Click on the Aux Relay tab. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 126
appears.
4100-30014100-300241 Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
00-3003 Relays 2. Locate the Relay Point to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting the Aux
Relay checkbox within the Filter option displays only the system’s relay.)
3. Double click on the relay point. A properties window similar to the one
shown in Figure 126 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
Unit, Box, and Bay icons.
2. Double click on the Relay card icon containing the relay point you want to
edit. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 126 appears.

page 167 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 126: Typical Relay Point Editing Window

9.13.2 Step 2. Define a point type

Click on the Point Type drop down list box and select a point type for the relay point. The point type determines the function of the point
and the message displayed on the system annunciators. Refer to Appendix A Software point types for a complete list of the point types.

9.13.3 Step 3. Define a custom label

The Custom Label field provides a way to associate descriptive text with the point. When changes to the state of the point occur (i.e.
Relay point experiences a trouble), this text and the associated message appear at the system's annunciators. Typically, Custom Labels are
developed in conjunction with the building's facility management personnel.
The Point Tab includes two useful features for editing custom labels: Autofill and Spellcheck. Refer back to the Overview at the
beginning of this chapter for specific information on these features.
To edit the Custom Label, simply replace the default text located in the Custom Label field with the text you want to associate with the
point.

9.14 Programming IDNet and MAPNET points

9.14.1 Introduction
IDNet and MAPNET points consist of both automatic and manual initiating devices used to detect the presence of a fire condition.

9.14.2 Step 1. Choose an IDNet/MAPNET point to program

IDNet and MAPNET points can be programmed from either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab. The Hardware tab lists points on a per-
card basis, whereas the Point Tab lists all points in the system. Use the following procedures to edit the attributes for a specific point.

page 168 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 52: Selecting IDNet or MAPNET Point

Point Type Tab Procedure
IDNet Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
2. Locate the IDNet point to be programmed, using either the window's
scroll bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting
the MAPNET/IDNET checkbox within the Filter option displays only the
system's IDNet and MAPNET points.)
3. Double click on the point. A properties window similar to the one shown in
Figure 127 appears. The device type cannot be edited here. The device type
can be edited via the Hardware tab.
Hardware Tab IDNet Points on a Power Supply
1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
unit, box, and bay.
2. Double click on the icon for the appropriate power supply card. A dialog for
the power supply appears.
3. Click on the IDNet tab. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 127
appears.
IDNet Points on an IDNet Option Card
1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
Unit, Box, and Bay icons.
2. Double click on the IDNet card icon containing the point you want to edit. A
window similar to the one shown in Figure 127 appears.
MAPNET Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
2. Locate the MAPNET point to be programmed, using either the window's
scroll bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting the
MAPNET/IDNET checkbox within the Filter option displays only the system's
MAPNET and IDNet points.)
3. Double click on the point. A properties window similar to the one shown in
Figure 127 appears. The device type cannot be edited here. The device type
can be edited via the Hardware tab.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
Unit, Box, and Bay icons.
2. Double click on the MAPNET card icon containing the point you want to edit.
A window similar to the one shown in Figure 127 appears.

page 169 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 127: Defining IDNet Points

page 170 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.14.3 Step 2. Define a device type

Click on the Device Type drop down list box and select a device type for the IDNet/MAPNET point. The device type determines the
physical device hardware connected to the channel. Refer to Appendix A Software point types for a complete list of device types.

9.14.4 Step 3. Define a point type

Click on the Point Type drop down list box and select a point type for the IDNet/MAPNET point. The point type determines the function
of the point and the message displayed on the system’s annunciators. Refer to Appendix A Software point types for a complete list of the
point types.

9.14.5 Step 4. Define a custom label

The Custom Label field provides a way to associate descriptive text with a point. When changes to the state of the point occur (i.e. point
experiences a trouble), this text and the associated message appear at the system’s annunciators. Typically, Custom Labels are developed
in conjunction with the building’s facility management personnel.
The Point Tab includes two useful features for editing custom labels: Autofill and Spellcheck. Refer back to the Overview at the
beginning of this chapter for specific information on these features.
To edit the Custom Label, simply replace the default text located in the Custom Label field with the text you want to associate with the
point.

9.15 Programming the 4098 CO Detectors/Sensors

9.15.1 Introduction
There are two CO sensor base types: CO Normal and CO Sounder. One of the following sensors can be fitted on each base: a TrueAlarm
ion sensor head, a TA photo sensor head, a TA heat sensor head, or a photo/heat sensor combo head.
Their are 8 programmer’s models for CO bases: MCOP (multi-point CO with photo sen. head), MCOH (heat sensor head), MCOI (ion head),
MCOPH (photo-heat head), MCOPS (photo head with sounder base), MCOHS (heat sensor head with sounder base), MCOIS (ion head with
sounder base), and MCOPHS (photo-heat head with sounder base). Each variation have multiple sensors (multipoint).
Note: The underlined point types in Table 53 are default point types
Table 53: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOI
Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOI MX-Y-0 MCOI FIRE Common
SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MION GVMON Ion sensor
LATSUPV subpoint
SMOKE
SUPDET
SUPERV
UTILITY
MX-Y-2 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
MAOFF COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-3 MACOFIRE COPRI2 CO fire
COSUPV algorithm
UTILITY subpoint
UTILITY

page 171 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 54: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOIS

Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOIS MX-Y-0 MCOIS FIRE Common
SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MION GVMON Ion sensor
LATSUPV subpoint
SMOKE
SUPDET
SUPERV
UTILITY
MX-Y-2 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-3 MACOFIRE COPRI2 CO fire
MAOFF COSUPV algorithm
UTILITY subpoint
UTILITY
MX-Y-4 MCOI BSIGNAL Sounder
RELISIG subpoint
RELSIG
RELWVIS
RSIGNAL
SIGNAL
SSBASE
SSIGNAL
SUPERV
TSIGNAL
Table 55: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOH
Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOH MX-Y-0 MCOH FIRE Common
SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MHEAT HEAT Heat sensor
MOHEAT LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SUPERV
UTILITY
MX-Y-2 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-3 MACOFIRE COPRI2 CO fire
MAOFF COSUPV algorithm
UTILITY subpoint
UTILITY

page 172 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 56: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOHS

Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOHS MX-Y-0 MCOHSCOMBO FIRE Common
(MCOHS) SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MHEAT HEAT Heat sensor
MOHEAT LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SUPERV
UTILITY
MX-Y-2 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-3 MACOFIRE COPRI2 CO fire
MAOFF COSUPV algorithm
UTILITY subpoint
UTILITY
MX-Y-4 MSOUND BSIGNAL Sounder
RELISIG subpoint
RELSIG
RELWVIS
RSIGNAL
SIGNAL
SSBASE
SSIGNAL
SUPERV
TSIGNAL
Table 57: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOP
Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOP MX-Y-0 MCOPCOMBO FIRE Common
(MCOP) SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MPHOTO GVMON Photo sensor
MXPHOTO LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SMOKE
SUPERV
UTILITY
VSMOKE
MX-Y-2 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-3 MACOFIRE COFIRE (If CO fire
MAOFF Photo is algorithm
config as fire subpoint
alarm pt type)
COPRI2
COSUPV
UTILITY
UTILITY
MX-Y-4 MACOFAST FCORFAST Algorithm
MACOFALSE SCORFAST subpoint
(MACOFLSE) PCORFAST
MAOFF UCORFAST
FCORFALSE
SCORFALSE
PCORFALSE
UCORFALSE
UTILITY

page 173 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 58: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOPS

Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOPS MX-Y-0 MCOPSCOMBO FIRE Common
(MCOPS) SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MPHOTO GVMON Photo sensor
MXPHOTO LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SMOKE
SUPERV
UTILITY
VSMOKE
MX-Y-2 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-3 MACOFIRE COFIRE (If CO fire
MAOFF Photo is algorithm
config as fire subpoint
alarm pt type)
COPRI2
COSUPV
UTILITY
UTILITY
MX-Y-4 MACOFAST FCORFAST Algorithm
MACOFALSE SCORFAST subpoint
(MACOFLSE) PCORFAST
MAOFF UCORFAST
FCORFALSE
SCORFALSE
PCORFALSE
UCORFALSE
UTILITY
MX-Y-5 MSOUND BSIGNAL Sounder
RELISIG subpoint
RELSIG
RELWVIS
RSIGNAL
SIGNAL
SSBASE
SSIGNAL
SUPERV
TSIGNAL

page 174 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 59: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOPH

Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOPH MX-Y-0 MCOPHCOMBO FIRE Common
(MCOPH SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MPHOTO GVMON Photo sensor
MXPHOTO LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SMOKE
SUPERV
UTILITY
VSMOKE
MX-Y-2 MHEAT HEAT Heat sensor
MOHEAT LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SUPERV
UTILITY
MX-Y-3 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-4 MACOFIRE COFIRE (If CO fire
MAOFF Photo is algorithm
config as fire subpoint
alarm pt type)
COPRI2
COSUPV
UTILITY
UTILITY
MX-Y-5 MACOFAST FCORFAST Algorithm
MACOFALSE SCORFAST subpoint
(MACOFLSE) PCORFAST
MAOFF UCORFAST
MARCOR FCORFALSE
SCORFALSE
PCORFALSE
UCORFALSE
UTILITY
FCOR
PCOR
SCOR
UCOR

page 175 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 60: Programmer’s Models for CO Base MCOPHS

Device Point Name ES Panel Device Type Point Type Description
MCOPHS MX-Y-0 MCOPHSCOMBO FIRE Common
(MCOPHS) SUPERV subpoint
LATSUPV
UTILITY
MX-Y-1 MPHOTO GVMON Photo sensor
MXPHOTO LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SMOKE
SUPERV
UTILITY
VSMOKE
MX-Y-2 MHEAT HEAT Heat sensor
MOHEAT LATSUPV subpoint
SUPDET
SUPERV
UTILITY
MX-Y-3 MCOGAS COGASPRI2 UL2075 CO
COGASSUPV gas sensor
UTILITY subpoint
MX-Y-4 MACOFIRE COFIRE (If CO fire
MAOFF Photo is algorithm
config as fire subpoint
alarm pt type)
COPRI2
COSUPV
UTILITY
UTILITY
MX-Y-5 MACOFAST FCORFAST Algorithm
MACOFALSE SCORFAST subpoint
(MACOFLSE) PCORFAST
MAOFF UCORFAST
MARCOR FCORFALSE
SCORFALSE
PCORFALSE
UCORFALSE
UTILITY
FCOR
PCOR
SCOR
UCOR
MX-Y-6 MSOUND BSIGNAL Sounder
RELISIG subpoint
RELSIG
RELWVIS
RSIGNAL
SIGNAL
SSBASE
SSIGNAL
SUPERV
TSIGNAL

page 176 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

9.15.2 Common point configurations

Each device’s common point (MCOPH, MCO, MCOI, MCOH, MCOP, …) can be configured as UTILITY, FIRE, SUPV, or LATSUP. Since the
common point’s alarm is the sum of all its sub-points’ statuses (excluding CO gas and sounder sub-points), if the common points are set to
another type than UTILITY, all sub-points are configured as UTILITY, except for the CO gas sub-point and the Sounder sub-point.
Refer to the following sections to configure the CO sensor bases for gas sensing, fewer nuisance alarms, fast fire detection, and CO fire
detection.
The ion, photo, and heat sub-points are configured the same way as the True Alarm sub-points.

9.15.3 MCOGAS - CO Toxic Gas Sub-Point

Update the CO toxic gas sub-point’s point type. The available alarm options are summarized in Table 61.
Table 61: Alarm options
Sub-Point Type Description
COGASSUPV The SUPV Alarm is generated based on the CO exposure level over
time.
COGASPRI2 The PRI2 Alarm is generated based on the CO exposure level over
time.
Utility No Alarm is generated but SMPL can be used on this point (refer to
note below).
Note: If the Utility sub-point type is selected, custom control will most likely be written to monitor when the CO level matches an analog
value set by the user. For example, a fan relay turns ON when the CO level exceeds a particular concentration in PPM set by the user.

9.15.4 MACOFIRE - CO-enhanced Fire Detection Sub-Point

This sub-point can raise an expiry trouble if the CO sensor has reached its end-of-life. If P463 and P464 are toggled ON, this sub-point can
also raise a 6 or a 12 month trouble prior to the device’s expiration date.
This algorithm uses CO concentration and temperature to raise an alarm.
Table 62: Sub-point Types Description
Device Type Sub-Point Type Description
MACOFIRE COGASSUPV The SUPV Warning is generated.
MACOFIRE COGASPRI2 The PRI2 Alarm is generated.
MACOFIRE COFIRE FIRE Alarm is generated. Only valid when the Photo
sub point is configured as FIRE alarm point type.
MACOFIRE Utility No Alarm is generated. But SMPL can be written to
generate an alarm
MAOFF Utility No Alarm is generated. Algorithm is not functional.

9.15.5 CO/Photo Algorithm Sub-Point

The CO/photo algorithm sub-point uses the CO concentration and the photo detector to minimize false alarms or to help with the fire
detection.
MACOFALSE uses CO to help minimize false alarms.
MACOFAST uses CO to detect a fire faster.
MARCOR is the R correlation algorithm and MAOFF is used to disable the algorithm.
MACOFALSE can only be configured if the photo sub-point is not configured as a FIRE type.
Table 63: CO/Photo Algorithm Sub-point
Device Type Sub-Point Type Description
MACOFAST SCORFAST The SUPV Warning is generated.
MACOFAST PCORFAST The PRI2 Alarm is generated.
MACOFAST FCORFAST FIRE Alarm is generated.
MACOFAST UCORFAST No Alarm is generated, but SMPL can be written to generate an
alarm
MACOFALSE SCORFALSE The SUPV Warning is generated.
MACOFALSE PCORFALSE The PRI2 Alarm is generated.
MACOFALSE FCORFALSE FIRE Alarm is generated.
MACOFALSE UCORFALSE No Alarm is generated, but SMPL can be written to generate an
alarm
MARCOR SCOR The SUPV Warning is generated.

page 177 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 63: CO/Photo Algorithm Sub-point

Device Type Sub-Point Type Description
MARCOR PCOR The PRI2 Alarm is generated.
MARCOR FCOR FIRE Alarm is generated.
MARCOR UCOR No Alarm is generated, but SMPL can be written to generate an
alarm
MAOFF Utility No Alarm is generated. Algorithm is not functional.

9.16 Programming pseudo points

Pseudo points are memory locations within the system designed to store specific types of information. The ES Panel system includes the
following three types of pseudo points.
• Analog Pseudo Points store analog values - such as a counter or timer - for use within user-defined Custom Control equations. User
analog pseudo points start at A256.
• Digital Pseudo Points are used with user-defined Custom Control equations and can have one of several functions, depending on the
point type assigned to the point. Alarm, supervisory, or trouble pseudo points generate an alarm, supervisory, or trouble event when
turned on. Utility pseudo points hold a value of on or off and are typically used as an on/off switch within a custom control equation.
User digital pseudo points start at P512.
• List Pseudo Point are typically used for custom control programming and for grouping multiple points for LED and switch control.
User list pseudo points start a L256.

9.16.1 Step 1. Choose a pseudo point to program

Pseudo points can be programmed from either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab. The Hardware tab lists points on a per-card basis,
whereas the Point Tab lists all points in the system. Use the following procedures to edit the attributes for a specific pseudo point.
Table 64: Selecting pseudo point
Point Type Tab Procedure
Analog or Digital Pseudo Point Tab 1. Click on the Point Tab. The programmer lists all points in the system.
Point 2. Locate the Pseudo point to be programmed, using either the window's scroll
bar or the Search, Filter, or Sort options. (For example, selecting the User
Digital Pseudo checkbox within the Filter option displays only the system's
user-defined digital pseudo points.) The first available user digital pseudo
point is P512.
3. Double click on the Pseudo Point. A properties window similar to the one
shown in Figure 128 appears.
Hardware Tab 1. Click on the Hardware Tab. Click on the + signs to the left of the appropriate
Unit, Box, and Bay icons in which the CPU Card resides.
2. Double click on the card icon containing the pseudo point you want to edit. A
window similar to the one shown in Figure 128 appears.

page 178 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 128: Programming Pseudo Points

9.16.2 Step 2. Define a custom label

The Custom Label field provides a way to associate descriptive text with the point. When changes to the state of the point occur (i.e., the
pseudo point turns On, for example), this text and the associated message appear at the system’s annunciators. Typically, Custom Labels
are developed in conjunction with the building’s facility management personnel.
The Point Tab includes two useful features for editing custom labels: Autofill and Spellcheck. Refer to Overview at the beginning of this
chapter for specific information on these features.
To edit the Custom Label, simply replace the default text located in the Custom Label field with the text you want to associate with the
point.

9.16.3 Step 3. Define an analog pseudo point type

If the selected point is an analog pseudo point, click on the Point Type drop down list box and select one of the following point types.
Table 65: Defining Analog Pseudo Points
Point Type Description
ANALOG Stores a static, analog value between 0 and 65,535.
COUNTER Allows custom control to increment the point's analog value. This is typically used to track the number of some
system condition and trigger some action when the threshold is reached.
TIMER Allows you to set an analog value between 0 and 65,535 for use as a Custom Control countdown timer. A timer
can be used to delay some action until a specified amount of time passes.

9.16.4 Step 4. Programming a digital pseudo point type

If the selected point is a digital pseudo point, click on the Point Type drop down list box and select one of the following point types.

page 179 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 66: Defining Digital Pseudo Points

Point Type Description
FIRE Turning on a pseudo point whose point type is ALARM causes an alarm condition on the system.
SUPV Turning on a pseudo point whose point type is SUPV causes a supervisory condition on the system.
PRI2 Turning on a pseudo point whose point type is PRI2 causes a priority 2 alarm on the system.
TROUBLE Turning on a pseudo point whose point type is TROUBLE causes a trouble condition on the system.
UTILITY A pseudo point whose point type is UTILITY can hold a value of On or Off, and is typically used as an on/off
switch within a custom control equation.

page 180 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10 Audio programming 4100ES jobs

10.1 Introduction
Programming the ES Panel audio components involves the following.
• Specifying Audio Controller Properties. These properties allow you to specify what audio equipment is attached to the audio
controller.
• Programming Manual Audio Functions. Programming these functions involves creating custom control equations and associating
those equations with a switch and LED. Turning on the switch triggers the custom control equation, which in turn plays a facility-
specific, pre-recorded message on a selected speaker list.
• Programming Automatic Audio Functions. The audio system automatically plays pre-recorded messages (such as an evacuation
message, etc.) when an alarm condition occurs.
Before beginning to program the audio components, make sure all audio hardware (controllers, amplifiers, option cards) are added to the
job.

10.2 Programming guidelines

10.2.1 Guidelines and restrictions

Be aware of the following guidelines when programming audio components. These guidelines are important to understand before
programming switches for control of speaker circuits or creating custom control applications that select specific groups of speakers (such
as floor above and floor below). Ignore these guidelines if the panel is operating as a general alarm panel.
• The 100 Watt amplifier is capable of routing the message from one channel to the speakers at any point in time. The Flex50 amplifier
is capable of routing the message from two channels to any combination of speakers at any point in time.
• It is recommended that lists be created to group the amplifier circuits. Individual speaker circuits should not be controlled. Custom
control or annunciators used to change the channel on which speakers are playing should use lists to prevent problems. The following
is the recommended way of breaking up speaker circuits into each list.
- One Channel System. Individual speakers on either the Flex 50 or 100W amplifier can be turned on or off without any problems.
- Two Channel System. Speakers connected to a Flex 50 amplifier can be routed individually to either channel. Speakers connected
to a 100W amplifier can be turned on or off individually, but all speakers that are on must be playing the same message. To avoid
problems and simplify the application, it is recommended that all speakers on the amplifier be controlled via a single list.
In most cases, Flex 50 amplifiers can be used across multiple signaling areas, but 100W amplifiers should be restricted to a single
area. For example, a 100W amplifier could be used to drive speaker circuits in a perimeter area. Flex 50 amplifiers could be used
across floors or areas of a building that may be playing an evacuation message or paged independently.
- Three to Eight Channel Systems. Speakers connected to a Flex 50 amplifier can be turned on or off independently but only two
channels can be active at any point in time. To avoid problems, the speaker circuits should be divided into two lists and controlled
via those lists. Speakers connected to a 100W amplifier can be turned on or off individually, but all speakers that are on must be
playing the same message. To avoid problems and simplify the application, it is recommended that all speakers on the amp be
controlled via a single list.
On three to eight channel systems, Flex 50 amplifiers can be used across two signaling areas. 100W amplifiers should be contained
to one signaling area. For example, a Flex 50 amplifier could be used to control two floors of a multi-store anchor store in a mall, and
100 W amplifiers could be used for the single floor mall area.

TrueAlertES Speaker. When TrueAlertES Speakeris configured, all SPEAKER NACs are added to the auto-generated and editable list L185
ADDRESSABLE SPEAKER NACs. All NACs in this list will be considered to be addressable speaker by the syste,m. Any NAC manually removed
from this list will be considered to be a conventional speaker NAC by the system. In operation, this list will be used to control the following
operations:
• For each NAC in this list, OPEN trouble due to lack of an end-of-line resistor on the audio wire will be suppressed. This is valid on Class
B wiring style. All other troubles from the amplifier will be reported as before (earth fault, short, Class A loop trouble).
• It will be possible for this list to control whether or not audio is sent to a particular circuit. For example, it is expected that during a
TrueAlertES Self-teat, speaker audio will only be sent to NACs in this list (i.e. so that conventional speakers do not sound during a
TrueAlertES Self-test).
Under this scheme, the system defaults to all conventional if no TreuAlert speakers are configured. Under conditions where it is desired to
have a mixed system- where some circuits support conventional speakers and others will support addressable speakers- the Technician
must manually perform two actions:
1. List Auto Generation off
2. Remove the conventional NACs from the “Addressable Speaker NAC” List

page 181 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Removing these circuits from this list will re-enable EOL resistor trouble on those circuits, and will prevent speaker audio from
being sent to those circuits during TestAlert tests.

10.3 Setting audio card properties

10.3.1 Add controllers and amplifiers to the job

1. Click on the Hardware tab.
2. In the Available Hardware List, click on the Audio entry to expand the list of available audio cards.
3. Drag the icons for the appropriate equipment to the Unit/Box/Bay icon in which the card/amplifier is installed.
4. After placing the icon in the correct location, double click on it.

10.3.2 Analog or digital audio controller properties

The audio controller card properties are shown in the figure below. Refer to Table 67 for information on these fields.

Figure 129: Audio Controller Properties Example

page 182 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 67: Analog/Digital Controller Properties

Tab Description
Card Properties Tab The Card Properties, selected by clicking on the Card Properties tab, allow you to set the basic
properties of the audio controller card. These properties include the card's address, unit, bay, and box
designation.
Data Entry Tab Audio Card Inputs. Check the boxes that correspond to the input devices connected to the controller.
Riser Type. Selections differ depending on controller:
• Analog Controller. Select whether the audio riser uses Class A or Class B wiring.
• Digital Controller. Select whether the audio riser uses Class A or Class B wiring.
Remote Mic Source. This option is available only when Remote Microphone 1 is checked.
Message Data. Refer to “Specify Initial Audio Library” later in this chapter for information on this
option.
Network Synchronization.
Option Card 1 Tab Option Card 2 Select the Option Card 1 or Option Card 2 tab, click on the Enable checkbox, and set the options as
Tab follows:
• 25 V Audio. Select this radio button if a 25V audio input source is attached to the input
connection of the option board.
• 70 V Audio. Select this radio button if a 75V audio input source is attached to the input
connection of the option board.
• Line Level Audio. Select this radio button if a line level audio input source is attached to the input
connection of the option board.
• Remote Microphone 2.
• Network DAR Microphone.
Audio Input Priorities Tab The Audio Input Priorities allow you to specify the priority level of each audio input source. This is
important when the maximum number of audio inputs are active and an additional live input is
activated. If the priority level of the additional input is higher than one of the inputs currently playing,
the higher level input interrupts the lower level priority and begins to play. To select the priority of an
input, click on it and then press the Increase or Decrease button.

10.3.3 Editing amplifier properties

Table 68: Amplifier Properties
Tab Description
Card Properties Tab The Card Properties, selected by clicking on the Card Properties tab, allow you to set the basic
properties of the audio controller card. These properties include the card's address, unit, bay, and box
designation.
Data Entry Tab Depleted Battery Cutout. Check to enable depleted battery cutout (100W Amp only).
Backup Amp Address. Address of amplifier used as a backup to this one.
Configure as Power Preamp. Applies to Flex 35 amplifiers only.
Insuite Devices Used. Checking this option allows multiple rooms to be wired off a single circuit. In this
case, a short can be seen by the card but the circuit will still turn on in an alarm condition. The amplifier
with Insuite enabled will then isolate the room with the short.
NAC Options. Select the choice corresponding to the type and number of NACs connected to the
Amplifier.
NAC Tab All amplifiers include a NAC's tab, used to specify the attributes of the amplifier's NAC outputs. Editable
fields include:
Point Type. Set this field to Signal, Speaker, XSNAC1, or XSNAC2.
Custom Label - Use this field to add a descriptive label to the point.

page 183 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.4 Specify Initial Audio Library

10.4.1 Introduction
The Audio Library includes the audio data (phrases and tones) for all standard messages required by the audio system. This section
describes the process required to import the default audio library into the message editor. This is a required step the first time you
program the audio controller.
Note: system using addressable speaker must use an audio library containing the Self-test message, eg. Chipset 42 Rev F or above.

Note: Procedure
1. Click on the Data Entry tab in the property sheet for the 4100-1210 or 4100-1211 audio controller and click on the box labeled
Edit Message Data. A screen similar to the following appears.

Figure 130: Audio Message Editor

2. Click on the tab labeled Librarian. A screen similar to the following appears.

page 184 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 131: Librarian Tab

3. Click on the button labeled Replace All Audio Data with Library. A dialog box appears, allowing you to locate and select the
audio library file. Once you locate and open this file, the screen shown below appears. The listing of Job Clips on the right hand
side of the screen lists all of the phrases and tones contained in the library.

Figure 132: Library Dialog Showing Library Loaded

page 185 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.5 Specify audio options

The Audio Options allow you to specify which audio scripts (combinations of phrases and tones) are associated with the system's standard
message definitions. For example, when the appropriate system condition (general alarm, pushing the EVAC switch, user-defined custom
control) triggers a primary EVAC, the script that you choose in this tab plays.
Procedure
This procedure is as follows:
1. Click on the Options tab. A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Click on the drop down list box labeled Standard Message Definitions and choose one of the standard audio messages.
3. Click on the Selection drop down list box and associate one of the scripts with the standard audio message selected in Step
2. If the system on which the programmer resides has a standard windows sound card, you can press Playback to listen to the
selection.

Figure 133: Options Tab

4. When TrueAlertES speaker devices are used, the audio library must contain the NXNA Self-test Script to test the audible appliance
properly. Using another script can result in false TrueAlertES Self-test failure.

page 186 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 134: Self-test message entry

10.6 Build Job and Download Files

When you are satisfied with the programming of your audio job, you must do the following:
Table 69: Building Job and Downloading File
Step Action
Step 1 -- Build the job Use the Build menu, located at the top of the Audio Message Editor to build the job for download. Note
that this menu contains two choices, check and full. Use the Check option to error check the audio job
before performing the build. When no errors are detected within the job, use the Build option to create
the .MSB and .CFG4100 files.
Step 2-- Download the .MSB The .MSB file, which contains all of the audio definitions, is located in the AUDIO subdirectory of the job
file to the audio slave subdirectory. For example:
C:\4100UJOBS\0104U001A\AUDIO\0104U001A.MSB
See below for information on downloading the .MSB file to the audio slave.
Step 3 -- Download the Master The master and the audio slave file must be synchronized with one another. Always make sure to perform
to the panel. a download to the master after downloading a new .MSB file to the audio slave.

page 187 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.7 Downloading directly to audio controller

1. Launch the ES Panel Programmer.
2. Click on Transfer, then click Serial and then click To Audio Slave. The File Transfer dialog box appears (Figure 135).

Figure 135: File Transfer Dialog Box

3. Select the Audio Data radio button and check the Full checkbox.
4. Click on the Settings button. The Port Settings dialog box appears (Figure 136).

Figure 136: Port Settings Dialog Box

5. Under the Baud Rate setting, select 115200. Do not change the Port, Parity, Stop Bits and Data Bits settings.
6. Prepare appropriate Analog or Digital Controllers as follows:
Analog Audio Controller (0566-218, 0566-1011)
a. Make sure P8 is open to set for 115200 baud.
b. Connect the 10 pin download cable to Message Download port.
c. Set SW1 position 1 OFF to take the card offline. The trouble LED turns ON.
d. Set SW1-1 ON. The trouble LED blinks.
e. Set SW1-1 OFF.
Digital Audio Controller (0566-033, 0566-409, 0566-1028)
a. Make sure P3 is in position 2-3 to set for 115200 baud.
b. Connect the 10 pin download cable to Message Download port.
c. Set SW1 position 1 OFF to take the card offline.

page 188 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

7. Click on Download in the File Transfer dialog box. If you get an Upgrade Warning window, check contents and click on Continue.
8. Click on Start in the Download dialog box (Figure 137).

Figure 137: Download Dialog Box

page 189 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.8 Creating custom scripts

10.8.1 Downloading the ES Panel Audio Library

Downloading the ES Panel Audio Library is required for any change made to the library being used in an audio controller. Make sure the
audio file has been built from within the programmer before downloading the audio files.
1. Open the ES Panel job file and access the File Transfer dialog box (Figure 135).
2. Select the Audio Data radio button and the Full check box under Type of Transfer.
3. Select Direct to slave under Type of Connection.
4. Click on the Settings button.
5. In the Port Settings dialog box (Figure 136) the Baud Rate selection must match jumper P7 selection on the card (56K or 115K).
Leave the other settings at their default. Click on OK.
6. Click on Download in the File Transfer window (Figure 135). The Download dialog box appears. (Figure 137). DO NOT CLICK ON
START. Perform the steps below:
a. Connect the download cable to the download port on the left side of the audio controller, with the tracer stripe on top.
b. Toggle Dipswitch # 1 OFF, ON, and OFF again without stopping in between.
c. The LED on the audio controller should blink 3 times indicating it is ready for a download.
7. Click on the Start button in the Download dialog box.
8. After the download has been completed, set Dipswitch # 1 on the audio controller back to the ON position.

10.8.2 Adding custom messages to ES Panel Audio

Follow the steps below to add custom messages:
1. Check to see what files were received from headquarters. Note which .WAV files are included in the Audio directory with
the .AUDSDB file
2. In the audio message editor, under the Librarian tab, click on the Open button and select the .AUDSDB file sent to you. The
messages (phrases and tones) included in the library are shown in the Library Clips window.
3. Select only the library clips that correspond to the .WAV files included with the files. The other clips were in the headquarters
editor when your Library was created. They may already exist in your job.
4. Click the Add button. The selected clips now appear in the Job Clips window to the right.
5. Build the audio library. You can also export the library to a directory on your PC for a complete backup of your entire library.
Note:
a. The ES Panel audio .WAV file format is not the same as the standard Windows format. It cannot be created in the field.
These .WAV files need to be created and ordered from Applications Engineering.
b. When ALL the .WAV files needed are with the .AUDSDB and audio directory, you can use the Replace All Audio Data with
Library button instead of the steps 1 through 5 above. Clicking this button deletes all existing .WAV files.

10.8.3 Introduction
A script (Revision 10 and higher term) is analogous to a message (pre-Revision 10 term). A script is made up of the following building
blocks.
• Phrases. These are .WAV files containing spoken audio data. Phrases can either be the generic ones provided with the default audio
library, or they can be facility-specific phrases.
• Tones. These are .WAV files containing tones, such as a whoop, bell, horn, etc.
• Statements. These are the programming statements associated with the script. The editor contains a range of statements that, for
example, allow you to repeat a phrase or tone, initiate march time coding, etc.
The audio message editor allows you to edit existing scripts and create new scripts. This allows you to create facility-specific scripts that can
then be associated with either automatic (for example, message automatically plays following a fire alarm) or manual (message plays when
a switch is activated) audio functions. For example, you might want to edit a script so that the phrase “Attention” is repeated three times
before a standard announcement is made.

page 190 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.8.4 Creating a new script

1. Click on the Script tab and then click on the Script menu. When the list of options appears, select New. A dialog similar to the
one shown below appears.

Figure 138: Add New Script Dialog

2. Enter a name for the script in the Script Name field and click on OK. The audio message editor updates the fields in the Script
Tab. Refer to Figure 139 for an explanation of the window's fields.

Figure 139: Script Tab

Note:
- Statements field
Statements are audiotasks (for example, play Marchtime signal) or programming functions (for example, repeat last statement)
used to create scripts. A script can contain multiple statements. Statements are dragged from the Statements list into the work
area on the right of the editor.
- Phrases field
Phrases are pre-recorded messages that can be dragged from the Phrases box and included in a Voice statement.
- Tones field
Tones are pre-recorded tones that can be dragged from the Tones box and included in the MARCHTIME, STEADY, PNIST, or
TEMPORAL statements.
- Options radio buttons

page 191 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Check a radio button to make the script available in the Option Tab. For example, when you check Evac, the script is included in
the Selection drop down list box for the Primary Evac message in the Options tab.

3. Enter a name for the script in the Script field. Identify the author of the script in the Author field.
4. Select the Option Check boxes as required. Selecting an option field makes the script available for that function in the Options
Tab.
5. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging statements from the Statements box into the Work Area and release
the mouse button. See Table 70 for an explanation of each statement. Each time you drag a statement to the work area, the
statement appears in the Work Area, followed by the statement's arguments. For example:
BEEP (SECONDS =) <NUMBER>
Required arguments are enclosed within the <> brackets. A word enclosed
within parentheses must be included in the statement. The BEEP statement shown
above, for example, must have a number to specify the number of times the
beep should occur and the word seconds must be included in the
statement. For example:
BEEP SECONDS = 2
Use the following table for an explanation of each audio script statement and its
arguments.
Table 70: Script Statements
Statement Description Syntax/Arguments Example
BEEP Plays a beep on the audio BEEP (SECONDS =) <NUMBER> BEEP SECONDS = 2
channel. To use this
statement, delete the
parentheses surrounding
SECONDS and substitute the
number of seconds in place
of NUMBER.
DO ENDO Allows multiple statements DO <NUMBER> <STATEMENTS> ENDDO DO 2 VOICE PHRASE = Attention
to be linked together in Phrase REPEAT = 2 ENDDO
a loop. NUMBER equals
the number of times the
group of statements should
execute. STATEMENTS is any
of the valid statements in
this table.
MARCHTIME Allows you to insert a MARCHTIME TONE = <NUMBER or TONE> MARCHTIME TONE=3 SECOND=2
marchtime coded signal into SECONDS = <NUMBER> FREQUENCY = <NUMBER> FREQUENCY=60
the script. Substitute the
number assigned to a tone
for the first argument
PAUSE Allows you to insert a pause, PAUSE (TENTHS = ) <NUMBER> PAUSE TENTHS = 2
measured in tenths of a
second, into a script.
PNIST Allows you to insert a PNIS PNIST TONE = <NUMBER or TONE> ROUNDS =
coded signal into the script. <NUMBER> FREQUENCY = <NUMBER> DIGITS
= <NUMBER> - <NUMBER> - <NUMBER> -
<NUMBER>
REPEAT Allows you to repeat one of REPEAT = <NUMBER> REPEAT = 2
the statements in the script.
The number of times the
statement is repeated is
specified by the <NUMBER>
argument.
STEADY Allows you to insert a steady STEADY TONE = <NUMBER or TONE> (SECONDS = STEADY TONE = HORN SECONDS
tone into the script. <NUMBER>) =2
STUTTER STUTTER (SECONDS = ) <NUMBER> STUTTER SECONDS = 2

page 192 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 70: Script Statements

Statement Description Syntax/Arguments Example
TEMPORAL Allows you to insert a TEMPORAL TONE = <NUMBER or TONE> TEMPORAL TONE = HORN
temporally coded tone into (SECONDS = <NUMBER>) SECONDS = 2
the script.
VOICE Allows you to specify a pre- VOICE PHRASE = <NUMBER or PHRASE> (REPEAT = VOICE PHRASE = 2 Phrase REPEAT
recorded voice message <NUMBER>) =2
into the script. CAN USE
NUMBER.

10.9 Example - Programming LED/switch for audio

Overview
This section provides a programming example that illustrates how to associate a display card switch and LED with a custom message.

Figure 140: Associating Switch with Message

10.10 Programming the example switch and LED

The switch is used to trigger the audio message. The mode for the switch is ON/OFF and the reference point is user-defined, digital pseudo
point 512. This means the first press of the switch turns on pseudo point 512 and causes the associated custom control equations to
execute. The second press of this switch turns the point OFF.
Each switch has a corresponding LED. In this example, the LED illuminates while the audio message is playing and turns off when the
message is done playing. The mode for the LED is ON and the reference address is user-defined pseudo point 513.

page 193 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 141: Point Editing for Switches

page 194 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.11 Programming the example custom control equations

The custom control equation shown below can be interpreted as follows:
• Input Side. The STATUS ON opcode monitors the state of P512, which is turned on when the switch associated with the equation
turns ON. When P512 turns on, the input side of the equation is true and the output side executes.
• Output Side. The UPLAY opcode (used only with a ES Panel system) allows the full range of output parameters (channel, volume level,
speaker list, tracking LED) to be set.

Figure 142: Example Custom Control

10.12 Editing Loop TFX Audio Interface Module properties

The ES Panel TFX Audio Interface module is designed to interface the ES Panel Analog Audio Controller with the existing TFX Amp96
amplifier. The TFX Audio Interface module provides an AMP96 compatible audio riser interface to feed the AMP96s. The Audio Interface
module converts the 10Vrms audio signal received from the PDI to a 0.77Vrms signal, providing a compatible riser signal to the TFX
amplifier. The card is similar to the TFX Riser Driver 2 board in that it allows the user to adjust the desired output via a trim pot.
The card is a flat, 4”x5” form-factor module that plugs into the ES Panel power distribution interface.

10.13 Accessing the ES Panel TFX Audio Interface Module Properties screen
Follow these steps to access the interface properties screen for the ES Panel (4100-1340) TFX Loop
Audio Interface card.
1. Click on the Hardware Tab to open the Hardware Window.
2. Expand the unit, box, and bay combination by clicking on the plus signs.
3. Add a second bay to the box if it does not already contain one.
4. From the Available Hardware pane, expand the INTERFACE components, select 4100-1340 TFX Loop Audio Interface card, and
move interface card to bay two. Please note the ES Panel Analog Audio Controller must be added to the system first before
adding the TFX Audio Interface card.
5. Double click on the interface card’s icon. The Properties sheet for the card appears as shown in Figure 143.

page 195 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 143: TFX Audio Interface Card Properties Dialog Tab

10.14 General settings

The Card Properties tab allows you to edit the general settings for the ES Panel (4100-1340) TFX
Loop Audio Interface Card.
Click on the Card Properties. This tab is default to open when you first access the ES Panel (4100-1340) TFX Loop Audio Interface card. The
card properties appear as follows:
• Card Address. The address is set to the same address as the ES Panel Analog Audio controller by the programmer and can not be
changed.
• Card Custom Label. You can change the information of the Card Custom Label or the Card Alternate Custom Label by clicking on
their fields and entering a text string.
• Unit, Box, and Bay. The Unit, Box, and Bay fields are set with the current configuration values. However, you can change these
values by clicking in their fields and enter a numerical value.
• Location. From the drop-down list, select the location where the (4100-1340) TFX Loop Audio Interface card is physically located in
the bay.

10.15 Programming the TFX Loop AMP96 Audio Application

10.15.1 Overview
The AMP96 riser point type must be set to “SIGNAL” in order to play the audio. The other point types are used for driving the TFX
notification appliances. If there are other signal driver modules such as SDA505/SDA506 (point type SIGNAL) used for the audio
applications, you must create a user list to include these points as well as the AMP96 riser input point. The AMP96 riser input point feeds
the riser to signal driver modules. The signal that will play over the speaker of the AMP96 is determined by the audio signals on Channel 1
of the PDI bus. The objective of using SMPL programming for the AMP96 audio application is to allow the ES Panel Audio Controller to play
the required audio message on Channel 1. Subsequently, this allows the AMP96 riser input point to pick up the message through the TFX
audio interface. The procedures for the different cases are described in the subsequent sections

10.16 AMP96 plays its own DV2/Tone card

If the AMP96 plays its own DV2/Tone card signal, then write SMPL to turn on the AMP96 DV2/Tone card control subpoint.

page 196 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Example: When there is a fire, play the DV2/Tone card audio message. Stop the audio message when the alarm silence key is pressed.
Equation 1:

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P3|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FIRE ALARM DETECT
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M2-4-6|MSIGB|SIGNAL|DV2/TONE SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]
Equation 2:

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P6|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALARM SILENCE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M2-4-6|MSIGB|SIGNAL|DV2/TONE SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]

10.17 AMP96 plays the ES Panel Analog Audio Channel 1 Message

If the ES Panel Amplifier is installed in the system, develop the SMPL equations to do the following:
1. AMP96 riser input points (or list) to track the status of a ES Panel speaker point which is playing the channel 1 message
2. When playing the supervision message, turn off the AMP96 riser input points (or list)
3. When playing the silence, turn off the AMP96 riser input points (or list)
Examples:
Equation 1: AMP96 track a ES Panel speaker point

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
SIG9|SPEAKERB|SPEAKER|SIGNAL CARD 7 CIRCUIT SIG9
AND STATUS CHL1
SIG9|SPEAKERB|SPEAKER|SIGNAL CARD 7 CIRCUIT SIG9
[END OUTPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
M2-4-5|MSIGB|SIGNAL|RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]
Equation 2: turn off the AMP96 riser input point when playing silence

[INPUTS]
IF ANALOG=CONSTANT 0.000000 CNTS
A49|Compare analog|ANALOG|CHANNEL|ROUTING
AND STATUS ON
M2-4-5|MSIGB|SIGNAL|RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M2-4-5|MSIGB|SIGNAL|RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]
Equation 3: turn off the AMP96 riser input point when playing the supervision

page 197 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P375|DIGITAL|UTILITY|CHL1-AUDIO SUPERVISION ACTIVE
AND STATUS ON
M2-4-5|MSIGB|SIGNAL|RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M2-4-5|MSIGB|SIGNAL|RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]
If ES Panel Amplifier is not installed in the system and there are no ES Panel speaker points in the ES Panel, then write the SMPL equations
for the AMP96 to play the ES Panel analog audio message. The following procedures are the general steps to make the AMP96 play default
audio similar to that of the ES Panel audio system:
Note: In this case select the system option: Number of Channels: 1 Paging channel: 1

1. Write an equation to disable the default ES Panel audio program at system startup, in this equation also turn on P398 to disable
the supervision not active trouble on channel 1.
2. Copy these equations to another SMPL program (for example programmer 7) as templates. (actually it is recommended to copy
all the default equations).
3. Modify the templates for the AMP96 SMPL application programs if any equation statement contains the ES Panel speaker circuit
list (L80/L90/L83/L84). Follow these rules to change the SMPL statement:
- For USPEAKER statement, change the ES Panel speaker circuit list (L80/L90/L83/L84) L90 to the Amp96 riser circuit points (or create
a List to hold these points), and use the HOLD statement instead, use the same control priority.
- For the UPLAY or UPLAQ statement, if the SPK is neither “NONE” nor “Local”, set the SPK to “NONE” and add additional HOLD
statement to turn the desired AMP96 riser points (or list) ON, use the same control priority
- Change the input statement of detecting the ON/OFF on channel 1 of the ES Panel speaker list (L80/L90/L83/L84) to simply
detecting the ON/OFF status of the AMP96 points (or list)
- Delete the UVOLUME statement from all the equations
- The template “STOP SUPERVISION TONE” equation can be deleted or leave it unchanged
- Leave other template equations the same as the original
4. Add a new equation to turn off AMP96 riser circuit (or the point list) when the silence message is playing on channel 1.
5. If necessary, develop other audio application SMPL equations for the cases of specific application.
L256 contains the all the AMP96 riser input points to play the ES Panel channel 1 audio in the examples below.
Example 1: Disable the default program 1 and turn on the P373 at system start-up

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A34|ANALOG|TIMER|SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P17|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SMPL PROGRAM 1 - DEFAULT AUDIO
HOLD ON PRI=3,3
P398|DIGITAL|UTILITY|CHL & AMPLIFIER TROUBLE ENABLE
[END OUTPUTS]
Example 2: Modify the template examples
Template equation 1:
Original: EVAC MESSAGE ON ALL SPEAKERS

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P141|DIGITAL|UTILITY|MANUAL AUDIO EVAC ON
OR STATUS ON
P35|DIGITAL|UTILITY|MANUAL EVACUATION SWITCH INPUT
SAVE 1

page 198 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=15,15
USPEAKER CHL1 PRI=3,3
L90|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS-NON EDITABLE
UVOLUME VOLUME=A208
L90|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS-NON EDITABLE
[END OUTPUTS]
New: EVAC MESSAGE ON ALL SPEAKERS

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P141|DIGITAL|UTILITY|MANUAL AUDIO EVAC ON
OR STATUS ON
P35|DIGITAL|UTILITY|MANUAL EVACUATION SWITCH INPUT
SAVE 1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=15,15
HOLD ON PRI=3,3
L256|LIST|CONTROL|AMP96
[END OUTPUTS]
Template equation 2:
Original: START EVAC MESSAGE IF NOT PLAYING
[INPUTS]
NOT ANY ALL ON
L90|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS-NON EDITABLE
OR NOT STATUS ON
P89|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EVACUATION MESSAGE LED
AND RECALL 1
[END OUTPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=15,15
UPLAY CHL1=A55 VOLUME=NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK=NONE TRK=P89
PRI=9,9
[END OUTPUTS]
New: START EVAC MESSAGE IF NOT PLAYING

[INPUTS]
NOT ANY ALL ON
L256|LIST|CONTROL|AMP96
OR NOT STATUS ON
P89|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EVACUATION MESSAGE LED
AND RECALL 1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=15,15
UPLAY CHL1=A55 VOLUME=NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK=NONE TRK=P89
PRI=9,9
[END OUTPUTS]
Template equation 3:
Original: PLAY AUX 1 MESSAGE ON L83

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON

page 199 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

P99|DIGITAL|UTILITY|AUX MSG 1 ON
AND NOT STATUS ON
P101|DIGITAL|UTILITY|AUX MSG 1 LED
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
UPLAY CHL1=A59 VOLUME=A208 RESET NOFLUSH SPK=L83 TRK=P101 PRI=9,9
[END OUTPUTS]
Template equation 4:
Original: ALL SPEAKERS TALK SWITCH ON

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P129|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=15,15
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P131|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK LED
USPEAKER CHL1 PRI=9,9
L90|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS - NON EDITABLE
UVOLUME VOLUME=A208
L90|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS - NON EDITABLE
[END OUTPUTS]
New: ALL SPEAKERS TALK SWITCH ON

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P129|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=15,15
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P131|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK LED
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
L256|LIST|CONTROL|AMP96
[END OUPUTS]
Template equation 5:
Original: ALL SPEAKERS TALK SWITCH OFF

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P130|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK OFF
AND STATUS ON
P131|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK LED
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P131|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK LED
USPEAKER OFF PRI=9,9
L90|LIST|EMPTY|ALL SPEAKERS - NON EDITABLE
[END OUTPUTS]
New: ALL SPEAKERS TALK SWITCH OFF

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON

page 200 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

P130|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK OFF

AND STATUS ON
P131|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK LED
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P131|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALL SPEAKERS TALK LED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
L256|LIST|CONTROL|AMP96
[END OUTPUTS]

Example 3:
Turn off the L256 when the silence message is playing on channel.

[INPUTS]
IF ANALOG=CONSTANT 0.000000 CNTS
A49|Compare Analog|ANALOG|ANANLOG|CHANNEL 1 ROUTING
AND STATUS ON
L256|LIST|CONTROL|AMP96
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
L256|LIST|CONTROL|AMP96
[END OUTPUTS]

10.18 Programming the TFX Loop ATM500 Phone Application

10.18.1 The microphone of the AMP96 operation

The microphone signal can only be heard from the AMP96 speakers. Other AMP96(s) and signal driver modules (such as SDA505/506)
that are setup to receive the audio riser signal from the AMP96 (the one with the microphone) can play the voice via SMPL control
programming.
Example: the configuration is described as follows:
M2-4: AMP96 with Microphone
M2-5: 505SDA, audio input from the AMP96 (M2-4)
M2-6: 506SDA, audio input from the AMP96 (M2-4)
Equation 1:

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
M2-4-4|MINPUT|UTILITY|INPUT POINT (MIC KEYED MONITOR)
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
M2-5-0|500SDM|SIGNAL|
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
M2-6-0|500SDM|SIGNAL|
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
M2-6-5|MSIGB|SIGNAL|RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]

10.18.2 Phone paging operation for the AMP96 speakers

The operation is similar to the audio playing as long as the ES Panel master phone page channel is selected Channel 1.
Equation 1: START PHONE PAGING

[INPUTS]

page 201 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

STATUS ON
P107|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PHONE PAGING LED
AND NOT STATUS ON
P437|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PHONE PAGING STATUS LED
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
UPLAY CHL1=PHONE VOLUME=NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK=NONE
TRK=NONE PRI=4,4
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M2-4-5 | MSIGB | SIGNAL | RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]
Equation 2: STOP PHONE PAGING

[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
P107 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | PHONE PAGING LED
AND STATUS ON
P437 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | PHONE PAGING STATUS LED
[END INPUTS]
[OUPUTS]
USILENCE CHL1 PRI=3,9
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M2-4-5 | MSIGB | SIGNAL | RISER INPUT SIGNAL
[END OUTPUTS]

10.18.3 Programming the TFX ATM500 phone operation

The ES Panel TFX Phone Riser card provides the interface for the communication between ES Panel. Master phone and the TFX ATM500
modules. Please verify the following before any SMPL programming:
• The ES Panel TFX Phone Riser card is configured
• The point type for the signal points on this ES Panel TFX Phone Riser card must be configured as “RISER” or “SIGNAL”.
• The Maximum number of the ATM500 modules supported by this module is limited to be 30.
• The points on this card must be always turned on from the systems startup by using the SMPL equation, if the point type is “RISER”,
the higher control priority (priority 2) is required to override the default operation.
The ATM500 phone module has 2 TFX addressable loop devices, a contact used to detect the phone off hook condition and a relay used to
control the phone riser.
The point type for the contact: UTILITY
The point type for the Relay module: RELAY

page 202 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

10.18.4 ATM500 Phone SMPL programming examples

System configuration (only the modules directly to the examples are listed):
ES Panel TFX Phone Riser card: SIG9 – 11 (point type: RISER, L257 contains SIG10 and SIG11)
ES Panel TFX Loop Interface: AMP96 - M2-8, L256 contains the riser input point M2-8-5AMT500 – M2-39 (500RM) and M2-40 (502CMA
Class B)
ES Panel 64 Led/64 Switch controller, see windows for the point configurations:

Figure 144: Phone Configuration (1)

page 203 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 145: Phone Configuration (2)

page 204 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 146: Phone Configuration (3)

1. Turn on the points on the ES Panel TFX Riser card when system starts up.

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A34 | ANALOG | TIMER | SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,2
L257 | LIST | CONTROL | GENERIC LIST
HOLD ON PRI=2,2
SIG9 | PHONEB | RISER | SIGNAL CARD 5 CIRCUIT SIG9
[END OUTPUTS]
2. Fast flash the phone LED when the ATM500 phone is off-hook and the phone circuit is not connected.

[INPUTS]
STATUS ABNORM
M2-40-0 | 500CMAB | UTILITY |
AND NOT STATUS ON
M2-39-0 | 500RM | RELAY |
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH FAST
3-9|LED|LED|
[END OUTPUTS]
3. Turn the phone LED steady on when ATM500 phone is jacked in and the phone circuit is connected.

[INPUTS]

page 205 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

STATUS ON
M2-39-0 | 500RM | RELAY |
AND STATUS ABNORM
M2-40-0 | 500CMAB | UTILITY |
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH ON
3-9 | LED | LED |
[END OUTPUTS]
4. Turn the phone LED off when ATM500 phone is on-hook and the phone circuit is disconnected.

[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
M2-39-0|500RM|RELAY|
AND NOT STATUS ABNORM
M2-40-0|500CMAB|UTILITY
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH OFF
3-9|LED|LED|
[END OUTPUTS]

ATM500 Phone SMPL Programming Examples

5. Turn off the ATM500 phone circuit if local master phone has been inactive for 10 seconds.

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
M2-39-0 | 500RM | RELAY |
AND NOT STATUS ON
L164|LIST|MIXED|LOCAL MASTER PHONES HANDSET OFF HOOK
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A256|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M2-39-0|500RM|RELAY|
[END OUTPUTS]

page 206 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

11 Viewing, adding, and editing lists

11.1 Introduction
A list is a group of similar points, sharing a common name, that can be monitored or controlled as if they were a single point. For example,
when you use a switch to turn on a list populated with control points, all of the points in the list turn on.
The ES Panel includes the following types of list:
• Automatically Generated, Read-Only System Lists: These lists are created based on the point type assigned to the point. Points
cannot be manually added or deleted from these lists.
• Automatically Generated, Editable System Lists: These are lists created based on the point types you assign to the point. These
lists are only editable after the automatic list generation property is turned off for the list.
• User-Defined Lists: Switches, LEDs, and Custom Control equations all make use of these types of lists. Switches typically control lists
made up of control points (relays), audio NACs, or standard NACs (horns/strobes). LEDs can be programmed to monitor a list and
turn ON when any point in the list activates. Custom Control equations typically use lists of monitor points to indicate when a specific
output action should occur, and the points affected by the output action are typically specified in a user-defined list of control points.
• Zone Lists: This option allows you to create a list that groups together points into one defined zone. 4100ES and 4010ES jobs can
have up to 512 zones, and NDU jobs can have up to 1024 zones,
This chapter describes programming the five list categories, General Lists, Alarm Verification Lists, WalkTest Lists, Coding Lists, and Elevator
Recall Lists, used by the ES Panel FACP.
Note: For information on using lists for the Install Mode feature, consult the 4100ES Operator’s Manual (579-197)

11.2 List tab overview

11.2.1 Introduction
Select the List tab to display the List Tab window, shown in Figure 147. By default when you select the List Tab, the General List subtab,
located on the bottom left of the window, is selected. This window contains an entry for every list in the system.
The subtabs running across the bottom of the window allow you to display only the lists associated with a specific system category. For
example, clicking on the alarm verification subtab displays only the lists associated with alarm verification.
This section describes the general features of the List Tab. These features are available for use with all categories of list.

page 207 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 147: General List

page 208 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

11.2.2 Sort function

The Sort function allows you to sort and display lists in ascending or descending order based on list-specific criteria (the criteria shown in
the Sort Dialog is different for each type of list). To sort lists, do one of the following:
Press F5 function key. When the Sort Dialog (shown below) appears, click on the Column drop down list box to select the criteria to use
for the sort operation. Next, select whether the sort should be in Ascending or Descending order and click on OK.

Figure 148: Sort dialog

Click on a Column Title. Clicking on one of the column titles in the List Tab window automatically sorts the list in descending order.
Clicking on the same column title again sorts the lists in ascending order.

Right Click in the List Window. Right Click in the list window. When the list of options appears, select Sort. The Sort Dialog shown
above appears. Click on the Column drop down list box to select the criteria to use for the sort. Next, select whether the sort should
be in Ascending or Descending order and click on OK.
Figure 149: Column Titles

11.2.3 Custom label spell check

Spell Check allows you to validate the spelling of custom labels. Using Spell Check, incorrectly spelled words can then be automatically
corrected or suggested alternatives can be substituted.
1. Position the pointer in the point list and press the F7 button. (Alternatively, you can right click in the List window and select Spell
Check when the list of options appears.)

Figure 150: Spell Check

2. Correct the misspelled word in any of the following ways. (Use the Ignore and Ignore All buttons to ignore the misspelled word.)

- Click on the Change or Change All button to accept the suggested spelling in the Change to field.
- Type the correct spelling in the Change to field and press the Change or Change All button.
- Scroll through the Suggestions drop down list, click on one of the entries, and then click on the Change or Change All field.

11.2.4 Search
The Search and Find functions allow you to specify a specific search criteria (such as a specific custom label) and then search the List
Window for the selected data.
1. Position the pointer in the List Window and press the CTRL + F key combination. (Alternatively, you can right click in the List
Window and select Search or Find from the list that appears.)

page 209 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 151: Search dialog

2. Enter the Search text in the Search For field. Click on the Search in Column field and select the column in which to search. Click
on Search Next to start the search.
3. Press the F3 key to continue searching the List Window for another occurrence of the item you are searching.

11.3 Editing system lists

Default custom control programming within the system automatically adds points to system lists based on their point type, a process
known as auto list generation, or autogen. For example, adding a signal point with the SSIGNAL point type automatically adds the point to
system list L8, Fire Alarm Points Off on Silence.
In some applications, however, you need to turn a system list's autogen property off, so that you can manually move points into or out of
the system list. This is particularly true when editing Alarm Verification, WalkTest, Coding, and Elevator Recall groups.
Be aware that when working with the system lists, four icons are used to indicate the status of the system list.
Table 71: System List icons
Icon Description
This symbol represents an auto-generated list with the autogen property turned on. When autogen is turned on, points cannot be
manually moved into or out of the list.

This symbol represents an auto-generated list whose autogen property cannot be altered. The list is permanently set to autogen on
and cannot be edited.

This symbol represents an auto-generated list with the autogen property turned off.

Indicates that the list is not automatically generated.

A system list's autogen property can be turned on and off in one of two places:
• General List Tab. Clicking on the General List tab displays all lists (system and user) currently defined on the panel. Refer to “Turning
Autogen Off and On from the General List Tab” below for specific information on doing this.
• Alarm Verification, WalkTest, Coding, Elevator Recall Tabs. Each of these tabs displays a window that allows you to move points
into the appropriate lists. Within each window, you can toggle the autogen property to allow points to be moved into and out of the
lists. Refer to the specific section later in this chapter for information on turning off autogen for alarm verification, WalkTest, coding, or
elevator recall.

11.3.1 Turning Autogen off and on from the General List tab
1. Click on the List tab at the top of the programmer.
2. Click on the General List subtab at the bottom of the window.
3. Right click on the list whose autogen property you want to change. Select Properties from the list that appears. A dialog similar
to the following appears.

page 210 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 152: List Properties

4. Click on the AutoGen field and change the setting.

11.4 Adding and editing user-defined lists

This section describes the basic operations - add list, tag points, delete points, and view list properties - that can be performed on a user-
defined list.
User-defined lists allow a range of points to be controlled (turned on or off, for example) by turning a switch on, or via a Custom Control
command. Lists associated with LEDs allow the status of system attributes or components to be monitored.

11.4.1 Adding a user-defined list

To add a general-purpose list and populate it with points, follow these steps.
1. Open the List Window by selecting the List Tab at the top of the Programmer. See Figure 147 for the location of this tab.
2. Open the TagList window by either pressing the Insert key or right clicking in the List Window and selecting Add List. A TagList
window, similar to the one shown below, appears.

page 211 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 153: Taglist window

3. You can select points for the list using a combination of the following three methods. When you select points, the TagList window
adds the >> character to the left of the point to indicate that the point is tagged.

- Use the spacebar to select/deselect specific points. Click on the point you want to select and then press the spacebar once to tag
the point; press it again to deselect the point.
- Click on the Tag All icon, located at the top of the TagList window. This selects every point in the Taglist.
- Click on the Tag by Type dialog to tag points based on their point type or device type.
- Click on Clear All Tags (eraser) to erase all the tags.
- Click on Tags Up to sort the tagged points to the top of the list.
- Click on Sort to sort either HW Ref, Point Name, Device Type, Point Type or Custom Label columns in the TagList window in
ascending or descending order
- Click on Filter to sort points according to predefined criteria, such as: Device Type, Point Type and Custom Label.
- Click on Search to look for a point in one of the five columns in the TagList window.
- Click on Help to open the ES Panel Online Help.
4. Click on the OK button in the TagList window. The dialog shown below appears, prompting you to name the list. Enter
descriptive text and click on OK.

page 212 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 154: List Label Dialog

11.4.2 Editing an existing user-defined list

To edit an existing list (i.e., add additional points or delete points from the list), follow these steps.
1. Open the list's Tag List by either right clicking on the list and selecting Tag List from the menu that appears, or click on the list
and press the F9 key.
2. When the tag list appears, click on the point you want to add or delete. Press the spacebar to toggle whether the point is tagged
(included in the list) or not. Tagged points are identified by the >> to the left of the point name.

11.5 Editing alarm verification groups

11.5.1 Alarm verification overview

The ES Panel's alarm verification feature reduces unwanted alarms caused by smoke detectors. Alarm verification uses the following three-
stage process to verify the presence of an alarm condition.
• Stage 1. Retard. An activated smoke detector (which must have an alarm verification point type) starts a timer in the FACP that
usually lasts 30 seconds (15 seconds for Canadian systems).
• Stage 2. Reset. After the retard timer expires, power is temporarily dropped to the device and the detector resets itself.
• Stage 3. Confirmation. After the detector is restored, the system starts a new timer (10 seconds for Canadian systems; up to 120
seconds for domestic systems). At this point, if the original detector (or another detector within the same alarm verification group)
alarms before the timer expires, the signals activate and all other system alarm functions occur. Otherwise, if no detectors within the
alarm verification group activate, no NAC signals sound.
The ES Panel FACP supports both Domestic (United States) and Canadian versions of alarm verification. Refer to “Selecting Canadian or
Domestic (US) Operation” later in this chapter for information on enabling the Canadian or domestic version of alarm verification.
The alarm verification list consists of seven alarm verification groups. These groups allow you to segment the premises protected by the
FACP into distinct areas. Doing this allows the alarm verification process in each area of the building to run independently. For example,
when a smoke detector in the Area A group enters an alarm state, the system does not abort the verification process and activate building
signals if a smoke detector in the Area B group enters an alarm state. Compare this to the case where one smoke detector in the Area A
group enters an alarm state, triggering its alarm verification process. If another smoke detector in the Area A group then enters an alarm
state, the alarm verification process aborts and the building's signals sound.

11.5.2 Moving points between groups

By default, all smoke detectors with a verification point type are initially put in Alarm Verification Group 0. Follow these steps to put points
into other alarm verification groups.
1. Open the List Window by selecting the List Tab at the top of the Programmer. See Figure 147 for the location of this tab.
2. Click on the Alarm Verification tab at the bottom of the List Window. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 155 appears.

page 213 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 155: Alarm Verification tab

3. Click on the Alarm Verification group into which you want to move points. Right click and select Tag List. A screen similar to the
one shown in Figure 156 appears.

Figure 156: Sample Tag List for an alarm verification group

4. Use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each point you want to move into the group. A point is selected when a >> appears to
the left of the point. Repeat this step to select other points.

11.5.3 Selecting Canadian or domestic (US) operation

Canadian alarm verification works somewhat differently from the domestic (US) version. When you select Canadian operation for the alarm
verification feature, the system operates as follows:
Table 72: Canadian / domestic operation
Type Operation
Canadian Operation Retard Stage. If a point specified within one of the alarm verification lists enters an alarm state, the system
delays the annunciation of the alarm for 15 seconds
Reset Stage. When the 15 second timer expires, the system attempts to reset the initiating device for five
seconds.
Confirmation Stage. After the five second timer expires, the system evaluates the state of the initiating
device for 10 additional seconds. After 10 seconds, if the device is still in alarm, the system immediately
annunciates the alarm.

page 214 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 72: Canadian / domestic operation

Type Operation
Domestic (US) Operation Retard Stage. If a point specified within one of the alarm verification lists enters an alarm state, the system
delays the annunciation of the alarm for 30 seconds
Reset Stage. When the timer expires, the system attempts to reset the initiating device for five seconds.
Confirmation Stage. After the timer expires, the system evaluates the state of the initiating device for up to
120 additional seconds. After this duration, if the device is still in alarm, the system immediately annunciates
the alarm.
To select Canadian or Domestic (US) operation, follow these steps.
1. Right click on one of the groups and select Properties. The Alarm Verification Properties dialog shown below appears.

Figure 157: Alarm Verification Properties dialog

2. Click on the Alarm Verification tab.
3. Click on the drop down list box and select Canadian or Domestic operation.
Note: You only need to set the Verification Timer field for one of the alarm verification groups. The programmer sets this field to the
same value for all other groups.

11.5.4 Renaming a group

The default names for the groups are Alarm Verification Group 0 through Alarm Verification Group 7. To add a more descriptive name to
the group, follow these steps.
1. Right Click on the group whose name you want to change and select Properties. The Alarm Verification Properties dialog shown in
Figure 157 appears.
2. Click on the List tab in the dialog.
3. Enter a name for the group in the Description field.

11.6 Editing coding groups

The Coding list consists of eight groups. The purpose of these groups is to allow different areas of a building (or different buildings) to play
different codes on their NAC appliances, allowing the area containing the activated initiating device to be determined by the code being
played.
Coding Group 1 initially contains all of the signal points with a coded point type and all of the monitor points with a PNIS code assigned to
them. Each coding group consists of two lines: one for monitor zones and one for signal/relays.

page 215 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

11.6.1 Moving points between groups

Follow these steps to move points from Coding Group 1 (where they are initially placed) into other coding groups. Monitor points can exist
in multiple groups, but signals/relays can be in only one group at a time.
1. Open the List Window by selecting the List Tab at the top of the Programmer.
2. Click on the Coding tab at the bottom of the List Window. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 158 appears.

Figure 158: Coding Tab

3. Right click on Coding Group 1 and select Properties. A properties dialog appears. Click on the DC Coding tab in the dialog.
Remove the checkmarks from the Monitor and Control checkboxes. Click the Apply button, followed by the OK button to close
the dialog.
4. Select the monitor points to move as follows:
- Move the pointer to the Coding group into which you want to move monitor points and right click on the line similar to the one
shown in the example below. When the list of options appears, select Tag List. In the example below, the points are being moved
into Coding Group 4.

page 216 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- In the Tag List use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each monitor point you want to move into the group. A point is selected
when a >> symbol appears to the left of the point.
- Repeat these steps to move other monitor points into the group.
- The points that you selected in Step b above are not automatically deleted from Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones list. If you do not
want these points to be in both groups, you need to open up the Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones list and delete the points. To do
this, right click on Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones list. Select Tag List. When the list of points appears, use the mouse or arrow keys
to highlight each point you want to unselect from Coding Group 1. Press the space bar to deselect the highlighted point. Points do
not have the >> symbol to their left when they are unselected.
5. Select the signal/relay points to move as follows:
- Move the pointer to the appropriate Coding group and right click on the line shown in the example below. When the list of options
appears, select Tag List. In the example below, the points are being moved into Coding Group 4.

- In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each signal/relay point you want to move into the group. A point is selected
when a >> symbol appears to the left of the point.
- Repeat these steps to move other signal/relay points into the group. When you do this, points are automatically unselected in Group
1 - Signals/Relays and moved into the group you chose.

Figure 159: Sample TagList for a coding group

11.6.2 Editing group properties

Each Coding Group includes a set of properties that allow you to control the way in which points within the group operate. Follow these
steps to edit the properties for a group.
1. Right click on the group and select Properties from the menu that appears. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 160
appears.

Figure 160: Coding Group Properties

2. Use the guidelines listed in set the properties for the Coding group.

page 217 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 73: Group properties

Tab Properties
DC Coding Note: Any changes made to the options in the DC Coding tab apply to all of the coding group lists.
Monitor. A check in this box means monitor points with a PNIS code are automatically inserted in Group 1 - Monitor
Zones. You must unselect this check box if you want to move monitor points to another group. Note that if you
uncheck this box, move points, and then check the box at a later point, all of the points you moved will be placed
back in Group 1.

Note: Control. A check in this box means control points (signals/relays) with a coded point type are automatically
inserted in Group 1 - Signals/Relays. You must unselect this check box if you want to move relay points to another
group. Note that if you uncheck this box, move points, and then check the box at a later point, all of the points you
moved will be placed back in Group 1.
Note: On. Allows you to set the duration of each tone within the PNIS code.

Note: Off. Allows you to set the duration of silence between tones of the PNIS code.
DC Group When you change these options, the change only affects the selected group.Track Coded Input. This field only
applies to an upgraded ES Panel that uses older, mechanical pull stations. Selecting this checkbox allows the ES
Panel to play the mechanical code enabled on the pull station.
On Til. This field has three selections: Completion, Reset, and Silence. It allows you to specify how long the code
plays before it shuts off. Select Completion to play all rounds of the code. Select Reset to play the code until the
system is reset. Select Silence to play the code until an Alarm Silence occurs.
Number of Rounds. Specifies the number of code rounds that the system should play. Specifying 0 means
continuous.
List Description. Allows you to change the description of the selected coding group list (monitor zones or signal relay
list). For example, you can change the name of the Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones or Coding Group 1 - Signals/
Relays to a more descriptive name.
3. After making changes to the Coding Group properties, click on the Apply button to apply the changes and then click on OK to
close the Coding Group window.

11.7 Editing WalkTest groups

WalkTest allows the function of the system's initiating devices and signals to be tested by a single person. Conducting a WalkTest requires
you to perform the following general steps.
• Step 1. Create WalkTest Groups. The ES Panel supports up to eight Walk Test™ groups. This allows the building to be divided into
small portions for the Walk Test™, and allows the rest of the building to be protected by the fire alarm panel. Each group has a list
of monitor points (initiating devices) and a list of the signal circuits that activate when one of the monitor points within the group
activates.
• Step 2. Enable WalkTest Options from Front Panel. These options include the following. Refer to the “Setting WalkTest Options” in
the 4100ES Operator's Manual or the 4010ES Operator’s Manual for information on setting these options.
- Which WalkTest Group is enabled.
- Whether the group's signals turn on when a monitor point in the same group activates. Turn this option off to perform a silent
WalkTest on the system.
- Whether logging of WalkTest information is enabled or not. (Enable this option to perform a silent WalkTest.)
• Step 3. Manually Activate Initiating Devices in Each Group and Interpret Signals. Individually activate each initiating device
in the group, using the manufacturer’s recommended test equipment. Make sure to proceed in a logical manner (i.e., start with the
lowest IDNet or MAPNET address and work toward the highest). Each time you activate an initiating device, the system’s signals pulse
a code that allows you to verify exactly which initiating device triggered the signals. For hardwired monitor zones, the signal code
corresponds to the number of the zone. (For example, if the zone number is eight, the signals pulse eight times to indicate zone
eight.) For IDNet and MAPNET devices, the first set of pulses from the signals correspond to the channel. The signals then pause
momentarily and the next set of pulses corresponds to the number of the device on the channel. For example, if you activate an IDNet
smoke detector with an address of M1-25, the signals would sound once to indicate channel one, pause for a short duration, and
then sound two pulses followed by a pause and then five pulses to indicate device 25. In some cases, immediately after verifying the
function of an initiating device, you may also want to verify its ability to generate a trouble condition. To do this, cause a trouble on the
device and then listen to the signals. The signals sound steady for 4 seconds to indicate trouble conditions, and then reset.

11.7.1 Moving points between groups

The WalkTest list consists of eight groups. The purpose of these groups is to allow a technician to conduct a WalkTest in a specific area of a
building (or different buildings), and limit the activation of the building signals to only the intended area.
WalkTest Group 0 initially contains all of the monitor points and all of the signal points wired to the panel. Each WalkTest group consists of
two lines: one for monitor zones and one for signal/relays.

page 218 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Follow these steps to move points from WalkTest Group 0 (where they are initially placed) into other WalkTest groups. Signal/relay points
can exist in multiple groups, but monitor points can be in only one group at a time.

1. Open the List Window by selecting the List Tab at the top of the Programmer.
2. Click on the WalkTest tab at the bottom of the List Window. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 161 appears.

Figure 161: WalkTest tab

3. Right click on WalkTest Group 0 and select Properties. A properties dialog appears. Click on the WalkTest tab in the dialog.
Remove the checkmarks from the Monitor and Control checkboxes. Click the Apply button, followed by the OK button to close
the dialog.
4. Select the monitor points to move as follows:
- Move the pointer to the WalkTest group into which you want to move the points. Right click on the line shown in the example
below. When the list of options appears, select Tag List. In the example below, the points are being moved into WalkTest Group 4.

- In the Tag List (see Figure 162), use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each monitor point you want to move into the group. A
point is selected when a >> symbol appears to the left of the point.
- Repeat these steps to move other monitor points into the group. When you move points, the points are automatically unselected in
WalkTest Group 1 - Monitor Points and moved into the group you chose.
5. Select the signal/relay points to move as follows:
- Move the pointer to the appropriate WalkTest group and right click on the line shown in the example below. When the list of options
appears, select Tag List. In the example below, the points are being moved into WalkTest Group 4.

page 219 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each signal/relay point you want to move into the group. A point is selected
when a >> symbol appears to the left of the point.
- Repeat these steps to move other signal/relay points into the group.
- The points that you selected in Step b above are not automatically deleted from WalkTest Group 1 - Signals/Relays list. If you do not
want these points to be in both groups, you need to open up the WalkTest Group 1 - Signals/Relays list and delete the points. To do
this, right click on WalkTest Group 1 - Signals/Relays list. Select Tag List. When the list of points appears, use the mouse or arrow keys
to highlight each point you want to unselect from WalkTest Group 1. Press the space bar to deselect the highlighted point. Points do
not have the >> symbol to their left when they are unselected.

Figure 162: Sample TagList for WalkTest groups

11.7.2 Editing group properties

Each WalkTest group includes a set of properties that allow you to control the way in which points within the group operate. Follow these
steps to edit the properties for a group.
1. Click on the WalkTest tab at the bottom of the List Window.
2. Double click on one of the WalkTest groups to view its properties window. (Alternatively, you can right click on the group and
select Properties from the menu that appears.) A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 163 appears.

Figure 163: WalkTest Properties

3. Use the guidelines listed below to set the properties for the WalkTest group.

page 220 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 74: Group properties

Tab Properties
WalkTest Setting the properties in this tab affects all WalkTest groups.
Monitor. A check in this box means monitor points are automatically inserted in Group 1 - Monitor Zones. If you
uncheck this box, you can move points from one group to another. However, at a later point, if you recheck this box, the
points you previously moved to other groups will be moved back to Group 1.
Control. A check in this box means control points (signals/relays) are automatically inserted in Group 1 - Signals/Relays.
If you uncheck this box, you can move points from one group to another. However, at a later point, if you recheck this
box, the points you previously moved to other groups will be moved back to Group 1.
On. Allows you to set the duration of each tone within the PNIS code.
Off. Allows you to set the duration of silence between tones of the PNIS code.
Group Setting the properties in this tab affects only the selected group.Monitor. A counter that tracks the number of devices
in the group.
Control. A counter that tracks the number of devices in the group.
Voice. Check this box to play tones or messages rather than the standard WalkTest tones.
Reset Delay. Allows you to shorten or lengthen the reset time used by the monitor device. For example, increase the
delay in cases where canned smoke does not clear from a smoke detector quickly enough.
List Description. Allows you to change the description of the group’s monitor or control lists. For example, you can change
the name of the WalkTest Group 0 - Signals/Relays to a more descriptive name, if necessary.
4. After making changes to the WalkTest Group properties, click on the Apply button to apply the changes and then click on OK to
close the window.

11.8 Editing elevator recall lists

11.8.1 Introduction
The Elevator Recall list is made up of five groups, each corresponding to an elevator shaft numbered from one to five. Each shaft group
contains three lists - one for the primary recall points, one for the alternate recall points, and one for the shutdown points.
The Elevator Shaft 1 group initially contains all of the system's monitor points and all relays with the following point types - PRIMARY,
ALTERN, and SHAFT (shutdown).

page 221 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

11.8.2 Moving points between groups

Follow these steps to move points from Elevator Shaft 1 group (where they are initially placed) into other elevator shaft groups. Signal/relay
points and monitor points can exist in multiple groups at the same time.
1. Open the List Window by selecting the List Tab at the top of the Programmer.
2. Click on the Elevator Recall tab at the bottom of the List Window. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 164 appears.

Figure 164: Elevator Recall tab

3. Select the monitor points to move as follows:
- Move the pointer to the appropriate Elevator Shaft group and right click on the line shown in the example below. When the list of
options appears, select Tag List. In the example below, the points are being moved into Elevator Shaft 4 -- Primary Monitor Zone list.

- In the Tag List use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each monitor point you want to move into the group. A point is selected
when a >> symbol appears to the left of the point.
- Repeat these steps to move other monitor points into the group.
- Points that you move from Elevator Shaft 1 Primary Monitor Zones list to another group are not automatically deleted from Elevator
Shaft 1 Primary Monitor Zones list. To delete points from this list, you need to highlight the Elevator Shaft 1 Primary Monitor Zones
list, press F9 to see the tag list, and then highlight the point you want to delete and hit the space bar.
4. Select the signal/relay points to move as follows.
- Move the pointer to the appropriate Elevator Shaft group and right click on the line shown in the example below. When the list of
options appears, select Tag List. In the example below, the points are being moved into Elevator Shaft 4 -- Primary Relay group.

- In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each signal/relay point you want to move into the group. A point is selected
when a >> symbol appears to the left of the point.
- Repeat these steps for the Alternate and Shaft lists within the selected group.

page 222 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- If you want to delete relay points from the Elevator Shaft 1 Primary Relay list, you need to first right click on the Elevator Shaft 1
Primary Relay list, select Properties, and set the AutoGen field to No. Next, press F9 to see the tag list, and then highlight the point
you want to delete and hit the space bar.

Figure 165: Sample TagList for Elevator Recall group

11.8.3 Editing group descriptions

Each Elevator Recall group includes a description property that allows you to change the label of the group. Follow these steps to edit the
group's description.
1. Click on the Elevator Recall tab at the bottom of the List Window. Double click on the appropriate Elevator Recall list, and a
screen similar to the one shown in Figure 166 appears.
2. Edit the description field and click on the Apply button. Click OK to close the screen.

Figure 166: Elevator Recall list description properties

11.9 Zone Lists

11.9.1 Introduction
Using the Zone List tab, you can group alarm conditions into zones (Up to 512 for 4010ES and 4100ES jobs. Up to 1024 for NDU jobs).
When an alarm occurs, a list of affected zones displays on the panel's touchscreen. Touch the zone in alarm to display all the points that
are in alarm in that selected zone.

page 223 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

11.9.2 Creating a Zone List

1. Open the Zone List tab in the programmer.
2. Double click on an empty Zone List. The Zone List Properties window opens.
3. Enter a custom label to describe the Zone List.
4. Enter an alternate custom label to describe the Zone List.
5. Click on the Select Point button; the Tag List window opens.
6. Select the points that you want to include in the list.
7. Click on OK to confirm the selection.
Note:
• On the 4100ES/4010ES FACU, point numbering for Zone Lists will start at 1001 (for example ZN1001. Points below this value are
considered a monitor point and any ZN points starting at this value are considered a Zone List.
• You can nest Zone Lists within other Zone Lists. For example, the Zone List ZN1001 can contain points M-1-1, M-1-2, etc. Zone List
ZN1002 can contain M2-1, M2-1, and Z001 (and all its zones). Zone Lists can contain up to three layers of nested Zone Lists.
• When you upgrade an old job that has verification alarm points in system pseudo lists and you add Zone Lists, ensure that you
manually add them to a zone. The system also lists auto-generation for verification groups if a user removes all Zone Lists and there
are verification points in the job.

11.9.3 Adding and deleting Zone Lists on 4100ES/4010ES FACUs

You can use the Zones tab to add or delete Zone Lists.
Ensure to use the following guidelines when upgrading jobs with List Cards populated between 171 and 174:
• For 4100ES and 4010ES jobs: Zone List Cards can only be populated between 173 and 174,. If there is a List Card already in these
addresses, the Zone List Card will be added to the next available address, with 174 as the upper limit. Remove list cards from these
addresses if they are all occupied and you wish to use Zones.

Note: Once you add a Zone List Card, then the empty slot after it can only be used for a Zone List.

• For NDU ES jobs: Zone List Cards can only be populated between 171 and 174,. If there is a List Card already in these addresses, the
Zone List Card will be added to the next available address, with 174 as the upper limit. Remove list cards from these addresses if they
are all occupied and you wish to use Zones.
Note: Once you add a Zone List Card, then the empty slots after it can only be used for a Zone List.

page 224 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

12 Custom control
Introduction
Use custom control to create user-defined equations that control the components of the ES Panel fire alarm control panel (FACP), such as
hardware points, pseudo points, and lists.
This chapter describes using custom control to create custom programming applications for the ES Panel FACP.

12.1 Custom control overview

What is custom control?
The ES Panel custom control is a wizard-based application used to create Custom Control Equations. Custom control equations provide a
way to override the default operation of the ES Panel, and enables the ES Panel to function in a facility-specific way. Each Custom Control
equation has a similar form: one half of the equation, called the input side, is used to monitor the state of specific system inputs, initiating
devices, for example. The other half of the equation, called the output side, is used to control specific system outputs, relays, notification
appliances, and so on. The output side executes only when the state of the input side is true. Another way to think about custom control
equations is to consider them as If/Then commands. If the input side of the equation is true, then execute the output side.
The following examples help explain the way custom control is typically used with a ES Panel FACP.
• Selective signaling: Selective signaling replaces the general alarm NAC operation of the system, which activates all NACs in response
to any alarm condition, with selective NAC control. Use this type of control to program the system so that only specific NACs respond
to specific initiating devices.
• Fan and damper control following an alarm: Controlling a HVAC system of the building following an alarm condition prevents
supply fans from feeding a potential fire, and enables the HVAC system to exhaust smoke from the area in alarm. In this case, custom
control equations are used to monitor the initiating devices in a given area and control the dampers and air handling units of the
HVAC system to provide the correct supply and exhaust pressurization.

12.2 The role of lists and pseudo points

Using user-defined and system lists and pseudo points, improves the efficiency of custom control equations, and enables facility-specific
operations to be programmed.
• Digital Pseudo Points: Digital pseudo points store a value of ON or OFF.
- System Digital Pseudo Points can be used to track when common actions, for example a system reset, have occurred and to
activate facility-specific output as necessary.
- User-defined digital pseudo points can be used to signal that a specific event has occurred, for example, turn on a user-defined
pseudo point to indicate when a water tank is full.
• Analog Pseudo Points : Analog pseudo points store analog values that can be used in custom control equations.
- System Analog Pseudo Points store analog values, the number 128, for example, and can be used as a threshold value within
a custom control equation. For example, perform some output action when the value of the number of system troubles analog
pseudo point (A2) reaches a specific value.
- User Analog Pseudo Points store user-defined analog values. The exact function of an analog user pseudo point depends on the
point type, that is counter, timer, or analog value.
• List Pseudo Points: Use User-Defined Lists to refer to a specific group of devices using a single reference. For example, creating a
user-defined list called “Floor 1 Pull Stations,” and populating it with only the pull stations from floor 1 provides a way to monitor all of
the pull stations on the floor, without writing an equation for each pull station.

12.3 Anatomy of a custom control equation

Every custom control equation has an input side, consisting of input statements, and an output side, consisting of output statements.
Input Statements are typically used to monitor the status of a point or list, or perform an action such as delay, cycle, compare two values,
or save/recall values. Every input statement begins with an Opcode, which is the action that the input is performing, for example, monitor
point status, recall memory register, and so on. The Custom Control Wizard displays a series of opcode-specific dialog boxes. For example
if the Opcode is Point Status, the dialog boxes prompt the user for a qualifier about the condition, alarm, trouble, and so on, and the point
being monitored.

Output Statements are the actions that occur only when the input side of the equation is true. Every output statement begins with an
Opcode, which is the general action that occurs when the input side is true. The opcode is followed by a series of opcode-specific dialog
boxes, which allow you to specify exactly how the selected opcode functions. For example, if you are using the Set Opcode, the wizard

page 225 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

displays a series of dialog boxes that you can use to specify a qualifier, on, off, and so on, and the point, a signal, for example, on which you
want the output action to execute.

Use the Logical Operators, AND, OR, and NOT, to link multiple input statements to form logical expressions. Logical operators are only
used with input statements, and are not used with output statements. ES Panel custom control uses the following logical operators:
• The AND operator: Use the AND logical operator to put a group of points in series, so that only the activation of all points at the
same time causes the output side of the equation to occur. In the following example, Zone1 and Zone2 must both be in alarm, FIRE,
before the output, Hold ON SIG3, executes.

• The OR operator: Use the OR operator to put a group of points in parallel, meaning the activation of any one of the points causes
the output side of the equation to execute. In the following example, if either Zone1 or Zone2 enters an alarm state, the output, Hold
ON SIG3, executes:

• The NOT operator: Use the NOT operator to specify that a condition must not be true in order for the output to execute. In the
following example, the output side of the equation, PRINT ALL “SMOKE NOT DIRTY”, executes only if the condition of M1-1 is NOT
dirty.

12.4 Using a ladder logic diagram to evaluate an equation

A ladder logic diagram is a sketch of the equation used to evaluate or predict the outcome, of a custom control equation before it is
entered into the ES Panel Programmer. Use the following conventions when creating ladder logic diagrams:
• Draw a solid, vertical line on the left side of the sketch to represent the starting point for the equation. Use a vertical dashed line to
divide the sketch into an input side and an output side.
• Use two vertical, parallel lines to represent each input statement. Add text between the lines to describe the input statement.
• Use a circle to represent each output statement. Add text within or beside the circle to describe the output statement. In the following
example, the output side of the equation contains a single output statement, HOLD ON SIG 1. This action only occurs if the input side
of the equation, which monitors point M 2-1 for the presence of a fire condition, is true.

• Represent the OR logical operator by positioning inputs on top of one another as shown in the example below. Represent the AND
logical operator by positioning the inputs beside one another.

page 226 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

The previous example can be interpreted as: If point M2-1 OR M2-2 OR M2-3 AND M2-4 are in a trouble state, hold on signal 1. M2-4
is the key here. At least one of the three on the left, M2-1, M2-2, and M2-3, must be in a trouble state AND M2-4 must also be in a
trouble state.

12.5 Custom Control window overview

Selecting the Custom Control tab from the main ES Panel Programmer window displays the Custom Control window shown in the
following figure. This window has two sections:
• The left section lists user-defined and system-only (non-editable) custom control programs. Click the + sign on the left of the custom
control program to see more.
• The right section of the window is used for creating user-defined custom control equations. Use the Equation Comment box to
enter descriptive text explaining the operation of the equation. The Equations area contains a text entry box for creating and editing
input and output statements for the equation. Use the Add button to launch the Custom Control Wizard, and to create new
equations. Use the Edit button to edit existing equations. Use the Taglist button to launch a tag-list that you can use for selecting
and de-selecting points in an existing equation.

Figure 167: Custom Control window

12.6 Creating an equation

Step 1. Select user program
Note:
You cannot write custom control on InfoAlarm/ES TSD switches and LEDs.

page 227 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

You can create an equation on the Custom Control tab, or using the Floors/Suites Wizard, see Using the Floors/Suites Wizard.

When you are defining a custom control equation the first step is to add the equation to one of the fifty two user programs, Program 3
through Program 55. Complete the following steps to do this:

1. Right-click one of the user programs, Program 3 through Program 55, and click Add Equation on the list of options.

Figure 168: Add Equation

2. The Custom Control Equation Properties dialog appears. Enter a name for the equation in the Label field and click OK.

Figure 169: Custom Control Equation Properties

The Equations section of the Custom Control window updates to include the [INPUTS], [END INPUTS], [OUTPUTS], and [END
OUTPUTS] entries.
Step 2. Add the input statements

page 228 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

When you are creating a custom control equation, the second step is to add input statements to the equation. Repeat the steps in this
section until all input statements in the equation have been defined.
1. In the Equations box, position the cursor to the right of [INPUTS].

Figure 170: Positioning the cursor

2. Click Add. The dialog shown in Figure 171 appears.

Figure 171: Select Input Opcode Dialog

3. Select an Opcode type from the Input list, and click Next.
4. The next dialogs that appears depends on the Opcode you selected in Step 3.
5. The Finish button becomes available when all dialogs related to the input opcode have appeared. Click Finish to complete
defining the input statement.

Step 3. Add the output statements

page 229 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

When you are creating a new custom control equation, the third step is to add the output statements. Repeat the steps in this section until
all output statements in the equation are defined.
1. In the Equations box, position the cursor to the right of [OUTPUTS].

Figure 172: Positioning the cursor

2. Click Add. The dialog shown in Figure 173 appears.

Figure 173: Select Output Opcode dialog

3. Select an Opcode type from the Output list , and click Next.
4. The next dialogs displayed by the wizard depend on the Opcode you selected in Step 3. Refer to the entry for the Opcode in
Appendix D for information about the dialogs that appear for specific opcodes.
5. The Finish button becomes available when all dialogs related to the output opcode have appeared. Click Finish to complete
defining the output statement.

12.7 Using the Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard

This application limits the activation of NACs to the floor on which the activated initiating device is located, referred to as the fire floor, and
the floors immediately above and below the fire floor.

Figure 174: Floor Above/Below

In the previous figure, an activated smoke detector or pull station on Floor 3 activates the NACs on Floors 2, 3, and 4.
Step 1. Select the Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard tab
1. Click the Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard tab, located at the bottom left of the Custom Control window.
2. Right-click the blank area above the tab. When the list of options appears, select Create Floor Group. The ES Panel refers to

page 230 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

each set of floor above/floor below equations as a Floor Group. This is the name of the group or area that the floor above/floor
below program controls. Enter a name for the Floor Group in the dialog box that appears, and click Next.

Figure 175: Creating a Floor Group

Figure 176: Creating a Floor Group

Step 2. Specify general information
Specify general information about the application in the next dialog box that appears.
Specify this information as follows:
• Program #: Use this entry to specify the custom control user program in which this application is to be stored. Programs 3 - 55 are
available for user programs.
• Number of Floors: Specify the total number of floors controlled by the floor above/ floor below equations.
• Control # of Floors Above: When a fire occurs, this setting determines how many floors above the fire floor are notified.
• Control # of Floors Below: When a fire occurs, this setting determines how many floors below the fire floor are notified.
• Type: Select all that apply from the following:
- Audio: Select this if you are using speaker circuits.
- Non-Audio: Select this if you are using non-audio notification appliances.
- Smoke: Select this option to control smoke control, damper/AHU, points.
Click Next button and specify the custom names for the floors in the next dialog

page 231 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 177: Floor Above/Below data

Step 3. Specify floor names
The Floor list contains an entry for all floors so that, if you set number of floors to 10 in the previous screen, there are 10 entries.
To enter a name for a floor, complete the following steps:
1. Click the list to select the floor.
2. Enter a descriptive label in the Floor Label text box.
3. Enter any comments in the Comment text box.

Figure 178: Specify floor names

Step 4. Specify input and static points.
Enter information for the other fields in this screen as follows:
• Alarm Points: Identifies the input points for the floor, such as detectors, pull stations, and so on.
• Audio Points: Identifies the audio speaker points for the floor.
• Non-Audio Points: Identifies the non-audio notification points for the floor, such as horns, strobes, and so on.
• Air ON Points: Identifies the pressurization fan and damper ON points.
• Exhaust ON Points: Identifies the exhaust fan and damper ON points.
• Air OFF Points: Identifies the pressurization fan and damper OFF points.
• Exhaust OFF Points: Identifies the exhaust fan and damper OFF points.
There is a button for each of these selections. When you click the button, a tag-list appears. Select specific points for the selection on the
tag-list by pressing the space bar. A >> symbol appears to the left of the point to indicate that it is selected.

page 232 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 179: Input and static points

Note: List numbers L256 and L257 are the next available lists. They are not specifically L256 and L257.

Click Next. A dialog containing the custom control equations generated by the Custom Control Wizard appears. Click Finish.

12.8 Using the Selective Signaling Wizard

Overview
Selective Signaling is typically used to limit the activation of NACs to the area or floor on which an activated initiating device is located. In
the following example, an activated initiating device on Floor 2 triggers only the NACs located on Floor 2.

Figure 180: Selective Signaling

Step 1. Select the Selective Signaling Wizard tab
1. Click the Selective Signaling Wizard tab, located at the bottom left of the Custom Control window.
2. Right-click the blank area above the tabs. When the list of options appears, Select Create Group, see the following figure.

page 233 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 181: Create Selective Signaling group

The following dialog box appears. Enter a name for the group in the dialog box and click Next

Figure 182: Naming the group

Step 2. Set the general options
Specify general information about the application in the dialog box that appears.

Figure 183: General Information

page 234 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Specify the following information in the Initial Data area:

• Program #: If necessary, specify an alternate program number for the selective signaling application.
• Number of Signal Zones: Enter the total number of signal zones affected by the application.
• Type: Select all that apply from the following:
- Visual: Select this when there are visual notification appliances in the application.
- Audible: Select this when there are audible notification appliances in the application.
- Speaker: Select this when there are speaker circuits in the application.
- TrueAlert Zones (Addressable): Select to use addressable TrueAlert zones (wired to 4009T or TrueAlert Power Supply) in the
application.
- TrueAlert Zones (Non-Addressable): Select to use non-addressable TrueAlert appliances (2-wire with independent control of
audibles and visuals) in the application.
Step 3. Set zone names
Click the Next button. Use the dialog that appears to specify the following general information about the application:
1. Click the Zone list and select the zone number.
2. Enter a label for the zone in the Signal Zone Label text box.
3. Click Next to continue.

Figure 184: zone names

Step 4. Link initiating and notification points
Use the following screen to link initiating and notification points to one another. If one of the specified initiating devices activates, only the
notification appliances linked to the initiating device activate.

Figure 185: Linking initiating and notification devices

page 235 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Note: List numbers L262, L263 and L264 are the next available lists. They are not specifically L262, L263 and L264.

1. Click Alarm Point. A tag list appears. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list. Use the space bar to tag, or
select a point. A >> symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected. Click OK to continue. The previous screen appears.
2. In the Notification Points in this Signal Zone area, click the button corresponding to the type of notification appliance you
want to turn on when the tagged initiating devices activates. The choices are: Visual Points, Audible Points, Speaker Points,
TrueAlert Zones (Addressable), and TrueAlert Zones (Non-Addressable). A tag list appears. Select the points and click OK.
The previous screen appears.
3. You can also activate other notification signal zones when a tagged initiating device activates. To do this, click the Notification
Zones button to the right of the Other Signal Zones Notified label. A tag list appears. Select the points and click OK. The
previous screen appears.
4. Click Next to continue. A screen showing the equations generated by the wizard appears. Click Finish.

12.9 Using the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard

Use the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard to change the default operation of single station smoke detectors.
Note: The default operation, the sounder activates when the alarm threshold is passed and deactivates when the smoke level drops back
below the threshold, is programmed using the TPHOTO device type. To use the wizard to change the default operation, you must assign a
device type of SPHOTO or RPHOTO to the device.

The wizard has two types of custom operations, Alarm-activate base on alarm, and Alert-activate base prior to alarm. See the
appropriate section below for specific information.
Using the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard
1. Click the Sounder/Relay Base Operation Wizard tab, located at the bottom left of the Custom Control window.
2. Right-click the blank area above the tabs. When the list of options appears, select Create Point Group. A dialog box similar to
the following appears:

Figure 186: Creating Point Group

3. Enter a name for the group in the Point Group field.
4. Enter any comments in the Comments text box.
5. Click Next to continue. The screen that appears contains two choices, Alarm-activate base on alarm, and Alert-activate
base prior to alarm. See the appropriate section below for specific information.

12.10 Alarm-activate base on alarm

Alarm-activate base on alarm configures the single station detectors to activate when the alarm threshold is reached, and to turn off
on either reset or silence. To select this option, complete the following steps:
1. Click Alarm-activate base on alarm.
2. If necessary, you can select a different custom control user program. In the Program # list, select the user program number.
Click Next to continue.

page 236 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 187: Sounder/Relay Base Information

3. A dialog similar to Figure 188 appears. For the device operation, select either:

- Hold Device ON until Reset: the sounder or relay remains active until reset.
or
- Hold Device on until Silence: the sounder or relay remains active until signal silence.

Figure 188: Specifying Device Operation

Note: List number L256 is the next available list. It is not specifically L256.
4. Click the Group Points button. A tag list, containing single station points appears. Use the space bar to select the points. A >>
symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected.

Figure 189: Tagging points

5. Click OK to continue. The previous screen appears. Press the Next button to continue. A screen appears displaying the custom

page 237 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

control statements. Click Finish.

12.11 Alert-activate base prior to alarm

If you select the radio button labeled Alert-activate base prior to alarm, the sounder or relay on the single station detector activates
when the detector passes a threshold below the alarm level. To select this option, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Alert-activate base prior to alarm radio button.
2. If necessary, you can select a different custom control user program. In the Program # list, select the user program number.
Click Next to continue.

Figure 190: Alert-activate base prior to alarm

Figure 191: Operation

Note: List number L256 is the next available list. It is not specifically L256.
3. Click on one of the following options to configure the operation of the single station device:

- Track Device On while input is TRUE: The sounder or relay remains active while the smoke condition is above the threshold, but
turns off when the condition drops below the threshold.
- Hold Device ON until Reset: The sounder or relay remains active until a system reset occurs.
- Hold Device ON until Silence: The sounder or relay remains active until a Signal Silence occurs.
4. Click the Group Points button. A tag list, containing single station points appears. Use the space bar to select the points. A >>
symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected.
5. Click the Next button. A dialog similar to the following appears:

page 238 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 192: Options

6. Select these options as follows:

- Alert Threshold: This is the smoke obscuration value at which the alert is generated and the device activates.
- Advisory Sent to Panel: The setting of this option determines the type of event (Fire, None, Priority 2 Alarm, Supervisory, or
Trouble) sent to the panel when the alert condition occurs.
- Alarm Threshold: Specifies the smoke obscuration level that must be present at the single station detector to trigger an alarm
condition.
7. Press Next to continue. A screen appears displaying the custom control equations generated by the wizard. Click Finish.

12.12 Suppression Release

Introduction
This section describes how to configure suppression release hazard areas using the ES Panel Programmer.
Suppression Release refers to the release of water or chemical agents in response to alarm conditions. Suppression Release operation is
limited to hazard areas, which are collections of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and releasing peripherals, powered by NACs, that
are set up to respond to alarm conditions.
Note: For ULC applications, see Appendix C for information about releasing-specific controls and indication.

12.12.1 General Capabilities

The ES Panel can control either a preaction/deluge sprinkler system, or an agent release extinguishing system.
• The number of hazard areas that the ES Panel can monitor is restricted only by the amount of memory available for Custom Control
equations, each hazard is defined as a separate area containing its own 4090-9005 or 4090-9006 releasing peripheral and solenoid.
• Each hazard area requires four or five Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs).
- One NAC controls notification appliance visuals. This circuit is ON when the releasing output activates, and is OFF upon System
Reset.
- One NAC controls notification appliance audibles. This circuit provides an audible indication of the release sequence.
- One NAC is a warning circuit. This circuit can be wired to a bell, horn, or strobe in the hazard area. It activates during the first stage
of a cross-zoned releasing sequence, and can be used to alert system operators when the initial alarm occurs.
- One NAC provides power to the 4090-9005 or 4090-9006 releasing peripheral of the hazard area.
- One NAC provides power for NYC Abort Investigation Appliances. Note that this NAC is only used when NYC Abort operation
is selected. This NAC is used to tie bells and strobes to the same circuit. These devices activate when the NYC investigation timer
activates, and turn off when the investigation timer reaches zero. The NYC Abort option does not comply with UL 864.
• The releasing peripheral activates its output, which attaches to the solenoid, only when the designated initiating device and the NAC
connected to the release peripheral are active at the same time. This prevents a malfunctioning input from triggering a release.
• The releasing signaling patterns are as follows:
- Dual Detector Application: Temporal on the first alarm, this can also be configured as 20 or 120 beats per minute. The signal
changes to 120 BPM on the second alarm. When the releasing appliances activate, the tone changes to steady.
- Single Detector Application: When an initiating device in the hazard area activates, the system does one of two things. If a delay
timer is used, the NACs play a 120 BPM signal as the timer counts down. This changes to a Steady pattern when release occurs. If a
delay timer is not used, the releasing appliances activate as soon as a single detector enters an alarm state. In this case, the NACs
sound a steady tone pattern, and a distinct pre-discharge tone pattern does not play.

page 239 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Alarm Triggered by Activation of Manual Release Switch: If a delay timer is used, the system plays a 120 BPM signal on the
NACs as the timer counts down. When the releasing outputs activate, the signal changes to a steady tone.

Figure 193: Suppression Release Overview

• * 4090-9005 / 4090-9006

12.12.2 Applying the appliqué

The ES Panel ships with a self-adhesive appliqué. You must apply this to the front door of the unit when it is used as a suppression release
system. This label (4010-9830 English/4010-9830 CAF French) is used to indicate that the ES Panel has been programmed to work as a
releasing panel, and all releasing circuits must be disabled prior to servicing. Apply this label to any area of the front door.
Note: These labels are used for both 4100ES and 4010ES panels.

page 240 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

12.12.3 Device and point types

Suppression release device and point types are listed in the following table. Assign the applicable device and point types to the
suppression points before programming the hazard area information.
See Programming non-audio points of this manual for information about programming points.
Table 75: Valid device and point types
Point type Description Valid device types Auto-generates to following lists:
RELSIG Releasing audible SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
circuit CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SIGIAM, L1 - Coding Group 1
NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, L50 - Walk Test Group 0 - signals/relays
MFIO_SIGB, MSOUND, MSIGA, MSIGB L139- Local Mode Operation Points
RELISIG NYC investigation SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
bell/strobe circuit CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SBZAM, SAZAM, L1 - Coding Group 1
NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, L48 - TrueAlert Zone OFF on SILENCE
MFIO_SIGB, MSOUND, MSIGA, MSIGB, VNAC L50 - Walk Test Group 0 - signals/relays
L139- Local Mode Operation Points
RELVIS Release visual SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
circuit CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SBZAM, SAZAM, L13 - Fire Alarm Visuals OFF on RESET
SIGIAM, NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, L49 - TrueAlert Zone OFF on RESET
MFIO_SIGB, MSOUND, MSIGA, MSIGB, VNAC L50 - Walk Test Group 0 - signals/relays
L139- Local Mode Operation Points
RELWVIS Releasing warning SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
visual signal CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SBZAM, SAZAM, L13 - Fire Alarm Visuals OFF on RESET
SIGIAM, NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, L49 - TrueAlert Zone OFF on RESET
MFIO_SIGB, MSOUND, MSIGA, MSIGB, VNAC L50 - Walk Test Group 0 - signals/relays
L139- Local Mode Operation Points
SSABRT Shorted MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50,
Suppression Agent 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM,
Abort Zone MBZAM
SSDUMP Shorted MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Suppression Agent 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
Manual Dump MBZAM, ADRPUL, CANPUL L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
L81 - Audio Coding Group 1- MonitorZones
L139- Local Mode Operation Points
SUPRELS Suppression RELEASE, SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B,
Release output CHAN4A, CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B,
SBZAM, SIGIAM, SAZAM, NULLSIG, PS_SIGA,
PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, MFIO_SIGB
SUPRELS Suppression (Agent OUTPUT
(Graphic24) Discharge) Release
Output
SUPDET Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Monitor Zone 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
MBZAM, ADRDET, GENIAM, NULLMON,500PSM, L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
APM500, CM520, DM520, DMC520, IHN135, L81 - Audio Coding Group 1- Monitor Zones
IHN200, 500CMB, 500CMC, 500CMAB, L139- Local Mode Operation Points
500CMAC, 500CMAD, 500CMAE, TFXCDM,
501CMB, LPBD520, MD501, MD501EX, MD901,
MDR901,MDS901, MF401, MF501,MF501HA,
MF501EX, MF901, MF901HA, MFR901HA,
MFS901HA,MER901, MFS901, MR501, MR501EX,
MR501T, MR501TEX, MR901, MRR901, MRS901,
MS502EX, MU901, MU912, S251, S252PLUS, All
PHOTO Device types, All ION Device types, all
HEAT Device types
SUPDUMP Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Manual Dump 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
MBZAM, ADRPUL, CANPUL L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
L81 - Audio Coding Group 1- Monitor Zones
L139- Local Mode Operation Points

page 241 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 75: Valid device and point types

Point type Description Valid device types Auto-generates to following lists:
SUPABRT Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50,
Abort Zone 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM,
MBZAM
SUPPRES Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Pressure Mon 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
MBZAM L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
L81 - Audio Coding Group 1- Monitor Zones
L139- Local Mode Operation Points
Note: The VNAC device type is valid for RELVIS, RELWVIS, RELISIG points, but is not valid for RELSIG points because temporal and
marchtime coding cannot be performed on TrueAlert devices.

12.12.4 Step 1. Defining the Hazard Area

1. Click the Custom Control Tab.
2. Click the Suppression Release sub tab. A screen similar to the one shown in the following figure appears.

Figure 194: Create Hazard Area menu choice

3. Right-click the blank area of the screen labeled Hazard Area.
4. Click Create Hazard Area. A screen similar to the following appears.
5. Enter a name in the Hazard Area Name field, and enter any applicable comments. Click the Next button to continue.

Figure 195: Naming the Hazard area

page 242 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

12.12.5 Step 2. Specifying the initial data and options

Specify the following information in the next screen that appears:
• Custom Control Program Number: This is the program number under which the suppression release custom control equations
created by the wizard is stored. No specific program number is reserved for use by suppression release equations. The programmer
automatically selects the next available number, but you can specify a particular number.
• Cross Zone (Dual Detector): Select this option to enable cross-zoned (dual detector) operation. Cross-zoned applications require
that two automatic initiating devices on different areas enter an alarm state before the releasing appliance can activate.
Note: To achieve true cross zoning, the initiating devices must be wired to either Monitor cards or ZAMs. Dual detector operation,
which simply requires two detectors to activate, can use TrueAlarm initiating devices.
• First Stage Audible Notification: Use this list to set the audible notification appliance pattern used for the first stage of a cross-
zone (dual detector) alarm. The choices are Slow March Time, Temporal, or Fast March Time. When cross-zoned (dual detector)
is enabled, this is the audible NAC tone pattern that will play following activation of the first detector. When the second detector
activates, the pattern is always Fast March Time. This option is not applicable if the Cross Zone (Dual Detector) check box is not
selected.

Figure 196: Cross Zone (Dual Detector) options

Click the Next button to continue.

12.12.6 Step 3. Specify abort switch operation

When the next screen appears, specify the action that occurs when the abort switch is released.
Important:
For all choices except IRI Abort, pressing and holding the abort switch prevents agent release for as long as the switch is held in, unless
a Manual Release switch is operated, which overrides the Abort switch operation. For IRI Abort, the abort switch must be pressed and
held before the second alarm activation occurs to prevent release.

Figure 197: Abort switch options

page 243 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Set this option to one of the following choices:

• Immediate Release (No Delay): If a confirmed alarm exists, such as two detectors on separate zones for a cross zoned system or a
single detector in a single alarm system, the suppression release peripheral activates its output immediately upon release of the abort
switch.
• 10 Second Delay: When the abort switch is released, the delay is 10 seconds. If a confirmed alarm exists, such as two detectors on
separate zones for a cross zoned system or a single detector in a single alarm system, the suppression release peripheral activates its
output.
• 10s/Remaining: When the abort switch is released, the delay used is whichever is greater, the remaining time on the Automatic
Release Delay Timer, or 10 seconds.
• IRI Abort - Cross Zoned System Only (Does not comply with UL 864): When a single alarm is present, pressing the abort switch
prevents the output on the suppression release peripheral from activating. If a second alarm condition occurs while the Abort switch
is still pressed, the automatic release timer resets to whatever value has been configured for it and begins to count down, stopping at
10 seconds. When the Abort switch is released, the panel starts the release timer countdown.
• Reset Original Time Delay (Does not comply with UL 864):Releasing the Abort switch resets the delay timer interval to the value
set for the Automatic Release Delay Timer.
• NYC Abort (Does not comply with UL 864). Pressing the abort switch does the following:
• Bell and bell strobe turn on (NAC associated with RELISIG point type).
• Evacuation visuals turn off (NAC associated with RELWVIS point type).
• Evacuation audibles turn off (NAC associated with RELSIG point type).
• Automatic Release Timer countdown stops at its current value.
Releasing the Abort switch starts the 90-second Investigate Timer. When the Investigative Timer expires, the following occurs:
• Bell and bell strobe turn off
• Evacuation visuals turn on
• Evacuation audibles turn on at 120 BPM
• Reload the Automatic Release Timer with the programmed value
Subsequently pressing/releasing the abort switch repeats the process, silencing the NACs, activating the bell, starting the 90 second
investigation timer, and so on, until the Release Timer expires and the output on the suppression release peripheral activates.
Pressing or releasing the Abort switch while the Investigation Timer counts down has no effect.
Click the Next button to continue.

12.12.7 Step 4. Setting the timer options

Use the next screen to set values for the Manual Release, Detector Release, and the Releasing Cutout.

Figure 198: Timer Configuration options

Use the following guidelines when setting these values:
• Manual Release: The Manual Release Time Delay is a programmable timer that specifies the delay between the activation of a
manual release switch and the activation of releasing appliances. The default setting for this timer is 10 seconds. A setting of 0 causes
the releasing appliances to immediately activate after a manual release switch activates. This delay is programmable from 0-30
seconds.

page 244 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Detector Release Delay: The Automatic Release Time Delay is a programmable timer that delays the activation of the releasing
appliance circuits. This timer starts immediately after receiving a confirming alarm (cross zoned system) or a first alarm (single alarm
system). When the timer expires, the releasing appliances activate, assuming the abort switch is not active. This delay is programmable
from 0-60 seconds.
This delay allows evacuation of the protected space before release of the agent. A delay timer should be considered if occupants
might possibly be present in the protected space.
- Cross-Zoned System: The occupants may or may not receive an evacuation signal depending on the interval between the first and
second alarms. Implementing a delay in this case ensures that an interval of time passes between when the signals sound and the
agent releases.
- Single Alarm System: A selection of 0 seconds activates the releasing circuit at the same time as when the NACs signal an initial
warning. A delay provides a configurable amount of time for the signals to sound and warn occupants to leave the protected space.
• Releasing Cutout: The Releasing Cutout Timer is a programmable timer that specifies the length of time the output on the
Suppression Release Peripheral is held on. When the timer expires, the solenoid turns off, or cuts out, which stops the water flow or
release of the extinguishing agent. This option is typically used on Deluge systems, and does not work with all releasing systems or
releasing devices. A selection of 0 means the solenoid does not cut out and remains on until the system is reset.

12.12.8 Step 5. Specifying Hazard Area points

The next screen, see Figure 199, contains seven buttons, each corresponding to one of the suppression-release system lists. Points are
automatically assigned to the appropriate list based on the suppression release point type assigned to the point.

Figure 199: Tag list buttons

Note: List numbers L256 through L262 are the next available lists. They are not specifically L256 through L262. .
Each button accesses a tag list, which then allows you to select (tag) the specific points to associate with the hazard. Follow these steps to
tag points
1. Click on the button corresponding to the type of suppression points you want to select. The tag list screen shown in Figure 200
appears.
2. The tag list screen displays all points with the relevant suppression release point type. To select a point for inclusion in the hazard
area you are programming, click on the point to highlight it and then press the space bar.

page 245 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 200: Tagging points

3. Click OK when you are finished selecting points. The screen containing the Tag List buttons (Figure 199) appears. Click Next
when all the points associated with this hazard are selected.
Use the final screen, see Figure 201 to review the options you have set for the hazard area. Use the scroll bar to check the
selections for all options. If necessary, use the Back button to return to one of the option selection screens to change a choice.
When all the options are correct, click Finish.

Figure 201: Reviewing options

When you click Finish, an icon and label appear in the list of hazard areas, see Figure 202

page 246 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 202: The Hazard Area icon and label

12.12.9 Deleting a Hazard Area

To delete an existing Hazard Area, right-click the label of the hazard area (see Figure 202) and select Delete Hazard Area. A dialog box
appears warning you that all Custom Control equations associated with the hazard area will be deleted. You can also use this dialog box to
delete the list and pseudo points associated with the hazard area.

Figure 203: Deleting Hazard Areas

12.12.1 Editing an existing Hazard Area

0

You can edit existing hazard areas in the following ways:

• Using the Suppression Release Wizard: Right-click the label of an existing equation (see Figure 202 ) and select Edit Hazard Area.
The wizard screens reappear in sequence. Reselect the options for the hazard area as necessary.
• Using the equation properties: Right-click the label of an existing equation and select Properties. A properties dialog box,
containing a series of tabs across the top, appears. Each tab corresponds to one of the groups of suppression options. Click each tab
and reselect the options for the hazard area as necessary.
• Using custom control equations. Right-click the label of an existing equation and select Manual Edit. Using this option, you can
edit the custom control equations, but it also eliminates the ability to use the wizard to edit the equations. Select this option and click
the Custom Control sub tab at the bottom of the Custom Control window. Select the program containing the equations of the
hazard area.

page 247 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 204: Manual edit

12.13 Using the Scheduled Self-Test Wizard

Scheduling options
Select the following options in the Scheduled Self-Test Wizard to set up one or more schedules that run the scheduled self-tests:
• Frequency
• Day
• Time
• Triggering pseudo point
Note: An automatic self-test can be launched from the TSW instead of the FACP. The psudo point is a trigger to execute the schedule
self-test. The triggering point is optional, the purpose is to select a digital pseudo point to launch a scheduled self-test by overriding
the usual date and time condition. For example, a public TSW digital point can be added to the job as an external point, and used to
trigger a self-test. The user can run an automatic self-test at any time, and on multiple panels at the same time.

Important: The system pseudo point P530 RUN SCHEDULE SELF-TEST can not be used as triggering point. Doing so will lead to
unpredictable behavior.
After configuring the date and time select the following options:
• List of SIGs
• Volume
• Trouble on Fail

page 248 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 205: Wizard entry screen

Figure 206: Initial data screen

page 249 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 207: Weekly configuration

Figure 208: Monthly configuration

page 250 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 209: Yearly configuration

Figure 210: Triggering point and self-test options

page 251 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 211: Summary screen

Table 76: The default values for the wizard settings

Setting Value User options Input validation
Self-test time 2:00 am User can edit hour and minute.
Weekly No day selected User cannot continue to next page while no day
is checked. User can select more than one day.
Monthly Two options: By choosing the second option, the user can Input validation required as
Day 1 of each month configure the test not to execute every month; the number of days varies
First Sunday of each month quarterly or biannual execution. from 28 to 31.
Yearly Two options: Two options to allow user select between the Input validation required. A
First of January date or day of the week. self-test schedule with the
First Sunday of January wizard will be executed at
least once a year.
Triggering point Triggering or point list not selected User cannot continue to next page if a point list
and Self-Test by default is not selected.
options
Volume NORMAL
Trouble on fail NO

page 252 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

12.14 Using the Floors/Suites Wizard

This section describes how to use the Floors/Suites Wizard to automate creating custom control equations for Single Station Programming.
Use Single Station Programming to associate input devices with output devices, for one specific location, so that when there is a CO or
smoke alarm, only that specific location goes into alarm.
To create custom control equations using the Floors/Suites Wizard, complete the following steps:

12.14.1 Step 1. Creating floor groups

You can create multiple floor groups. To create a floor group using the Floors/Suites Wizard, complete the following steps:
1. Launch the ES Panel programmer, and open the relevant job.
2. Click the Custom Control tab, and click the Floors/Suites Wizard sub-tab.
3. Right-click the blank area of the screen labeled Floor Group, and select Create Floor Group.
4. Enter a floor group name in the Select Group field, and click Next.
5. In the Initial Data dialog box, enter the program number, the number of floors in the building, and the number of floors above
and below the floor in alarm that enter a pre-alarm state. Click Next.

12.14.2 Step 2. Configuring the equation event settings

To configure the equation event settings, complete the following steps:
1. Select the event to modify:

- ALARM
- PREALARM
- SMOKE
- CO
2. Configure the settings in the Event Properties section. The settings for Channel, Channel Input, and Tracking Pseudo for
each event type in Event to Modify, are used in the corresponding UPLAY and USPEAKER equations. Click TagList to select a
point, or type the point name into the text box.
3. Click Next to complete the equation event settings configuration.
If there are no input or output devices, no UPLAY or USPEAKER equations are created.

12.14.3 Step 3. Configuring the equation data floor settings

To configure the equation data floor settings, complete the following steps:
1. Select the floor number in the Floor list.
2. Select the number of suites on the floor in the Number of Suites and Corridors list.
3. Enter an name in the Floor Label field.
4. Enter a comment, that is assigned to the first corresponding floor equation, in the Comment field.
5. The Audible/Visual and the Speaker TrueAlert Zones (VNACs) display in the associated VNACs section. Click the Speaker VNAC
button to configure the associated audio circuits (NACs).
6. Click Next to complete the equation data floor configuration.
Note:
The maximum number of VNACs on an EPS or IDNAC card is 56. The ES Panel Programmer does not determine which VNAC is
associated with an EPS or IDNAC card. When the number of VNACs in the system exceeds 56, the following warning message appears:

Figure 212: Warning message for more than 56 VNACs

12.14.4 Step 4. Configuring the equation data suite settings

To configure the Equation Data Suite, complete the following steps:

page 253 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

1. Select the floor and the suite in the list.

2. Select the number of suites on the floor in the Number of Suites and Corridors list. Use the Corridor check box to
differentiate between a corridor and a suite. The Corridor icon in the Device Association Tool is blue, and the Suite icon is red.
The equation created for a corridor is the same as the equation created for a suite.
3. Enter a name in the Suite/Corridor Label field, and add a comment. The comment is assigned to the first corresponding suite
equation.
4. Click the Device Association Tool button to associate input or output devices with the suite. Drag and drop devices from the
list to the appropriate input or output category of the suite. If there are more than 12 devices associated with a suite, a VNAC is
required for a shorter activation time. In this case, remove the devices from the suite, and create a custom VNAC manually using
the TrueAlert Zone tab. Use the Device Association Tool to drag and drop the custom VNAC to the suite.
5. Click Next to complete the equation data suite configuration.

12.14.5 Deleting floor groups

To delete a floor group complete the following steps:
1. Right-click the floor group in the Floors/Suites Wizard view, and click Delete Floor Group.
2. A dialog box appears, click Yes to delete the floor group. You can also use this dialog box to delete the VNACs associated with the
floors in the group.

12.14.6 Using the Device Association Tool

Use the Device Association Tool to associate an input or output device with a suite. The Device
Association Tool has the following input and output categories:
Table 77: The Device Association Tool input and output categories
Category In/Out Related event Notes
Heat/Misc Alarm In Floor Alarm
Smoke - Fire In Floor Alarm Drag and drop devices that create alarm conditions into
this category
Smoke - Supv In Suite Smoke Drag and drop smoke devices that create supv
conditions into this category
CO - Pri2 In Suite CO Drag and drop CO devices that creates Pri2 conditions
into this category
CO - Supv In Suite CO Drag and drop CO devices that creates Supv conditions
into this category
Audible/Visual/Misc Out Suite Smoke or CO, Floor Alarm
Speaker Out Suite Smoke or CO, Floor Alarm
The different categories indicate which devices apply to each custom control equation. For example, devices in the Heat/Misc Alarm
category are inputs in the alarm related equation.
If there is no device in a category, the equation is empty.
To associate a device with a suite using the Device Association Tool, complete the following steps:
1. Launch the Device Association Tool from the Floor/Suites Wizard. In the Floors/Suites Wizard, right-click a floor, a suite, or an
equation, and click the Device Association Tool button. To launch the Device Association Tool from the Suite Data Wizard
click the Device Association Tool button.
2. Drag and drop a device to the appropriate input or output category. To filter the list of devices, right-click the Device
Association Tool and click Filter.
3. Click Save to preserve the devices in the input and output categories.
The maximum number of NXNA devices that can be associated with a suite is 12. To associate more than 12 NXNA devices with a suite,
create a custom VNAC, and associate this with the suite.
When you drag and drop a device to the incorrect category, a warning message displays indicating that the device is unrecognized for the
category. The Heat/Misc Alarm category, and the Audible/Visual/Misc category do not generate this warning, because the devices in the
categories have the same operation.
Adding a device to the incorrect category results in a build error because the device is not supported by the custom control equation.
When you drag and drop a device that has two or more appliances to a category, for example an NXNA S/V device, a dialog appears with
the option to add it into each of the appliance categories. Click Yes to add the device into all categories. Click No to add the device to a
single category.

page 254 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

A device that has a smoke and a CO device requires confirmation for both. The ES Panel Programmer displays the following confirmation
options:
• Is the smoke appliance reporting as FIRE, or as SUPV?
• Is the CO appliance reporting as PRI2, or as SUPV?
• The associated floor A/V VNAC and SPK VNAC generate automatically.

12.14.7 Creating the custom control equations

The final dialog box that the Floors/Suites Wizard displays, shows the associated VNACs created, and the list of suites for each floor.
A prompt appears reminding you to manually remove the devices from L18.
Click Finish to create the custom control equations.

12.14.8 Viewing the custom control equations

The custom control equations display in the Equations box in the Floors/Suites Wizard window. The equations in the Custom Control
tab expand the Floors/Suites Wizard, and they display in the Equations box. In the Custom Control view, the floor and suite name are
included in the equation name.

page 255 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

13 Programming TrueAlert zones

This chapter describes creating TrueAlert zones, which are groups of TrueAlert devices attached to the panel via a TrueAlert controller:
• 4009T TrueAlert NAC controller
• IDNAC Card
• TrueAlert Power Supply (TSP)
• Extended Power Supply (EPS)
• 4010 Extended System Supply (4010ESS)
• 4007 IDNAC Power Supply (IDNAC PS)

13.1 TrueAlert zone description

Power, control, and supervision of TrueAlert devices (horns, strobes, or A/V combinations) occurs over a single pair of wires, referred to as
a TrueAlert channel. Each device communicates over this channel by having a unique digital address, as assigned in the hardware screen
for this card. The TrueAlert Zone tab provides a way to group TrueAlert NAC devices into zones, regardless of the channel on which they
reside. Because these special zones can contain more than one device, they act like groups or lists.
The first five zones auto-generate the TrueAlert hardware into their respective groups. By default, the following happens:
• All audible (AUD) devices are auto-generated into SIG901 and are assigned the point type SSIGNAL to turn them OFF on silence.
• All visual (VIS) devices are auto-generated into SIG903 and are assigned the point type RVISUAL to turn them OFF on reset.
• All Amber strobe devices are auto-generated into SIG902 and are assigned by default the point type SIGNAL which does not turn
them ON or OFF. This group can then be controlled in custom control as part of the Mass Notification System requirements.
• All isolators are auto-generated into SIG904 to be turned ON on startup.
• All Speaker devices are auto-generated into SIG905 and are assigned by default the point type SIGNAL which does not turn them On
or OFF. This group can then be controlled in custom control to disconnect all speakers from the audio circuits.
The main purpose of SPK TrueAlert zone is to map a set of addressable speaker to the SPEAKER NAC circuit that supplies the audio
signal. As this is job specific, this must be done through custom zone. Because the audio supervision tone is disabled when a SPEAKER
NAC is active and that supervision tone is required for the device to perform the audio line supervision, false audio wiring trouble might
occur if custom zones are not created. The system uses these zones to suspend audio wiring supervision on the addressable speaker
devices that belong to that zone each time the associated SPEAKER NAC circuit is turned on. The exception is for a non-alarm audio
channel where supervision is maintained by the system. However the constant supervision NAC module (4100-1259, 4100-1260 or
4100-1268) must be installed on the audio amplifier card to be compliant with the regulatory. Also, these custom zones, or new zones, can
be used to control a subset of devices at the time. This is especially useful to create different TrueAlert ES Self-Test scenarios.

13.2 TrueAlert Zone window

You can create up to 56 user-defined TrueAlert Zones using the TrueAlert Zone window. The first eight groups are reserved by the ES
Panel Programmer. Figure 213 identifies some of key elements of the TrueAlert Zone window.

Figure 213: TrueAlert Zone window

Note:
• Each line corresponds to a TrueAlert Zone. Double click to open the property dialog of the group.
• In Figure 213 point name SIG906, for example, is used for custom control.

page 256 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• Circuit Type field (Ckt Type) indicates the type of TrueAlert devices in group.

13.3 Creating and editing TrueAlert zones

13.3.1 Grouping TrueAlert zones

If selective operation is desired, the AUD and VIS devices can be removed from general alarm operation in SIG901 and SIG903 by changing
the Point Type to SIGNAL. Then they can be selectively copied to any of the unused groups starting with SIG908. These user groups can
be controlled automatically by assigning point types SSIGNAL or RVISUAL. They can also be controlled in custom control by assigning the
SIGNAL Point Type.
Group the TrueAlert devices to do the following:
• Create logical groups of TrueAlert NACs for use within custom control equations. For example when grouping devices for each floor, a
separate group for the AUD and for the VIS devices would be needed if they are turned OFF at different times. If they all turn OFF on
silence, they can all be in the same group.
• Assign a point type to a group of similar devices that are in the same location such as a stairwell spanning all the floors. If they are all
OFF on silence, it would be SSIGNAL.

13.3.2 Setting TrueAlert zone properties

Each TrueAlert Zone uses a property dialog similar to Figure 214.
1. To access this dialog for a specific group double-click the group in the TrueAlert Zone window.
2. Edit the properties of the TrueAlert Zone, as follows:

- Circuit Type: Use this list box to specify what type of TrueAlert devices are contained in the zone. Choices are AUD (group contains
audible TrueAlert devices, VIS (group contains visual TrueAlert devices), A/V (group contains both portions, audible and visual, of
TrueAlert device), SPK (group contains speaker TrueAlert devices).
- Point Type: Controls the way in which the system reacts when a member of the TrueAlert zone enters an alarm, trouble, or
supervisory state. Selective Alarm operation commonly uses SIGNAL for custom control. Refer to Appendix A for a listing of point
types.
- Custom Label: After selecting circuit type and point type, you must click Apply to enter the custom label. The text you specify in
this field appears on the LCD display when a point within the zone enters an alarm, supervisory, or trouble state.
3. Click Apply to save the changes.

Figure 214: Setting Properties for a VNAC Group

13.3.3 Using the tag list to add devices to the TrueAlert zone
To use the tag list to add devices to the TrueAlert zone, complete the following steps:

page 257 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

1. Click Device List in Figure 214 (or press F9 if the screen is closed) to see the tag list of TrueAlert devices that can be added to
the zone. The list of devices that you see depends on what you select in the circuit type of the group, and the way in which the
Device Types were programmed for the TrueAlert controller points. For example, if the TrueAlert controller contains no points
with a Device Type of Horn and the group’s Circuit Type is Aud, no devices appear in the tag list.
2. Highlight the point you want to add to the zone. Press the Space bar to tag the point. A >> symbol appears to the left of the point
to indicate that it is selected and the Tagged field updates to indicate the total number of tagged points in the list.
3. Click OK to close the tag list. The TrueAlert Zone window reappears. The number of devices field, located on the far right of the
window, updates to show the total number of devices in the group.

Figure 215: Taglist for TrueAlert Zone Devices

13.3.4 True Alert application example

TrueAlert devices programming example. See for reference.
• SIG901 and SIG903 have been changed to SIGNAL so there is no automatic operation.
• SIG908 has been labeled as Cafeteria for A/V devices and assigned SSIGNAL Point Type for ON in any alarm and OFF on silence.
• SIG909 has been labeled as 1ST FLOOR for AUD devices and assigned SIGNAL Point Type so it can be held ON in custom control.
• SIG910 has been labeled as 1ST FLOOR for VIS devices and assigned SIGNAL Point Type so it can be held ON in Custom Control.
• If amber devices need to be separated, SIG911 has been labeled 1ST FLOOR AMBER DEVICES for VIS devices and assigned Point
Type SIGNAL so it can be held ON in custom control. If all amber devices are to turn ON and OFF together, then SIG911 is not
needed, and SIG902 are held ON in custom control.
• SIG904 does not need to be programmed in custom control.
All the points that are held ON in custom control should be turned OFF by adding them to L73 or L74, as required.

page 258 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 216: TrueAlert application example

13.3.5 Speaker type zone configuration and behavior

When addressable speaker devices are configured, they automatically go into the SIG905 - TRUEALERT ZONE 6 - ALL SPEAKER DEVICES.
This default zone of type SPK can be used to disconnect all addressable speakers from the audio line. This VNAC can accept SO or SV
device type and only controls the on-board relay that connect/disconnect the speaker from/to the audio line. Changing the state of SPK
VNAC never turns on the visual appliance of SV devices. A VIS or A/V zone type that contains SV devices does not change the on-board
relay position when it gets turned on. One exception is when a SPK or A/V type VNAC is used for the TrueAlertES Self-Test. In that case,
both appliances are tested.
In Figure 217, the Device List button is used by the user to select the addressable speaker devices and the Speaker Circuit button
opens the tag list dialog box showing all the available SPEAKER NAC circuits. Only one SPEAKER NAC point can be associated with a VNAC,
but the same SPEAKER NAC can be mapped to more than one zone.

Figure 217: Device list button

page 259 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 218: Speaker circuit

page 260 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

14 Port Vectoring
14.1 Introduction
The term port vectoring refers to the way in which certain cards can be programmed to output only specific groups of events. For example,
it is possible to have the service modem card route only the alarm, trouble, and supervisory events that occur and to ignore the pseudo
events (pseudo point turns on or off), etc.
This section describes programming the port vectoring option of the ES Panel.

14.2 Selecting Event Groups

14.2.1 UL disclaimer
User editing of the DACT port vectoring is not permitted in UL864. User editing of the IP Communicator port vectoring is not permitted in
UL864 if you use the IP Communicator to connect to the central station.

14.2.2 Choosing Event Groups to route

Click the Port Vectoring tab to view the window used to route events to the service modem, RS-232 port, or DACTs, or IP Communicators.
A window similar to Figure 219 appears.
1. In the Available Ports list, located on the left side of the window, click the line containing the port you want to program. If you
choose a Service Modem or RS-232, or IP Communicator all of the event types shown in the figure are available for routing. If you
choose one of the DACTs, the following event types are not available.

- System Reset
- Alarm Silence
- SMPL Print Statements
- Walk Test Events
- ACTIVE State Events
- Time/Date Updates
2. In the Event Types list, located on the right side of the window, click the check boxes corresponding to the event types that you
want to route to the device selected in Step 1.

Figure 219: Port Vectoring Window

page 261 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

15 AMON Point Types

15.1 Introduction
This section describes creating custom point types, referred to as AMON point types, for use with analog monitor ZAMs. Use these point
types to associated descriptive text and device-specific settings with a point name.

15.2 Adding or editing an AMON point type

This tab in Figure 220 is for use only with MAPNET
and IDNET analog monitor ZAMs. Use this tab to
create a custom point type that specifies how the ES
Panel system reacts to incoming analog data from
the device attached to the ZAM. This point type can
then be assigned to the ZAM using the IDNET Point
Editing window, that you can access through either
the Hardware or Point tab. For example, if you have
an analog device that measures the amount of liquid
within a tank, you can use this tab to create a point
type that specifies what the unit of measurement is,
for example gallons, and what the threshold value for
an alarm is, for example, generate an alarm when the
tank is half empty.

Figure 220: AMON Point Type tab

15.2.1 Adding a point type

The AMON Point Type tab has a wizard-style interface that guides you through the process of creating an AMON point type. To add a
point type using the wizard, complete the following steps:
1. To start this wizard, right-click in the blank space in the AMON Pt type window. When the menu appears, click Add. A dialog
similar to Figure 221 appears.

Figure 221: Initial AMON point type dialog

2. Enter data in the Analog Monitor Point Type dialog box, as follows.

page 262 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Point Type Name: Enter a seven-character name for the point in this text entry field. This point name can then be assigned to the
analog ZAM via the MAPNET point editing screen. The point editing screen is accessible through either the Hardware Tab (double
click on the MAPNET card’s icon) or the Point Tab (scroll through the points and locate the MAPNET point for the analog ZAM).
- Alarm Type: The alarm type you choose determines how the ES Panel reacts when the device attached to the ZAM crosses the
threshold that you define for it. (The threshold is defined in a step described below.) Choices for this field are as follows.
Table 78: Alarm type
Alarm type Description
FIRE Causes the system to generate a fire alarm when the device crosses the threshold.
LATSUPV Creates a latching supervisory condition when the device crosses the threshold. This means that the supervisory
condition on the panel does not clear until the point restores to normal and a system reset is performed.
MPRI2 Generates a priority 2 alarm when the device crosses the threshold.
SUPERV Generates a Supervisory condition when the device crosses the threshold.
TROUBLE Generates a trouble condition when the device crosses the threshold.
UTIL Defines the point to be a pseudo point, having a value of either ON or OFF. Typically used as a trigger for custom
control, such as, perform some action if the point turns ON.
- Decimal Display: This field specifies the degree of precision for the device reporting data; how many digits after the decimal place
does the device report. If the device reports data one unit at a time, choose the XXXX. choice. If the device reports data in 10ths of a
unit, choose the XXXX.X selection. If the device reports data in 100ths of a unit, choose the XXXX.XX choice.
3. Click Next to view the dialog shown in Figure 222.

Figure 222: 4mA and 20 mA values dialog

4. Enter data in the 4mA and 20mA Values dialog, as follows.
Table 79: 4mA and 20mA values
Field Description
Eng Unit Text The unit, ppm, gal, psi, and so on, text that appears on the front panel display when you display the current
value of the device via the front panel. For example, if a monitor device with a monitoring capability of parts
per million is attached to the ZAM, you might put ppm in this field.
4mA Value This is the lowest value that the device reports. When the device is at this value, it draws 4mA of current from
the ZAM.
20mA Value This is the highest value that the device reports. When the device is at this value, it draws 20mA of current
from the ZAM.
5. Click Next to continue. A dialog similar to Figure 223 appears.

page 263 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 223: Threshold Unit Values dialog

6. In the Threshold Unit Values dialog box, you can specify up to three thresholds.

- Threshold Checkbox. Place a check in this box if you want the system to generate an event (the specific type of event depends on
what you chose for Alarm Type in Step 2) when the device being measured goes above the value that you specify in the Unit field.
- Unit Field. This is the value that the device must pass to trigger the alarm condition.
7. Click Finish.

page 264 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

16 Configuring the ES TSD

The ES TSD can be configured similarly to the InfoAlarm and other annunciator cards. As with other annunciator cards, right-click on the ES
TSD card icon, and select Properties. The ES TSD properties window contains six tabs: Card Properties, Annunciator Settings, Point Editing,
Access Levels, Point Vectoring and Global Settings.

Figure 224: ES TSD Properties Window

16.1 Card properties

You can set the following properties on the ES TSD:
• Card Address: A unique number for identifying the card within the system. This number must correspond to the card address dip
switch settings on the card.
Note: It is recommended to first add the card to the job with the programmer and then set the dip switches with the address
automatically assigned by the programmer.
• Card Custom Label: Use this field to describe the card's function, location, or other information.
• Card Alternate Custom Label: Use this field for to describe an alternative function, location, or other information.
• Unit, Box, Bay, and Slot (location): The values in these fields display the location of the card icon after you add it it to the
Programmer. If you change the values, the new values must reflect the new physical location of the card.
• Connection type: You can choose Ethernet or RUI. You can also choose to have earth monitoring on Port A for Ethernet.
Note: Ethernet is the only connection type for an ES TSD placed in the main CPU bay.

page 265 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

16.2 Annunciator settings

When using ES TSD, the display functions are set to Key Lockout. This indicates that the function is ignored unless a switch programmed
with (TAKETCL) mode is set to ON.

16.3 Point editing

You can edit the Control Keys and the Associated LEDs on the ES TSD in the Point Editing tab.
You can edit the points from the tables in the Control Keys or Associated LEDs section by double clicking the relevant fields. By right
clicking the points, you can AutoFill, Search, Spell Check, Mimic Points or see where they are used.
You can also populate these fields using the Properties section.
In the Properties section, the following can be reviewed or edited:
• HW Ref: The predefined hardware reference for the point.
• Mode: You can select a mode from the drop-down menu.
• Reference Address: Press F9 to select a reference address.
• Reference Label: The predefined reference label for the point.
• Point: The assigned hardware reference for the point.
• Point Type: The Point Type is set to SWITCH when editing keys, and set to RGB LED when editing LEDs. You can also set color options
for the LEDs when they are TRUE and FALSE.
• Custom Label: Enter up to 40 characters of descriptive text for the device. In many cases, this label identifies the location of the
device and its device number in a single label. Consult facility management for the building when you define a custom label.
• Alternate Label: Enter up to 40 characters of alternative descriptive text for the device. Use this for non-English systems as an
alternate name for the custom label. For example, on a panel running in Spanish, a custom label can be in English with an alternate
label in Spanish.
• Primary Action Message: Assign a Primary state Action Message to use for the device.
• Trouble Action Message: Assign a Trouble state Action Message to use for the device.

16.4 Access levels

Use the Access Levels tab to set the access level for the ES TSD.
Note: These access levels apply only to actions you perform with the ES TSD. Refer to “Restricting Access to Display Functions” for
information on setting access levels and passcodes for front panel display functions.
To set an access level for one of the service port operations, scroll through the list of functions and highlight the function.

16.5 Point vectoring

Point Vectoring on the ES TSD card is a two-step process:

• Creating a list of points to be vectored
• Selecting the list
Note: When using Zones, do not combine zones and lists. Do not have points inside a list if they are already in a zone that is destined for
points vectoring on this particular RFP.

16.6 Global settings

The options in the Global Settings tab apply to all ES TSDs in a job.
System normal
In this section you can choose a custom image that displays on the LSD when the system is normal. Consider the following when choosing
an image:
• The following image formats are supported: .BMP, .JPG, .TIFF, .GIF, .PNG.
• If the image is not a .BMP format, a warning display on the programmer explaining that the quality of the image will be reduced and
asks if you want to continue or cancel the operation.

page 266 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

• The image must by 800 x 504 pixels. A warning appears if the image is too big and the programmer will resize the image. The aspect
ratio is preserved if the image is resized. If the image is too small, it is centered and not resized.
To add or update the custom image, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Enable System Normal Bitmap checkbox.
2. Click Import Image...
The default background screen of the LSD is white. To change the background color, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Edit Background Screen Color button.
2. Choose a background screen color from the background screen color selector.
Alarm display modes
The following display options are present on the Global Settings tab:
• Fire Display Mode
• Pri2 Display Mode
• Supv Display Mode
• Trbl Display Mode
You can set the modes to the following display options:
• First and last
• First 5 and last
• First 8
Select the Use Fire Alarm Setting for All Alarm checkbox to set the same mode for all alarms.
Reverse display of custom label and status line
When you click this check box, the status line is swapped with the line that displays the custom label.
Replace PRI2 event text with CO
When you click this check box, certain strings will have PRI2 replaced with CO.
Advanced options
When you click this check box, you will have the option to create individual bin files to upgrade with the USB app.

page 267 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

17 Programming the InfoAlarm

This section describes programming a InfoAlarm through the FUI tab.

17.1 FUI tab overview

The FUI tab, see Figure 225, contains all the visual configuration options for the InfoAlarm. You can only access the FUI tab once when you
are either installing an InfoAlarm annunciator, or a box with a InfoAlarm in the hardware settings.

Figure 225: FUI Tab

17.1.1 Specifying bitmap for use with site map

The InfoAlarm display can be configured to display either a text-based status screen or a site-specific bitmap. If you are using a site-specific
bitmap, follow the directions in this section:
1. Use a drawing program to create a black and white bitmap image (BMP) that measures 281 (W) by 192 (H) pixels. Larger images
are clipped, and smaller images are centered.

Figure 226: Site Map option

2. Select the Enable Site Map Bitmap check box.
3. Click Import Bitmap. In the dialog that appears, specify the location and the name of the bitmap file.

Figure 227: Default screen settings

4. Click either Default System Is Normal or Default Alarm Display, and select Site Map so that the image appears during
normal operation or an alarm mode respectively.

page 268 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

17.1.2 Specifying the watermark text

Watermark text displays as a ghosted bitmap image in the background of the InfoAlarm screen. To specify a watermark, do the following:
1. Use a drawing program to create a black and white bitmap image measuring 281 pixels wide x 192 pixels high.

Figure 228: Watermark option

2. Click Enable Watermark Bitmap.
3. Click Import Bitmap. In the dialog that appears, select the location and the name of the watermark bitmap file.

Figure 229: Configuring the watermark display

4. Click Default System Is Normal and select System is normal screen (text).
Note: The watermark appears in grey behind the text during normal operation only. It can not be viewed in any other mode.

17.1.3 Setting the general options

Set the InfoAlarm general options as described below:
• Alarm Display Mode. Different displays can be selected for the four event types:
- First and Last. Displays first and last unacknowledged alarms in the alarm list.
- First 5 and Last. Displays first five unacknowledged alarms, plus the last alarm in the alarm list.
- First Eight. Displays the first eight unacknowledged alarms in the alarm list.
- Direct to List. Displays the active alarm list.
- Generic Alarm Display. Displays a generic alarm message with no details regarding points. To obtain point information, press ACK
to go to the list.
Note:
Click Use Fire Alarm Setting for All Alarms to set all alarm modes identically.

page 269 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 230: Alarm display modes

• Backlight Operation. Determines whether the InfoAlarm operates with the backlight on or off.
• Default System Is Normal. Determines the appearance of the InfoAlarm when no alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions are
present. Two options are available: System is Normal Screen (text) or Site Map.
• Default Alarm Display. Determines the appearance of the InfoAlarm when an alarm is active. Two options are available: Alarm
Display (text) or Site Map.
• Reverse Display of Custom Label and Status Line. When checked, the custom label appears above the status line on the
InfoAlarm display.

Figure 231: Default screen configurations

17.1.4 Advanced FUI options

Click the Advanced button at the bottom of the InfoAlarm tab. A pop up window appears with the following options:
• Unsolicited Event Format. This feature is intended for future use.
• Use local Menu customization. Check this box to permit user defined menus in the InfoAlarm.
• Create separate binary files for direct download on job build. Check this box when downloading directly to the InfoAlarm. The
InfoAlarm binary files are not included with the CFIG file when building the project. This permits the InfoAlarm files to be downloaded
separately from the master CFIG file.

Figure 232: Advanced InfoAlarm options

17.1.5 Setting site point coordinates

Icons representing all points can be placed on the site map in the FUI tab. When a site map is imported, click the Site Point Coordinates
sub-tab to access the point list. A window similar to Figure 233 appears.

page 270 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Click the row of the point you want to display on the site map. The row appears highlighted in gray. Click the row, and drag the cursor to a
spot on the site map. A circular icon appears. Highlight the row again to show the point on the site map.

Figure 233: Site point coordinate screen

Figure 234: Point site coordinates dialog box

The site point coordinates can be adjusted at any time by double clicking on the desired row. A dialog box appears with the following
options:
• X Coordinate. The horizontal position of the point. It must be a number between 1 and 255.
• Y Coordinate. The vertical position of the point. It must be a number between 1 and 255.
• Check box for Use Default Location for user points, or Do Not Display for system points.
• User Points: If a user wants a point to use the DEFAULT location, click on this check box instead of entering 0,0. If the user checks this
box, then the X and Y input fields will be disabled. If the user un-checks this box, then the X and Y input fields will be editable. If a point
is dropped on the site map, the coordinates is still automatically assigned and the Use Default check box is unchecked the next time
the properties are displayed for that point.
• System Points: If you click Do Not Display for one of the system points, FIRE, PRI2, SUPV, TRBL, the grid displays NOT DISPLAYED in
the point coordinate field for this point and the X and Y input controls are disabled.
• First. Selects the first point on the list.
• Previous. Selects the point on the list that appears above the selected point.
• Next. Select the point on the list that appears below the selected point.
• Last. Selects the last point on the list.
Note: On the table, the z coordinate is placed in the x position, while the x coordinate is in the y position, and the y coordinate is in the z
position. The z coordinate is always zero.

page 271 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

17.2 Programming the InfoAlarm language

The InfoAlarm can display two languages to suit local needs. Depending on the language, the steps taken to translate the InfoAlarm
commands differ. At all times, the MsgLib file must be updated. The MsgLib contains every command and text string used in the InfoAlarm.
See Standard MsgLib for directions on configure the MsgLib.

17.2.1 Standard MsgLib

Version 12.01 and later of the firmware contain three Msglib files: primary, alternative, and a standard English Msglib. The standard English
Msglib ensures that traditional English commands can be used to communicate with the InfoAlarm, even if two non-English languages are
used as primary and alternate.

17.2.2 Select FUI fonts

Use the section of the FUI tab labeled Custom External Files to specify the name of the font to be used with the primary and, if
necessary, the alternate language. If you are using a primary and an alternate language, click the Bilingual Operation check box. If all the
characters for the primary and alternate language are contained in the primary font, select only the primary font and click Use Primary
Font for Alternate Language.
If you are using the default English font, click Use Primary Default Font to insure that your job will include any future changes to the
default font.

Figure 235: Font selection

To specify the name of either the primary or alternate font, click the Import button to the right of the Primary or Alternate field. In the
dialog box that appears, select the appropriate binary font file.
If you need to create a new binary font file for the InfoAlarm, use the FUI Font builder. See the steps required to configure the languages
displayed.

17.2.3 English
The panel ships with a standard English language font and message library file (msglib.dat). This file contains all of the panel messages, for
example, System Reset in Progress, in English.
• No changes to the msglib.dat are necessary if you are planning to use English as either the primary or alternate language.
• You must set the InfoAlarm options in the FUI tab.

17.2.4 French/Spanish
The default English language font shipped with the ES Panel contains the standard English language characters, plus additional language-
specific characters for the Spanish and French languages.
If you are using French or Spanish as either the primary or alternate language, you do not need to create a language-specific font, but you
must create and edit an alternate message file that uses French or Spanish phrases in place of the English phrases.

17.2.5 Other languages

To use another language as the primary or alternate language, complete the following steps:
1. Use the provided FUI font utility to capture and edit a language-specific font file. Use the FUI font utility to scroll through the
characters and make minor edits if necessary.
2. Copy and edit the msglib.dat message file, substituting country-specific phrases, using the edited font, for the standard English
phrases. Rename the file when you are finished editing.
3. Create country-specific point labels. Use the ES Panel Programmer to edit the panel custom labels so that point names display in
the country-specific font.
4. Set the InfoAlarm Options, which control how the InfoAlarm operates.
5. Download message library files to the InfoAlarm.
6. Download the job changes to panel.

page 272 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

17.2.6 Editing country-specific font

If the language you want to use does not use the default English language font shipped with the InfoAlarm, you must first import, verify
and, if necessary, edit the characters of the font you want to use. The FUI font utility samples pre-existing fonts in order to create the font
displayed on the panel. Some fonts may be copyrighted, and require permission for use outside of the Windows environment. Ensure you
verify that you can legally import the selected font.

17.2.7 Starting the FUI Font Utility

1. Click Start and point to Programs. Click Simplex, then select ES, and select FUI Font Utility. The FUI Font Utility appears as shown
in Figure 236.

Figure 236: Font Utility screen

2. When the prompt appears, select one of the following options:

- Select Windows Font to Create an Intermediate Text File: Select this option if you want to edit one of the Windows fonts installed on
your computer to create a InfoAlarm compatible font.
- Build InfoAlarm Binary Font File: Select this option if you have already created and edited a text font file and you want to build it into
a InfoAlarm binary font file.

17.2.8 Creating and editing a text font file

A text font file is an editable text file created by the InfoAlarm font utility. After creating this file, you can use Windows Notepad to verify and
modify each character in the font.
1. Click Select Windows Font to Create an Intermediate Text File. A screen similar to Figure 237 appears.
2. Select the source font for the text font file. Choose fonts for the main font and the small font. The main font is the set of
characters used for system messages. The small font is the set of characters used with the context sensitive soft keys. You can
also set the height and width of the font.

page 273 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 237: Select the source font

3. Click Select under the heading Main Font. Use the window that appears to scroll through a list of the fonts installed on your
computer. Scroll to the font you want to use, and click OK. Do the same for the Small Font.
Note: The FUI Font Creator does not scale the size of the imported font. Depending on the size of the font selected, some of the
characters can appear clipped.
4. Set values for Font Width and Font Height, as follows:
a. Determine the size of the country-specific font. The font size determines the number of lines and characters available per line
on the InfoAlarm screen. If a font is too large certain features do not display. The standard English font is 5x9 pixels, and has
40 characters per line. To select your font size use the following formulas:
i. The Number of Available Lines = 240/(fontheight + 3) — 4
ii. If the font width is 14 pixels or less,
iii. The Number of Characters per Line = 280/(fontwidth + 2)
iv. If the font width is greater than 14 pixels,
v. The Number of Characters per Line = 280 — [(fontwidth — 14) x 2]/(fontwidth + 2)
b. The following features require a specific number of characters per line:
Table 80: Lines required for InfoAlarm features
Feature Minimum Requirements
First and Last Alarm mode 8 lines
First 5 and Last Alarm mode 14 lines
First 8 Alarm mode 16 lines
Time/date strings 17 characters
c. Make sure the boxes labeled Generate contains a check for the fonts.
d. Click Use main font for both to use the main font as both the main and small fonts.
5. Click Next to continue. A screen similar to Figure 238 appears.

Figure 238: Selecting characters

page 274 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

6. Highlight and delete all unwanted characters. Use the buttons shown in Figure 238 as follows:
a. Select Characters. Use this button to specify a text file containing characters to include in the font.
b. Include All Characters. Click this button to select all of the characters in the font.
c. Restore Defaults. Select this button if you have added characters, using the Select Characters button, and you want to
restore the font to its original set of characters.
7. Click Next to continue. A screen similar to in Figure 239 appears.

Figure 239: Specifying output text

8. Use the fields and buttons shown in Figure 239 as follows:
a. Output Text. This is the name of the file that will be generated. The default name is font.txt. Use the Browse button to select
the directory in which the file will be stored.
9. Click Next to continue. A screen similar to Figure 240 appears.

Figure 240: Invoking the Windows Notepad screen

17.2.9 Using Notepad to verify and edit font characters

After you click the button labeled Invoke Windows Notepad to Edit File, shown in Figure 240, the Windows Notepad text editor
appears, containing the output of the text font file.
Font characters appear within Notepad as shown below.

page 275 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 241: Editing fonts with Notepad

Each character within the file contains the number of rows and columns that you specified when you set the width and height. Examine
each character in the font carefully. Make sure that the characters are not truncated on either the top or the sides. Also make sure that
there is not too much space surrounding each character.
If you need to edit a character, you can do so using the period and pound sign keys. Place a period at any point in the character's grid
where nothing should appear. Place a pound sign at any point in the grid where a portion of the character should appear. If you make
edits, make sure you save the file after editing.

17.2.10 Building the text font file

When you close Notepad, the screen shown in Figure 240 reappears. Click Next to continue. The dialog box shown in Figure 242 appears.
Use this dialog box to build a binary font file, which is the file used to alter the panel's message library file, from a text font file.
• Click Browse, located to the right of the input text or the output binary field to select the source input text font file or to specify a
name for the output binary font file.
• Click Finish to build the binary font file. To skip building the file, click Close.

Figure 242: Building the binary font file

17.2.11 Importing the binary file

In the FUI tab, choose either the primary or alternate language for your font, and click the Import button beside the language designation.
Use the dialog box that appears to locate the new binary file. Select the correct bin file, and click Open. The file name appears in the
InfoAlarm to indicate that it is ready to download to the panel.

page 276 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18 Adding or editing network information

18.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the following network-related procedures.
• Defining public and external points.
• Setting the panel Network Information fields.

18.2 Role of the Network Programmer

Programming a network of ES Panel FACPs requires the use of two programmers, as follows.
• The Simplex Network Programmer. Use this programmer to create a new network or edit an existing network. Opening an existing
network job with the network programmer spawns the ES Panel programmer, which can then be used to declare the public and
external points for that node.
• The ES Panel Programmer. The ES Panel programmer works with the Simplex Network Programmer. You can use it to specify the
panel's public points, external points, and Node numbers.

18.3 Public versus external points

A public point is a point connected to this panel that you want to be visible to other nodes on the network. In other words, when the status
of the point changes, it annunciates its status on the other node.
An external point is a point on another node. Declaring it to be an external point means its status is annunciated on this panel.
For example, when you want changes to the status of the panel’s points to report to a central annunciator, such as a TSW, you would
use the ES Panel programmer to declare the panel’s points (or a subset of its points) public. Likewise, on the TSW, you would declare the
panel’s points as external.

18.4 General network programming guidelines

Use the following guidelines when programming a network:
• All nodes must have the same version or a compatible version of software and firmware.
• All 4120 network nodes must use the same baud rate.
• To reduce Net activity and increase efficiency, it is recommended that you do the following:
- Avoid making control points Public.
- Program all control functions in the node that contains the control points.
- Use Lists to minimize the network traffic. Nest only one list within a main list. Do not make a list that already contains external points
public.
- Do not use the SET command when writing custom control for a network node, unless absolutely necessary. It acts on every poll
cycle and slows down the network response time. Use TRACK rather than SET whenever possible.
• Do not make an NDU point Public above offset 1535. This only applies to the 4100+.
• Never set the value of an external analog pseudo point through the network.
• Do not use P210, P211, or P212 at the same time for Network System Reset.
• Use P217 for Network Signal Silence.
• Avoid Version Mismatch. If you change a label or device type or point type on a point that is EXTERNAL to other nodes, you must
build and download all nodes that have an external copy of the point. If you change the Job Title in the General Info screen, or the
Network Prefix in the Network Points in the Info Screen, you must build all nodes and download all nodes.

page 277 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.5 ES Panel Programmer Network tab

The Network tab, shown in Figure 243, provides access to the dialogs used to add and edit the lists of public and external points. Click the
Network tab to see the window shown in Figure 243.

Figure 243: Network tab

page 278 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.6 Editing network information

18.6.1 Accessing the network information

The network information fields are contained in the Panel tab. To access these fields, do the following:
1. Click the Network tab.
2. Click the Network Information sub tab.

Figure 244: The Network tab, showing network information

page 279 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.6.2 Editing the network name and node number

The Network Information tab includes the following fields. Use the guidelines outlined in the table when setting these fields.
Table 81: Network information
Field Guidelines
Advanced Network Network Click on the Advanced button and use the dialog that appears to change the
Information network to which the ES Panel is assigned.
Node Click on the Advanced button and use the dialog that appears to change the
node number of the ES Panel.
Master Timekeeper Select to use this panel as the network’s master timekeeper. Only one master
timekeeper per network.
Annunciate Common Troubles Select if you wish to have other panel’s common trouble messages
annunciated on this panel.
Annunciate Network Troubles Select if you wish to have this panel’s Network messages sent to the system’s
annunciators.
Annunciate Extra Node The Annunciate Extra Node Option prevents a node from annunciating an
Troubles Extra Node Trouble following the addition of a new node. Guidelines for setting
this option are as follows:
• Unselect this option on nodes without a need to annunciate events from
the new node.
• Select this option on the node that functions as the network's central
annunciator.
Auto Gen List Externals When selected, this option adds the external points from other nodes to the
system lists on this node. When it does this, it adds the points to the list based
on the point type of the point.
Miscellaneous Network Network Prefix Enter descriptive text in this field. This text appears when the more info. field is
Information selected on a TSW.
Special Analog Initialization Checking this option prevents analog detectors from sending status on
initialization if the value is not an alarm or trouble condition. However, if the
analog value indicates an alarm or trouble condition exists, the detector will
send its state. If you select this option and you have Custom Control equations
that contain the Compare Opcode and Current Value qualifier, be aware
that the equation will not trigger on network initialization, but will trigger on
subsequent value changes. Also, if analog detectors have a numeric value on
a GCC screen, the screen will not update until the point's value changes after
network initialization.
Note: To avoid Network Initialization troubles, all network nodes must be set
the same way.
Inhibit Priority-Only EQBs This option prevents network EQBs from being generated for status changes
that only affect priority and not the status of the point. For example, a Custom
Control equation triggers that modifies the priority of a public control point,
putting the point to the reset priority but not changing its state. If this option
is selected, no EQB will be generated. The side effect of choosing this option is
that there will be a display mismatch of the priority between the owner and the
external node.
Note: Select this option only if required to reduce network traffic.
Inhibit Sounder-EQBs This option prevents TrueAlarm sounder/relay base (non-combo points)
from generating network EQBs when only the status of the sounder/relay
changes. If the sounder/relay is turned on or off without a threshold or logical
state change on the sensor portion of the device, no EQB will be generated
to external nodes. Status changes to the device that involve a logical status
change (e.g. alarm, trouble), or a sensor threshold level change will still report.
Note: Select this option only if required to reduce network traffic.
Allow Extended Point Range This option is only for a large TSW node of more than 62,500 user points.
for TSW When this option is ON, public points are external to other TSW nodes and
appear in the high point range, greater than 65534, of the other TSW nodes.
When this option is OFF, public points are external to other TSW nodes and
appear in the low point range, less than 65535, of the other TSW nodes. This
option only applies to ES panels.

page 280 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.7 Declaring public points

Use the following procedure to define the panel’s public points:
1. Click the Network tab.
2. Right-click the Public Points folder and select Edit Public. The tag list is shown in Figure 245.
3. Highlight a point and press the space bar to tag it. A >> symbol is shown to the left of the point to indicate that it is selected. To
remove this symbol and de-select a point, highlight the point and press the space bar again.
To select a contiguous group of points, click on the first point in the group, press the SHIFT key and click the last point in the
group you want to select.

Figure 245: Public Points tag list

page 281 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.8 Declaring external points

Use the following procedure to define the panel’s external points:
1. Right-click the External Points folder and select Edit Externals. The dialog shown below appears.
2. Click External list and select the number of the node containing the points you want to declare external.

Figure 246: Select Network Node

3. Click OK. The tag list shown in Figure 247 appears. This tag list contains all of the points that are currently declared public on the
node selected in Step 1 above.

Figure 247: Tag list for external points

4. Highlight a point and press the space bar to tag it. A >> symbol is shown to the left of the point to indicate that it is selected. To
remove this symbol and de-select a point, highlight the point and press the space bar again.
To select a contiguous group of points, click on the first point in the group, press the SHIFT key and click the last point in the
group you want to select.

page 282 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.9 Programming Network Alarm Silence

18.9.1 Introduction
This section describes programming Network Silence and Network Reset. These options can be configured to work in either of the
following ways:
• Central Network Silence and Reset. With this type of configuration, only one node, known as the Central Network Silence/Reset
Node, is capable of initiating a Network Silence or Network Reset.
• Distributed Network Silence and Reset. This setup allows a Network Silence or Network Reset to be initiated from any node on
the network.

18.9.2 Programming Central Network Silence

Any ES Panel node can be configured as the Central Network Silence Node. Programming Central Network Silence does not invalidate
inhibit and cutout timers on each node. Each node handles these functions locally. The figure below provides an overview of Central
Network Silence. In this figure, Node 1 serves as the Central Network Silence Node. Each node’s P217 pseudo point is declared external on
Node 1 and L106 on this node has been edited to include the external points.

Figure 248: Central Network Silence

Follow these steps to program Central Network Silence.
1. Open the network job, using the Simplex Network Programmer. Open the job for the node you have designated as the Central
Network Silence Node.
2. When the ES Panel Programmer appears, click the Network tab at the top of the programmer. When the Network window
appears, click the Network Points sub tab.
3. Right-click the Network window. When the options appear, select Edit Externals. A dialog similar to the following appears. Click
the External list, and select one of the nodes on the network.

Figure 249: Select Network Node

4. Click OK to close the dialog. When you do this, a tag list containing the public points from the selected node appears. Click P217

page 283 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Network Signal Silence and press the Space bar to select the point. Click OK to close the tag list.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for every node on the network.
6. Click the List tab. When the List window appears, click the General List sub tab. Scroll through the list to L106 - External
Alarm Silence Points, right-click and select Tag List.
7. Click the Filter icon at the top of the tag list. When the list of choices appears, click the Network Externals check box. Click OK.
All of the External Points appear.
8. Click on each entry for P217 - Network Signal Silence, each node on the network should have an entry, and press the Space
bar to add the entry to L106. N:P217 represents the node number.

18.9.3 Distributed Network Silence

This setup allows a Network Silence to be initiated from any node on the network. The figure below provides an overview of Distributed
Network Silence. In this figure, each node's P217 pseudo point has been declared external on the other nodes, and L106 on each node
has been edited to include the external points.

Figure 250: Distributed Network Silence

To configure Distributed Network Silence, follow the steps in Programming Central Network Silence of this chapter for each node.
Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for every node on the network.

page 284 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.10 Programming Network System Reset

18.10.1 Central Network Reset

Note:
1. Do not reset a node using Central Network Reset if you cannot see all the alarms associated to that node. When reset is
pressed, P210 goes ON in every node it can reset. If the node where reset is activated has no alarms, it immediately turns ON the
P211 pseudos on all nodes. However the system in alarm is not ready for this and latches.
2. If a TSW has a UT connected to it, put P210 of the UT into L0 to reset the UT.
Any ES Panel node can be configured as the Central Network Reset Node. Keep the following in mind when programming Central Network
Reset:
• This application performs separate internal Detector Reset and System Reset.
• All General Alarm Points must be monitored and SMPL-controlled by the Central Node.
• System Points involved:
- P210 Network Detector Reset/L103 External Detector Reset Points
- P211 Network System Reset/L104 External Control Reset Points

Figure 251: Central Network Reset

1. Open the network job, using the Simplex Network Programmer. Open the job for the node that will serve as the Central Reset
Node.
2. When the ES Panel programmer appears, click the Network tab. When the Network window appears, click the Network
Points sub tab.
3. Right-click in the Network Window. When the options appear, click Edit Externals. A dialog appears. Click the list and select
one of the nodes on the network.
4. Click OK to close the dialog. When you do this, a tag list containing the public points from the selected node appears. Click P210
and press the Space bar to select the point. Click P211 and press the Space bar to select the point. Click OK to close the tag list.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for every node on the network.
6. Click the List tab. When the List window appears, click the General List sub tab. Scroll to L103, right-click and select Tag List.
7. Click the Filter icon. When the options appear, click Network Externals. All of the External Points appear.
8. Click the entry for P210 and press the Space bar.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for every node on the network.
10. Click the List tab. When the List window appears, click the General List sub tab at the bottom of the window. Scroll through the
list, right click on L104 and select Tag List.
11. Click the Filter icon. When the options appears, click Network Externals. All of the External Points appear.
12. Click on the entry for P211 and press the Space bar.
13. Repeat Steps 10 through 12 for every node on the network.

page 285 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.10.2 Distributed Network Reset

With Distributed Network Reset, the following occurs:
• Each node controls its own General Alarm Points.
• System Reset can be initiated from any node and all other nodes may also experience the reset operation.
• System Points involved: P212 Detector/System Reset, and 105 External Entire System Reset Points.

Figure 252: Distributed Network Reset

To configure Distributed Network Silence, do the following on each node.
1. Open the network job, using the Simplex Network Programmer. Open the job for one of the nodes.
2. When the ES Panel Programmer appears, click the Network Tab. When the Network window appears, click the Network
Points sub tab.
3. Right-click in the Network window. When the options appear, click Edit Externals. A dialog similar to the following appears.
Click the list and select one of the nodes on the network.

Figure 253: Select Network Node

4. Click OK to close the dialog. When you do this, a tag list containing the public points from the selected node appears. Click on
P212 and press the Space bar to select the point. Click OK to close the tag list.
5. Click the List tab. When the List window appears, click the General List sub tab. Scroll to L105, right-click and select Tag List.
6. Click the Filter icon at the top of the Tag List. When the options appear, click Network Externals. All of the External Points
appear.
7. Click every entry for P212 and press the Space bar to add the entry to L106.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for every node on the network.

page 286 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

18.11 Programming the digital pseudo points P463 and P464

18.11.1 Distributed configuration

The digital pseudo points P463 and P464 are used to raise a trouble when a CO sensor is within 6 or 12 month of its expiration date. A
transition from off to on of the digital pseudo point will trigger a check on all CO sensors within the local panel. On site, where multiple
panels are linked together over the network, it is possible to synchronize the 2 digital pseudo points on every node. To do so, the remote
node must declare the local node’s P463 as External, since P463 and P464 are always public by default. Once P463 is imported to the
remote node’s job, its L170 is automatically updated to include the imported digital pseudo point. The same applies to P464 and L171. So
when the remote node P463 is turned on, default SMPL equation 0-164 will turn the local node’s P463 to on. To declare an external point,
refer to the section Declaring External Points in Adding or editing network information.

Figure 254: Distributed configuration

1. Open the network job using the Simplex Network Programmer.
2. Open the job for the node that will serve as the central reset node.
3. When the ES Panel Programmer appears, click the Network Tab.
4. When the Network window appears, click the Network Points sub tab.
5. Right-click the Network window.
6. When the choices appear, click Edit Externals. A dialog box appears.
7. Click the list and select one of the nodes on the network.
8. Click OK to close the dialog. A tag list containing the public points from the selected node appears.
9. Click P463 and press the Space bar to select the point.
10. Click P464 and press the Space bar to select the point.
11. Click OK to close the tag list.
12. Repeat Steps 5 to 11 for every node on the network.

page 287 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19 File Transfer and Terminal Features

This section describes features associated with IP and Serial File Transfer.

19.1 IP File Transfer

The IP file transfer operates exclusively over the Ethernet service port.
When you transfer files using the IP File Transfer, the files are saved in the compact flash on-board the NXP CPU board. When the panel
restarts, the CPU bootloader copies the changed files into the operating flash memory in the CPU master. New Slave Exec or Audio data is
downloaded by the CPU master when it is running.

19.1.1 IP File Transfer connection to the PC

To connect the IP File Transfer to the PC, complete the following steps:
1. Connect the Ethernet service port to the front panel Ethernet connection using a standard straight, noncrossover, Ethernet patch
cable. If this connection is not available, you can plug the cable directly into the CPU card connector J1 (Figure 255).
2. If you need to connect to a remote node or a BNIC, enable the remote download function. At the front panel, log in at the correct
access level, level 3 by default.
3. Press the Menu button on the front panel, and use the next and previous buttons to scroll to the Enable Remote Download/
Operations menu and press Enter. Scroll to the 1=Enable Remote Download for all nodes on the network menu and
press 1.
4. When the download is complete, scroll to the Disable Remote Download/Operations menu and press Enter. Scroll to the
1=Disable Remote Download/Operation menu and press 1.

Figure 255: Front panel Ethernet service port

page 288 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.2 Starting the IP File Transfer Utility

This feature enables a user to download all Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) software features, such as Panel Exec, Slave Exec, and so on. All
files are first downloaded to the Compact Flash Memory card on the Master Controller card before being activated. This provides a means
for recovering previous configurations using the File Transfer History/Undo tab. It also enables the FACP to continue operating during file
download operation. FACP down-time is minimal.
Using the IP File Transfer Utility
You can launch the ES Panel IP File Transfer utility from the ES Panel Programmer, or as a standalone application from the Windows Start
menu. Use the IP File Transfer to connect to the local panel or, when the panel is part of an ES Network, to connect to any ES Panel on the
Network.
To start the File Transfer utility:
• From within the Programmer. While the ES Panel Programmer is already running, click the Transfer icon, located along the menu
bar at the top of the programmer window. When the options appear, click Local Panel. The File Transfer Utility appears. Using this
method, the IP File Transfer attempts to connect to the panel it is connected to, equivalent to local panel.

Figure 256: Transfer Icon

In the menu, Click Transfer, and click Ethernet Connection. The following options appear (see Figure 257).

Figure 257: The Transfer menu

Panel for loaded job: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer automatically selects the relevant panel for the loaded
job, and the IP File Transfer dialog box appears, see Figure 258. When you click the Transfer icon in the ES Panel Programmer, this also
automatically connects to the relevant panel for the loaded job. Before you try to connect to a node using this method, ensure that
Remote Download is enabled.
Local Panel: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer connects to the local node, and the IP File Transfer dialog box appears,
see Figure 258.
Select Panel: To manually select the node you want to connect to, click this option and the Select Panel/Network dialog box appears.
The Select Panel/Network dialog box lists the panels that are currently visible on the ES Net network.

page 289 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.2.1 Using the select Panel/Network dialog box

Figure 258: IP File Transfer dialog

• The Panel Selection button on the IP File Transfer dialog box has the same functionality as the Select Panel menu option.
• From the Start Menu. Click Start. Point to the Programs option. When the list of options appear, point to Simplex , and click on the
option containing the ES Panel Programmer. A list of options appears. Click IP File Transfer. The Select Panel/Network dialog appears
as in Figure 259.

page 290 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 259: Select Panel/Network Dialog

The Panel list in the Select Panel/Network dialog box automatically updates as panels are discovered over the network. Use this dialog to
select a panel and connect to it directly. The Select Panel/Network dialog box shows the following information for each node:
• Network Name: type a network name in this field to filter entries by network name.
• Node #: type a node number in this field to filter entries by node number.
• To filter by Panel name: type a panel name to filter the list.
• To filter by Type: type a panel type or TSW to filter the list.
• To filter by Source: type mDNS, DNS or Other to filter the list based on protocol used for resolving name/address of the panel.
Click the Selected Panel Details drop down button to see the Host Name and IP Address of the panel.
If you can see multiple ES Net networks, they will be grouped together by name. Click the plus and minus icon next to a network name to
expand or collapse the list of all nodes in this network.

page 291 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 260: Networks grouped by name (with node list expanded for the first network)
If a panel is not listed, it may be because it is not advertised on the network, for example when a BNIC is not advertised on the building
network. In this case, it is also possible to manually search for the panel by using the text box at the top of the dialog. To do so, complete
the following steps:
1. Type the IP address into the text box and click Search Panel Address.
2. The following messages appear depending on the search result:
- Panel already in list.
- Panel found, added to list using its IP address as identification (see Figure 261).
- Panel not found.
3. When the search finds the panel, double click on the panel you want to connect to or highlight it and press Connect to this
Panel.
Note: The Search Panel Address button is enabled only when you enter a valid IP address.

page 292 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 261: Manually adding a panel using the Search function

page 293 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.2.2 Network downloads

If the FACP is equipped with a Building Network Interface Card (BNIC), it is possible to download files using the building network. For more
information see the BNIC Installation and Programming Guide (579-949).

19.3 IP File Transfer download

The following types of files can be downloaded to the ES Panel FACP through its file transfer utility.
• CFIG File. This is the built job file, consisting of all programming definitions in a binary format, that the panel's CPU can execute.
• Slave Exec. Module-specific slave Exec files execute on intelligent slave modules and define the way in which the slave module
operates. Occasionally changes to the functionality of a slave module may require you to download a new slave Exec file. For
example, a change to the IDNet Slave Exec file may be necessary to provide support for new, additional device types. The following
4100ES/4010ES modules are “intelligent” slave devices that use a module-specific Slave Exec file.
- 4100ES Power Supply (ES-PS)
- 4100ES Expansion Power Supply (ES-XPS)
- NAC Card
- IDNAC Card
- Extended Power Supply (EPS)
- System Power Supply (SPS)
- IDNet Module (IDNET)
- Expansion Power Supply (XPS)
- Remote Power Supply (RPS)
- Main System Slave (MSS)
- Transponder Interface Card (TIC)
- External Battery Charger (XBC)
- Transponder Interface (Local Mode) (TIC_LM)
- Phone Card (PHONE)
- TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS)
- Audio Amplifier (AUDIO_AMP)
- Digital Audio Controller (AUDIO_DIG)
- Analog Audio Controller (AUDIO_ANA)
- ES Touch Screen Display (ES TSD)
- InfoAlarm (FUI)
- Bootloader (BOOT)
- Operating System (EOS)
- BNIC application (BNIC)
- ES Net NIC application (ESNET)
• CPU Bootloader Files. The ES Panel uses the following three types of bootloader files.
Note: To make a blank system operational, load both a CFIG text file (job containing programming definitions) and a Panel Exec file.
- CFIG Text File. A panel with a missing or corrupt CFIG file can be restored to proper operation by downloading a CFIG text file to the
panel. The CFIG text file is automatically built and placed in the same job directory as the “executable” CFIG file (file ending in .CFG
extension).
- Panel Exec (Master). The Panel Exec file is the “operating system” that runs on the panel’s CPU module. It manages interactions
between system components. Occasionally changes to the functionality of the operating system may require that a new Panel Exec
file be downloaded.
- Alternate Msglib. The alternate msglib file is used in non-English ES Panel jobs, for example, French. It contains all the alternate
language text that appears in the ES Panel. It must be downloaded when the “Language of Use” option in the programmer is
selected to “alternate.” If the alternate language option is selected and the file is not downloaded, the ES Panel displays text in
English and an unclearable trouble exists, indicating the panel is running in the non-configured language.

page 294 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.3.1 Download tab

By default, the IP File Transfer window opens the Download tab.

Figure 262: IP File Transfer download tab

1. To download a software feature, click the radio button next to the file you want to download. The options are:

- CFIG and all Execs

- CFIG
- Slave Exec
- Panel Exec
- CPU Bootloader
- Primary Msglib
- Alternate Msglib
2. Select the download options:

- Download to a running panel: Select this option to download the file to a running panel. When this option is selected, there are 3
ways to apply the changes:
- Automatically after the download. Check the Apply download changes after download box to have the
downloaded changes applied immediately after the download. This is the program’s default setting.
- When the system reboots: If the Apply download changes after download button is not checked, the downloaded
changes will be saved and applied once the system is rebooted.
- When you click activate changes on all network nodes: To use this function, leave Apply download changes
after download unchecked and click it when you are ready to apply the changes. It is not necessary to reboot when
using this option. See Additional Download tab functions. Exclude the recovery file. This box option can be used
when downloading a CFIG, it results in a faster download.
WARNING: Checking this box will render job recovery impossible and will create a trouble on the panel.
- Preserve current Install mode list: Check this box to keep all the points you have placed in install mode in install mode once
downloaded changes have been applied. This is highly recommended.
3. Use the File Name box to select the file you want to download to the panel.
4. Click Download to start the process.

19.3.2 Additional Download tab functions

View Final Status of Last Panel Update: Click this button to bring up the final status of the last panel update.

page 295 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Activate changes on all Network Nodes: Click this button at any point to apply all previously downloaded files.
Note: All inactive files, including job configuration files download through IP File Transfer and/or the serial file transfer utility, will be
applied when the button is clicked and the user confirms the activation.

page 296 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.4 IP File Transfer Upload/Reports

The default option for this feature is to upload the job that is currently running in the FACP. The file that is uploaded is a compressed image
of the programmer job file. Therefore, there is no need for an unbuild. The file is uploaded to its default location (C:\4100UJOBS\JobName).
This tab also has options for uploading all FACP reports. The reports are uploaded to the reports subdirectory of the current job directory.
The report file is given a descriptive name, appended with the current date (e.g., AlarmLog_2010_3_11.txt).

Figure 263: Upload/Reports tab

To upload a file or a report:
1. Click the Upload/Reports tab at the top of the IP File Transfer window. See Figure 263.
2. Select the type of file you want to upload.
3. Chose one of the following:
Panel Configuration/ Job TrueNAC Reports
• Job Associated with CFIG (SDB4100U) • All
Panel Logs • Last
• Alarm Log • Last
• Trouble Log Self-Test
Reports • All
• TrueAlert Report • Last
• TrueAlarm Status Advanced Earth Fault Report
• Card Address
• TrueAlarm Service
• TrueAlarm CO Service

page 297 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

4. Use the File name box to select the directory on your PC you want to upload the report to.
5. Click the Upload button to start the upload.

page 298 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.4.1 Types of transfer

In addition to the upload of the CFIG file, other types of information from the Panel can also be uploaded to the ES Panel Programmer.
• TrueAlert Report: It is a report generated by the panel and provides information such as Point ID, Device Type and Candela rating for
all TrueAlert devices.
• TrueNAC Report: It is a report generated by the panel following the completion of a TrueNAC diagnostic test. The report indicates all
devices pass or fail status along with nominal current, predicted worst case current and predicted worst case voltage threshold at the
minimum TPS operating voltage. Selecting this option allows one to choose between downloading the report for All TrueAlert devices
on all TPSs or only for the Last TrueNAC diagnostics performed on a specific TPS and SLC.
• Panel Logs: It is a selection which allows one to select between uploading an Alarm Log or the Trouble Log, produced as a result of
Alarm or Trouble conditions reported to the Control Panel, onto the ES Panel Programmer.
• TrueAlarm Status Report: A report providing the following information for each point:
- Device Number
- Custom Label
- Current Sensitivity of the Point
- Point Status: Normal, Trouble, Alarm
- Almost Dirty Status: Points that are almost dirty have an asterisk in this field to denote this status.
• TrueAlarm Service Report: A report providing the following information for each point:
- Device Number
- Custom Label
- Alarm Level (sensitivity level of the device)
- Average Value
- Current Value
- Percent of Alarm: Shows the current value for the sensor. Value is shown as a percentage of 100 percent (alarm). For example, if the
value shown is 9%, it means that the sensor is currently at 9% of the value required to trigger an alarm.
- Peak Value: Shows the highest value that the sensor has reached. Value is shown as a percentage of 100 percent (alarm). For
example, if the value shown is 9%, it means that the peak value experienced by the sensor was 9% of the value required to trigger an
alarm.
- Current State: Possible values include Normal, Trouble, Dirty, Excessively Dirty, and Almost Dirty.
• TrueAlarm CO Service Report: This report provides the following information regarding the CO devices:
- Device Number (on the network)
- Custom Label (custom description of device)
- Current Device Value (PPM)
- End-of-Life Date
Device Status (Normal, Trouble)
• Self-Test: A report providing the following information for each point:
- Number of devices that failed the Self-Test
- Number of devices that passed the Self-Test
- Number of devices that do not support Self-Test, for example legacy TrueAlert devices
- Device custom label
- Device address
- Device serial number
• Advanced Earth Fault Report: this report provides the following information about the condition of each earth-searchable circuit on
all AEFD supporting power supplies:
- Impedance value
- Polarity value
- A circuit quality assessment of Good, Poor, or Fault

page 299 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.4.2 Mass Storage tab

Use this feature to copy job related files to the 4100ES Master Controller Card’s compact flash memory. You can also use it to copy file
from the panel to the PC and from the PC to the panel easily.
To use the mass storage:
1. Open the ES Panel Programmer and perform a File Backup – creating an .SDC file. The .SDC file is then stored in the Jobs folder.
2. Open File Transfer software and click the Mass Storage tab
3. Browse the PC files or the panel files and select the appropriate .SDC file

- The upper portion of the window displays the panel files.

- The lower portion of the window displays the PC files.
4. Click Copy FROM PC to copy a selected file from the PC to the panel, or click Copy TO PC to copy a selected file from the panel
to the PC.
5. Follow District Procedures for storing backup copies of jobs

Figure 264: Mass Storage tab

6. To copy the entire compact flash, click Create Image of Compact Flash. This copies the entire content of the compact flash to
a .zip folder.
7. To return previously saved compact flash contents to the panel, click Restore Image to Compact Flash, and select the compact
flash file you want to restore to the panel.

page 300 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.4.3 History/Undo tab

Each time a 4100ES FACP initializes, it checks versions of any active software, for example, Panel Exec, Slave Exec, CFIG, and so on. If a new
software version is detected, a snapshot of the current configuration is taken. File Transfer software retrieves the FACP snapshots and
displays a list of the configuration snapshots within the History/Undo tab. You can manage the number of snapshots – with a limit of 1
GB available memory.
By selecting a snapshot from the list, the user is shown an overview of the differences from the active configuration. For a detailed
description of job configuration changes, the user has the option of uploading the job configurations and automatically running the
Compare utility. An option also exists to restore the FACP to any of the listed snapshots. Workflow: Explains how to compare versions of
4100ES jobs based on operation differences and then restore a previous job, including .BIN files.
To use this option do the following:
1. Open File Transfer Software and click the History/Undo Tab
2. Click the revision of the job file you want to compare with the active revision. If you want to use another revision for you compare,
click on the Select Compare Base File button.
3. The bottom half of the screen highlights the differences between the two job revisions
4. Verify what has changed between revisions at a high level, such as, Slave Execs, Panel Execs, and CFIG)

Figure 265: History/Undo tab

19.4.3.1 Upload a job to PC and perform a full compare

To upload a job to your PC and perform a full compare, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Upload Jobs and Full Compare button.

page 301 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

This uploads the file to the PC and will launch the Database Compare tool that comes with the ES Panel Programmer.
2. To Restore an earlier revision of the job file to the Panel
a. Select the revision you want to restore from the top window.
b. Click the Restore Panel to Selected Setup button.

19.5 Downloading files to the ES TSD

19.5.1 USB
The ES TSD supports a USB mass storage device.
Perform the following actions using a USB mass storage device:
1. Update the ES TSD images:
- Bootloader
- Kernel
- Filesystem
- ES TSD UI app
2. Update ES TSD configuration (RFP file, except for point vectoring).
3. Update the message libraries.
When you insert a USB mass storage device that contains valid data, the ES TSD automatically detects files that require updating. You can
also manually select the files and edit the file list that.
Note: Use a USB with FAT32 format.

19.5.2 Downloading the ES TSD Files

To download ES TSD files to a USB, open the ES Programmer and follow these steps:
1. Build a job in the ES programmer.
2. In the Transfer tab, select USB.
Note: This is only an option if an ES TSD is part of the job. 3.
3. A list of options appears for you to perform the following actions:
- Copy a folder of binary files
- Automatic file upgrade when USB is inserted
- Apply automatic upgrade to all ES TSDs
- Select which connected USB device to use (if multiple USB devices are connected)
4. Optional: Click the checkbox Automatically commence configuration file upgrade on USB insertion for express download.
Note: If you do not chose the option for express download, the programmer deletes any existing requested file on the USB
device. If the selected device does not contain the necessary folders, the Programmer creates them.
5. Optional: Click the checkbox Apply to all ESTSD (When using USB at other job sites with ES-TSDs). A warning will display
that the job name differs between the Panel and what is going to be upgraded. You need to give confirmation before proceeding
with the upgrade.

19.5.3 File Structure

The USB mass storage device requires the following root folders and their sub folders:
• admin
- RevControl
• ES
- Jobs
• bins
Note: Delete folders in the Jobs folder to create space.

page 302 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.5.4 File Naming

All ES TSD system loads must follow a strict naming convention. The loads are for the following:
• Kernel
• Bootloader
• Filesystem
• ESTSD UI
Format
You must follow this format for filenames:
M…M_xx.xx.xx.xx_P...P.bin
M…M is the type of load and includes the following:
• bootloader
• kernel
• filesystem
• estsdui
xx.xx.xx.xx is the revision string. It must contain a minimum of 2 parts and a maximum of 4 parts.
Each part can be any length but must only contain numerical characters.
P…P is the platform and card on which that load runs. For example: cpu801-estsd

19.5.5 RFP Files

Primary Upgrade
RFP files for PRIMARY upgrades include:
• Msglibs
• Custom Labels
• SMPL Strings
• Menu Definition
• Point Config
• System is Normal Image
RFP primary files are located in the PRIMARY folder.
Alternate Upgrade
RFP files for ALTERNATE upgrades include:
• Msglibs
• Custom Labels
• SMPL Strings
RFP alternate files are located in the ALTERNATE folder.

page 303 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.6 Starting the Serial Transfer Utility

The ES Panel Serial File Transfer utility, shown in Figure 266, can be started from within the ES Panel Programmer.
Important: The Serial Download should only be used for Audio Data and InfoAlarm Data.Serial file transfer CFIG/Slave/network/
bootloader should only be performed when there is an issue with IP file transfer.

While the ES panel Programmer is already running, click the Transfer menu, located along the menu bar at the top of the programmer
window. When the options appear, click Serial, and the select the connection you want to make. See Figure 266.

Figure 266: Transfer menu with the Serial option selected

The File Transfer utility, shown in Figure 267, appears.

Figure 267: File Transfer utility

page 304 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.6.1 Setting serial communication parameter settings

The serial communication parameters allow you to set the port, baud rate, parity, and stop bits used by the PC. In most cases, it is
recommended that you use the default settings for these parameters, see the following note.
Note: If you connect the serial cable (733-794) to a port other than COM1, make sure to open the Port Settings dialog and change the
default (COM1) to the port being used.
1. In the File Transfer utility window, click the Settings button. A dialog box similar to the following appears. Use this window to
specify the settings for the serial communication parameters used by the PC.

Figure 268: Port Settings

2. Change the settings as required and click OK to close the Port Settings window.

page 305 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.6.2 Connecting the service PC to the panel

This section describes connecting the service PC to the panel -- via a direct connection, network connection, or modem connection -- and
specifying the type of connection in the File Transfer utility. Refer to the appropriate section below for specific information.

19.6.2.1 Direct connection to a panel

A direct connection between the PC and panel is shown in Figure 269. This type of connection can be used to download any of the
supported files (CFIG, Slave Exec, Bootloader Files) from the PC to the panel.

Figure 269: Direct connection to a panel

Follow these steps to connect the 733-794 serial cable between the PC and the panel.
1. Locate the PC within 6 feet of the ES Panel FACP and connect a 733-794 serial cable to a free serial port (typically COM1) on the
PC.
Note: If you connect the cable to a port other than COM1, make sure to alter the serial communication settings to reflect this. See
Setting serial communication parameter settings earlier in this chapter for information on doing this.)
2. On the 4100ES, connect the other end of the cable directly to the Serial Service Port P5 on the FACP CPU card.On the 4010ES,
connect the serial cable to P5 on the CPU card (0566-861 or 0566-888).
3. Click the File Transfer utility and select CPU Service Port (local xfer).

Figure 270: CPU Service Port (Network Xfer)

page 306 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.6.2.2 4120 Network connection

A network connection can be used to download a CFIG file (file with extension .CFG4100) to a ES Panel node on a 4120 network. Keep the
following guidelines in mind when downloading a CFIG.
1. Connect the service PC to the Service Port of a node on the network. Follow these steps to connect the 733-794 serial cable
between the PC and the panel.

a. Locate the PC within 6 feet of the ES Panel FACP and connect a 733-794 serial cable to a free serial port (typically COM1) on the
PC.
Note: If you connect the cable to a port other than COM1, make sure to alter the serial communication settings to reflect this.
See “Setting Serial Communication Settings” earlier in this chapter for information on doing this.
b. On the 4100ES, connect the other end of the cable directly to serial service port P5 on the FACP CPU card. On the 4010ES,
connect the serial cable to P5 on the CPU card (0566-861 or 0566-888).
2. Click Transfer, and point to Serial Transfer.
3. In the list, click to 4120 Network, the File Transfer dialog box appears.
4. Click CPU Service Port (network xfer).

Figure 271: CPU Service Port (network xfer)

Note: When performing a network transfer, you can only download to the indirectly connected, ES Panel, networked nodes. For
example, in the figure below, you cannot download to Node A, but you can download to Nodes B, C, and D. To download to Node A,
you need to select the CPU Service Port (local xfer) radio button instead of the CPU Service Port (network xfer) radio button. Be aware
that Rev. 8 or Rev. 9 jobs must be downloaded via the network card service port.

page 307 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 272: Network connection to a panel

page 308 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.7 Serial File Transfer download

19.7.1 Modem connection to remote panel

A modem connection can be used to download a CFIG file (file with extension .CFGES) or a Slave Exec file to a functional (i.e., operational),
remote ES Panel node. In order to authorize and initiate a remote download, a person must be present at the fire panel. To perform a
remote download via modem, you must do the following:
1. Make sure the PC has a Modem. Refer to the modem’s installation instructions for information on setting up the modem, etc.
2. Install and configure a 4100-6030 Service Modem in the Remote Panel. Refer to 579-194 for information on installing the
4100-6030 modem.
3. Enable the Remote Panel for Remote Download. To do this, follow these steps at the remote panel.

a. Login to the panel at Level 4.

b. Press the panel’s Menu button and use the Next and Prev keys to scroll through the menu options. When “Enable Remote
Download” appears, press the Enter button. The following prompt appears: “1 = Enable Remote Download for this node”.
c. Press the 1 key to enable the node for remote download.

Figure 273: Remote download

4. Click Transfer, and point to Serial Transfer, then select to 4120 Network;the File Transfer dialog box appears.
5. In the File Transfer utility, click CPU Service Port (local xfer) and click Modem. Enter the phone number of the modem in the
remote panel in the text entry box.

Figure 274: Service Port (Local Xfer)

6. In the File Transfer utility, click the Settings button and set the port to the one being used by the PC's modem.

page 309 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

The procedure required to download a file to the ES Panel differs slightly depending on whether the file is a CFIG, Slave Exec, or
Bootloader file. Refer to the appropriate section below for specific information.

19.7.2 Procedure for downloading a CFIG file

The procedure required to download a file to the ES Panel differs slightly depending on whether the file is a CFIG, Slave Exec, or Bootloader
file. Refer to the appropriate section below for specific information.
Do the following in the File Transfer Utility dialog (Figure 275) to download a CFIG file.
1. Click the Download radio button, not the Download button on the right side of the File Transfer window.
2. Select the Type of Connection, local, network, modem, and connect the panel to the Service PC, see Figure 275. Refer to the
previous section for information on setting up a local, network, or modem connection to the panel.

Figure 275: Downloading a CFIG file

3. Click the CFIG radio button.
4. Set the options to use during the download.

- Panel Off-Line During File Transfer (Fastest). Select this option when downloading a large job (thousands of points, complicated
custom control equations). Note that the panel is non-functional for the duration of the download when this option is selected.
- Swap CFIG and restart after download. In most cases, this option should be selected. When selected, the existing CFIG is
automatically replaced with the CFIG being downloaded and the panel is automatically restarted following download.
Note: The Swap CFIG and restart after download option is the preferred method to restart a system but can be unselected. If it is
unselected and the panel is restarted, a trouble appears on the front panel. That trouble indicates that the system is not running on
the latest Cfig. The Swap Cfig option has to be performed through the Front Panel Interface or by restarting the system and pressing
the UP and RIGHT arrow keys simultaneously until the words SWAP CFIG are displayed on the front panel readout.
5. Click the Settings button and in the dialog box that appears verify that the following settings are selected:

- Port: COM1 (this is the Serial Port setting for DELL Latitude laptops. It may be different for other computers.
- Baud Rate: 19200

page 310 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

- Parity: None
- Stop Bits: 1
- Data Bits: 8
Click OK when the settings are verified.
6. Back in the File Transfer dialog box, click the Browse button and use the standard Windows dialog to open the folder
containing the built job file (.CFGES). When the folder containing the CFIG is open, click the filename, and click Open to select the
file and close the dialog box.
7. Verify that the correct File Name is displayed at the bottom of the File Transfer window. The correct path should be displayed if
the File Transfer Utility was launched from the ES Panel Programmer with the correct job loaded. Typical path should appear as
follows: C:\4100UJOBS\filename\filename.CFG4100.
Note: If the File Transfer utility is launched from the Start menu, 4100U icon group, the File Name will be blank.
8. Connect the 4100 download cable (733-794) to Com 1 Serial Port on the Laptop and the Service port on the front of the ES
Control Panel (blue stripe to the left).
9. Click the Download button. The dialog shown in Figure 276 appears.

Figure 276: Download start dialog

10. Click Start to begin the download. The display on the front panel of the ES Panel shows the progress of the download. The panel
restarts automatically at the end of the download.

page 311 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.7.3 Procedure for downloading Slave Exec files

Do the following in the File Transfer Utility dialog to download a Slave Exec file:
Note: The SPS.BIN will automatically update the IDNet software. A separate download for IDNet slave is not required for the IDNet
channel that resides on the SPS power supply.
1. Click the Download radio button, not the Download button on the right side of the File Transfer window.
2. Click the CPU Service Port (local xfer) or CPU Service Port (network xfer) radio button, see refer to Figure 267. Refer to the
previous section in this chapter for information on setting up a connection to the panel.
3. Click the Slave Exec radio button.

Figure 277: Slave Exec download dialog

4. Do one of the following:
Option 1 -- Browse for the Slave Exec BIN File:
- i. Click the Browse button and use the standard Windows dialog to open the folder containing the Slave Exec BIN file.
ii. When the folder containing the BIN file is open, first click on the filename and then click Open to select the file and close
the dialog.
iii. Click the Download button, located on the right side of the Slave Exec Download dialog box.
Option 2 - View Available Slaves and then Browse:
- i. Click the Download button, located on the right side of the dialog. The Slave Exec download screen displays a list of all
the available slaves.
ii. Click the Browse button and use the standard Windows dialog to open the folder containing the Slave Exec BIN file.
iii. When the folder containing the BIN file is open, first click on the filename and then click Open to select the file and close
the dialog.
5. The Slave Exec Download screen now displays a list of the valid slaves to which the selected BIN file can be downloaded. In this
list, the empty card slots are listed as NOT AVAILABLE.
6. Click the card addresses of the target slave cards (the ones you want to download the BIN file to). Hold down the CTRL key and
click the left mouse button to select multiple slaves. To select a range of slave devices, hold down the SHIFT key and click the left
mouse button.
7. Click the Download button.The system displays a Start dialog.
8. Click the Start button to begin the download.The system displays a progress bar for the download operation.

page 312 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 278: Start button

page 313 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.7.4 Downloading Bootloader files

Use the CPU Bootloader files, the Panel Master and the CFIG.TXT file, to restore a blank panel or a corrupt system to normal operation.
Unless otherwise directed by Technical Support, these are typically the only situations in which these files should be downloaded to the
panel.
Note: Alternate Msglib files can also be downloaded via the Bootloader. The alternate Msglib file is used in non-English ES Panel jobs (e.g.,
French). It contains all the alternate language text that appears in the ES Panel. It must be downloaded when the Language of Use option
in the programmer is set to Alternate. If the alternate language option is selected and the file is not downloaded, the ES Panel will operate
in English and a trouble that cannot be cleared appears on the panel, indicating that the panel is running in the non-configured language.

Note: Do the following in the File Transfer utility dialog box to download one of the CPU Bootloader files.
1. Click the Download radio button, not the Download button on the right side of the File Transfer window.
2. Click the Bootloader radio button (refer to Figure 279). See Connecting the service PC to the panel, earlier in this chapter for
information on setting up a direct connection to the panel.

Figure 279: Downloading Bootloader files

3. Click the Settings button and in the dialog box that appears verify that the following settings are selected:

- Port: COM1 (this is the Serial Port setting for DELL Latitude laptops. It may be different for other computers.
- Baud Rate: 19200
- Parity: None
- Stop Bits: 1
- Data Bits: 8
Click OK when the settings are verified.
4. Back in the File Transfer dialog box, click the Browse button and use the standard Windows dialog to open the folder
containing the master (.BIN), the Alternate Msglib (.BIN), or the CFIG.TXT file that you want to download. When the folder
containing the file is open, first click on the filename and then click Open to select the file and close the dialog box. The name of

page 314 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

the file appears in the File Name field of the File Transfer utility.
5. Verify that the correct file name is displayed at the bottom of the File Transfer window. The correct path should be displayed if
the File Transfer utility was launched from the ES Panel Programmer and the correct job loaded. Typical path should appear as
follows: C:\4100UJOBS\filename\filename.TXT.
Note: If the File Transfer Utility is launched from the Start Menu, 4100U icon group, the File Name will be blank.
6. Connect the 4100 download cable (733-794) to Com 1 Serial Port on the Laptop and the Service port on the front of the 4100U
Control Panel (blue stripe to the left).
7. Click the Download box, and the following SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS are displayed: Press the start button. The panel should
restart immediately.
8. Click the Download button. A download status screen with SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS appears (Figure 280).

Figure 280: Download dialog for Bootloader files

9. Press the Warm Start button, located on the CPU Motherboard, and then immediately click the Start button in the Download
dialog box shown in Figure 281. The panel LCD displays messages describing the progress of the download operation.

Figure 281: Location of the warm start button

page 315 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.7.5 Downloading files to the InfoAlarm

Information can be downloaded to the InfoAlarm in two ways. The InfoAlarm can retrieve system info from the ES Panel master
(recommended) or can connect directly with the ES Panel Programmer, which may be required for larger jobs. The following bin files can be
downloaded directly to the InfoAlarm:
• InfoAlarm bootloader
• InfoAlarm bootloader status bitmap
• InfoAlarm slave executive
• Primary font definition
• Alternate font definition
• Primary MsgLib
• Alternate MsgLib
• Primary custom label
• Alternate custom label
• Point configuration
• Menu definition
• Site info
• Site bitmap
• Watermark bitmap
• SMPL print statements
To download files directly to the InfoAlarm, you must first do the following.
• Physically connect the PC containing the bin files to the InfoAlarm panel.
• Start the ES Panel PC Programmer's file transfer utility.

19.7.6 Build file for the InfoAlarm

All InfoAlarm files are downloaded to the panel using the File Transfer utility. First, the InfoAlarm files must be built. In the FUI tab of the
ES Panel Programmer, click the Advance button at the bottom of the screen. Make sure that the box beside Create separate binary
files for direct download on job build contains a check mark. Click OK. Follow the instructions in this chapter to build a file.

Figure 282: Advanced features dialog box

page 316 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

19.7.7 Connect the PC to the InfoAlarm panel

1. Open the InfoAlarm panel, by pressing the latches located at the top of the InfoAlarm, and pulling the panel forward.
2. Connect the harness to plug P5 on the InfoAlarm controller card.
3. Move switch SW1-1 to the OFF position.

19.7.8 Downloading InfoAlarm files

When the job has been built, click the Download radio button on the top, left of the file transfer window, not the Download button on the
right side of the File Transfer window.
1. Click on the FUI Data radio button (refer to Figure 267). At this moment, Direct to Slave is the only type of connection available.
Refer to Figure 267 for details on setting up the file transfer window.

a. Click the All Files check box to automatically download all necessary bin files.
b. When All Files is selected, you can also select the Display FUI Files to Download check box to review the files prior to download.
2. Click Download. The following window appears:

Figure 283: InfoAlarm warning

3. This is a warning box to confirm that you have fully prepared the binary file you wish to download. Click OK.
4. A file selection box appears. To select or de-select a file, click the file name and press the Space bar. A red >> symbol indicates
that the file is selected for download. After selecting the files, click Download.

- Click Specify/Replace External Files for Download if one of the bin files can be found in a separate directory.
- Select Copy Specified files to the Alternate Subdirectory if you want to place a copy of the InfoAlarm files in the Alternate
directory on your PC.

Figure 284: InfoAlarm direct download selection

5. When the Download dialog box appears, click Start to begin downloading the files to the InfoAlarm. The files download

page 317 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

individually.

Figure 285: Transfer status dialog box

19.7.9 Resetting the InfoAlarm

With all the files downloaded, the InfoAlarm must be reset to begin operating with the new files.
1. Remove the harness from plug P5.
2. Move switch SW1-1 to the ON position. The InfoAlarm restarts with the new downloaded files.
3. Close the InfoAlarm panel assembly.

19.7.10 Upgrading the ES Panel

1. Open the job using the newer version of the ES Panel Programmer.
2. When prompted, confirm that you want to upgrade the job.
3. Build the job.
4. Connect your laptop to the ES Panel through the service port.
5. In the File Transfer dialog box, see Figure 279, make the following selection:

- Under Upload/Download, select Download.

- Under Type of Connection, select CPU Service Port (local xfer).
- Under Type of Transfer, select CFIG and All Execs.
- Click Browse to access the appropriate set of BIN files, these must match the programmer version.
6. Click the Download button in the File Transfer dialog box. The cards requiring upgrading will be indicated with a >> symbol on
the left side of the Download window.
7. Click the Start button to begin the download.
The upgrade process runs automatically and does not require your intervention. It downloads the job file, followed by the CPU
and by the remaining cards.

19.7.11 Upgrading FUI job to latest Programmer/Master

Some site config files used by the FUI are not compatible with the ES TSD. A job cannot contain both a FUI and an ES TSD at the same time.

19.7.12 Upgrading a LEGACY job

The previous Master can contain information used by the FUI, but the new master contains information that is only compatible with an
ES TSD. This includes the menu definition file that is embedded when you build the master. The FUI does not have this file if it was not
provided a custom one through the programmer.
To upgrade a legacy job, follow these steps:
1. Retrieve the TechSupport .zip file that comes with the Master release executable file. This zip file contains a copy of the menu
definition bin file.
2. Save the file menu definition bin file.
3. In the programmer under the FUI tab, set the menu definition field with the filename of the recently saved bin file. During the
upgrade to the current Programmer, the “Use local menu customization” option is automatically deselected in the advance
options of the FUI tab. Note: Some msglib compatibility issues may occur.
Note: Some msglib compatibility issues may occur.

page 318 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

When the upgrade is completed, a dialog box will appear stating that manual procedure must be done to ensure the FUI still operates
properly and refer to the Programmer Manual.

19.8 Terminal connection

19.8.1 Using the terminal feature

It is possible to connect a terminal session to an ES Panel using the ES Panel Programmer. Depending on your system configuration, it
possible to connect to the local panel, or to a remote panel if it is part of an ES Network.
To launch a terminal session Click Terminal in the ES Panel Programmer menu and select either Ethernet Connection or Serial
Connection.

Figure 286: Terminal session

19.8.2 Selecting options

Options for Ethernet or Serial connection can be modified if required.
The application automatically detects the local panel address for the service port. It is fixed to Port 23 (Telnet).
You can modify the serial port configuration using the local serial port options. In most cases, it is recommended that you use the default
settings for these parameters.
Port: Select which port the PC uses to communicate with the panel. By default, laptops assign COM1 for their built in serial port.
Baud rate: Communication speed between the PC and panel, 19200 by default.
Data bits: 8 (default).
Parity: None (default).
Stop bit: 1 (default).

page 319 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 287: Connection settings

19.8.3 Connecting to the panel using the serial port

Complete the following steps to connect the 733-794 serial cable between the PC and the panel:
1. Locate the PC within 6 feet of the ES Panel FACP and connect a 733-794 serial cable to a free serial port (typically COM1) on the
PC.
If you connect the cable to a port other than COM1, you must alter the serial communication settings in the “Terminal Settings” menu.
2. In the 4100ES, connect the other end of the cable directly to the Serial Service Port P5 on the FACP CPU card.
3. On the 4010ES, connect the serial cable to P5 on the CPU card (0566-861 or 0566-888).
4. Click “Terminal” then select “Serial Connection” from the list. A Tera Term terminal launches.

19.8.4 Connecting to the panel using the Ethernet port

Complete the following steps to connect to a panel using an Ethernet connection:

1. Use a straight through Ethernet cable to connect the service PC to the service port at the front panel.
2. Click Terminal, and select Ethernet Connection from the list. The following options appear:

- Panel for loaded job: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer automatically launches a terminal session for the panel
for which the current load belongs (if one is currently loaded only).
- Local Panel: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer launches a terminal session for the panel into which the PC is
connected.
- Select Panel: To manually select the node you want to connect to, click this option; the Select Panel/ Network dialog box appears.
Click on the panel for which a terminal session is required.
3. A Tera Term terminal launches if a connection can be established.

page 320 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20 Appendix A Software point types

The software point type that you choose for a point controls the following:
• The message displayed on the front panel display when the point activates.
• The system list to which the point is automatically assigned. (Generic point types such as RELAY and SIG are the exceptions to this
rule. Generic points do not have any automatic operation and are the point types used for custom control.)
• The way in which the system responds when changes occur to the state of the point. For example, assigning a point type of SSIG
causes the Signal or Notification Appliance point to activate when an input device (smoke detector, pull station) enters the alarm state
and to turn off when the alarm is silenced. Contrast this to the TSIG point type. TSIG causes the Signal or Notification Appliance point
to activate only when a trouble or supervisory condition occurs on an input point and to turn off when the trouble or supervisory
condition clears.

20.1 Device type and point types for IDNet/MAPNET

20.1.1 Analog device types

Table 82: Analog device types
Analog Device Types Point Type (Default) Available Point Types
ANAMON - IDNet Only NONE Point types for the ANAMON point type must be created by
the user.
CPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
COGAS – IDNet Only UTILITY COGASPRI2, COGASSUPV, UTILITY
CRPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
CSPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
CTPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
HCL (TrueAlarm) FIREHCL PRI2HCL, SUPHCL, UTILHCL
HEAT - IDNet and MAPNET HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
IHEAT - IDNet Only HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
IION - IDNet Only SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
IOHEAT - IDNet Only HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
ION - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
OHEAT - IDNet and MAPNET HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
IPHOTO - IDNet Only SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE,
I2HEAT - IDNet2 Only HEAT GENPRI2, HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
I2HTHEAT - IDNet2 Only HEAT GENPRI2, HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
I2ION - IDNet2 Only SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
I2OHEAT - IDNet2 Only HEAT GENPRI2, HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
I2OHHEAT - IDNet2 Only HEAT GENPRI2, HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
I2PHOTO - IDNet2 Only SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
I2XPHOTO - IDNet2 Only SMOKE DUCT, GENPRI2, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE,
SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY, VSMOKE
PHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
RHCL - IDNet Only FIREHCL FIREHCL, PRI2HCL, SUPHCL, UTILHCL
RHEAT - IDNet and MAPNET HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
RIAM IDNet Only AHUO AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS,
CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY,
RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SRELAY, SUPERV, SVISUAL,
SWATER, TRELAY
RION - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
ROHEAT - IDNet and MAPNET HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
RPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
SHCL -IDNet Only FIREHCL FIREHCL, PRI2HCL, SUPHCL, UTILHCL
SHEAT - - IDNet and MAPNET HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
SION - - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
SOHEAT - IDNet and MAPNET HEAT HEAT, UTILITY

page 321 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 82: Analog device types

Analog Device Types Point Type (Default) Available Point Types
SPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
TION - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
TPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
UHEAT - IDNet and MAPNET UTILITY N/A
XIPHOTO - IDNet Only SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
XPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE,
XRPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
XSPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
XTPHOTO - IDNet and MAPNET SMOKE GVMON, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE

page 322 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.1.2 Control device types

Table 83: Control device types
Control device types Point type Available point types
(default)
NULAUX RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET,
PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV,
SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY
NULMON FIRE ABORT, DAMPER, DUCT, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, PULL, SDUCT,
SMOKE, SO, SUPERV, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER, LSDUCT
NULSIG SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET,
PHONE, PRIMARY, RELAY, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SPEAKER, SSIGNAL,
SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TSIGNAL
RZAM RRELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET,
PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV,
SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY
SAZAM SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET,
PHONE, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SPEAKER,
SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TSIGNAL
SBZAM SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET,
PHONE, PRIMARY, RELAY, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SPEAKER, SSIGNAL,
SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TSIGNAL
SIGIAM SIGNAL All Signal except for CODED, PHONE, RISER, RMPHONE, QALERT, SQALERT, RSYNVIS,
SSYNVIS, SYNVIS, XSNAC1, XSNAC2

20.1.3 Multipoint device types

Table 84: Multipoint device types
Multipoint Device Types Point Type (Default) Available Point Types
MLPTIO UTILITY UTILITY
MCOGAS UTILITY COGASPRI2, COGASSUPV, UTILITY
MCOI UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOIS UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOP UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOPS UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOH UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOHS UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOPH UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MCOPHS UTILITY FIRE, LATSUPV, SUPERV, UTILITY
MINPUT FIRE ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME,
FPUMP, GENFS, GENMON, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT,
LWSO, MPRI2, PULL, S2STAGE, SDUCT, SFIRE, SFPUMP, SGENMON,
SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SO, SPULL, STYLEC,
SUPERV, TDAMPER, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE, VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER,
WSO
MION SMOKE GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MOUTPUT RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT,
SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY
COMBO/ICOMBO/SCOMBO/ UTILITY FIRE, UTILITY, GENPRI2, LATSUPV, SUPERV
RCOMBO/I2COMBO
MPHOTO SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, LVSUPV, SDUCT, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MXPHOTO SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MHEAT HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
MOHEAT HEAT HEAT, UTILITY
MACOFALSE UCORFALSE FCORFALSE, PCORFALSE, SCORFALSE, UCORFALSE
MACOFIRE UTILITY COFIRE, COPRI2, COSUPV, UTILITY
MACOFAST UCORFAST FCORFAST, PCORFAST, SCORFAST, UCORFAST
MARCOR UCOR FCOR, PCOR, SCOR, UCOR
MAOFF UTILITY UTILITY

page 323 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 84: Multipoint device types

Multipoint Device Types Point Type (Default) Available Point Types
MISO (ICOMBO ONLY) ISOLATO ISOLATO
MSOUND (SCOMBO ONLY) SSIGNAL BSIGNAL, RSIGNAL, SIGNAL, SSBASE, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, TSIGNAL
MRELAY (RCOMBO) RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT,
SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY
FRIAM UTILITY UTILITY
MRELAY RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT,
SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY
MFEEDBACK UTILITY DAMPER, SUPERV, TROUBLE, UTILITY
TRIAM UTILITY UTILITY
MRELAY RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS,CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT,
SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY,
MTSENSE ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, FIRE, FLAME, FPUMP,
GENFS, GENMON, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, LWSO,
MPRI2, PULL, S2STAGE, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR, SFIRE,
SFPUMP, SGENMON, SMMOT, SMOKE, SO, SPULL, STYLEC, SUPERV,
TDAMPER, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE, VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER, WSO
4009A4/4009A8 SIGNAL SIGNAL
R4009A/R4009A8
MSIGA SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, AUXPWR, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS,
CODED, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, QALERT, RELAY, RSIGNAL,
RSYNVIS, RVISUAL, RWATER, SIGNAL, SQALERT, SSHAFT, SSIGNAL, SSYNVIS,
SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, SYNVIS, TSIGNAL
MSIGB SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, AUXPWR, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS,
CODED, CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, QALERT, RELAY, RSIGNAL,
RSYNVIS, RVISUAL, RWATER, SIGNAL, SQALERT, SSHAFT, SSIGNAL, SSYNVIS,
SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, SYNVIS, TSIGNAL

20.1.4 TFX device types

Table 85: TFX device types
TFX device types Device description Allowed point types
500 PSM Power Monitor with Contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
512ION 512 ION Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
512 PHOTO 512 PHOTO Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
912HEAT 912 Heat Detector HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
912SHEAT 912 Heat with Sounder HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
912RHEAT 912 Photo with Relay DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
912HPHOT 912HP Photo Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
912SHPHO 912HP Photo with Sound DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
912RHPHO 912HP Photo with Relay DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
912ION 912 ION Smoke Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
912RION 912 ION with Relay GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
912PHOTO 912 Photo Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
912SPHOT 912 Photo with Sounder DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE

page 324 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 85: TFX device types

TFX device types Device description Allowed point types
912RPHOT 912 Photo with Relay DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
APM500 Power Monitor with Contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
IHN135 Heat Detector HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
IHN200 Heat Detector HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
412ION 412 ION Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
412PHOTO 412 Photo Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
550ION 550 ION Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
550PHOTO 550 Photo Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
TFXCDM IXA500DM/MDM521 Detector ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
500CMB Class B IXA-500CM Contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
500CMC Class B IXA-500CM Contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, STYLEC, SUPDET, SUPERV,
TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
501CMB Class B IXA-501CM Contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
500CMAB Class B IXA- 500CMA contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, STYLEC, SUPDET, SUPERV,
TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
500CMAC Class B IXA- 500CMA contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
500CMAD Class A IXA- 500CMA ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
500CMAE Class A IXA- 500CMA ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, STYLEC, SUPDET, SUPERV,
TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
IXARMS IXA-RMS Pull Station BGLASS, CALLPT, PULL, SSDUMP, SUPDUMP
500RM QXA-500RM Relay All RELAY points except: AUXPWR, CODED, RRELAY, BRELAY, SRELAY, TRELAY
The default point type is: RELAY
500SDM OXA-500SD Signal Drive Module Same as SIGIAM
The default point type: SIGNAL
AM521 Aspirating Interface S3SMOKE, S3UTIL
CM520 CM520 Contact ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
CP520 CP520 Manual Callpoint BGLASS, CALLPT, PULL, SSDUMP, SUPDUMP
CP540EX CP540 EX Manual Callpoint BGLASS, CALLPT, PULL, SSDUMP, SUPDUMP

page 325 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 85: TFX device types

TFX device types Device description Allowed point types
DM520 Conventional Detector ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
DMC520 Conventional Detector ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
LPBB521 Line Powered Banshee Same as SIGIAM Default point type: SIGNAL
LPS520 Line Powered Sounder Same as SIGIAM Default point type: SIGNAL
LPBD520 Beam Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MD501 Heat Detector HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
MD501EX Heat Detector HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
MD901 Heat Detector HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
MDS901 Heat Detector with Sounder HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
MDR901 Heat Detector with Relay HEAT, LATSUPV, SUPDET, SUPERV, UTILITY
MF401 ION Smoke Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MF501 ION Smoke Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MF501EX ION Smoke Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MF901 ION Smoke Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MFS901 ION Detector with Sounder GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MFR901 ION Detector with Relay GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MF901HA High Altitude ION Detecto GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MFS901HA High Altitude ION Detector with GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
Sounder
MFR901HA High Altitude ION Detector with GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
Relay
MR501 Smoke Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MR501EX Smoke Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MR501T Smoke Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MR501TEX MR501T EX Smoke Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MR901 Smoke Detector DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MRS901 Smoke Detector with Sounder DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MRR901 Smoke Detector with Relay DUCT, GVMON, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, SUPDET, SUPERV,
UTILITY, VSMOKE
MS502EX Ion Smoke Detector ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON,
HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPDET, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
MU901 Carbon Monoxide Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
MU912 Carbon Monoxide Detector GVMON, SMOKE, SUPDET, UTILITY, VSMOKE
RM520 Relay Module Same as 500RM
S251 S251i & S251f Flame Sensor FIRE, FLAME, GVMON, SUPDET, UTILITY
S252+ S251i/S251f/S252F+ Flame Same as S251
Detector
SM520 Sounder Drive Module Same as SIGIAM Default device type: SIGNAL

page 326 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.2 Device type and point types for TFX

20.2.1 TFX multipoint device types

Table 86: TFX multipoint device types
TFX multipoint device Point name ES Panel device type Point types Description
types
MAMP96 MX-Y-0 MAMP96 SIGNAL AMP96
MX-Y-1 MINPUT TROUBLE PS AC fail status
MX-Y-2 MINPUT TROUBLE PS Earth fault status
MX-Y-3 MINPUT TROUBLE Device Fault (DV/Tone, CS2, etc)
MX-Y-4 MINPUT UTILITY Input point (Mic Keyed monitor)
MX-Y-5 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL Riser input signal
SSIGNAL
MX-Y-6 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL DV2/Tone signal
SSIGNAL
MCS2 MX-Y-0 MCS2 SIGNAL CS2 Channel Select
MX-Y-1 MINPUT TROUBLE Device Fault
MX-Y-2 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL Riser A input signal
SSIGNAL
MX-Y-3 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL DV2/Tone signal
SSIGNAL
MX-Y-4 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL Riser B input signal
SSIGNAL
MPSM MX-Y-0 MPSM UTILTY Power Supply Monitor
MX-Y-1 MINPUT TROUBLE PS AC fail monitor
MX-Y-2 MINPUT TROUBLE Battery missing/flat
MX-Y-3 MINPUT TROUBLE Ground fault
MX-Y-4 MINPUT TROUBLE Mains failure
MX-Y-5 MINPUT TROUBLE Wiring Fault (Short Circuit etc)

page 327 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.2.2 Minerva multipoint device types

Table 87: Minerva multipoint device types
Minerva Multipoint Point Name ES Panel Device Point Types Description
Device Types type
MSDIO520 MX-Y-0 MSD520IO UTILITY SD520 Smoke Damper Interface (with 1
input, 1output)
MX-Y-1 MINPUT All MINPUT point types Sensor
Default: FIRE
MX-Y-2 MOUTPUT All point types for Relay
MOUTPUT Default:
RELAY
MSD2I520 MX-Y-0 MSD520IO UTILITY SD520 Smoke Damper Interface (with 2
inputs)
MX-Y-1 MINPUT All MINPUT point types Sensor 1
Default: FIRE
MX-Y-2 MINPUT All MINPUT point types Sensor 2
Default: FIRE
MSU521 MX-Y-0 MSU521 UTILITY SU521/PI521 (outputs First) SU521/PI521
(Input First)
MX-Y-1 MINPUT Point Types Default: FIRE Sensor 1
MX-Y-2 MINPUT All MINPUT Point Types Sensor 2
Default: FIRE
MX-Y-3 MOUTPUT All MOUTPUT Point Types Relay 1
Default: RELAY
MX-Y-4 MOUTPUT All MOUTPUT Point Types Relay 2
Default: RELAY
MVM520 MX-Y-0 MVM520 SIGNAL VM520
MX-Y-1 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL Test Mode Tone signal
SSIGNAL
MX-Y-2 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL Fire Alarm Tone signal
SSIGNAL
MX-Y-3 MSIGB SIGNAL RSIGNAL Fire Evacuate Tone signal
SSIGNAL

20.2.3 Hardwired monitor device types

Table 88: Hardwired monitor device types
Hardwired monitor device Point type (default) Available point types
types
SMONB SMONA FIRE ABORT, CODEIN, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME, FPUMP,
GENFS, GENMON, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, MPRI2, PULL, S2STAGE, SC,
SDUCT, SECMON, SFIRE, SFPUMP, SGENMON, SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR,
SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SPRI2, SPULL, SSALARM, SSBREAK, SSDOOR,
SSMOT, SSWIND, STYLEC, SUPERV, TDAMPER, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE,
VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER, WSC, WSO
SCAN50 FIRE ABORT, CODEIN, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME, FPUMP,
GENFS, GENMON, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, MPRI2, PULL, S2STAGE, SC,
SDUCT, SECMON, SFIRE, SFPUMP, SGENMON, SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR,
SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SPRI2, SPULL, SSALARM, SSBREAK, SSDOOR,
SSMOT, SSWIND, STYLEC, SUPERV, TDAMPER, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE,
VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER, WSC, WSO

page 328 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.2.4 ES Panel hardwired signal

Table 89: ES Panel hardwired signal
ES Panel hardwired signal Point type (default) Available point types
Class B Signal Circuit SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CODED, CPRESS,
Class A Signal Circuit DHOLDER, DRESET, PHONE, PRIMARY, RELAY, RMPHONE, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL,
RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SPEAKER, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER,
TSIGNAL

20.2.5 SPS and MSS NACs device types

Table 90: ES Panel power supply NACs device types
ES Panel power supply NACs Point type (default) Available point types
device types
SIGB SSIGNAL AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, AUXPWR, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CODED,
CPRESS, DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, QALERT, RELAY, RSIGNAL, RSYNVIS,
RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SQALERT, SSIGNAL, SSYNVIS, SUPERV,
SVISUAL, SWATER, SYNVIS, TSIGNAL

20.2.6 XPS AUX Relay

Table 91: XPS AUX Relay
XPS AUX Relay Point type (default) Available point types
AUXPWR AUXPWR AUXPWR, CODED, RELAY

20.3 Device and point types for hardwired monitor, signal and AUX relay

20.3.1 SPS, MSS, OR RPS AUX Relay

Table 92: SPS, MSS, OR RPS AUX Relay
SPS, MSS, or RPS AUX Relay Point type (default) Available point types
AUXPWR AUXPWR AUXPWR, CODED, RELAY
RELAY RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CODED, CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY, RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER,
SHAFT, SRELAY, SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY

20.3.2 4100-3001, 4100-3002, 4100-3003

Table 93: 4100-3001, 4100-3002, 4100-3003 Relay
4100-3001, 4100-3002, 4100-3003 Relay Point type (default) Available point types
RELAY RELAY AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, BRELAY,
CDAMPER,CEXHAUS, CODED, CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RRELAY,
RSIGNAL, RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SRELAY,
SSIGNAL, SUPERV, SVISUAL, SWATER, TRELAY

20.3.3 EPS AuxNAC

Table 94: EPS AuxNAC
EPS AuxNAC Point type Available point types
(default)
SIGB SUPRELS AHUF, AHUO, AHUR, ALTERN, AUXPWR, BSIGNAL, CDAMPER, CEXHAUS, CODED, CPRESS,
DHOLDER, DRESET, PRIMARY, RELAY, RELISIG, RELSIG, RELVIS, RELWVIS, RSIGNAL, RSYNVIS,
RVISUAL, RWATER, SHAFT, SIGNAL, SSIGNAL, SSYNVIS, SUPERV, SUPRELS, SVISUAL, SWATER,
SYNVIS, TSIGNAL
AUXPWR AUXPWR AUXPWR, CODED, RELAY

20.3.4 ES-PS/ES-XPS AuxNAC Point Types

page 329 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 95: AUX relay point types

AHUF Air Handling Unit Off Relay
AHUO Air Handling Unit On Relay
AHUR Air Handling Unit (On/Off), Relay
ALTERN Elevator Capture (Altern), Relay
BRELAY Tbl/Supv Bell Relay (on until ack)
CDAMPER Damper Control Relay (On/Off), Relay
CEXHAUS Exhaust fan/damper, Relay
CODED Coded (PNIS or Coded Input)
CPRESS Pressurization fan/damper, Relay
DHOLDER Door Holder
DRESET Detector Reset Signal
PRIMARY Elevator Capture (Primary), Relay
RELAY General Purpose AUX-relay Driver
RRELAY Alarm Relay (on until reset)
RSIGNAL Resettable signal relay
RVISUAL Visual signal relay(on until reset)
RWATER Waterflow Relay (on until reset)
SHAFT Elevator Capture (Shutdown)
SRELAY Alarm Relay (on until silence)
SSIGNAL Silenceable signal relay
SUPERV Sprinkler Supervisory Relay
SVISUAL Visual signal relay(on until silence)
SWATER Waterflow Relay (on until silence)
TRELAY Tbl/Supv Relay (on until clear)
Table 96: SNAC card point types
AHUF Air Handling Unit Off Relay, Signal
AHUO Air Handling Unit On Relay, Signal
AHUR Air Handling Unit (On/Off), Relay Signal
ALTERN Elevator Capture (Altern), Signal
AUXPWR Aux Power Relay (Signal)
BSIGNAL Tbl/Supv Bell Signal (on until ack)
CDAMPER Damper Control Relay (On/Off), Signal
CEXHAUS Exhaust fan/damper, Relay, Signal
CODED Coded Signal (PNIS)
CPRESS Pressurization fan/damper, Signal
DHOLDER Door Holder Control, Signal
DRESET Detector (4-wire) Reset Relay, Signal
PRIMARY Elevator Capture (Primary), Signal
RELAY Supervised Control Relay
RELISIG NYC investigation horn circuit
RELSIG Releasing horn circuit
RELVIS Release visual circuit
RELWVIS Releasing warning visual signal
RSIGNAL Resettable signal relay
RVISUAL Visual signal (on until reset)
RWATER Waterflow Signal (on until reset)
SHAFT Elevator Capture (Shutdown) Signal
SIGNAL Generic Signal
SSIGNAL Alarm Signal (on until silence)
SUPERV Sprinkler Supervisory Signal
SUPRELS Suppression Release Output
SVISUAL Visual signal (on until silence)
SWATER Waterflow Signal (on until silence)
TSIGNAL Tbl/Supv Signal (on until clear)

page 330 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.3.5 NAC Card Point Types

Table 97: Point types
Point type Description
AHUF Air Handling Unit Off Relay, Signal
AHUO Air Handling Unit On Relay, Signal
AHUR Air Handling Unit (On/Off), Relay Signal
ALTERN Elevator Capture (Altern), Signal
AQALERT Amber Quick Alert
AUXPWR AUX Power Relay (Signal)
BSIGNAL Tbl/Supv Bell Signal (on until ack)
CDAMPER Damper Control Relay (On/Off), Signal
CEXHAUS Exhaust fan/damper, Relay, Signal
CODED Coded Signal (PNIS)
CPRESS Pressurization fan/damper, Signal
DHOLDER Door Holder Control, Signal
DRESET Detector (4-wire) Reset Relay, Signal
PRIMARY Elevator Capture (Primary), Signal
QALERT TrueAlert Non -Addressable (generic)
RELAY Supervised Control Relay
RELISIG NYC investigation horn circuit
RELSIG Releasing horn circuit
RELVIS Release visual circuit
RELWVIS Releasing warning visual signal
RSIGNAL Resettable signal relay
RSYNVIS Synchronized Visual (on until Reset)
RVISUAL Visual signal (on util reset)
RWATER Waterflow Signal (On until reset)
SHAFT Elevator Capture (Shutdown) Signal
SIGNAL Generic Signal
SQALERT TrueAlert Non-Addressable (on until Silence/Reset)
SSIGNAL Alarm Signal (On until silence)
SSYNVIS Synchronized Visual (on until Silence)
SUPERV Sprinkler Supervisory Signal
SUPRELS Suppression Release Output
SVISUAL Visual signal (on until silence)
SWATER Waterflow Signal (on until silence)
SYNVIS Synchronized visual
TSIGNAL Trouble/supervisory signal (on until clear)

page 331 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.4 Device/communication channel compatibility

PID descriptions
Table 98: PID descriptions
PID Description Communication channel
4090-9101 Class B IDC ZAM ES Panel IDNet MAPNET II
4090-9106 Class A IDC ZAM
4098-9713 QuickConnect sensor w/ sounder
4098-9750 In-Duct sensor housing – no relay
4098-9751 In-Duct sensor housing w/ relay
4098-9755 Duct sensor housing w/o relay
4098-9756 Duct sensor housing w/ relay
4098-9788 Multi-purpose base
4098-9789 Sensor base with remote connections
4098-9791 Sensor base with supervised remote connections
4098-9792 Standard sensor base
4098-9794 Sounder base
4099-9001 Addressable station, standard
4099-9002 Addressable station, breakglass
4099-9003 Addressable station, push
4098-9795 Multi-sensor sounder base MAPNET II or ES Panel
4098-9796 Multi-sensor base
4090-9001 Supervised IAM IDNet – Class B monitoring with T sense monitoring
MAPNET II – Class B monitoring only
4090-9116 IDNet communications isolator IDNet only
4090-9117 Addressable power isolator
4090-9121 Security monitor IAM
4190-9050 & 4090-9051 4-20 mA AMZ MAPNET II or IDnet
2099-9135 Double action, push pull no logo MAPNET II only
2099-9761 Double action, push pull
2099-9795 Single action station
2099-9796 Double action, breakglass
2099-9797 Single action station, local cover
2190-9153 & 2190-9154 Monitor ZAM, Class A IDC
2190-9155 & 2190-9156 Monitor ZAM, Class B IDC
2190-9157 & 2190-9158 4-wire detector ZAM, IDC
2190-9159 & 2190-9160 Single ZAM, Class A NAC
2190-9161 & 2190-9162 Single ZAM, Class B NAC
2190-9163 & 2190-9164 Control Relay ZAM, DPDT contacts
2190-9172 Supervised IAM
2190-9173 2-point I/O module
4098-9784 Standard sensor base
4098-9785 Sensor base with remote connections
4098-9786 Piezo sounder base
4098-9787 Remote relay sensor base
4090-9002 Relay IAM
4098-9777 Isolator Base, black
4098-9793 Isolator Base
4009-9401 TrueAlert Addressable Controller Use RUI
4009-9201 4009A 120 VAC
4009-9301 4009A 240 VAC
4009-9809 4009 IDNet Repeater
4090-9005 Suppression Releasing Peripheral No Enclosure
4090-9006 Suppression Releasing Peripheral with Enclosure
4090-9007 IDNet Signal IAM
4090-9008 Dual Contact Relay IAM

page 332 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 98: PID descriptions

PID Description Communication channel
4090-9010 8 Amp Relay IAM
4090-9122 IDNet Isolator2 IDNet2 only
4098-9766 IDNet Isolator2 Base, black IDNet2 only
4098-9767 IDNet Isolator2 Base IDNet2 only

page 333 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5 Signal point types

20.5.1 SIGNAL
Table 99: Generic Signal (No Default Operation)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT ON
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT OFF
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT CODING
Fault SIGNAL CIRCUIT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl SIGNAL CIRCUIT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SIGNAL CIRCUIT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: A generic point type used when the signal point is to be controlled using Custom Control equations.

20.5.2 RELAY
Table 100: Supervised Relay (No Default Operation)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CONTROL CIRCUIT ON
Normal CONTROL CIRCUIT OFF
Normal CONTROL CIRCUIT CODING
Fault CONTROL CIRCUIT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl CONTROL CIRCUIT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl CONTROL CIRCUIT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a supervised control circuit is required – for example smoke control operations.

20.5.3 SSIGNAL
Table 101: Alarm Signal (On Until Silence)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT ON
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT OFF
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT CODING
Fault SIGNAL CIRCUIT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl SIGNAL CIRCUIT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SIGNAL CIRCUIT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for all audible or audible/visible units that are required to be ON until the alarm silence key is operated. A separate type
for visuals only is available.

page 334 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.4 RSIGNAL
Table 102: Alarm Signal (On Until Reset)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT ON
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT OFF
Normal SIGNAL CIRCUIT CODING
Fault SIGNAL CIRCUIT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl SIGNAL CIRCUIT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SIGNAL CIRCUIT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for any signaling device that is required to be ON until the system reset key is operated.

page 335 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.5 TSIGNAL
Table 103: Trouble/Supervisory Signal (On Until Clear)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal TROUBLE SIGNAL ON
Normal TROUBLE SIGNAL OFF
Normal TROUBLE SIGNAL CODING
Fault TROUBLE SIGNAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open TROUBLE SIGNAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short TROUBLE SIGNAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl TROUBLE SIGNAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl TROUBLE SIGNAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when an audible signal should activate on any system trouble or supervisory condition and remain ON until the trouble
or supervisory condition has cleared.

20.5.6 BSIGNAL
Table 104: Trouble/Supervisory Signal - Bell (On Until Acknowledged)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal TROUBLE SIGNAL ON
Normal TROUBLE SIGNAL OFF
Normal TROUBLE SIGNAL CODING
Fault TROUBLE SIGNAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open TROUBLE SIGNAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short TROUBLE SIGNAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl TROUBLE SIGNAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl TROUBLE SIGNAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when an audible signal should activate on any supervisory or trouble condition and remain ON until the condition has
been acknowledged.

20.5.7 CODED
Table 105: Coded Signal
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CODED SIGNAL ON
Normal CODED SIGNAL OFF
Normal CODED SIGNAL CODING
Fault CODED SIGNAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open CODED SIGNAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short CODED SIGNAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl CODED SIGNAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl CODED SIGNAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to indicate that circuit will track the PNIS code or coded input zone. By default all “C” devices go into one group (non-
selection) and then they may be separated as required.

page 336 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.8 SVISUAL
Table 106: Visual (On Until Silence)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal VISUAL ON
Normal VISUAL OFF
Normal VISUAL CODING
Fault VISUAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open VISUAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short VISUAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl VISUAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl VISUAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used only with visuals that are required to be ON until the alarm silence key is operated.

20.5.9 RVISUAL
Table 107: Visual (On Until Reset)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal VISUAL ON
Normal VISUAL OFF
Normal VISUAL CODING
Fault VISUAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open VISUAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short VISUAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl VISUAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl VISUAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used only with visuals that are required to be ON until the system reset key is operated.

20.5.10 SWATER
Table 108: Waterflow Signal (On Until Silence)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal WATERFLOW SIGNAL ON
Normal WATERFLOW SIGNAL OFF
Normal WATERFLOW SIGNAL CODING
Fault WATERFLOW SIGNAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open WATERFLOW SIGNAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short WATERFLOW SIGNAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl WATERFLOW SIGNAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl WATERFLOW SIGNAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a waterflow control circuit is required to be ON until signal silence. Activated by zone with Water
point type

page 337 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.11 RWATER
Table 109: Waterflow Signal (On Until Reset)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal WATERFLOW SIGNAL ON
Normal WATERFLOW SIGNAL OFF
Normal WATERFLOW SIGNAL CODING
Fault WATERFLOW SIGNAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open WATERFLOW OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short WATERFLOW SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl WATERFLOW DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl WATERFLOW MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a waterflow control circuit is required to be ON until reset. Activated by zone with Water point
type.

20.5.12 SUPERV
Table 110: Sprinkler Supervisory Signal (On Until Acknowledged)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SUPERVISORY SIGNAL ON
Normal SUPERVISORY SIGNAL OFF
Normal SUPERVISORY SIGNAL CODING
Fault SUPERVISORY SIGNAL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open SUPERVISORY SIGNAL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SUPERVISORY SIGNAL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl SUPERVISORY SIGNAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SUPERVISORY SIGNAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a supervisory control circuit is required to be ON until acknowledged.

20.5.13 PRIMARY
Table 111: Primary Elevator Capture
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE ON
Normal PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE OFF
Fault PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used with the primary elevator relay point or signal point. Points with this type are automatically include in L21.

page 338 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.14 ALTERN
Table 112: Alternate Elevator Capture
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE ON
Normal ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE OFF
Fault ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used with the alternate elevator relay point or signal point. Points with this type are automatically include in L22.

20.5.15 AHUR
Table 113: AHU Signal
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal AHU RELAY ON
Normal AHU RELAY OFF
Fault AHU RELAY RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open AHU RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short AHU RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl AHU RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AHU RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used where one auxiliary relay performs AHU ON and AHU OFF control.

20.5.16 AHUO
Table 114: AHU On Signal
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal AHU ON RELAY ON
Normal AHU ON RELAY OFF
Fault AHU ON RELAY RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open AHU ON RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short AHU ON RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl AHU ON RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AHU ON RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when two auxiliary relays are used to perform AHU control. One relay is for ON and the other relay is for OFF. This point
type is used with the ON relay. The point type is usually used with the AHUF point type.

20.5.17 AHUF
Table 115: AHU Off Signal
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal AHU OFF RELAY ON
Normal AHU OFF RELAY OFF
Fault AHU OFF RELAY RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open AHU OFF RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short AHU OFF RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl AHU OFF RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AHU OFF RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when two auxiliary relays are used to perform AHU control. One relay is for ON and the other relay is for OFF. This point
type is used with the OFF relay. The point type is usually used with the AHUO point type.

page 339 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.18 CPRESS
Table 116: Pressurization
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal PRESSURIZATION ON
Normal PRESSURIZATION OFF
Fault PRESSURIZATION RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open PRESSURIZATION OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short PRESSURIZATION SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl PRESSURIZATION DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl PRESSURIZATION MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to initiate smoke pressurization sequence in a smoke control application.

20.5.19 CEXHAUS
Table 117: Exhaust
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal EXHAUST ON
Normal EXHAUST OFF
Fault EXHAUST RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open EXHAUST OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short EXHAUST SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl EXHAUST DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl EXHAUST MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to initiate an exhaust sequence in a smoke control application. The relay associated with this point type does not
operate on general alarm.

20.5.2 CDAMPER
0

Table 118: Damper Signal

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DAMPER CONTROL ON
Normal DAMPER CONTROL OFF
Fault DAMPER CONTROL RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open DAMPER CONTROL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DAMPER CONTROL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl DAMPER CONTROL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl DAMPER CONTROL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to control dampers in a smoke control application.

20.5.21 DRESET
Table 119: Detector Reset Signal
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal RESET RELAY ON
Normal RESET RELAY OFF
Fault RESET RELAY RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open RESET RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short RESET RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl RESET RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl RESET RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

page 340 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.2 DHOLDER
2

Table 120: Door Holder

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DOOR HOLDER ON
Normal DOOR HOLDER OFF
Fault DOOR HOLDER RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open DOOR HOLDER OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DOOR HOLDER SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl DOOR HOLDER DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl DOOR HOLDER MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

20.5.2 PHONE
3

Table 121: Phone Circuit

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal PHONE CIRCUIT ON
Normal PHONE CIRCUIT OFF
Fault PHONE CIRCUIT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open PHONE CIRCUIT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short PHONE CIRCUIT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl PHONE CIRCUIT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl PHONE CIRCUIT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

page 341 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.5.2 RMPHONE
4

Table 122: Remote Master Phone

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT ON
Normal REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT OFF
Fault REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl REMOTE MASTER PHONE CIRCUIT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

20.5.2 SHAFT
5

Table 123: Elevator Shaft Shutdown

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SHAFT ON
Normal SHAFT OFF
Fault SHAFT RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open SHAFT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SHAFT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl SHAFT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SHAFT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

20.5.2 AUXPWR
6

Table 124: Auxiliary Power

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal AUXILIARY POWER ON
Normal AUXILIARY POWER OFF
Fault AUXILIARY POWER RELAY FAULT TROUBLE T
Open AUXILIARY POWER OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short AUXILIARY POWER SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl AUXILIARY POWER DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AUXILIARY POWER MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

20.6 Monitor point types

20.6.1 FCORFAST
Table 125: Alarm CO/PHOTO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FAST CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FAST CORR MONITOR ALARM F
Open N/A
Short N/A

page 342 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 125: Alarm CO/PHOTO

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Disabled tbl FAST CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.2 SCORFAST
Table 126: SUPERV CO/Photo
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FAST CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FAST CORR MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl FAST CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.3 PCORFAST
Table 127: PRI2 CO/PHOTO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FAST CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FAST CORR MONITOR PRI2 ALARM P
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl FAST CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.4 UCORFAST
Table 128: UTILITY CO/PHOTO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FAST CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FAST CORR MONITOR ABNORMAL
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl FAST CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.5 SCORFALSE
Table 129: UPERV CO/Photo
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FALSE CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FALSE CORR MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl FALSE CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.6 PCORFALSE
Table 130: PRI2 CO/PHOTO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FALSE CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FALSE CORR MONITOR PRI2 ALARM S
Open N/A

page 343 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 130: PRI2 CO/PHOTO

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Short N/A
Disabled tbl FALSE CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.7 UCORFALSE
Table 131: UTILITY CO/PHOTO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FALSE CORR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FALSE CORR MONITOR ABNORMAL
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl FALSE CORR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.8 COFIRE
Table 132: Alarm CO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CO FIRE MONITOR NORMAL
Limited CO FIRE MONITOR ALARM
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl CO FIRE MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.9 COPRI2
Table 133: PRI2 CO
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CO FIRE MONITOR NORMAL
Limited CO FIRE MONITOR PRI2 ALARM P
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl CO FIRE MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

20.6.1 COSUPV
0

Table 134: Supervisory CO

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CO FIRE MONITOR NORMAL
Limited CO FIRE MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open N/A
Short N/A
Disabled tbl CO FIRE MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl N/A

page 344 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.11 COGASPRI2
Table 135: Gas Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CO GAS DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited CO GAS DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM P
Open CO GAS DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short CO GAS DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM P
Disabled tbl CO GAS DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl CO GAS DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T

20.6.12 COGASSUPV
Table 136: Gas Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CO GAS DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited CO GAS DETECTOR SUPV ALARM S
Open CO GAS DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short CO GAS DETECTOR SUPV ALARM S
Disabled tbl CO GAS DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl CO GAS DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T

page 345 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.13 FIRE
Table 137: Generic Fire Alarm
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FIRE MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited FIRE MONITOR ZONE ALARM F
Open FIRE MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short FIRE MONITOR ZONE ALARM F
Disabled tbl FIRE MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl FIRE MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: A type FIRE zone is used for all fire alarm zones where more than one type of device may be connected. For example, smokes,
pulls, waterflows, and heats are all connected to the same circuit. Shorts and current limited conditions activate alarms (general alarm).

20.6.1 WATER
4

Table 138: Waterflow Switch

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal WATERFLOW MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited WATERFLOW MONITOR ZONE ALARM F
Open WATERFLOW MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short WATERFLOW MONITOR ZONE ALARM F
Disabled tbl WATERFLOW MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl WATERFLOW MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: For hardwired zones, this point type is used when only waterflow devices are connected to the circuit. This point type is also
used when the waterflow device is connected to an IDNet Zone Addressable Module (ZAM). Shorts and current limited conditions are
treated the same (activate alarms).

20.6.15 HEAT
Table 139: Heat Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal HEAT DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited HEAT DETECTOR ALARM F
Open HEAT DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short HEAT DETECTOR ALARM F
Disabled tbl HEAT DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl HEAT DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: For hardwired zones, this point type is used when only heat detectors are connected to the zone. This point type is also used
when an addressable heat detector is wired to an IDNet or MAPNET channel.

20.6.16 DUCT
Table 140: Duct Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DUCT DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited DUCT DETECTOR ALARM F
Open DUCT DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DUCT DETECTOR ALARM F
Disabled tbl DUCT DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl DUCT DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: For hardwired zones, this point type is used when only duct detectors are connected to the zone. This point type is also used
when an addressable duct detector is wired to an IDNet or MAPNET channel.

page 346 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.17 FLAME
Table 141: Flame Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FLAME DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited FLAME DETECTOR ALARM F
Open FLAME DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short FLAME DETECTOR ALARM F
Disabled tbl FLAME DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl FLAME DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: For hardwired zones, this point type is used when only flame detectors are connected to the zone. This point type is also
used when an addressable flame detector is wired to an IDNet or MAPNET channel.

20.6.1 PULL
8

Table 142: Pull (manual) Station

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal PULL STATION NORMAL
Limited PULL STATION ALARM F
Open PULL STATION OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short PULL STATION ALARM F
Disabled tbl PULL STATION DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PULL STATION CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: For hardwired zones, this point type is used when only pull stations are connected to the zone. This point type is also used
when an addressable pull station is wired to an IDNet or MAPNET channel.

20.6.19 SMOKE
Table 143: Smoke Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SMOKE DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited SMOKE DETECTOR ALARM F
Open SMOKE DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM F
Disabled tbl SMOKE DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SMOKE DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: For hardwired zones, this point type is used when only 2-wire or 4-wire smoke detectors are connected to the zone. This
point type is also used when an addressable smoke detector is wired to an IDNet or MAPNET channel.

20.6.2 VSMOKE
0

Table 144: Verified Smoke Detector Only

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SMOKE DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited SMOKE DETECTOR VERIFIED SMOKE ALARM F
Open SMOKE DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SMOKE DETECTOR SHORT CKT ALARM F
Disabled tbl SMOKE DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SMOKE DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used with smoke detectors for alarm verification applications.

page 347 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.21 CODEDIN
Table 145: Coded Input
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal CODED INPUT NORMAL
Limited CODED INPUT ALARM F
Open CODED INPUT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short CODED INPUT ALARM F
Disabled tbl CODED INPUT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl CODED INPUT CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate that one of the monitor card circuits is connected to coded input devices. When first detected, the alarm is
latched. This aborts PNIS and other coded inputs for 30 seconds after the system is returned to normal. Output signals are determined by
the programmer.

20.6.2 EMERG
2

Table 146: Combination Fire/Emergency

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited MONITOR ZONE EMERGENCY ALARM S
Open MONITOR ZONE TROUBLE T
Short MONITOR ZONE FIRE ALARM F
Disabled tbl MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to connect two types of Emergency Alarm devices on the same zone – for example, nurse call type devices and fire
alarm devices. The Emergency Alarm devices require the use of a current limiting resistor. Emergency devices cause a supervisory service
condition.

page 348 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.2 EXTNGSH
3

Table 147: Fire Extinguisher Monitor

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal EXTINGUISHER NORMAL
Abnormal EXTINGUISHER BLOCKED/LOW PRESSURE T
Open EXTINGUISHER OPEN CIRCUIT TBL T
Short EXTINGUISHER REMOVED S
Disabled tbl EXTINGUISHER DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl EXTINGUISHER CLASS A TROUBLE T

20.6.2 SFIRE
4

Table 148: Combination Smoke/Fire

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited MONITOR ZONE SMOKE ALARM F
Open MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short MONITOR ZONE FIRE ALARM F
Disabled tbl MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used when smoke detectors and other shorting type devices are on the same circuit. The current limited state of the smoke
detector causes the display to indicate smoke alarm.

20.6.2 VSFIRE
5

Table 149: Verified Smoke/Fire Combination Zone

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited MONITOR ZONE VERIFIED SMOKE ALARM F
Open MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short MONITOR ZONE FIRE ALARM F
Disabled tbl MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to activate the alarm verification software for all smoke detectors connected to this circuit. All shorting type devices will
cause an immediate alarm.

20.6.2 SPULL
6

Table 150: Smoke/Pull Combination Zone

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited MONITOR ZONE SMOKE ALARM F
Open MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short MONITOR ZONE MANUAL ALARM F
Disabled tbl MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used when only smoke detectors and pull stations are connected to the same circuit.

page 349 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.2 VSPULL
7

Table 151: Verified Smoke/Pull Combination Zone

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited MONITOR ZONE VERIFIED SMOKE ALARM F
Open MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short MONITOR ZONE MANUAL ALARM F
Disabled tbl MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used when only smoke detectors and pull stations are connected to the same circuit and alarm verification operation is
required.

20.6.2 GENMON
8

Table 152: Generator Monitor (No Supervisory)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal GENERATOR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited GENERATOR MONITOR RUNNING
Open GENERATOR MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short GENERATOR MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl GENERATOR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl GENERATOR MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used when emergency generator monitoring is required. The shorted condition of the circuit indicates an abnormal status
and is indicated by the Supervisory Service LED. The current limited condition indicates the generator is running and can be tracked with a
programmable LED, which must be programmed. A current limited resistor must be installed for this operation.

20.6.2 SGENMON
9

Table 153: Generator Monitor (Supervisory)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal GENERATOR MONITOR NORMAL
Limited GENERATOR MONITOR RUNNING S
Open GENERATOR MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short GENERATOR MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl GENERATOR MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl GENERATOR MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Same as GENMON, except generator running is automatically displayed and requires operator acknowledgement.

page 350 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.3 FPUMP
0

Table 154: Fire Pump Monitor (No Supervisory)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FIRE PUMP MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FIRE PUMP MONITOR RUNNING
Open FIRE PUMP MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short FIRE PUMP MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl FIRE PUMP MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl FIRE PUMP MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to monitor fire pump conditions. The shorted condition indicates Fire Pump Abnormal. A current limited condition
indicates the fire pump is running.

20.6.31 SFPUMP
Table 155: Fire Pump Monitor (Supervisory)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FIRE PUMP MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FIRE PUMP MONITOR RUNNING S
Open FIRE PUMP MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short FIRE PUMP MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl FIRE PUMP MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl FIRE PUMP MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Same as FPUMP, except Fire Pump Running is automatically displayed and operator acknowledgement is required.

20.6.3 ABORT
2

Table 156: Abort Zone (Pre-Signal) Supervisory

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal ALARM ABORT NORMAL
Limited ALARM ABORT ACTIVATED S
Open ALARM ABORT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short ALARM ABORT ACTIVATED S
Disabled tbl ALARM ABORT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl ALARM ABORT CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used in conjunction with Stage 1 and Stage 2 operations to prevent timers from moving a condition from Stage 1 to Stage 2.
The abort is a supervisory condition requiring acknowedgement.

20.6.3 S2STAGE
3

Table 157: 2 Stage Monitor

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal 2 STAGE MONITOR NORMAL
Limited 2 STAGE MONITOR STAGE 1 ALARM F
Open 2 STAGE MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short 2 STAGE MONITOR STAGE 2 ALARM F
Disabled tbl 2 STAGE MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl 2 STAGE MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used for Stage 2 alarms. The current limited state of any device indicates a Stage 1 alarm. The shorting of the circuit, such as
a key switch operation, causes a Stage 2 alarm.

page 351 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.3 SO
4

Table 158: Sprinkler Supv (Normally Open)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SPRINKLER MONITOR NORMAL
Limited SPRINKLER MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open SPRINKLER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SPRINKLER MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate sprinkler abnormal conditions such as the operating of the PIV or OS&Y tamper switch. Used with normally
open contacts only.

20.6.3 SC
5

Table 159: Sprinkler Supv (Normally Closed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SPRINKLER MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Limited SPRINKLER MONITOR NORMAL
Open SPRINKLER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SPRINKLER MONITOR SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used the same as SO, except the contacts monitored must be normally closed and a shunt resistor must be used. This point
type assures the zone will not go into alarm when multiple tamper valves are activated.

20.6.3 WSO
6

Table 160: Combination Waterflow/Sprinkler (Normally Open)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SPRINKLER MONITOR NORMAL
Limited SPRINKLER MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open SPRINKLER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SPRINKLER MONITOR WATERFLOW ALARM F
Disabled tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Where permitted by the AHJ, this circuit operates both waterflows and tampers on the same circuit. All tamper switches (N.O.
contacts) must be connected with a current limiting resistor as described in the installation instructions for the monitor circuit, and will be
indicated by the supervisory service LED. A short condition indicates a waterflow alarm.

page 352 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.3 WSC
7

Table 161: Sprinkler Supv (Normally Closed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SPRINKLER MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Limited SPRINKLER MONITOR NORMAL
Open SPRINKLER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SPRINKLER MONITOR WATERFLOW ALARM F
Disabled tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SPRINKLER MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Same operation as the WSO point type, except all tamper switches must have normally closed contacts. A 1K Ohm shunt
resistor must be installed across the tamper switch and a 560 Ohm end-of-line resistor must also be used.

20.6.3 GVMON
8

Table 162: Generic Verified Smoke Detector

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited MONITOR ZONE VERIFIED ALARM F
Open MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short MONITOR ZONE FIRE ALARM F
Disabled tbl MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T

20.6.3 SUPERV
9

Table 163: Supervisory Monitor (No Alarm)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SUPERVISORY MONITOR NORMAL
Limited SUPERVISORY MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open SUPERVISORY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SUPERVISORY MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl SUPERVISORY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SUPERVISORY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: When a point assigned this point type enters a supervisory condition, the condition is cleared from the system at the time the
point returns to normal operation.

20.6.4 LATSUPV
0

Table 164: Latching Supervisory Monitor (No Alarm)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SUPERVISORY MONITOR NORMAL
Limited SUPERVISORY MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Open SUPERVISORY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SUPERVISORY MONITOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl SUPERVISORY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SUPERVISORY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Using this point type requires a system reset once the point is returned to normal.

page 353 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.4 UTILITY
1
Table 165: Utility Monitor with Tri-State (No Alarm)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal UTILITY MONITOR NORMAL
Limited UTILITY MONITOR ABNORMAL
Open UTILITY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short UTILITY MONITOR ABNORMAL
Disabled tbl UTILITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl UTILITY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to monitor and supervise any condition; operator acknowledgement is not required.

20.6.4 TROUBLE
2

Table 166: Trouble Monitor (No Alarm)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal TROUBLE MONITOR NORMAL
Limited TROUBLE MONITOR ABNORMAL T
Open TROUBLE MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short TROUBLE MONITOR ABNORMAL T
Disabled tbl TROUBLE MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl TROUBLE MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used to monitor and supervise any condition and has the device operation indicated as a trouble condition.

20.6.4 DAMPER
3

Table 167: Damper Monitor (Open/Closed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DAMPER MONITOR OPEN
Limited DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Open DAMPER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Disabled tbl DAMPER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl DAMPER MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used for supervising smoke or fire damper open/closed status. The normal status of the circuit indicates damper open. The
shorted and current limited operation indicates damper closed.

page 354 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.4 TDAMPER
4

Table 168: Tri-State Damper Monitor (Center/Open/Closed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DAMPER MONITOR PARTIALLY OPEN
Limited DAMPER MONITOR OPEN
Open DAMPER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Disabled tbl DAMPER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl DAMPER MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used for supervising smoke or fire damper open/closed status plus partially open status. In this circuit, the open damper
contact is current limited. The closed damper contact shorts when the damper is closed. If neither condition is sensed, the partially open
condition is sensed via end-of-line resistor. No operator acknowledgement or automatic display of information occurs with this point type
or the DAMPER point type.

20.6.4 MPRI2 (ARMED)

5

Table 169: Class M Generic Priority 2 (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% PRIORITY 2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open PRIORITY 2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short PRIORITY 2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.4 MPRI2 (DISARMED)

6

Table 170: Class M Generic Priority 2 (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL ON
Open PRIORITY 2 MONITOR TROUBLE T ON
Short PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.4 SMALARM (ARMED)

7

Table 171: Class M General Security Alarm (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open SECURITY MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short SECURITY MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T

page 355 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 171: Class M General Security Alarm (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Class A tbl SECURITY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.4 SMALARM (DISARMED)

8

Table 172: Class M General Security Alarm (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL ON
Open SECURITY MONITOR TROUBLE T ON
Short SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.4 SMDOOR (ARMED)

9

Table 173: Class M Door Monitoring (Armed )

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY DOOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY DOOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open SECURITY DOOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short SECURITY DOOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY DOOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY DOOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SMDOOR (DISARMED)

0

Table 174: Class M Door Monitoring (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY DOOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY DOOR NORMAL ON
Open SECURITY DOOR TROUBLE T ON
Short SECURITY DOOR NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY DOOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY DOOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 356 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.51 SMWIND (ARMED)

Table 175: Class M Window Monitoring (Armed)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY WINDOW PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open SECURITY WINDOW PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short SECURITY WINDOW PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY WINDOW DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY WINDOW CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SMWIND (DISARMED)

2

Table 176: Class M Window Monitoring (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL ON
Open SECURITY WINDOW TROUBLE T ON
Short SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY WINDOW DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY WINDOW CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SMBREAK (ARMED)

3

Table 177: Class M Break Glass (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal BREAK GLASS NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% BREAK GLASS PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open BREAK GLASS PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short BREAK GLASS PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl BREAK GLASS DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl BREAK GLASS CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SMBREAK (DISARMED)

4

Table 178: Class M Break Glass (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal BREAK GLASS NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% BREAK GLASS NORMAL ON
Open BREAK GLASS TROUBLE T ON
Short BREAK GLASS NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl BREAK GLASS DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl BREAK GLASS CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 357 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.5 SMMOT (ARMED)

5

Table 179: Class M Motion Detector (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% MOTION DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open MOTION DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short MOTION DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl MOTION DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MOTION DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SMMOT (DISARMED)

6

Table 180: Class M Motion Detector (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL ON
Open MOTION DETECTOR TROUBLE T ON
Short MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl MOTION DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MOTION DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SPRI2 (ARMED)

7

Table 181: Class S Generic Priority 2 (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% PRIORITY 2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open PRIORITY 2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short PRIORITY 2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 358 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.5 SPRI2 (DISARMED)

8

Table 182: Class S Generic Priority 2 (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% PRIORITY 2 MONITOR NORMAL ON
Open PRIORITY 2 MONITOR TROUBLE T ON
Short PRIORITY 2 MONITOR TROUBLE T ON
Disabled tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PRIORITY 2 MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.5 SSALARM (ARMED)

9

Table 183: Class S General Security Alarm (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open SECURITY MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short SECURITY MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.6 SSALARM (DISARMED)

0

Table 184: Class S General Security Alarm (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY MONITOR NORMAL ON
Open SECURITY MONITOR TROUBLE T ON
Short SECURITY MONITOR TROUBLE T ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.61 SSDOOR (ARMED)

Table 185: Class S Door Monitoring (Armed)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY DOOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY DOOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open SECURITY DOOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short SECURITY DOOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY DOOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY DOOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 359 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.6 SSDOOR (DISARMED)

2

Table 186: Class S Door Monitoring (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY DOOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY DOOR NORMAL ON
Open SECURITY DOOR TROUBLE T ON
Short SECURITY DOOR TROUBLE T ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY DOOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY DOOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.6 SSWIND (ARMED)

3

Table 187: Class S Window Monitoring (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY WINDOW PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open SECURITY WINDOW PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short SECURITY WINDOW PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY WINDOW DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY WINDOW CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.6 SSWIND (DISARMED)

4

Table 188: Class S Window Monitoring (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% SECURITY WINDOW NORMAL ON
Open SECURITY WINDOW TROUBLE T ON
Short SECURITY WINDOW TROUBLE T ON
Disabled tbl SECURITY WINDOW DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SECURITY WINDOW CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 360 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.6 SSBREAK (ARMED)

5

Table 189: Class S Break Glass (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal BREAK GLASS NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% BREAK GLASS PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open BREAK GLASS PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short BREAK GLASS PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl BREAK GLASS DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl BREAK GLASS CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.6 SSBREAK (DISARMED)

6

Table 190: Class S Break Glass (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal BREAK GLASS NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% BREAK GLASS NORMAL ON
Open BREAK GLASS TROUBLE T ON
Short BREAK GLASS TROUBLE T ON
Disabled tbl BREAK GLASS DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl BREAK GLASS CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.6 SSMOT (ARMED)

7

Table 191: Class S Motion Detector (Armed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% MOTION DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open MOTION DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Short MOTION DETECTOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl MOTION DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MOTION DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.6 SSMOT (DISARMED)

8

Table 192: Class S Motion Detector (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% MOTION DETECTOR NORMAL ON
Open MOTION DETECTOR TROUBLE T ON
Short MOTION DETECTOR TROUBLE T ON
Disabled tbl MOTION DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl MOTION DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 361 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.6 STYLEC
9

Table 193: Style C Monitor Point

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FIRE MONITOR ZONE NORMAL
Limited FIRE MONITOR ZONE ALARM A
Open FIRE MONITOR ZONE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short FIRE MONITOR ZONE SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disabled tbl FIRE MONITOR ZONE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl FIRE MONITOR ZONE CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.7 SDUCT
0

Table 194: Supervisory Duct Detector

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DUCT DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited DUCT DETECTOR ABNORMAL S
Open DUCT DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DUCT DETECTOR ABNORMAL S
Disabled tbl DUCT DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl DUCT DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.71 GENPRI2 (ARMED)

Table 195: Priority 2 with Open Trouble (Armed)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal PRI2 MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% PRI2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Open PRI2 MONITOR OPEN CKT ALARM T ON
Short PRI2 MONITOR PRI2 ALARM A ON
Disabled tbl PRI2 MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PRI2 MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

page 362 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.7 GENPRI2 (DISARMED)

2

Table 196: Priority 2 with Open Trouble (Disarmed)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED Active Status
Normal PRI2 MONITOR NORMAL OFF
+ - 50% PRI2 MONITOR NORMAL ON
Open PRI2 MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T ON
Short PRI2 MONITOR NORMAL ON
Disabled tbl PRI2 MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl PRI2 MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.7 GENFS
3

Table 197: Generic Normally Open Fire/Supervisory

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal FIRE/SUPV MONITOR NORMAL
Limited FIRE/SUPV MONITOR SUPERVISORY S
Open FIRE/SUPV MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short FIRE/SUPV MONITOR ALARM F
Disabled tbl FIRE/SUPV MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl FIRE/SUPV MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.7 S3SMOKE
4

Table 198: Three Stage Smoke Detector

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SMOKE DETECTOR NORMAL
Abnormal SMOKE DETECTOR ALARM F
Disabled tbl SMOKE DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Description:

20.6.7 SUTIL
5

Table 199: Three Stage Utility Monitor

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SMOKE DETECTOR NORMAL
Abnormal SMOKE DETECTOR ON
Disabled tbl SMOKE DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Description:

page 363 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.6.7 LSDUCT
6

Table 200: Latching Supervisory Duct Smoke Detector (No Alarm)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DUCT DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited DUCT DETECTOR ABNORMAL S
Open DUCT DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DUCT DETECTOR ABNORMAL S
Disables tbl DUCT DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl DUCT DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Using this point type requires a system reset once the point is returned to normal.

20.6.7 LVSUPV
7

Table 201: Latching Verified Supervisory Smoke Detector Only

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal SUPERVISORY MONITOR NORMAL
Limited SUPERVISORY MONITOR VERIFIED SMOKE ALARM S
Open SUPERVISORY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short SUPERVISORY MONITOR SHORT CKT ALARM S
Disables tbl SUPERVISORY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl SUPERVISORY MONITOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used with smoke detectors for latching verified supervisory applications. Using this point type requires a system reset once
the point is returned to normal.

20.6.7 LVSDUCT
8

Table 202: Latching Verified Supervisory Duct Smoke Detector Only

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DUCT DETECTOR NORMAL
Limited DUCT DETECTOR VERIFIED SMOKE ALARM S
Open DUCT DETECTOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DUCT DETECTOR SHORT CKT ALARM S
Disables tbl DUCT DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Class A tbl DUCT DETECTOR CLASS A TROUBLE T
Description: Used with smoke detectors for latching verified supervisory duct applications. Using this point type requires a system reset

20.6.7 FBEAM
9

Table 203: Fire Beam Detector

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Disabled BEAM DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Manual Override BEAM DETECTOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Input 1 Abnormal SMOKE STATUS FIRE F
Input 1 Normal SMOKE STATUS NORMAL -
Input 2 Abnormal DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLE T
Input 2 Normal DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS NORMAL -
Input 3 Abnormal RAPID OBSCURATION TROUBLE T
Input 3 Normal RAPID OBSCURATION NORMAL -
Input 4 Abnormal SELF ALIGNED STATUS TRUE -

page 364 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 203: Fire Beam Detector

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Input 4 Normal SELF ALIGNED STATUS FALSE -
Input 5 Abnormal ALMOST DIRTY TRUE -
Input 5 Normal ALMOST DIRTY FALSE -
Input 6 Abnormal EXCESSIVELY DIRTY TROUBLE T
Input 6 Normal EXCESSIVELY DIRTY FALSE -
Input 7 Abnormal SUMMARY TROUBLE TROUBLE T
Input 7 Normal SUMMARY TROUBLE NORMAL -

20.6.8 LSBEAM
0

Table 204: Supervisory Beam Detector

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Disabled BEAM DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Manual Override BEAM DETECTOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Input 1 Abnormal SMOKE STATUS SUPERVISORY S
Input 1 Normal SMOKE STATUS NORMAL -
Inputs 2-7 same as FBEAM
Description: Using this point type requires a system reset once the point is returned to normal.

20.6.8 UBEAM
1
Table 205: Utility Beam Detector
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Disabled BEAM DETECTOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Manual Override BEAM DETECTOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Input 1 Abnormal SMOKE STATUS UTILITY -
Input 1 Normal SMOKE STATUS NORMAL -
Inputs 2-7 same as FBEAM

page 365 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7 AUX relay point types

20.7.1 RELAY
Table 206: Generic Relay (No Default Operation)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off AUXILIARY RELAY OFF
On AUXILIARY RELAY ON
Disabled tbl AUXILIARY RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AUXILIARY RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for all relay applications that are not defined by a specific type.

20.7.2 PRIMARY
Table 207: Elevator Capture (Primary)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE ON
Off PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE OFF
Disabled tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used with the primary elevator relay point .

20.7.3 ALTERN
Table 208: Elevator Capture (Alternate)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE ON
Off ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE OFF
Disabled tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used with the auxiliary elevator relay point or signal point.

20.7.4 AHUR
Table 209: AHU On/Off (Single Relay Control)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On AHU RELAY ON
Off AHU RELAY OFF
Disabled tbl AHU RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AHU RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used where one auxiliary relay performs AHU ON and AHU OFF control.

page 366 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7.5 AHUO
Table 210: AHU On Relay (Dual Relay Control)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On AHU ON RELAY ON
Off AHU ON RELAY OFF
Disabled tbl AHU ON RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AHU ON RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used where two auxiliary relays are used to perform AHU control. One relay is for ON and one relay is for OFF. This point type
is used with the ON relay.

20.7.6 AHUF
Table 211: AHU Off Relay (Dual Relay Control)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On AHU OFF RELAY ON
Off AHU OFF RELAY OFF
Disabled tbl AHU OFF RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AHU OFF RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used where two auxiliary relays are used to perform AHU control. One relay is for ON and one relay is for OFF. This point type
is used with the OFF relay.

20.7.7 CODED
Table 212: Coded Relay (PNIS or Coded Input)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On CODED RELAY ON
Off CODED RELAY OFF
CODED RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl CODED RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl CODED RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to track any PNIS coded or coded input zone.

20.7.8 CPRESS
Table 213: Pressurization (Supply) Fan/Damper Control
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On PRESSURIZATION ON
Off PRESSURIZATION OFF
Disabled tbl PRESSURIZATION DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl PRESSURIZATION MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to initiate smoke pressurization sequence in a smoke control application.

page 367 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7.9 CEXHAUS
Table 214: Exhaust Fan/Damper Control
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On EXHAUST ON
Off EXHAUST OFF
Disabled tbl EXHAUST DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl EXHAUST MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to initiate exhaust sequence in a smoke control application.

20.7.1 CDAMPER
0

Table 215: Damper Control (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On DAMPER CONTROL ON
Off DAMPER CONTROL OFF
Disabled tbl DAMPER CONTROL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl DAMPER CONTROL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used to control dampers in a smoke control application.

20.7.11 SRELAY
Table 216: Alarm Relay (On Until Silence)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On ALARM RELAY ON
Off ALARM RELAY OFF
ALARM RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl ALARM RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl ALARM RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for any relay that must be ON from the time an alarm occurs until an alarm silence occurs.

20.7.12 RRELAY
Table 217: Alarm Relay (On Until Reset)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On ALARM RELAY ON
Off ALARM RELAY OFF
ALARM RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl ALARM RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl ALARM RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for any relay that must be ON from the time an alarm occurs until a system reset occurs.

page 368 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7.13 TRELAY
Table 218: Trouble/Supervisory Relay (On Until Clear)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On TROUBLE RELAY ON
Off TROUBLE RELAY OFF
TROUBLE RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl TROUBLE RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl TROUBLE RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for an audible or visual device (trouble or supervisory) that must be ON until the condition clears.

20.7.1 BRELAY
4

Table 219: Trouble/Supervisory (Bell) Relay (On Until Acknowledged)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On TROUBLE RELAY ON
Off TROUBLE RELAY OFF
TROUBLE RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl TROUBLE RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl TROUBLE RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for trouble relays that must be ON (for supervisory or trouble condition) until the condition is acknowledged.

20.7.15 DRESET
Table 220: Detector (4-Wire) Pulse Reset
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On RESET RELAY ON
Off RESET RELAY OFF
RESET RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl RESET RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl RESET RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when 4-wire smoke detectors are used and are reset through an auxiliary relay. They are pulsed for 5 seconds at the
start of the reset sequence.

20.7.16 DHOLDER
Table 221: Door Holder Control (Normally Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On DOOR HOLDER ON
Off DOOR HOLDER OFF
Disabled tbl DOOR HOLDER DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl DOOR HOLDER MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when the auxiliary relay is connected to door holders. The relay energizes on alarm, loss of AC power, or when
programmed.

page 369 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7.17 SWATER
Table 222: Waterflow Relay (On Until Silence)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On WATERFLOW RELAY ON
Off WATERFLOW RELAY OFF
WATERFLOW RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl WATERFLOW RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl WATERFLOW RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a waterflow control circuit is required that will remain ON until silenced.

20.7.18 RWATER
Table 223: Waterflow Relay (On Until Reset)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On WATERFLOW RELAY ON
Off WATERFLOW RELAY OFF
WATERFLOW RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl WATERFLOW RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl WATERFLOW RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a waterflow control circuit is required to remain ON until a system reset occurs.

20.7.19 SUPERV
Table 224: Sprinkler Supervisory Relay (On Until Acknowledged)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On SUPERVISORY RELAY ON
Off SUPERVISORY RELAY OFF
SUPERVISORY RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl SUPERVISORY RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SUPERVISORY RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used in applications where a supervisory control circuit is required to be ON until acknowledged.

20.7.2 SVISUAL
0

Table 225: Visual (On Until Silence)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On VISUAL ON
Off VISUAL OFF
VISUAL CODING
Disabled tbl VISUAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl VISUAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when a relay is connected to visual alarm devices that must remain ON until an alarm silence occurs.

page 370 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7.21 RVISUAL
Table 226: Visual (On Until Reset)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On VISUAL ON
Off VISUAL OFF
VISUAL CODING
Disabled tbl VISUAL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl VISUAL MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used when a relay is connected to visual alarm devices that must remain ON until an alarm reset occurs.

20.7.2 SSIGNAL
2

Table 227: Signal Relay (On Until Silence)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On SIGNAL RELAY ON
Off SIGNAL RELAY OFF
SIGNAL RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl SIGNAL RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SIGNAL RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for any signal relay that must remain ON until an alarm silence occurs.

20.7.2 RSIGNAL
3

Table 228: Signal Relay (On Until Reset)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On SIGNAL RELAY ON
Off SIGNAL RELAY OFF
SIGNAL RELAY CODING
Disabled tbl SIGNAL RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SIGNAL RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description: Used for any signal relay that must remain ON until an alarm reset occurs

20.7.2 SHAFT
4

Table 229: Elevator Shaft Shutdown

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On SHAFT ON
Off SHAFT OFF
Disabled tbl SHAFT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl SHAFT MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

page 371 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.7.2 AUXPWR
5

Table 230: Auxiliary Power

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off AUXILIARY RELAY OFF
On AUXILIARY RELAY ON
Disabled tbl AUXILIARY RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto tbl AUXILIARY RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TBL T
Description:

20.8 Monitor device types

Table 231: Monitor device types
Monitor device types Point type Available point types
(default)
4WZAM - MAPNET Only SMOKE DUCT, FIRE, GVMON, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, VSMOKE
ADRDET -- MAPNET Only SMOKE DUCT, GVMON, HEAT, LSDUCT, SDUCT, SMOKE, VSMOKE
ADRPUL -- MAPNET and IDNet PULL BGLASS, CALLPT, PULL
CANPUL -- IDNET ONLY PULL S2STAGE
KACPUL -- IDNET ONLY PULL N/A
GENIAM - MAPNET Only UTILITY ABORT, DAMPER, DUCT, FIRE, FLAME, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT,
LATSUPV, LSDUCT, MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK,
SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPERV, TROUBLE,
UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
IAM - IDNet only FIRE ABORT, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME, FPUMP,
GENFS, GENMON, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT,
LVSUPV, PULL, S2STAGE, SDUCT, SFIRE, SFPUMP, SGENMON, SMOKE,
SO, STYLEC, SUPERV, TDAMPER, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE, VSPULL,
WATER, WSO
IDNETISO -- IDNet only ISO ISO
IDNISO2 -- IDNet2 only ISO ISO
ISO -- MAPNET Only ISO ISO
MAZAM -- IDNet Only GENFS ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH,
FIRE, FLAME, FPUMP, GENFS, GENMON, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV,
LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, PULL, S2STAGE, SDUCT, SFIRE, SFPUMP,
SGENMON, SMOKE, SO, SPULL, STYLEC, SUPERV, TDAMPER,
TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE, VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER, WSO
MAZAM -- MAPNET Only FIRE ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME,
GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, PULL, SDUCT,
SMOKE, SO, SUPERV, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
MBZAM - IDNET GENFS ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH,
FIRE, FLAME, FPUMP, GENFS, GENMON, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT,
LATSUPV, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV, MPRI2, PULL, S2STAGE,
SDUCT, SFIRE, SFPUMP, SGENMON, SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR,
SMMOT, SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SPULL, STYLEC, SUPERV, TDAMPER,
TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE, VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER, WSO
MBZAM -- MAPNET Only FIRE ABORT, BGLASS, CALLPT, DAMPER, DUCT, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME,
GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV, LSDUCT, LVSDUCT, LVSUPV,
MPRI2, PULL, SDUCT, SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR, SMMOT,
SMOKE, SMWIND, SO, SUPERV, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSMOKE, WATER
POWERISO - IDNet Only ISO N/A
PSMON -- MAPNET Only TROUBLE N/A

page 372 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 231: Monitor device types

Monitor device types Point type Available point types
(default)
SECIAM - IDNet Only SMOKE ABORT, DAMPER, DUCT, EMERG, EXTNGSH, FIRE, FLAME,
FPUMP, GENFS, GENMON, GENPRI2, GVMON, HEAT, LATSUPV,
LSDUCTMPRI2, PULL, S2STAGE, SDUCT, SECMON, SFIRE, SFPUMP,
SGENMON, SMALARM, SMBREAK, SMDOOR, SMMOT, SMOKE,
SMWIND, SO, SPRI2, SPULL, SSALARM, SSBREAK, SSDOOR, SSMOT,
SSWIND, STYLEC, SUPERV, TDAMPER, TROUBLE, UTILITY, VSFIRE,
VSMOKE, VSPULL, WATER, WSO
BEAM - IDNET Only FBEAM FBEAM, LSBEAM, UBEAM

20.9 24 Point I/O point types

20.9.1 Feedback point types

20.9.1.1 DAMPER
Table 232: Damper Monitor (Open/Closed)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On DAMPER MONITOR OPEN
Off DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Description:

20.9.1.2 AHUMON
Table 233: AHU Monitor (On/Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On AHU MONITOR ON
Off AHU MONITOR OFF
Description:

20.9.1.3 PRESSUR
Table 234: Pressurization Monitor (On/Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On PRESSURIZATION ON
Off PRESSURIZATION OFF
Description:

20.9.1.4 EXHAUST
Table 235: Exhaust Monitor (On/Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On EXHAUST ON
Off EXHAUST OFF
Description:

page 373 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.1.5 ONOFF
Table 236: Utility Monitor (On/Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
On UTILITY MONITOR ON
Off UTILITY MONITOR OFF
Description:

20.9.2 UTILITY
Table 237: Utility Monitor with Tri/State (Normal/Abnormal)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal UTILITY MONITOR NORMAL
Limited UTILITY MONITOR ABNORMAL
Open UTILITY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short UTILITY MONITOR ABNORMAL
Disabled Tbl UTILITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl UTILITY MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate that the point is a generic supervised input for a condition that is abnormal.

20.9.3 TROUBLE
Table 238: Generic Trouble Monitor
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal TROUBLE MONITOR NORMAL
Limited TROUBLE MONITOR ABNORMAL T
Open TROUBLE MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short TROUBLE MONITOR ABNORMAL T
Disabled Tbl TROUBLE MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl TROUBLE MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate that the point is a supervised input, but will cause a trouble indication when the point is activated.

20.9.4 USWITCH
Table 239: 2-Position Switch/Input (Unsupervised)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Open 2-POSITION SWITCH DOWN
Limited 2-POSITION SWITCH T
Short 2-POSITION SWITCH UP T
(*) Invalid Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH INVALID STATE TBL T
Disabled Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is connected to a two-position switch without an EOL or current-limited resistor. (Open = OFF;
Short = ON).

page 374 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.5 OSWITCH
Table 240: 2-Position Switch/Input (Open Supervised)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal 2-POSITION SWITCH CENTER
Limited 2-POSITION SWITCH T
Open 2-POSITION SWITCH OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short 2-POSITION SWITCH UP
(*) Invalid Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH INVALID STATE TBL T
Disable Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is supervised for opens and is connected to a two-position switch. An EOL resistor is required.

20.9.6 SSWITCH
Table 241: 2-Position Switch/Input (Open/Short Supervised)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal 2-POSITION SWITCH CENTER
Limited 2-POSITION SWITCH UP
Open 2-POSITION SWITCH OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short 2-POSITION SWITCH SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl 2-POSITION SWITCH MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is supervised for opens and shorts and is connected to a two-position switch. This requires EOL
and current-limited resistors.

20.9.7 TSWITCH
Table 242: 3-Position Switch/Input (Open Supervised)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal 3-POSITION SWITCH CENTER
Limited 3-POSITION SWITCH UP
Open 3-POSITION SWITCH OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short 3-POSITION SWITCH DOWN
Disable Tbl 3-POSITION SWITCH DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl 3-POSITION SWITCH MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is connected to an SPDT switch and is supervised for opens. Requires an EOL and series current-
limiting resistors (up leg).

20.9.8 TDAMPER
Table 243: Tri-State Damper Monitor (Center/Open/Closed)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DAMPER MONITOR PARTIALLY OPEN
Limited DAMPER MONITOR OPEN
Open DAMPER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Disable Tbl DAMPER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl DAMPER MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used for a supervised input monitoring damper, reports open/closed status as well as partially open status. A current limiting
resistor is required for the open damper contact.

page 375 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.9 AHUMON
Table 244: AHU Monitor (On/Off/Open/Short)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal AHU MONITOR OFF
Limited AHU MONITOR ON
Open AHU MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short AHU MONITOR SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl AHU MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl AHU MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is supervised for shorts and opens and is monitoring whether the AHU is ON or OFF. Requires a
current limiting resistor on the AHU ON contact.

20.9.1 PRESSUR
0

Table 245: Pressurization Monitor (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal PRESSURIZATION OFF
Limited PRESSURIZATION ON
Open PRESSURIZATION OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short PRESSURIZATION SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl PRESSURIZATION DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl PRESSURIZATION MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a supervised input, monitoring if an AHU is in a pressurization sequence.

20.9.11 EXHAUST
Table 246: Exhaust Monitor (On/Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal EXHAUST OFF
Limited EXHAUST ON
Open EXHAUST OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short EXHAUST SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl EXHAUST DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl EXHAUST MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a supervised input, monitoring if an AHU is in the exhaust sequence.

page 376 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.12 ONOFF
Table 247: Utility Monitor (On/Off)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal UTILITY MONITOR ON
Limited UTILITY MONITOR OFF
Open UTILITY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short UTILITY MONITOR SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl UTILITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl UTILITY MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used for a general ON/OFF utility input with supervision for shorts and opens. It requires a current limiting resistor for the ON
contact.

20.9.13 OFFON
Table 248: Utility Monitor (Off/On)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal UTILITY MONITOR OFF
Limited UTILITY MONITOR ON
Open UTILITY MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short UTILITY MONITOR SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl UTILITY MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl UTILITY MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a generic supervised input, monitored for a condition that is ON or OFF.

20.9.1 EP
4

Table 249: AHU Monitor (Exhaust/Pressure/Normal)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal AHU MONITOR NORMAL
Limited AHU MONITOR PRESSURIZATION
Open AHU MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short AHU MONITOR EXHAUST
Disable Tbl AHU MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl AHU MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a supervised input, monitoring whether an AHU is in the pressurization or exhaust mode.

20.9.15 DAMPER
Table 250: Damper Monitor (Open/Closed)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Normal DAMPER MONITOR OPEN
Limited DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Open DAMPER MONITOR OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Short DAMPER MONITOR CLOSED
Disable Tbl DAMPER MONITOR DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl DAMPER MONITOR MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a damper input, and to monitor whether a damper is in a closed or open position or
experiencing a trouble condition.

page 377 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.16 LAMP
Table 251: Lamp (With Lamp Test)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED OFF
On ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED ON
Slow Flash ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED FAST FLASH
Shorted Tbl ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Open Tbl ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl ANNUNCIATOR LAMP/LED MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a lamp or LED with lamp test capability.

20.9.17 PIEZO
Table 252: Piezo (Annunciator Use)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO OFF
On ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO ON
Slow Flash ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO FAST FLASH
Shorted Tbl ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Open Tbl ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl ANNUNCIATOR PIEZO MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an audible tone-alert circuit on a remote annunciator.

20.9.1 RELAY
8

Table 253: Generic Remote Relay (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off AUXILIARY RELAY OFF
On AUXILIARY RELAY ON
Slow Flash AUXILIARY RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash AUXILIARY RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl AUXILIARY RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl AUXILIARY RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl AUXILIARY RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl AUXILIARY RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output circuit controlling a remote auxiliary relay. It provides supervised wiring.

20.9.19 PRIMARY
Table 254: Elevator Capture (Primary)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE OFF
On PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE ON
Slow Flash PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE FAST FLASH
Open Tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE DISABLE TROUBLE T

page 378 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 254: Elevator Capture (Primary)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Offauto Tbl PRI ELEVATOR CAPTURE MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling primary floor elevator capture.

20.9.2 ALTERN
0

Table 255: Elevator Capture (Alternate)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE OFF
On ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE ON
Slow Flash ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE FAST FLASH
Open Tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl ALT ELEVATOR CAPTURE MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling alternate floor elevator capture.

20.9.21 AHUR
Table 256: AHU On/Off (Single Relay Control)
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off AHU RELAY OFF
On AHU RELAY ON
Slow Flash AHU RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash AHU RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl AHU RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl AHU RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl AHU RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl AHU RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling an AHU circuit for ON/OFF control. Uses one relay to perform both
functions.

20.9.2 AHUO
2

Table 257: AHU On Relay (Dual Relay Control)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off AHU ON RELAY OFF
On AHU ON RELAY ON
Slow Flash AHU ON RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash AHU ON RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl AHU ON RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl AHU ON RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl AHU ON RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl AHU ON RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling only the ON status of an AHU.

page 379 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.9.2 AHUF
3

Table 258: AHU Off Relay (Dual Relay Control)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off AHU OFF RELAY OFF
On AHU OFF RELAY ON
Slow Flash AHU OFF RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash AHU OFF RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl AHU OFF RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl AHU OFF RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl AHU OFF RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl AHU OFF RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling only the OFF status of an AHU.

20.9.2 CPRESS
4

Table 259: Pressurization Control (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off PRESSURIZATION OFF
On PRESSURIZATION ON
Slow Flash PRESSURIZATION SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash PRESSURIZATION FAST FLASH
Open Tbl PRESSURIZATION OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl PRESSURIZATION SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl PRESSURIZATION DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl PRESSURIZATION MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling the pressurization sequence in a smoke control application.

20.9.2 CEXHAUS
5

Table 260: Exhaust Control (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off EXHAUST OFF
On EXHAUST ON
Slow Flash EXHAUST SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash EXHAUST FAST FLASH
Open Tbl EXHAUST OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl EXHAUST SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl EXHAUST DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl EXHAUST MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling the exhaust sequence in a smoke control application.

20.9.2 CDAMPER
6

Table 261: Damper Control (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off DAMPER CONTROL OFF
On DAMPER CONTROL ON

page 380 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 261: Damper Control (On/Off)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Slow Flash DAMPER CONTROL SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash DAMPER CONTROL FAST FLASH
Open Tbl DAMPER CONTROL OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl DAMPER CONTROL SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl DAMPER CONTROL DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl DAMPER CONTROL MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output controlling damper in a smoke control application.

20.9.2 SRELAY
7

Table 262: Alarm Relay (On Until Silence)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off ALARM RELAY OFF
On ALARM RELAY ON
Slow Flash ALARM RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash ALARM RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl ALARM RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl ALARM RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl ALARM RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl ALARM RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output that is ON until an alarm silence occurs.

20.9.2 RRELAY
8

Table 263: Alarm Relay (On Until Reset)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off ALARM RELAY OFF
On ALARM RELAY ON
Slow Flash ALARM RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash ALARM RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl ALARM RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl ALARM RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl ALARM RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl ALARM RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is an output, which is ON until an alarm silence occurs.

20.9.2 TRELAY
9

Table 264: Trouble/Supervisory Relay (On Until Clear)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off TROUBLE RELAY OFF
On TROUBLE RELAY ON
Slow Flash TROUBLE RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash TROUBLE RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl TROUBLE RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl TROUBLE RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl TROUBLE RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T

page 381 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 264: Trouble/Supervisory Relay (On Until Clear)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Offauto Tbl TROUBLE RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a trouble/supervisory output, which is ON until the condition clears.

20.9.3 BRELAY
0

Table 265: Trouble/Supervisory Bell Relay (On Until Acknowledged)

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off TROUBLE RELAY OFF
On TROUBLE RELAY ON
Slow Flash TROUBLE RELAY SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash TROUBLE RELAY FAST FLASH
Open Tbl TROUBLE RELAY OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl TROUBLE RELAY SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl TROUBLE RELAY DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl TROUBLE RELAY MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Used to indicate the point is a trouble/supervisory output, which is ON until acknowledged.

20.9.31 SHAFT
Table 266: Elevator Shaft Shutdown
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off SHAFT OFF
On SHAFT ON
Slow Flash SHAFT SLOW FLASH
Fast Flash SHAFT FAST FLASH
Open Tbl SHAFT OPEN CKT TROUBLE T
Shorted Tbl SHAFT SHORT CKT TROUBLE T
Disable Tbl SHAFT DISABLE TROUBLE T
Offauto Tbl SHAFT MANUAL OVERRIDE TROUBLE T
Description: Elevator shaft shutdown point type. Output point connects to elevator control that shuts down elevator.

20.10 Digital pseudo point types

20.10.1 UTILITY
Table 267: Digital Utility Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off UTILITY POINT OFF
On UTILITY POINT ON
Description:

20.10.2 FIRE
Table 268: Digital Fire Alarm Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off FIRE ALARM POINT NORMAL
On FIRE ALARM POINT ABNORMAL F
Description:

page 382 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.10.3 TROUBLE
Table 269: Digital Trouble Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off TROUBLE POINT NORMAL
On TROUBLE POINT ABNORMAL T
Description:

20.10. SUPERVIS
4

Table 270: Digital Supervisory Point

Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off SUPERVISORY POINT NORMAL
On SUPERVISORY POINT ABNORMAL S
Description:

20.10.5 PRI2
Table 271: Digital Priority 2 Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off PRIORITY 2 POINT NORMAL
On PRIORITY 2 POINT ABNORMAL A
Description:

20.11 Analog pseudo point types

20.11.1 TIMER
Table 272: Analog Timer Pseudo Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off VALUE = 0 OFF
On VALUE = XXX ON
Description:

20.11.2 COUNTER
Table 273: Analog Counter Pseudo Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off VALUE = 0 OFF
On VALUE = XXX ON
Description:

20.11.3 ANALOG
Table 274: Analog Pseudo Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Off VALUE = 0 OFF
On VALUE = XXX ON
Description:

page 383 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

20.12 List pseudo point types

Table 275: List Pseudo Point
Circuit Status LCD Readout LED
Empty LIST POINT EMPTY LIST
Off LIST POINT OFF
On LIST POINT ON
Description:

page 384 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

21 Appendix B LED/Switch Modes

This appendix is a reference for all LED and Switch modes used on the ES Panel.

21.1 Switch modes

Table 276: Switch modes
Mode Description
AS ACK/Silence Switch. This mode requires no reference address. A switch with this mode functions in the
following manner. UP/Down: Perform Signal Silence/Alarm Acknowledgement CTR: No operation
DE Allows you to change the enable/disable state of the referenced point. A switch with this mode functions in
the following manner. UP: Disable CTR: No Operation Down: Enable
DISARM Disarm/Arm. Allows you to arm or disarm a security device. A switch with this mode functions in the
following manner. UP: Disarm CTR: No Operation Down: Arm
HOA1 Single Relay HOA Switch. Allows you to control the state of the referenced point. A switch with this mode
functions in the following manner. Use this mode with older switch modules. UP: ON CTR: Automatic
Operation Down: OFF Up turns the reference point on and generates a manual override trouble. Down
turns the referenced point off and generates a manual override trouble. The center position returns the
referenced point to automatic operation.
HOA1ON These modes are used with the newer switch modules. Implementing this mode on a newer switch module
HOA1OFF requires three adjacent switches. Switch 1.Turns on the referenced point and generates a manual override
HOA1AUTO trouble. Switch 2.Turns off the reference point and generates a manual override trouble. Switch 3.Automatic
operation.
HOA2 Dual Relay HOA Switch. Up turns the reference point on and turns point whose address is referenced point
plus one off. This generates a manual override trouble. Down turns the referenced point off and turns the
point whose address is referenced point plus one on. This generates a manual override trouble. The center
position returns the referenced point to automatic operation.
HOA2ON HOA2OFF Dual Relay HOA Center Pushbutton. Switch 1.Turns on the referenced point and turns off the point whose
HOA2AUTO address is reference point plus one. Generates a manual override trouble. Switch 2.Turns off the reference
point and turns on the point whose address is reference point plus one. Generates a manual override
trouble. Switch 3.Automatic operation.
LFACK Local Fire Acknowledge. This mode is typically used for a transponder. The acknowledgement action has
no effect at the panel to which the transponder is wired, or on other transponders. This mode requires
no reference address. A switch with this mode functions in the following manner. UP/Down: Local Fire
Acknowledge CTR: No operation
LLACK Up/Down acknowledges only points local (connected to) the annunciator. Center position has no operation.
LOACK Local Manual Override Acknowledge. This mode is typically used for a transponder. The acknowledgement
action has no effect at the panel to which the transponder is wired, or on other transponders. This mode
requires no reference address. A switch with this mode functions in the following manner. UP/Down: Local
Manual Override Acknowledge CTR: No operation
LP2ACK Up/Down acknowledges only points local (connected to) the annunciator. Center position has no operation.
LSACK Local Supervisory Acknowledge. This mode is typically used for a transponder. The acknowledgement action
has no effect on devices attached to other transponders. This mode requires no reference address. A
switch with this mode functions in the following manner. UP/Down: Local Supervisory Acknowledge CTR: No
operation
LSR Performs a system reset. A switch with this mode functions in the following manner. UP/Down: System
Reset CTR: No operation
LSS Performs a system silence. A switch with this mode functions in the following manner. UP/Down: System
Silence CTR: No operation
LTACK Local Trouble Acknowledge. This mode is typically used for a transponder. The acknowledgement action
has no effect at the panel to which the transponder is wired, or on other transponders. This mode requires
no reference address. A switch with this mode functions in the following manner. UP/Down: Local Trouble
Acknowledge CTR: No operation
LTEST Performs a lamp test on the referenced point.
OFF Up/Down turns the referenced point off.
ONOFF Programs the system to turn the referenced point on when the switch enters an open, short, or limited
state, and to turn the point off when the switch is in a normal state.
PBH Programs the system to turn a referenced point on and hold it on when the switch enters a short, open, or
current limited state. The point must be turned off by custom control or system reset.
PBT This mode allows the referenced point to track the state of the switch. The point turns on if the switch is
active (open/short/limited) and turns off if the switch is not active (normal).

page 385 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 276: Switch modes

Mode Description
SMPL Select this mode if the switch will be used to start the execution of an SMPL program.
TAKECTL The actual functionality of the way privileges are assigned as well as which annunciator has the ability to lock
others out is meant to be field-programmable using custom control and point priorities. The basic default
functionality used on systems will be either:
• In-control off – where the system functions as it does today. An in-control pseudo is available on
all annunciators that can be annunciated. When a user-programmable switch on an Annunciator is
activated, the system automatically turns the in-control pseudo on for that annunciator and turns all
other in-control pseudo points off.
• In-control on – all user actions from any annunciator that is not in-control are ignored by the system.
In-control must be taken before any other user action is accepted. A new mode that allows a switch to
bypass the in-control key lockout function so something can be used to take control will be provided
for switches (TAKECTL).
If in-control operation is “on”, each annunciator in the system should have one switch programmed
with this new TAKECTL mode. Once this is done, the standard in-control functionality is in place. Any
operator can activate this new “take control” switch, and then operate the other switches on that
annunciator while locking out all other annunciators until their “take control” switches are pressed.
By default, an annunciator that has become “in-control” will remain in-control forever until another
annunciator “takes” control.
TDE Programs the system to toggle (reverse) the disable/enable state of the referenced point when the switch
enters an open, short, or current limited state.
TDISARM Up/Down toggles the arm/disarm state of the point. Center has no operation.
TOF Programs the system to toggle (reverse) the ON/OFF state of the point when the switch enters a short,
open, or current limited state.

21.2 LED modes

Mode Meaning
ABALERT An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. Reference point has a current limited condition and requires acknowledgement.
• On. Reference point with current limited condition has been acknowledged.
• Fast. Reference point has cleared, current-limited condition requiring ackwledgement.
• Off. Reference point is in a normal state.
ABNORM LED illuminates when the state of the referenced control point is in an abnormal state.
ALL LED illuminates when all of the points associated with the reference point are on. This is typically for use
with a list of points.
COFF LED illuminates when the state of the referenced control point is off.
CON LED illuminates when the state of the referenced control point is on.
DISABLE LED illuminates when the state of the REF ADDR (point) is DISABLED.
DISARMD LED illuminates when the state of the referenced point is disarmed.
FIRE LED illuminates when the state of the REF ADDR (point) goes into ALARM
HOA2T An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. One or both points are in a trouble state and require acknowledgement.
• On. At least one point has been acknowledged.
• Fast. One or both points are in a cleared state and require acknowledgement.
• Off. Both points are in a normal state.
LED LED tracks the state of another LED (which is the reference point). The LED illuminates when the other LED
(ref. Point) is on and goes off when the other LED is off.
LF LED illuminates when the ALARM ACK button on the panel is pushed.
LL LED illuminates when a local alert with acknowledge occurs.
LO LED illuminates when a manual override occurs.
LP2 LED illuminates when a Priority 2 acknowledge occurs.
LS LED illuminates when the SUPV ACK button on the panel is pushed.
LT LED illuminates when the TROUBLE ACK button on the panel is pushed.
NORMAL LED illuminates when the state of the REF ADDR (point) is in the normal state.
OFF LED illuminates when the state of the REF ADDR (point) is OFF.

page 386 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Mode Meaning
ON LED illuminates when the state of the REF ADDR (point) is ON
OPEN LED illuminates when the state of the REF ADDR (point) is open.
PALERT An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. A point with a Primary/On state requires acknowledgement.
• On. Point with Primary/On state has been acknowledged.
• Fast. Cleared, Primary/On state requires acknowledgement.
• Off. Point in a normal state.
PIEZO Piezo driver output.
PRI2ALM LED illuminates when a priority 2 alarm occurs.
SALERT An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. A point with a supervisory condition requires acknowledgement.
• On. Point with supervisory has been acknowledged.
• Fast. Cleared, supervisory requires acknowledgement.
• Off. Point in a normal state.
SHALERT An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. A point with a short requires acknowledgement.
• On. Point with short has been acknowledged.
• Fast. Cleared, short state requires acknowledgement.
• Off. Point in a normal state.
SHORT LED illuminates when the referenced point is in a short state.
SMPL LED illuminates when the state of a Custom Control equation(s) is TRUE.
SUPERV An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. A point with a supervisory condition requires acknowledgement.
• On. Point with supervisory has been acknowledged.
• Fast. Cleared, supervisory requires acknowledgement.
• Off. Point in a normal state.
TRISTAT LED illuminates when the point is in an abnormal/current limited state.
TROUBLE An LED with this mode has four states:
• Slow. A point with a trouble condition requires acknowledgement.
• On. Point with trouble has been acknowledged.
• Fast. Cleared, trouble requires acknowledgement.
• Off. Point in a normal state.

page 387 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

21.3 High-level switch / LED modes

Table 277: High-level switch / LED modes
Mode Meaning
C Control Point On/Off. The up position of the switch turns the control point on and illuminates the LED adjacent
to the switch. The down position turns the point and LED off. The center position has no operation. This mode
requires the reference address of a control point.
CB Control Point Bypass. The up position of the switch bypasses the control point and illuminates the LED adjacent to
the switch. The down position returns the point to automatic operation and turns the LED off. The center position
has no operation. This mode requires the reference address of the control point.
CD City Disconnect. The up position of the switch disconnects the city circuit and illuminates the LED adjacent to the
switch. The down position reconnects the city circuit and turns the LED off. The center position has no operation.
This mode does not require a reference address.
DB Door Holder Bypass. The up position of the switch bypasses the FACP’s door holders (leaving them in their current
state) and illuminates the LED adjacent to the switch. The down position returns the door holders to automatic
operation and turns the LED off. The center position has no operation. This mode does not require a reference
address.
EB Elevator Bypass. The up position of the switch bypasses the FACP’s elevator control programming and illuminates
the LED adjacent to the switch. The down position returns the elevators to automatic operation and turns the LED
off. The center position has no operation. This mode does not require a reference address.
F Control with Feedback. The up position of the switch turns the control point on and the LED tracks the state of
the feedback point. The down position of the switch turns the control point off and the LED tracks the state of the
feedback point. The center position has no operation. The mode requires a reference point.
FACK Fire Alarm Acknowledge. The up or down position of the switch acknowledges the active alarm. The LED turns on
steady and turns off after a system reset.
FT Control Toggle with Feedback. The up and down positions of the switch toggle the state of the control point and
the LED tracks the feedback point.
LACK Local Acknowledge. The up or down position of the switch acknowledges all monitor points connected to the
annunciator. The LED turns on steady and turns off after a system reset.
LT Lamp Test. The up or down position of the switch performs a lamp test on all adjacent LEDs.
NONE No Operation Specified (SMPL). The operation of the switch and LED are under control of SMPL.
OACK Override Acknowledge. The up or down position of the switch acknowledges manual override troubles and
illuminates the adjacent LED. The LED turns off when a system reset is performed.
SACK Supervisory Acknowledge. The up or down position of the switch acknowledges supervisories and illuminates the
adjacent LED. The LED turns off when a system reset is performed.
SR System Reset. The up or down position of the switch performs a system reset. The adjacent LED illuminates for
the duration of the reset.
SS System Silence. The up or down position of the switch performs a system silence and illuminates the adjacent
LED. The LED turns off when a system reset is performed.
TACK Trouble Acknowledge. The up or down position of the switch acknowledges troubles and illuminates the adjacent
LED. The LED turns off when a system reset is performed.
A1LOCAL – A8LOCAL Turn local speaker onto the channel specified by the prefix (i.e., to turn the local speaker onto channel one, use
A1LOCAL). This allows an operator to hear the messages playing on a specific channel.
AALERT Alert Tone/Message. Associate this mode with a switch or button to allow the operator to manually play the alert
message.
ACLEAR All Clear Message. Associate this mode with a switch or button to allow the operator to manually play the all clear
message.
ADRILL Drill Message. Associate this mode with a switch or button to allow the operator to manually play the drill
message.
AEVAC Evac Message. Associate this mode with a switch or button to allow the operator to manually play the evac
message.
ALLMSGS All the messages. Associate this mode with a switch or button to allow the operator to manually start the playing
of all pre-programmed messages (e.g., Evac Channel 1, Alert Channel 2, etc.)
AMINUS Turns on all speakers that are currently off onto the Talk channel.
AOVERID Prevents default operation of the audio subsystem. Use this mode if you are going to be troubleshooting or
testing the system, so that you do not accidentally play messages on the audio system.
APHONE Map the firefighter’s phone to the audio system so that you can page via the phone.
ASCHN1 – ASCHN8 Turns all the speakers onto the specified channel (i.e, if the switch’s mode is set to ASCHN1, all speakers will be
switched to channel 1 when the switch is activated).
ASEVAC Plays the EVAC message and turns all speakers onto the EVAC channel.

page 388 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 277: High-level switch / LED modes

Mode Meaning
ASTALK Turns all speakers onto the TALK channel.
AUX1 Plays the AUX1 message, which is programmed via the audio tool.
AUX2 Plays the AUX2 message, which is programmed via the audio tool.
CAALRT Starts the alert message playing. Speakers must be manually selected when this mode is used. Use this mode for
Canadian Audio jobs.
CHN1 – CHN8 Routes the speakers specified in the list reference address to the specified channel.
CT Toggles the referenced point on and off. For example if the referenced point is on, pressing the switch associated
with this mode turns the point off.
FT Toggles the referenced point on and off, and tracks whether the associated feedback point is on or off. (The status
of the feedback point is annunciated using the LED linked to the switch.)
ME Starts the evacuation message and triggers a general alarm condition.
P Phone Circuit Control. Allows the operator to answer or place a firefighter’s phone circuit on hold. Use with toggle
switches.
PS Phone Silence. Allows the operator to silence the piezo associated with an incoming phone call.
TCTALK All Talk – 1, 2, 3 Channel. Toggles routing the microphone to talk to all channels.
TP Phone Circuit Control. Allows the operator to answer or place a firefighter’s phone circuit on hold. Use with
pushbutton switches.
TPAGE All Page – 1, 2, 3 Channel. Toggles routing the microphone to talk to the list of speakers specified via the reference
address.

page 389 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

22 Appendix C ULC programming requirements (Canadian)

This appendix discusses the programming operations that must be met to comply with Underwriter's Laboratory of Canada (ULC)
standards.

22.1 Common earth fault ground indication

This application monitors a system pseudo (A112) that counts the number of ground faults that occur on the system. Each time this
counter increments when a ground fault occurs, and a yellow LED on the operator interface panel illuminates.

22.1.1 Step 1. Open CPU Card Properties Dialog

1. Click the Hardware tab and expand the Unit 0, Box 1, Bay 1 icons to display the CPU Card, as shown in Figure 288.

Figure 288: Location of CPU Card icon

2. Right-click the CPU card icon, it is highlighted in the previous figure, and click Properties. When the CPU card properties dialog
appears, click the Display tab and click the Display check box, see the following example:

Figure 289: CPU card properties

page 390 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

22.1.2 Step 2. Program the LED

1. Select one of the multicolor LEDs to program, 0-5-11, 0-5-12, or 0-5-13.
2. In the Point Type list box, select LEDYELLOW.
3. In the Mode list, select ON.
4. Enter A112 in the Reference Address field.

Figure 290: Programming the Common Ground Fault LED

22.2 Programming the automatic alarm signal timer

Audio-capable ULC panels use the following two-stage alarm notification process:
• Stage 1. When a fire alarm occurs, the system initiates a timer, illuminates the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Running LED, and
plays the alert message while the timer counts down. You can configure the duration of the timer to between 0 and 300 seconds (5
minutes).
• Stage 2. When the timer expires, the alert message stops and the audio system plays the evacuation message.
To program the two-stage alarm notification process for an audio system, you must complete the following steps:
1. Create a custom control equation, and define the length of the automatic alarm signal as 300 seconds. See Step 1. Initializing
the timer for information about doing this.
2. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Running LED. This is a green LED that illuminates when the automatic alarm
signal is running.
3. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel switch. Use this switch to cancel the alarm condition at any time, while the timer
is running.
4. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel Switch LED. This LED illuminates when you press the Automatic Alarm Signal
Cancel switch.

page 391 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

22.2.1 Step 1. Initializing the timer

This section describes programming analog pseudo point A102, First Stage Timer Setpoint. This analog point stores the initial value for
the countdown timer. The input side of the equation evaluates the state of A34, the System Startup Pulse Timer. When A34 turns ON,
the startup sequence of the panel activates, the output side of the equation executes, initializing the value of analog pseudo A102 to 300
seconds.
To initialize the timer, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Custom Control tab.
2. Right-click either Program 6 - Optional User Program or Program 7 - Optional User Program. When the menu appears,
click Add Equation.
3. Position the cursor to the right of the line that reads [INPUTS], and click once. Click Add. The Custom Control Wizard appears.
Specify the input side of the equation as follows:
- In the Select Opcodes Inputs list, select Point Status and click Next.
- The CC Point Qualifier dialog box asks you for an input operator, AND, OR, or NOT, which is not used in this case. Click Next.
- In the Select Opcodes Inputs, select ON and click Next.
- Enter A34 in the Point Name text field, and click Finish.
4. Position the cursor to the right of the line that reads [OUTPUTS], and click once. Click Add. Specify the output side of the
equation as follows:
- In the Select Opcodes Inputs list, select Set Analog Values and click Next.
- In the Select Type dialog box, click Constant, and click Next.
- In the Value field, enter the value 300 and click Next.
- In the Select Qualifier list, select Secs and click Next.
- Enter A102 in the Point Name text field, and click Finish.

Figure 291: Programming the analog pseudo A102

22.2.2 Step 2. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Running LED
The Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Running LED illuminates when an alarm occurs.
To program the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Running LED, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab and expand the Unit 0, Box 1, and Bay 1 icons to display the CPU Card, see Figure 292.
2. Right-click the CPU card icon, and click Properties. When the CPU card properties dialog appears, click the Display tab, and click
the Display check box.
3. Click LED 13 to highlight it. This is the third LED down on the front panel interface.
4. In the Mode list, select ON.
5. Enter A101 in the Reference Address field.
6. In the Point Type list, select LEDGREEN.
7. You must enter Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Active in the Custom Label field.

22.2.3 Step 3. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel switch

Use the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel switch to cancel the alarm condition at any time when the timer is counting down, such as
when the alert message is playing. When the timer expires and the evacuation message begins to play, the cancel switch has no effect and
the operator must use the Alarm Silence key to silence the evacuation message.
To program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel switch, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab, and expand the expand the Unit 0, Box 1, and Bay 1 icons to display the CPU card, see Figure 292.
2. Right-click the CPU card icon and click Properties. When the CPU card properties dialog appears, click the Display tab and click
the Display check box.

page 392 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 292: CPU card properties

3. Click the entry for Switch 1, in Figure 292 this is 0-5-1.
4. In the Mode list, select TOF. This mode toggles the state of the switch so that if the switch is on, pressing the it again turns the
switch off.
Note: You must label the switch Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel on the control unit.

22.2.4 Step 4. Program the Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel LED

The Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel LED illuminates when you press the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer Cancel switch. This LED
indicates that the Automatic Alarm Signal Timer was manually canceled.
To program this LED, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab, and expand the Unit 0, Box 1, Bay 1 icons to display the CPU Card.
2. Right-click the CPU card icon, and click Properties.
3. Click the Display tab when the CPU card properties dialog appears, and click the Display check box.
4. Select one of the multicolor LEDs to program, 0-5-11, 0-5-12, or 0-5-13.
5. In the Mode list, select ON.
6. Enter P436 in the Reference Address field.
7. In the Point Type list, select LEDYELLOW.
8. You must enter Automatic Alarm Signal Canceled in the Custom Label field.
9. Click OK to close the dialog.

22.3 Simultaneous alarm display

ULC requires every fire panel to have the capabilities to visually display system status by means of specific indicators for each zone.
All status changes must clearly indicate that the information is an Alarm (ALM), Supervisory (SUP), Trouble (TBL), or Monitoring (MON).
Implementing this on the ES Panel is a three-step process, as follows:
Note: The 4010ES has a single 48 pluggable LED matrix installed in the base panel of some systems.

• If necessary on the 4100ES only, install a legacy 4100-0404 LED/Switch Display Card (8 Switches and 16 Red/Yellow LEDs) and a 64/64
LED Switch Controller in the same cabinet as the system operator display and controls. The LED Display Card has 8 switches and 16
pairs of LEDs (one yellow and one red), used to annunciate the alarm or trouble status for 16 zones. On the display card, clearly label
each pair of the LEDs with its associated zone name. See Specifying hardware components of this manual for information about
adding this card to the job.
• Create annunciation zone lists. Divide the initiating devices connected to the panel into physical areas, by floor, by department, and so
on. Create a user-defined list for each zone and, include all of the initiating devices for the zone in the list. See Creating annunciation
zone lists for information about this.

page 393 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Note: Annunciation zone lists are necessary only when you are using addressable devices. If you are using hardwired monitor zones, you
do not need to create annunciation zone lists.

• Program LED modes and reference addresses. This step associates the address of the zone list with the LED, and the LED mode.

22.3.1 Creating annunciation zone lists

To create the annunciation zone lists, which are the lists containing the initiating devices for each zone, complete the following steps:
1. Click the List tab in the main ES Panel Programmer window.
2. Right-click anywhere in the List window. A menu appears, click Add List. A TagList window similar to the following, appears:

Figure 293: TagList

3. In the TagList window, select the points to add to the annunciation zone list as follows:

- Non-adjacent points: If the points required for the zone are not adjacent to one another, hold down the Control key, and then click
each point you want to select. When all of the non-adjacent points are selected, press the Space key to select and add them to the
annunciation zone list. A >> symbol appears to the left of each point to indicate that it is selected.
- A range of adjacent points: If the points required for the zone are adjacent to one another in the tag list, highlight the first point
then hold down the Control key and use the Up or Down arrow key to highlight all of the points. Press the Space key to select the
points and add them to the annunciation zone list.
4. In the TagList window, click OK.
5. In the dialog box that appears, enter a text name that uniquely identifies the zone, such as Floor1, Zone1, and so on, and click
OK. The list is added to the List window.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each annunciation zone list.

22.3.2 Programming the address and mode for each LED

To associate each pair of LEDs with the correct mode and reference address, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab, and locate the icon for the 4100-0402 Display Card. Right-click, and select Properties. The properties
dialog for the card appears. Click the Point Editing tab, and a window similar to the following appears:

page 394 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 294: Display card properties

2. Complete the following steps for each zone:
- In the Point Type list, select LEDRED.
- In the Mode list, select FIRE.
- In the Reference Address field, enter the identifier for one of the lists associated with a zone.
- Select the yellow LED that is paired with the red LED you selected above.
- In the Mode list, select TROUBLE.
- In the Reference Address field, enter the identifier for the list specified above.
The effect of this programming is that the red LED illuminates if any of the points in the annunciation zone list enter an alarm state.
Likewise the yellow LED illuminates, if any of the points within the annunciation zone list enter a trouble state.

22.3.3 Programming a Lamp Test switch

A lamp test feature is accessible using a button in the Main Menu . You can also program a User-Defined button to perform this function.
You must program the first switch on the legacy 4100-0404 display card to perform a lamp test on the LEDs used for simultaneous alarm
display. To do this, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab. Expand the unit, box, and bay icons containing the 4100-0404 display card.
2. Double-click the display card icon. Click the Point Editing tab.
3. Click the first switch in the list. In the Mode list, select LTEST. A reference address is not required. When this switch is turned on,
it performs a lamp test on the LEDs located on the units 4100-0404 display card.
4. Click Apply and click OK.

page 395 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 295: LED/Switch card properties

22.4 Manual evacuation

The purpose of the Manual Evacuation key is to initiate an alarm at the panel, and to resound notification appliances after they have
been silenced.

22.4.1 Programming the Manual Evacuation Key

See Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs for information about programming the function key. In addition to the instructions
outlined in Programming non-audio points, complete the following steps:
• In the Reference Address list, enter digital pseudo point P35 (128-35), labeled Manual Evacuation Switch Input, see Figure 296.
• You must label the key on the panel Manual Evacuation, or Alarm Signal ON. Use the label insert provided.
• Use the ON mode to program the associated LED to P48

page 396 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 296: Manual Evacuation Switch, Digital Pseudo Point P35

22.5 Setting the alarm silence/reset inhibit timer

The alarm silence/reset inhibit timer system option disables the Alarm Silence and System Reset keys for a user-definable duration of
between 1 and 60 seconds. The timer is only activated by the first alarm, subsequent alarms do not reset the timer.
Note: The default setting is not enabled. This option must be enabled for ULC jobs.

22.5.1 Enabling the alarm silence/reset inhibit timer

To enable the alarm silence/reset inhibit timer, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the System Options sub-tab.
3. Click the Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit check box. Specify the timer value in the Seconds box to the right of the Alarm Silence/
Reset Inhibit check box.

22.5.2 Programming the Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit LED

The Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit LED turns on when an alarm is received, and turns off when the timer expires. Its purpose is to indicate
to the operator that the Alarm Silence and System Reset keys are temporarily disabled.
To program the Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit LED, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab and expand the Unit 0, Box 1, and the Bay 1 icons to display the CPU Card.
2. Right click the CPU card icon and click Properties. When the CPU card properties dialog appears, click the Display tab, and click
the Display check box.
3. Select one of the multicolor LEDs, 0-5-11, 0-5-12, or 0-5-13, to program.
4. Click the Mode list, and select ON.
5. Enter A22 in the Reference Address field.
6. In the Point Type list, select LEDYELLOW.
7. Enter a label for the LED in the Custom Label field, for example, Silence Inhibit Timer activated.

22.6 Enabling the low battery cutout option

Low Battery Cutout is a programmable option for the ES-PS, EPS, SPS, TPS, RPS, XPS, or MSS Power Supplies. The Low Battery Cutout
option disconnects a battery from the panel when the voltage is approximately 18 VDC.
Note: THIS OPTION MUST BE SELECTED FOR ALL ULC INSTALLATIONS.

page 397 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Note: There is no separate Canadian power supply assembly for the EPS, ES-PS, ES-XPS, ESS, or MSS. See appropriate installation
instructions for the proper switch or jumper configuration.

22.6.1 Enabling depleted battery cutout

Access the depleted battery cutout option using the Data Entry tab in the properties dialog of the power supply. To do this, complete the
following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab, and expand the unit, box, and bay combination containing the power supply.
2. Click the Data Entry tab to access the properties dialog of the power supply.
3. Click Depleted Battery Cutout, and click Apply.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
5. Repeat these steps for every ES-PS, ES-XPS, ESS, EPS, SPS, TPS, RPS, XPS, or MSS in the system.

22.7 The alarm cutout timer

You can use the alarm cutout timer to set a duration of up to 10 minutes, that specifies how long signals sound following an alarm. For
example, with this option set at two minutes, building signals sound for two minutes and then automatically stop. After the signals stop,
the alarm condition remains active at the panel.
Note: The default setting is not enabled. This option must be enabled for ULC jobs.

22.7.1 Enabling the alarm cutout timer

To enable the alarm cutout timer, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the System Options sub-tab.
3. Click the Alarm Cutout Timer check box. Specify the timer value in the Seconds box to the right of the Alarm Cutout Timer
check box.

22.7.2 Setting the Alarm Cutout Timer LED

ULC applications require a specific indication when the alarm cutout timer runs out. To enable this indication, complete the following steps:
1. Create a digital pseudo point that tracks when the alarm cutout timer has expired, see the example in Figure 297.

Figure 297: A digital pseudo point to indicate that the alarm cutout timer has expired
2. Create a custom control equation that turns on the Alarm Cutout Timer Expired pseudo point, see the following example:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A26|ANALOG|TIMER|FIRE ALARM CUTOUT SILENCE PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P600|DIGITAL|UTILTIY|ALARM CUTOUT TIMER EXPIRED
[END OUTPUTS]
3. Create a custom control equation that turns off the Alarm Cutout timer Expired pseudo point, see the following example:
[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
A78|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALARM SILENCE/ALARM CUTOUT PSEUDO
[END INPUTS]

page 398 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
p600|DIGITAL|UTILITY|ALARM CUTOUT TIMER EXPIRED
[END OUTPUTS]
4. Associate an LED with the pseudo points created. See Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs on page Programming
function keys, switches, and LEDs of this manual for information about programming the LED.
5. In the LED Properties dialog box, you must select ON in the Mode list.
6. In the Point Type list, select LEDYELLOW.

22.8 Degraded and local mode indication

If you configure the system to have degraded mode operation, each control unit must have indicators for degrade mode capability. If you
configure the system to have local mode operation, each control unit must have indicators for stand alone capability.

22.8.1 Procedure for degraded network operation

For information about programming the LEDs, see Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs on pageProgramming function keys,
switches, and LEDs of this manual. The LEDs for degraded mode must be yellow, and must only illuminate when the system is in degraded
mode. To indicate that the network is operating in degraded mode, complete the following steps:
1. In the Properties dialog box, click the Point Type list, and select LEDYELLOW.
2. Enter P225 in the Reference Address field.

22.8.2 Procedure for local mode operation

To indicate that the control unit is operating in local mode, complete the following steps:
1. Create a digital pseudo point that tracks when the control unit is operating in local mode. Using pseudo point P600, for example:

Figure 298: Pseudo point P600 to indicate local mode operation

2. Create a custom control equation, that uses the digital pseudo point you created, to track list L107. In the Custom label field,
enter ENTER LOCAL MODE ON DATA NOT AVAILABLE. List L107 must have only one point in the list, which is a point on the
master node in a networked system. Use this list when there is a single node on the network that is responsible for controlling
the speakers of this system. Do not use this list on systems with multiple VCCs. Using the P600 pseudo point example, the
following equation illustrates the default custom control equation 0-3. In this example, the pseudo point P600 turns on only
when it loses communication with the master node, the system is configured as a network, and list L107 is not empty:
[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS DATA_N/A
L107|LIST|DPSEUDO|ENTER LOCAL MODE ON DATA NOT AVAILABLE
AND STATUS ON
P213|DIGITAL|UTILITY| NETWORK CARD CONFIGURED
AND NOT STATUS EMPTY
L107|LIST|DPSEUDO|ENTER LOCAL MODE ON DATA NOT AVAILABLE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P600|DIGITAL|UTILITY|OPERATING IN LOCAL MODE
[END OUTPUTS]
3. Associate an LED with the digital pseudo point you created to track list L107. The LED must be yellow, and must illuminate only
when the system is in local mode.
4. In the Properties dialog box, enter the Reference Address of the digital pseudo point, in this example P600.

page 399 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

5. In the Mode list, select ON.

6. In the Reference Label field, enter OPERATING IN LOCAL MODE.
7. In the Point Type list, select LEDYELLOW.

22.9 Releasing specific controls and indications

To comply with ULC standards when using the 4100ES or 4010ES for releasing service, you must program a Pre-Discharge LED, a
Discharge LED, and the abort switches that cause a system trouble when activated. UL864 requires a system supervisory, which is the
default. You may need to program a Releasing Service Signal Silence button that has an associated yellow LED. If the system includes
abort switches, you must program an Abort Trouble LED.
Note: You may require additional LED modules if the number of LEDs required for the releasing service applications exceeds the available
LEDs on the annunciator.
Note: If there are multiple hazard areas, repeat the steps outlined in Programming the Pre-Discharge LED for each hazard area. Label
the provided inserts for the panel appropriately, identifying the function and the hazard zone that the LED refers to.

22.9.1 Programming the Pre-Discharge LED

You must program a Pre-Discharge LED for every hazard area. This LED must be red. The Pre-Discharge LED activates whenever the
system is in the pre-discharge state. The LED switches OFF when the system discharge is complete.

Figure 299: Hazard area lists in the Suppression Release Wizard

Use the following example as a guide to programming the Pre-Discharge LED:
1. Click the Custom Control tab, and click the Suppression Release Wizard sub-tab.
2. Double-click the hazard area to launch the Suppression Release Wizard.
3. Make a note of the list number of the Manual Release Points and Automatic Release Points hardware area lists, see Figure
299.
4. Program an available digital pseudo point, P720 in the following example, to turn on whenever a point is active in the Manual
Release Points and Automatic Release Points lists:
[INPUTS]
STATUS DETECT
L268|LIST|MONITOR|SupRel Manual Rel Points-CrossZone
OR STATUS DETECT
L269|LIST|MONITOR|SupRel Manual Rel Points-CrossZone
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PRE-DISCHARGE ACTIVE
[END OUTPUTS]
5. Write an equation to turn off the LED when the hazard zone releases:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
L274|LIST|CONTROL|SupRel Dump Points-CrossZone

page 400 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PRE-DISCHARGE ACTIVE
[END OUTPUTS]
6. Write an equation to turn off the LED when the hazard zone releases:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
L274|LIST|CONTROL|SupRel Dump Points-CrossZone
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PRE-DISCHARGE ACTIVE
[END OUTPUTS]
7. Write an equation to turn off the digital pseudo point during the system start up, or when the system is reset:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A21|ANALOG|TIMER|SYSTEM RESET PULSE TIMER
OR STATUS ON
A34|ANALOG|TIMER|SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PRE-DISCHARGE ACTIVE
[END OUTPUTS]
8. Click the Hardware tab.
9. To select an available red LED from either the panel or the LED module, select LEDRED in the LED point type list.
10. In the Mode list, select ON.
11. In the Reference Address field, enter the list number that you noted for the Manual Release Points or the Automatic
Release Points hardware area lists.

22.9.2 Programming the Discharge LED

You must program a Discharge LED for every hazard area. This LED must be red. The Discharge LED activates when the solenoid is
activated, and the suppression release device is in the release state. The LED switches off when the solenoid is deactivated. To program the
Discharge LED, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Custom Control tab, and click the Suppression Release Wizard sub-tab.
2. Right-click the hazard area, and click Properties in the Suppression Release Wizard.
3. Click the Points tab, and make a note of the list number of the Suppression Dump Points CrossZone list.
4. Click the Hardware tab.
5. To select an available red LED from either the panel or the LED module, select LEDRED in the LED point type list.
6. In the Mode list, select ON.
7. In the Reference Address field, enter the list number that you noted for the Suppression Dump Points CrossZone list.

22.9.3 Programming the Abort Switch Active LED

You must program an Abort Switch Active LED for every hazard area. The LED illuminates when an abort switch is activated during
a releasing service alarm. The LED does not turn on during normal supervisory conditions. To program the Abort Switch Active LED,
complete the following steps:
1. Click the List tab.
2. Scroll down until you locate the digital pseudo point created by the Suppression Release Wizard. The custom label of the digital
pseudo point begins with the text SupRel Abort Switch Activate. Make a note of the point name.
3. Click the Hardware tab.
4. To select an available yellow LED from either the panel or the LED module, select LEDYELLOW in the LED point type list.
5. In the Mode list, select ON.
6. In the Reference Address field, enter the point name that you noted in step 2.

page 401 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

22.9.4 Programming the Abort Switch Trouble During Normal Supervisory Conditions
You must program a trouble that appears on the panel when an abort switch is activated during normal supervisory conditions. If the
hazard area enters alarm while the abort switch is pressed, or if the abort switch is activated while the hazard area is in alarm, the abort
switch functions normally.
Important: You must disable the Suppression Release Wizard in the Custom Control tab to program the abort switch trouble during
normal conditions function. The custom control equations remain in the Custom Control tab, but you cannot edit them using the
Suppression Release Wizard. If you need to make further changes to the equations, you must edit them manually. To program the Abort
Switch Trouble During Normal Supervisory Conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Use the Suppression Release Wizard to assign the abort IAM, and make a note of the Point Number.
2. Click the Hardware tab, and expand the unit, box, and bay combination containing the IDNet card icon.
3. Double-click the IDNet card icon, and click the Point Editing tab.
4. Scroll down until you locate the IAM point.
5. In the Point Type list, select UTILITY.
6. Program two unused digital pseudo points with the Point Type TROUBLE. To enter the Custom Label for the two points, enter
the appropriate label for the hazard area followed by the bold text:
- (Enter the hazard area label here)-ABORT-ACTIVE-NO ALARM
- (Enter the hazard area label here)-ABORT SWITCH SHORT TROUBLE
7. Program an unused digital pseudo point with the Point Type SUPERV. To enter the Custom Label for the supervisory point,
enter the appropriate label for the hazard area followed by -ABORT SWITCH ACTIVE.
8. In the Suppression Release Wizard, right-click the hazard area title and click Properties.
9. Click the Points tab, and make a note of the list number of the Automatic Release Points and the Abort Switches CrossZone
lists
10. To enable the manual editing of the equations created by the Suppression Release Wizard, right-click the hazard area and click
Enable Manual Edit. Click Yes in the confirmation box that appears.
Important: When you enable manual edit, you cannot modify the hazard area using the Suppression Release Wizard.
11. Click the List tab in the ES Panel Programmer, and right click the list for the abort switches that you noted in step 9.
12. Click Where Used to view all custom equations that the list is references in.
13. For each of these equations where the Status is SUPV, use the custom control user equations to change the status to
ABNORM. For example change:
NOT STSTUS SUPV
L270|LIST|MONITOR|SupRel Abort Switches - CrossZone
to:
NOT STSTUS ABNORM
L270|LIST|MONITOR|SupRel Abort Switches - CrossZone
14. Program a HAZNAME - Abort Switch Trouble equation to annunciate troubles from the abort switch when the hazard area is
not in alarm. Set the STATUS to ABNORM. Use the Automatic Release Points and Abort Switches lists you noted in step 9 as the
equation inputs, and use the Abort Active - No Alarm trouble digital pseudo point as the equation output.
15. Program a HAZNAME - Abort Switch Short Circuit equation to annunciate short circuit troubles from the abort switch. Set the
STATUS to SHORT. Use the Abort Switches list you noted in step 9 as the equation input, and use the Abort Switch Short Trouble
trouble digital pseudo point as the equation output.
16. Program a HAZNAME - Abort Switch Supervisory equation to annunciate a supervisory when the abort switch is activated
during an alarm. Set the STATUS to SHORT. Use the Automatic Release Points and Abort Switches lists you created in step 9 as
the equation inputs, and use the ABORT SWITCH ACTIVE supervisory digital pseudo point as the equation output.

22.9.5 Programming the optional Releasing Service Signal Silence button and LED
You can use the Releasing Service Signal Silence (RSSS) button and LED instead of a silence for all systems that contain releasing and
standard evacuation zones. The separate silence LED is used to ensure that when someone attempts to silence the evacuation zone, they
do not inadvertently silence a releasing zone, disabling the warning of a possible toxic release. When you use this feature, signal silence
does not silence the service NACs, such as releasing warning NACs. The Releasing Service Signal Silence button must not prevent the
release, it only silences the warning NACs.
Note: When the releasing sequence escalates from warning to release, the warning NACs do not resound.

Note: See Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs on pageProgramming function keys, switches, and LEDs of this manual for
information about programming the function key and LED, and use the following example as a guide. In this example, both the visual and
audible release notification NACs are silenced.

page 402 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Important: You must disable the Suppression Release Wizard in the Custom Control tab to program the releasing service signal
function. The custom control equations remain in the Custom Control tab, but you cannot edit them using the Suppression Release
Wizard. If you need to make further changes to the equations, you must manually edit them.

Note: In addition to the instructions for programming the key, outlined in Programming non-audio points, complete the following steps:
1. Program an RSSS button with an associated RSSS LED for each hazard zone:
- In the Mode list of the RSSS button, select PBT.
- Select an available digital pseudo point in the Reference Address list.
- Enter an appropriate label for the hazard area you are silencing in the Custom Label field.
- In the Mode list of the RSSS LED, select ON.
- Select an available digital pseudo point in the Reference Address list.
- The LED must be yellow, select LEDYELLOW in the LED Point Type list.

Figure 300: Programming the RSSS key and LED

Figure 301: Programming the RSSS key and LED

2. Use the following equation to check if there are manual or automatic alarms in the system, and if someone is attempting to
silence the NACs:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
L256|LIST|EMPTY|SupRel Manual Rel Points - HazArea1
OR STATUS ON
L256|LIST|EMPTY|SupRel Manual Rel Points - HazArea1
SAVE 1
RECALL 1
AND STATUS ON
P731|DIGITAL|UTILITY|RSSS BUTTON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=6,6
L275|LIST|CONTROL|SupRel Notif Audible NACs - CrossZone
HOLD OFF PRI=6,6
L276|LIST|CONTROL|SupRel Notif Visual NACs - CrossZone
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P730|DIGITAL|UTILITY|RSSS LED
[END OUTPUTS]

page 403 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

If there is an alarm in the system, and someone is pressing the RSSS button, the digital
pseudo point associated with the button indicates this. The output holds the NACs off at
a higher priority than releasing turns them on. If the specific requirements for the job
you are programming require that the NACs turn on at a higher priority, you must adjust
these numbers accordingly. The digital pseudo point of the LED holds on indicating that
the releasing NACs are silenced.
3. Program the reset equation for the pre-discharge LED, to reset the NACs and the LED during a system reset or startup.
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A21|ANALOG|TIMER|SYSTEM RESET PULSE TIMER
OR STATUS ON
A34|ANALOG|TIMER|SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|PRE-DISCHARGE ACTIVE
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
L275|LIST|CONTROL|SupRel Notif Audible NACs - CrossZone
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
L276|LIST|CONTROL|SupRel Notif Visual NACs - CrossZone
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
P730|DIGITAL|UTILITY|RSSS LED
[END OUTPUTS]
4. You must delete the default equation that silences the NACs on the system, created by the Suppression Release Wizard. If you
do not delete the equation, it still silences the hazard area. To delete the equation, right click the title of the hazard area, and click
Enable Manual Edit. Click Yes on the confirmation box that appears.
5. Click the Custom Control tab and scroll down to the equation where the label text includes On System Silence. Right-click the
equation, and click Delete.

22.10 Request, grant, and deny control functionality for multiple display and control
centers
For ULC applications, when there are multiple displays and control centers on a system, only one node can control the system at a time.
Each control center can request control of the system, and the node in control can grant or deny the request. Every control center on the
system must continuously display which control center is in control.

22.10.1 Programming request, grant, and deny functionality

You must program a number of custom control equations for each display and control center on a system to use the request, grant, and
deny functionality.
Note: Every display and control center has a switch, and an LED for each display and control center in the system. For example, if a
system has a total of three display and control centers, you must program three LEDs, and three switches. You may require additional LEDs
and switches.

The following example has a display and control center named Node 1, and a second display and control center named Node 2. Use this
example of a two node system as a guide, and make the appropriate changes to suit the specific application you are programming.

22.10.2 Initiating the Request Timeout Setpoint

To initiate the Request Timeout Setpoint, complete the following steps:
1. Program the equation to initiate the timers used for this application. Create an analog pseudo point for the Request Timeout
Setpoint. In this example the pseudo point is A258. See the pseudo point properties as described in Figure 302.

page 404 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 302: Programming the analog pseudo point to request the timeout setpoint
2. Set the request timeout setpoint to between 1 and 90 seconds. In this example, the timeout is set to 30 seconds.
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A34|ANALOG|TIMER|SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
SET CONSTANT 3 SECS
A15|Set-Analog (Destination)|ANALOG|ANALOG|SYSTEM RESET WINDOW TIMER SETPOINT
SET CONSTANT 2 SECS
A16|Set-Analog (Destination)|ANALOG|ANALOG|FIRE ALARM CLEAR DELAY TIMER SETPOINT
SET CONSTANT 30 SECS
A258|Set-Analog (Destination)|ANALOG|ANALOG|REQUEST TIMEOUT SETPOINT
[END OUTPUTS]

22.10.3 Programming control of the system, and the associated LEDs

To program control of the system, and the associated LEDs, complete the following steps:
1. Program an equation for when Node 1 is in control of the system, and the Node 1 LED is on. To do this complete the following
steps:

a. Create a digital pseudo point for Node 1 In Control.

b. In the Point Type list, select UTILITY.
c. Enter Node 1 In Control in the Custom Label field. In this example the digital pseudo point Point Name is P700.
d. Program an LED on the display and control center. Do not use a red LED. In this example the LED is LED 6 on the Master I/O
Control.
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH ON
0-5-6|MKYLED5|LED|Master’s I/O Control LED 6
PRINT PANEL “NODE 1 IN CONTROL”
[END OUTPUTS]
2. Program an equation for when Node 1 is not in control of the system, and the Node 1 LED is not on, for example, when Node 1 is
no longer in control of the system:
[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH OFF
0-5-6|MKYLED5|LED|Master’s I/O Control LED 6
[END OUTPUTS]
3. Program an equation for when Node 2 is in control of the system, and the Node 2 LED is on. Create a digital pseudo point for
Node 2 In Control. In this example the digital pseudo point Point Name is also P700. When this Point Name is read over
the network at Node 1, it displays as 2:P700. Program an LED on the display and control center. Do not use a red LED. In this
example the LED is LED 7 on the Master I/O Control:
[INPUTS]

page 405 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

STATUS ON
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH ON
0-5-7|MKYLED5|LED|Master’s I/O Control LED 7
PRINT PANEL “NODE 2 IN CONTROL”
[END OUTPUTS]
4. Program an equation for when Node 2 is not in control of the system, and the Node 2 LED is not on, for example, when Node 2 is
no longer in control of the system:
[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH OFF
0-5-7|MKYLED5|LED|Master’s I/O Control LED 7
[END OUTPUTS]
5. Program an equation for when Node 1 is in alarm, and is automatically granted control of the system when another display and
control system is not in control of the system, or when Node 1 is operating in local mode:
[INPUTS]
STATUS FIRE
L256LIST|MONITOR|ALARM POINTS IN NODE 1
AND STATUS DATA_N/A
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
SAVE 1
STATUS FIRE
L256|LIST|MONITOR|ALARM POINTS IN NODE 1
AND NOT STATUS ON
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
OR RECALL 1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
[END OUTPUTS]

22.10.4 Programming equations, and the associated LEDs, that request system control
Complete the following steps to program the equations, and the associated LEDs, that request system control:
1. Program an equation for when Node 1 requests control of the system and the timeout timer starts. Create an analog pseudo
point for the Request Timeout timer. For this example, the analog pseudo point is A259.
2. Create a digital pseudo point that requests control of the system for Node 1. In the Point Type list, select UTILITY. For this
example, the digital pseudo point is P701, and the custom label is NODE1 REQUEST CONTROL.
3. Associate a button, or switch, with the digital pseudo point that requests control of the system. For this example, the Master I/
O Control Switch 1 is associated with digital pseudo point P701. In the Mode list, select TOF, and you must enter REQUEST
CONTROL in the Reference Label field, see Figure 303.

page 406 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 303: Programming the switch to request control of the system

4. Create the following equation to start the Request Timeout Timer when the operator presses the switch referencing pseudo
point P701:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE1 REQUEST CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
PULSE ANALOG
A259|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|REQUEST TIMEOUT
A258|Analog Timer SetPoint|ANALOG|ANALOG|REQUEST TIMEOUT SETPOINT
[END OUTPUTS]

22.10.5 Programming equations, and the associated LEDs, that grant and deny system control
Complete the following steps to program the equations, and the associated LEDs, that grant and deny system control:
1. Create a digital pseudo point to track when Node 1 is requesting control of the system, in this example pseudo point P703 tracks
this:

Figure 304: programming a digital pseudo point to track when the node requests control
2. Create an equation that tracks when an operator presses the Request Control switch, when Node 1 is not in control of the
system. Create the following equation to flash the LED associated with NODE 1 IN CONTROL, and send the request for control
to the display and control center that is currently in control of the system:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A259|ANALOG|TIMER|REQUEST TIMEOUT
AND NOT STATUS ON
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 REQUESTING CONTROL
FLASH SLOW
0-5-6|MYKLEDS|LED|Masters I/O Control LED6
PRINT PANEL “NODE 1 REQUESTING CONTROL”
[END OUTPUTS]
3. Create an equation that grants control of the system to Node 1 when the request timeout timer runs out, and the controlling
display and control center currently in control has not answered the request for control from Node 1. See the following example
of a transfer control timeout equation:

page 407 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 REQUEST CONTROL
AND NOT STATUS ON
A259|ANALOG|TIMER|REQUEST TIMEOUT
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1IN CONTROL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
PRINT ALL “NODE 1 IN CONTROL”
[END OUTPUTS]
4. Create a digital pseudo point that tracks when the display and control center in control of the system denies the request for
control it received from Node 1. In this example, the digital pseudo point is P702, and the custom label is NODE1 DENIED
CONTROL.
5. Create an equation that displays a message indicating that the request for control is denied, and turns off the Node 1 In Control
LED:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 DENIED CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
PRINT PANEL “CONTROL DENIED”
HOLD OFF PRI=2,9
P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 REQUEST CONTROL
FLASH OFF
0-5-6|MKYLEDS|LED|Masters I/O Control LED 6
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 DENIED CONTROL
[END OUTPUTS]
Note: When Node 1 sends the request for control, the request timeout timer initiates on Node 2. If the timer runs out before Node 2
responds by either granting or denying the request, Node 1 takes control of the system.
6. Associate a button or switch with P705, that an operator presses to grant control to another display and control center
requesting control. In this example, the Master I/O Control Switch number 4 is associated with P705, and the Mode is set to PBT.
7. Create a digital pseudo point that tracks when an operator presses the Grant Control key. In this example, the digital pseudo
point is P705, and the custom label is GRANT CONTOROL.
8. When Node 2 requests control of the system, the LED associated with Node 2 flashes. In this example, all the Node 2 pseudo
points mirror the node 1 pseudo points. The node 2 Requesting Control pseudo point is 2:P703. The following equation requests
control of the system for Node 2, and flashes the node 2 LED:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
2:P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 REQUESTING CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
FLASH SLOW
0-5-7|MKYLEDS|LED|Masters I/O Control LED 7
PRINT PANEL “NODE 2 REQUESTING CONTROL”
[END OUTPUTS]
Note: When Node 2 sends the request for control, the request timeout timer initiates on Node 1. If the timer runs out before Node 1
responds by either granting or denying the request, Node 2 takes control of the system.
9. Create an equation, similar to the following example, that displays the message Node 2 Now In Control, and turns the LED
associated with Node 2 In Control on steady:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
2:P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 REQUESTING CONTROL

page 408 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

AND STATUS ON
P706|DIGITAL|UTILITY|GRANT CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
FLASH OFF
0-5-6|MKYLEDS|LED|Masters I/O Control LED 6
PRINT ALL “NODE 2 NOW IN CONTROL”
[END OUTPUTS]
10. Create a digital pseudo point to track when an operator presses the Deny Control key. In this example, the digital pseudo point
it P706, and the custom label is DENY CONTROL.
11. Associate a button or switch with P706 that an operator presses to deny control to another display and control center requesting
control. In this example, the Master I/O Control Switch number 5 is associated with P706, and the Mode is set to PBT.
12. Create an equation, similar to the following example, that displays the message Control Denied, and turns the LED associated
with Node 2 off:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
2:P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 REQUESTING CONTROL
AND STATUS ON
P706|DIGITAL|UTILITY|DENY CONTROL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=2,9
2:P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE2 REQUEST CONTROL
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE2 DENIED CONTROL
PRINT PANEL “CONTROL DENIED”
FLASH OFF
0-5-7|MKYLEDS|LED|Masters I/O Control LED 7
[END OUTPUTS]

22.10.6 Programming an equation that grants system control after a system reset
The display and control center in control of the system can perform a system reset. This node does not have control of the system
after performing a system reset. After the system reset, control of the system is granted to either the first display and control center
that manually requests control, or the first node that goes into alarm. Create an equation similar to the following for this system reset
functionality:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
AND STATUS DETECT
P0|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SYSTEM RESET KEY
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=3,9
P212|DIGITAL|UTILITY|DETECTOR/SYSTEM RESET
HOLD ON PRI=3,9
2:P212|DIGITAL|UTILITY|DETECTOR/SYSTEM RESET
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 1 IN CONTROL
2:P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|NODE 2 IN CONTROL
[END OUTPUTS]

page 409 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

22.11 The fire drill feature

Fire drill is an optional feature. In ULC applications, you must use the label Fire Drill for the manual control that the operator uses to initiate
a fire drill.

22.11.1 Programming the Fire Drill manual control

See Programming function keys, switches, and LEDs for information about programming the function key and LED, and use the following
example as a guide. Figure 305 is an example switch that toggles the state of pseudo point P45, DRILL SWITCH INPUT:

Figure 305: An example fire drill switch

page 410 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

23 Appendix D UL programming requirements (United States)

This appendix identifies key UL programming requirements for the ES Panel FACP.

23.1 Setting Alarm Verification Timer to US operation

When you select United States operation for the alarm verification feature, the system operates as follows:
• If a point specified within one of the alarm verification lists enters an alarm state, the system delays the annunciation of the alarm for
30 seconds.
• When the 30 second timer expires, the system attempts to reset the initiating device for five seconds.
• After the five second timer expires, the system evaluates the state of the initiating device for up to 120 additional seconds. If the
device re-alarms during this time, the system immediately annunciates the alarm.
Note: Selecting "Verification Timer" to Canadian (ULC) does not comply with UL864.
1. Click on the List tab to display the List window.
2. At the bottom of the List window, select the Alarm Verification tab.
3. Right click on one of the lists and select Properties. The Alarm Verification Properties dialog shown below appears.
4. Click on the Alarm Verification tab.
5. Click on the drop down list box and select United States.
Setting this property for one alarm verification list sets it for all lists.

Figure 306: Alarm Verification, Domestic (US) Setting

23.2 Non-Steady Visual Evacuation System option

When enabled, this option allows you to select the flash pattern output by Non Steady Visual Signals. The term Non Steady Visual Signal
refers to any Visual Notification Appliance capable of emitting a pattern of flashes (such as incandescent visuals).
The default setting for this option is not enabled.
When you enable this option, use the drop down list box to the right of the option to set the flash pattern as follows:
• March Time. A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/4 second pulse on, 1/4 second off.
• Slow March Time. A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1/2 second pulse on, 1/2 second off.
• Temporal. A five-pulse coding pattern consisting of five ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½ second silence. Each three pulse
group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence.
Note:
This option cannot be used for public mode signaling as defined in Section 6.8.6.4 of NFPA 72-02.

page 411 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Figure 307: Non-Steady Visual Evac System option

page 412 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

24 Appendix E Labor saving features

This appendix provides a brief explanation for the ES Panel Labor Saving Features Hardware and Programming Features.
Table 278: Labor saving devices
Device Description
Custom Label Generator This is used to create & print labels for the ES Panel display cards (LED/Switch).
Import/Export of Custom Labels A utility under the File Menu of the ES Panel programmer that is used to import/export
custom labels of user points in the programmer.
Import/Export of Custom Control Programs Allows the user to export a Custom Control program to separate file outside of the
programming unit. The intent is that the program can then be imported into a different
job. Useful when more than one panel will have the same or similar programs.
Database Compare A utility that compares two different ES Panel job files. This is used to identify changes
that are made from one revision of a particular job file to another.
Where Used Right clicking on any point of the Programmer tabbed pages that show points or lists,
the user will see a context menu that includes the entry Where Used. Selecting Where
Used will cause to be displayed a dialog showing the usage of the point. The Where Used
Dialog is composed of at least one tabbed page detailing the usage of a point.
Mimic Point Wizard This wizard is used when adding a new point to an existing system and easily program it
to replicate (mimic) an existing point. This includes having the new point be added into
the same lists, annunciators, and/or Custom Control equations as the existing point.
• Point Properties: Specify the target point or source point by name or from the taglist.
• User Point Lists: Contains all the lists containing the target and source points.
• Annunciator Reference Lists: Show any points that use the target or source points as
reference points.
• Custom Equations: Will display any Custom Control equations that use target point
or source point, and that weren’t generated by a wizard.
• True Alert Zones: This property page is only available if the source point is a non-
addressable TrueAlert point.
• Summary Page: The final property page displays whether the point mimic process
was successful and any other actions that the user should take, such as network
scope.
Custom Control Wizards Custom SMPL (Simplex Multi-Function Programming Language) equations are created for
a customer job using these wizards which are available from the ES Panel Programmer
Custom Control Tab.
• Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard: This application limits the activation of NACs to the
floor on which the activated initiating device is located, referred to as the fire floor,
and the floors immediately above and below the fire floor.
• Selective Signaling Wizard: Selective Signaling is typically used to limit the activation
of NACs to the area or floor on which an activated initiating device(s) is located.
• Sounder/Relay Base Wizard: The Sounder/Relay Base Wizard allows you to change
the default operation of single station smoke detectors. Note that the default
operation – sounder activates when the alarm threshold is passed and deactivates
when the smoke level drops back below the threshold – is programmed using the
TPHOTO device type.
• Suppression Release Wizard: The Suppression Release Wizard is used to define a
hazardous area and then creating the hazardous menu choice and then naming it.
• Schedule Self-Test Wizard: Use the Scheduled Self-Test Wizard to create automated
self-tests in the panel, that generates custom control equations.
• Floors/Suites Wizard: Use the Floors/Suites Wizard to automate creating custom
control equations for Single Station Programming. Single Station Programming is
used to associate input devices to output device for one specific location so that
when there is a CO or smoke alarm, only that specific location goes into alarm.
Note: For specific functionalities refer to the ES Panel programmer help files.
I/O Matrix Report This report displays a grid showing which monitor points map to which system output
lists controlled by default SMPL. In a job without custom programming this shows the
mapping of inputs to outputs.

page 413 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

Table 278: Labor saving devices

Device Description
4100 Legacy Unbuild Utility The ES Panel Translate program has been updated to support unbuilding of legacy (rev 8
or rev 9) cfig (.bin) files.
Note: The .bin files are expected to be recovered from the CFIG ROM chip removed
from a 4100 system CPU. The initial File Selection dialog will allow the user to select
multiple .bin files if necessary. This unbuilds a legacy cfig into an upgrade .sdb4100U
file. This would aid someone in upgrading a legacy 4100+ to an ES Panel by recovering
the configuration from the binary file recovered from a ROM chip on the 4100+. You
cannot upgrade a job from 4100 or 4100U, 4100ES to 4010ES. The Unbuilder is also
capable of recovering ES Panel jobs from the latest rev (11.08). Any older ES Panel cfig
files have to be restored using previous versions of the unbuilder, (e.g. an 11.02 cfig must
be recovered with the 11.02 unbuilder; afterwards, this job can be loaded in 11.08.)
Ground Fault Search This is a function of the ES Panel that allows for automated searches of ground faults.
Power Supply Data on Front Panel Display The values available from the front panel display are System 24V, power supply current,
NAC currents, and (if there's a charger) the battery voltage, the battery charger voltage,
and the battery charger current.
TrueAlarm Data from Front Panel Display We have the following screens for TrueAlarm smoke sensors: Sensitivity - allows the user
to view and/or change the current alarm sensitivity for a TrueAlarm sensor. Average
Value/Alarm Level - allows the user to view the average value for the device and the
analog value (current) that would put the sensor into alarm at the current sensitivity level.
Value/Percent Alarm/Percent Smoke - displays the current analog value of the device
(updated in real time) and the percentage of alarm and current smoke level of the device.
Peak Value - displays the highest analog value that the device ever achieved, and also
displays the percentage of alarm it was in at that time.
Service Port This is the connection between PC and unit which is mainly used to upload and download
system software. The port can be used to access the system for debugging purposes.
Enabling multiple disabled points at one time When it is necessary to enable several disabled points at one time, simply enable
the appropriate auto-generated system list that contains the disabled points. Those
points will re-enable without affecting other points in the list that were not disabled.
For example, if several IDNet devices in different areas were disabled, selecting L18 and
enabling it at the operator interface will enable all points in that list that were disabled. If
notification circuits need to be enabled, use an appropriate auto-generated control list
(e.g. L8).

page 414 574-849 Rev. BA

 ES Panel Programmer’s Manual For 4100ES and 4010ES Fire Alarm Control Panels

25 Appendix F Multiple detector operation

Initiating device circuits
Initiating device circuits, or IDCs, are the means for connecting conventional (non-addressable) initiating devices to the 4100ES. The correct
placement of smoke and heat detectors is critical to system performance in fire detection. This is particularly true when installing cross-
zoned systems and alarm-verified systems. Heat detectors should never be installed so that cross-zoning or alarm verification operation is
required. An alarm from a heat detector must be immediate, with no cross-zoning or alarm verification.
When a system is cross-zoned, the smoke detectors in each room must be installed so that adjacent detectors are on different zones. The
location and spacing of detectors shall be in accordance with the requirements of section 5.7.3 of the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72),
2002 Edition. In the example below, the shaded detectors are on zone "A" and the non-shaded detectors are on zone "B".

Figure 308: Example cross-zoned system

Ensure that there are at least two detectors in each protected space, and reduce the detector installation spacing to .7 the linear spacing.
Initiating Device Circuits may be configured for Alarm Verification as long as they are not configured for Cross-Zone operation. Cross-zoned
IDCs are prohibited from configuration as Alarm Verification zones by NFPA 72, and by UL 864. The timing diagram is shown on the next
page.

25.1 Addressable detection

Addressable smoke sensors are configurable for operation as cross-zone initiation. In a system where each sensor is a "zone", the
alternate detector placement scheme (illustrated above) is not necessary. As noted above, the location and spacing shall be in accordance
with Section 5.7.3 of NFPA 72, 2002 Edition. Ensure that there are at least two detectors in each protected space, and reduce the detector
installation spacing to.7 the linear spacing.
Addressable detectors may be configured for Alarm Verification by selecting the point type VSMOKE. The VSMOKE point type is not allowed
as initiation inputs to releasing service applications or cross-zoned applications.
Alarm Verification Timing for the 4100ES is shown in the diagram on the next page.

25.2 Alarm verification timing

Figure 309: Alarm verification timing

page 415 574-849 Rev. BA

© 2021 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject
to change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and
approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized
use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

574-849 Rev. BA